E. W. Bullinger Appendix to the Companion Bible

  1. The Structure of the Books of the Old Testament according to the Hebrew Canon
  2. Genesis: The Foundation of Divine Revelation
  3. Genesis: Finds its Complement in the Apocalypse
  4. The Devine Names and Titles
  5. Creation versus Evolution
  6. Figures of Speech
  7. Italic Type in the Revised Version
  8. The So-called “Creation Tablets”
  9. The Usage of “Ruach”; Spirit
  10. The Spiritual Significance of Numbers
  11. The Word” Day” in Genesis 1
  12. “The Stars Also”
  13. The Use of “Nephesh” in the Old Testament
  14. The Synonymous Words Used for “Man”
  15. Laws Before Sinai
  16. The Occurrences of “Neshamah”, Breath
  17. The Genitive Case
  18. “In the Day” (Genesis 6:9)
  19. The Serpent of Genesis 3
  20. The prosperity of Cain
  21. Enos (Genesis 4:26): “Calling on the Name of the Lord”
  22. The Antediluvian Patriarchs, and the Flood Date
  23. “The Sons of God” in Genesis 6:2,4
  24. The 120 Years of Genesis 6:3
  25. The “Nephilim”, or “Giants” of Genesis 6, etc.
  26. Noah “Perfect” (Genesis 6:9)
  27. Wine
  28. Nimrod
  29. The generations of Terah, Issaac and Jacob
  30. The Massorah
  31. The Fifteen Extraordinary Points of the Sopherim
  32. The passages where the Sopherim altered “Jehovah” to “Adonia”
  33. The “Eighteen Emendations” of the Sopherim
  34. The Readings Called “Severin”
  35. “Sheol”
  36. “The Salvation” (Genesis 49:18)
  37. The Pharaohs of Genesis and Exodus
  38. “Leaven”
  39. The Decalogue (Exodus 20:2-17)
  40. The Names of the Tabernacle
  41. The Cherubim
  42. The Asherah
  43. “Offer” and “Offerings”
  44. Sin, Trespass. Iniquity, &c.
  45. The Order and Groupings of the Twelve Tribes
  46. Deuteronomy
  47. “The Book of the Law”
  48. The Use of Various Types in the English Bible
  49. “The Man of God”
  50. Chronological Charts and Tables
  51. Money and Coins, Weights and Measures
  52. Proper Names
  53. The Sieges of Jerusalem
  54. The Moabite Stone
  55. The Dynasty of Omri
  56. Parallel Passage of the Historical Books
  57. The Geology of the Persian Kings
  58. The Harmony of Ezra-Niamiah History
  59. The Twelve Gates of Jerusalem
  60. The Name of Jehovah in the Book of Esther
  61. Quotations from the Book of Job in the Other Books of the Bible
  62. The Septuagint Ending of the Book of Job
  63. The Book of Psalms: Miscellaneous Phenomena +
  64. “To the Chief Musician”
  65. The Psalms-Titles, and Words Employed in Them
  66. Hebrew Words in the Text of Psalms
  67. The Song of Degrees
  68. Zion +
  69. Trust
  70. Psalms 15 and “The Sermon on the Mount”
  71. “The Suffering, and the Glory”
  72. The Parenthesis of the Present Dispensation
  73. The Ten Words in Psalms 119
  74. The Book of Proverbs: Introduction and Analysis
  75. Special Passengers in the Book of Proverbs Acquiring New Light
  76. Supposed “Later” Hebrew Words in Ecclesiastes
  77. The Chronological Order of the Prophets
  78. The Inner-Relation of the Prophetical Books
  79. Isiah: The Evidence of One Authorship
  80. Isiah: Quotations and Allusions in the New Testament
  81. The “Alter to Jehovah in the Land of Egypt
  82. The Formulae of Prophetic Utterance
  83. Jeremiah: The Chronological Order of His Prophecies
  84. The Septuagint Version of Jerimiah
  85. Jeremiah, a type of the Messiah
  86. “The Fourth Year of Jehoiakim” (Jeremiah 25:1-3)
  87. “Pharaohs House in Tahpanhes” (Jeremiah 43:9)
  88. The Millennia “Sanctuary “and “Oblation” of Ezekiel 40-48
  89. The Vision of Daniel (Chs. 7-12) are Synchronous
  90. The “Times”, and Numbered “Days” of Daniel 7:25; 8:14; 12:7, 11, 12
  91. The “Seventy Weeks” of Daniel 9:24-27
  92. References to the Pentateuch in the Prophets
  93. The Alleged “Corruptions” of the Hebrew Text
  94. The Greek Text of the New Testament
  95. The New Testament and the Order of its Books
  96. The Diversity of the Four Gospels
  97. The Unity of the Four Gospels
  98. The Devine Names and Titles in the New Testament
  99. The Two Genealogies of Mathew 1 and Luke 3
  100. The Six Marys
  101. The Usage of “Pheuma” in the New Testament
  102. The Synonymous Words for “Will” and “Wish”
  103. The First Fulfilment of Prophecy in the New Testament (Mathew 1:22,23 Isaiah 7:14)
  104. Prepositions
  105. The usage of Negatives in the New Testament
  106. The Synonymous Words for “Appear”, “Appearing”, &c.
  107. The Principle Underlying the Quotations from the Old Testament in the New
  108. The Synonymous Words for “Child”, Children”, &c.
  109. The Herods of the New Testament
  110. The Use of “Psuche” in the New Testament
  111. The Synonymous Word for “Repent”, “Repentance”
  112. The Synonymous Expression for Kingdom
  113. The “Kingdom” and the “Church”
  114. The “Kingdom of Heavon” and the “Kingdom of God”
  115. “Baptize”, “Baptism”, &c.
  116. The Temptations of Our Lord
  117. The Lords Knowledge
  118. “If”: The Various Conditions Conveyed by Its Use
  119. The Fourfold Ministry of Our Lord
  120. The Synagogue; and the Jewish Sects
  121. The Synonymous Words for “Preach”, &c.
  122. The Synonymous Words for “Judge”, “Condemn”, &c.
  123. The Synonymous Words for “Man”, “Men”, &c.
  124. The Synonymous Words for “Other”, “Another”, &c.
  125. The Synonymous Words for “Perfect” (Adj. and Verb)
  126. The Eight Beatitudes of Mathew 5, and the Eight wows of Mathew23
  127. The Synonymous Words for “Poor”, &c.
  128. The Synonymous Words Used for “Sin”, “Wickedness”, “Evil”, &c.
  129. The Synonymous Words for “World”, Earth”, &c.
  130. The Synonymous Words for “Light”

To Be Continued

Appendix 1

THE STRUCTURE OF THE BOOKS OF THE OLD TESTAMENT
ACCORDING TO THE HEBREW CANON

I. THE LAW (Torah).

A. GENESIS. The beginning. All produced by the Word of God (Ge 1:3).
Israel as a “family” (Ge 15:1)

   B. EXODUS. History. Israel emerging from Families and Tribes to a
Nation. Called “Hebrews” according to their “tongue.”

        C. LEVITICUS. Worship. Jehovah in the midst. He, Israel’s God;
and they, His People.

       B. NUMBERS. History. Israel, now a “Nation,” numbered, and blessed
as such (23, 24).

A. DEUTERONOMY. The end. All depending on the Word of Jehovah.
Israel regarded as in the “Land.”

II. THE PROPHETS (Nebi’im).

The Former Prophets

(Zec 7:7)

A. JOSHUA. “The Lord of all the earth” giving possession of the Land. Government under Priests.

        B. JUDGES. Isreal forsaking and returning to God; losing and regaining their position in the Land. “No King” Bethlehem. Failure under Priest. 

           C. Samuel. Man’s king “rejected”; God’s king (David) “established.”

D. KINGS. Decline and Fall under the king.

The latter prophets.

  D. ISAIAH. Final blessing under God’s King.

                 C. JEREMIAH. Human kings “rejected.” David’s “righteous Branch” “raised up.”

           B. EZEKIEL. God forsaking Israel, and returning in glory, to say for ever of His Land and city “Jehovah-Shammah.”

A. MINOR PROPHETS. “The Lord of all the earth” giving restored possession of the Land, and foretelling final and unending possession.

III. THE PSALMS (Kethubim, Writings).

A. PSALMS. Tehilim. “Praises.” God’s purposes and counsels as to His
doings in the future.

B. PROVERBS, i.e. Rules: Words which govern or rule man’s life.
God’s moral government set forth.

C. JOB. “The end of the Lord” shown in Satan’s defeat, and the
saints deliverance from tribulation.

D. CANTICLES. Virtue rewarded. Read by the Jews at the
Passover: the Feast which commemorates the deliverance
from Pharaoh, the Jews’ oppressor.

The five Megilloth.

                                  E. RUTH. The stranger gathered in to hear of, and share in, God’s goodness in Redemption. Read at Pentecost, which commemorates God’s goodness in the Land.

                                        F. LAMENTATIONS. “Alas!” The record of Israel’s woes. Read at the Fast of the ninth of Abib.

                                 E. ECCLESIASTES. “The Preacher.” The People collected to hear of man’s vanity. Read at the Feast of Tabernacles, which commemorates God’s goodness in the wilderness.

                            D. ESTHER. Virtue rewarded. Read at the Feast of Purim, which commemorates the deliverance from Haman, “the Jews’ enemy.”

            C. DANIEL. “God’s judgment.” Here are shown the final defeat of
Antichrist, and the deliverance out of “the Great Tribulation.”

      B. EZRA-NEHEMIAH. Men who governed and ruled God’s People in
their resettlement in the Land.

A. CHRONICLES. Dibrae hayyamim. “Words of the Days”; or, God’s
purposes and counsels as to Israel’s doings in the past, and until the
time of the end.

Appendix 2

GENESIS: THE FOUNDATION OF DIVINE REVELATION

Genesis is the seed-plot of the whole Bible. It is essential to the true
understanding of its every part. It is the foundation on which Divine Revelation
rests; and on which it is built up. It is not only the foundation of all Truth, but it
enters into, and forms part of all subsequent inspiration; and is at once the
warp and woof of Holy Writ.

Genesis is quoted or referred to sixty times in the New Testament; and
Divine authority is set like a seal on its historical facts. See Mt 19:4-6;
24:37-39. Mk 7:4,10; 10:3-8. Lk 11:49-51; 17:26-29,32. Jn 1:51; 7:21-23;
8:44-56.

It, and the Book of the Law, of which it forms part, are ascribed to Moses.
See Dt 31:9,10,24-26. Jos 1:7; 8:32,35; 23:6. 1 Ki 2:3. 2 Ki 14:6; 23:25. 2 Ch 23:18;
30:16; 34:14. Ezr 3:2; 7:6. Ne 8:1. Da 9:11,

13. Mal 4:4. Mk 12:26. Lk 2:22. Jn 7:23. Ac 13:39; 15:5; 28:23. 1 Co
9:9. Heb 10:28.

Appendix 3

GENESIS FINDS ITS COMPLEMENT IN THE APOCALYPSE

Genesis

Apocalypse

  1. Genesis, the book of the beginning.
  2. The Earth created (1:1).
  3. Satan’s first rebellion.
  4. Sun, moon, and stars for Earth’s government (1:14-16).
  5. Sun to govern the day (1:16).
  6. Darkness called night (1:5).
  7. Waters called seas (1:10).
  8. A river for Earth’s blessing (2:10-14).
  9. Man in God’s image (1:26).
  10. Entrance of sin (3).
  11. Curse pronounced (3:14,17).
  12. Death entered (3:19).
  13. Cherubim, first mentioned in connection with man (3:24).
  14. Man driven out from Eden (3:24).
  15. Tree of life guarded (3:24).
  16. Sorrow and suffering enter (3:17).
  17. Man’s religion, art, and science, resorted to for enjoyment, apart from God (4).                                     
  18. Nimrod, a great rebel and king, and hidden anti-God, the founder of Babylon (10:8,9).    
  19. A flood from God to destroy an evil generation (6-9).                      
  20. The Bow, the token of God’s covenant with the Earth (9:13).20.      
  21. Sodom and Egypt, the place of corruption and temptation (13; 19).
  22. A confederacy against Abraham’s people overthrown (14).
  23. Marriage of first Adam (2:18-23).
  24. A bride sought for Abraham’s son (Isaac) and found (24).
  25. Two angels acting for God on behalf of His people (19).
  26. A promised seed to possess the gate of his enemies (22:17).
  27. Man’s dominion ceased and Satan’s begun (3:24).
  28. The old serpent causing sin, suffering, and death (3:1).
  29. The doom of the old serpent pronounced (3:15).
  30. Sun, moon, and stars, associated with Israel (37:9).
  1. Apocalypse, the book of the end.
  2. The Earth passed away (21:1).
  3. Satan’s final rebellion (20:3,7-10).
  4. Sun, moon, and stars, connected with Earth’s judgment (6:13; 8:12; 16:8).
  5. No need of the sun (21:23).
  6. “No night there” (22:5).
  7. “No more sea” (21:1).
  8. A river for the New Earth (22:1,2).
  9. Man headed by one in Satan’s image (13).
  10. Development and end of sin (21; 22).
  11. “No more curse” (22:3).
  12. “No more death” (21:4).
  13. Cherubim, finally mentioned in connection with man (4:6).
  14. Man restored (22).
  15. “Right to the Tree of Life” (22:14).
  16. No more sorrow (21:4).
  17. Man’s religion, luxury, art, and science, in their full glory, judged and destroyed by God (18).
  18. The Beast, the great rebel, a king and manifested anti-God, the reviver of Babylon (13-18)
  19. A flood from Satan to destroy an elect generation (12).
  20. The Bow, betokening God’s remembrance of His covenant with the Earth (4:3; 10:1).
  21. Sodom and Egypt again: (spiritually representing Jerusalem) (11:8).
  22. A confederacy against Abraham’s seed overthrown (12).
  23. Marriage of last Adam (19).
  24. A Bride made ready and brought to Abraham’s Son (19:9). See Mt 1:1.
  25. Two witnesses acting for God on behalf of His People (11).
  26. The promised seed coming into possession (11:18).
  27. Satan’s dominion ended, and man’s restored (22).
  28. The old serpent bound for 1,000 years (20:1-3).
  29. The doom on the old serpent executed (20:10).
  30. Sun, moon, and stars, associated again with Israel (12).

Appendix 4
THE DIVINE NAMES AND TITLES

I. ELOHIM occurs 2.700 times. Its first occurrence connects it with creation,
and give it its essential meaning as the Creator. It indicates His relation to
mankind as His creatures (see note on 2 Chron 18:31, where it stands in contrast
with Jehovah as indicating covenant relationship). ‘Elohim is God the Son, the
living “WORD” with creature form to create (Jn 1:1. Col 1:15-17. Rv 3:14); and
later, with human form to redeem (Jn 1:14). “Begotten of His Father before all
worlds; born of His mother, in the world.” In this creature form He appeared to
the Patriarchs, a form not temporarily assumed. ‘Elohim is indicated (as in
A.V.) by ordinary small type, “God”. See table on page 7.

II. JEHOVAH . While Elohim is God as the Creator of all things, Jehovah is
the same God in covenant relation to those whom He has created (Cp. 2 Ch
18:31). Jehovah means the Eternal, the Immutable One, He Who WAS, and IS,
and IS TO COME. The Divine definition is given in Ge 21:33. He is especially,
therefore, the God of Israel; and the God of those who are redeemed, and are
thus now “in Christ”. We can say “My God,” but not “My Jehovah”, for Jehovah is
“MY God.”

Jehovah is indicated (as in A.V.) by small capital letters, “LORD”‘ and by
“GOD” when it occurs in combination with Adonai, in which case LORD GOD =
Adonai Jehovah. The name Jehovah is combined with ten other words, which
form what are known as “the Jehovah Titles.” in the Hebrew Canon (Ap. 1). All
are noted in the margin, in all their occurrences:—

1. JEHOVAH-JIREH = Jehovah will see, or provide. Ge 22:14.

2. JEHOVAH-ROPHEKA = Jehovah that healeth thee. Ex 15:26.

3. JEHOVAH-NISSI = Jehovah my banner. Ex 17:15.

4. JEHOVAH-MeKADDISHKEM = Jehovah that doth sanctify you. Ex
31:13. Lev 20:8; 21:8; 22:32. Eze 20:12.

5. JEHOVAH-SHALOM = Jehovah [send] peace. Jdg 6:24.

6. JEHOVAH-ZeBA’OTH = Jehovah of hosts. 1 Sa 1:3, and frequently.

7. JEHOVAH-ZIDKENU = Jehovah our righteousness. Jer 23:6; 33:16.

8. JEHOVAH-SHAMMAH = Jehovah is there. Eze 48:35.

9. JEHOVAH-ELYON = Jehovah most high. Ps 7:17; 47:2; 97:9.

10. JEHOVAH-RO’I = Jehovah my Shepherd. Ps 23:1.

We have seven of these, experimentally referred to, in Ps 23, inasmuch as
Jehovah, the “Good,” “Great,” and “Chief Shepherd,” is engaged, in all the
perfection of His attributes, on behalf of His sheep:-

In verse 1, we have No. 1 above. In verse 2, we have No. 5. In verse 3, we
have Nos. 2 and 7. In verse 4, we have No. 8. In verse 5, we have Nos. 3 and 4.

III. JAH is Jehovah in a special sense and relation. Jehovah as having BECOME
our Salvation (first occ. Ex 15:2), He Who IS, and WAS, and IS TO COME. It
occurs 49 times (7 x 7. See Ap. 10). Compare Ps 68. 4, 18.

IV. EL is essentially the Almighty, thought the word is never so rendered
(see below, “Shaddai”). EL is Elohim in all His strength and power. It is
rendered “God” as Elohim is, but El is God the Omnipotent. Elohim is God the
Creator putting His omnipotence into operation. Eloah (see below) is God Who
wills and orders all, and Who is to be the one object of the worship of His
people. El is the God Who knows all (first occ. Ge 14:18-22) and sees all (Ge
16:13) and that performeth all things for His people (Ps 57:2); and in Whom all
the Divine attributes are concentrated.

El is indicated in this edition by type in large capital letters, thus: “GOD.” It is
sometimes transliterated in proper names Immanue-‘el, Beth-‘el, &c., where it
is translated, as explained in the margin.

V. ELOAH is Elohim, Who is to be worshipped. Eloah is God in connection
with His Will rather than His power. The first occurrence associates this name
with worship (Dt 32:15,17). Hence it is the title used whenever the contrast
(latent or expressed) is with false gods or idols. Eloah is essentially “the living
God” in contrast to inanimate idols. Eloah is rendered “God”, but we have
indicated it by type thus: GOD.

VI. ELYON first occurs in Ge 14:18 with El, and is rendered “the most high
(God)”. It is El and Elohim, not as the powerful Creator, but as “the possessor of
heaven and earth.” Hence the name is associated with Christ as the Son of “the
Highest” (Lk 1:35). It is Elyon, as possessor of the earth, Who divides the
nations “their inheritance”. In Ps 83:18, He is “over all the earth”. The title
occurs 36 times (6 x 6 or 62 See Ap. 10).

Elyon is the Dispenser of God’s blessings in the earth; the blessings
proceeding from a Priest Who is a King upon His throne (cp. Ge 14:18-22 with
Zec 6:13; 14:9).

VII. SHADDAI is in every instance translated “Almighty”, and is indicated by
small capital letters (“ALMIGHTY”). It is God (El), not as the source of strength,
but of grace; not as Creator, but as the Giver. Shaddai is the All-bountiful. This
title does not refer to His creative power, but to His power to supply all the
needs of His people. Its first occurrence is in Ge 17:1, and is used to show
Abraham that He Who called him out to walk alone before Him could supply all
his need. Even so it is the title used in 2 Co 6:18, where we are cal 1000 led to
“come out” in separation from the world. It is always used in connection with El
(see above).

VIII. ADON is one of the three titles (ADON, ADONAI, and ADONIM), all
generally rendered “Lord”; but each has its own peculiar usage and association.
They all denote headship in various aspects. They have to do with God as
“overlord.”

1. Adon is the Lord as Ruler in the earth. We have indicated this in
type by printing the preceding article or pronouns in small
capitals, not because either are to be emphasized, but to
distinguish the word “Lord” from Adonai, which is always so
printed in the A.V.

2. Adonai is the Lord in His relation to the earth; and as carrying out
His purposes of blessing in the earth. With this limitation it is
almost equivalent to Jehovah. Indeed, it was from an early date so
used, by associating the vowel points of the word Jehovah with
Adon, thus converting Adon into Adonai. A list of 134 passages
where this was deliberately done is preserved and given in the
Massorah (107-115). (See Ap. 32) We have indicated these by
printing the word like Jehovah, putting an asterisk, thus: LORD*.

3. Adonim is the plural of Adon, never used of man. Adonim carries
with it all that Adon does, but in a greater and higher degree; and
more especially as owner and proprietor. An Adon may rule others
who do not belong to him. Hence (without the article) it is often
used of men. But Adonim is the Lord Who rules His own. We have
indicated it by type, thus: LORD.

The three may be thus briefly distinguished:—

Adon is the Lord as overlord or ruler. Adonim is the Lord as owner. Adonai
is the Lord as blesser.

IX. The TYPES used to indicate the above titles, in the text, are as follows:—

· God = Elohim.

· GOD = Jehovah (in combination with Adonai, “Lord”).

· GOD* = Jehovah in the Primitive Texts, altered by Sopherim to
Elohim as the Printed Text. (See Ap. 32.)

· GOD = El.

· GOD = Eloah.

· LORD = Jehovah.

· THE LORD = Jah.

· LORD* = Jehovah in the Primitive Texts, altered by Sopherim to
Adonai as in the Printed Text. (See Ap. 32.)

· Lord = Adonai.

· LORD = Adonim.

· ALMIGHTY = Shaddai.

· MOST HIGH = Elyon.

X. The Combinations are indicated as follows:—

Adonai Jehovah = Lord GOD.
Jehovah Elohim = LORD God.
Elyon El = MOST HIGH GOD.
El Shaddai = GOD ALMIGHTY.

Appendix 5
CREATION VERSUS EVOLUTION

The Introduction to Genesis (and to the whole Bible) Ge 1:1-2:3, ascribes
everything to the living God, creating, making, acting, moving, and speaking.
There is no room for evolution without a flat denial of Divine revelation. One
must be true, the other false. All God’s works were pronounced “good” seven
times (see Ap. 10), viz. Ge 1:4,10,12,18,21,25,31. They are “great,” Ps 111:2.
Rv 15:3. They are “wondrous,” Job 37:14. They are “perfect,” Dt 32:4.

Man starts from nothing. He begins in helplessness, ignorance, and
inexperience. All his works, therefore, proceed on the principle of evolution.
This principle is seen only in human affairs: from the hut to the palace; from
the canoe to the ocean liner; from the spade and ploughshare to machines for
drilling, reaping, and binding, &c. But the birds build their nests to-day as at the
beginning. The moment we pass the boundary line, and enter the Divine
sphere, no trace or vestige of evolution is seen. There is growth and
development within, but no passing, change, or evolution out from one into
another. On the other hand, all God’s works are perfect.

In the Introduction to Genesis (ch. 1:1-2:3) forty-six times everything is
ascribed to direct acts and volitions on the part of God as the Creator (see Ap.
4. I.):—

God (or He) created6 times (1:1,21,27 [3 x]; 2:3)

God moved1 once (1:2)

God said10 times (1:3,6,9,11,14,20,24,26,28,29)

God saw7 times (1:4,10,12,18,21,25,31)

God divided2 twice (1:4,7)

God (or He) called5 times (1:5,8,10)

God (or He) made7 times (1:7,16,25,31; 2:2,3)

God set1 once (1:17)

God blessed3 times (1:22,28; 2:3)

God ended1 once (2:2)

God rested2 twice (2:2,3)

He sanctified1 once (2:3)

 46

It will be noted that the word “God” (Elohim, see Ap. 4. I.) occurs in this
Introduction thirty-five times (7 x 5), the product of 7 and 5, the numbers of
spiritual perfection, and grace. (See Ap. 10.)

There are also ten words connected with the word “God”; this is the number
of ordinal perfection (Ap. 10).

There is only one verb used alone with the pronoun “He”, instead of “God”,
and that is the verb “rested”. This makes eleven in all; for the significance of
which see Ap. 10.

The word “and” is repeated 102 times: thus by the figure Polysyndeton (Ap.
6), marking and emphasizing each separate act as being equally independent
and important.

Evolution is only one of several theories invented to explain the phenomena
of created things. It is admitted by all scientists that no one of these theories
covers all the ground; and the greatest claim made for Evolution, or Darwinism,
is that “it covers more ground than any of the others.”

The Word of God claims to cover all the ground: and the only way in which
this claim is met, is by a denial of the inspiration of the Scriptures, in order to
weaken it. This is the special work undertaken by the so-called “Higher
Criticism”, which bases its conclusions on human assumptions and reasoning,
instead of on the documen 4 e tary evidence of manuscripts, and Textual
Criticism does.

Appendix 6
FIGURES OF SPEECH

It is most important to notice these. It is absolutely necessary for true
interpretation. God’s Word is made up of “words which the Holy Ghost
teacheth” (1 Co 2:13. 1 Th 2:13. 2 Ti 3:16. 2 Pe 1:21, &c.).

A “Figure of speech ” relates to the form in which the words are used. It
consists in the fact that a word or words are used out of their ordinary sense,
or place, or manner, for the purpose of attracting our attention to what is thus
said. A Figure of speech is a deigned and legitimate departure from the laws of
language, in order to emphasize what is said. Hence in such Figures we have
the Holy Spirit’s own marking, so to speak, of His own words.

This peculiar form or unusual manner may not be true, or so true, to the
literal meaning of the words; but it is more true to their real sense, and truer to
truth. Figures are never used but for the sake of emphasis. They can never,
therefore, be ignored. Ignorance of Figures of speech has led to the grossest
errors, which have been caused either from taking literally what is figurative,
or from taking figuratively what is literal.

The Greeks and Romans named some hundreds of such figures. They may be
divided into three classes: Figures which involve: –

1. omission;

2. the addition; or

3. the alteration or change, of a word, or words, or their sense.

The 181 which follow are arranged in alphabetical order for the sake of
reference.

In Ge 3:14,15 we have some of the earliest examples. By interpreting these
figures literally as meaning “belly”, “dust”, “heel”, “head”, we lose the volumes of
precious and mysterious truth which they convey and intensify. It is the truth
which is literal, while the words employed are figurative. (See under Ap. 19.)
In the marginal notes will be found the names of most of these figures; and we
append a list with their pronunciation and English definitions (giving one or
more references as examples):—

Ac-cis’-mus; or, Apparent Refusal (Mt 15:22-26). So named because it is an
apparent or assumed refusal.

Ac-ro’-stichion; or, Acrostic (Ps 119). Repetition of the same or successive
letters at the beginnings of words or clauses.

Æ-nig’-ma; or, Dark Saying (Ge 49:10. Jdg 14:14). A truth expressed in
obscure language.

Æ’-ti-o-log’-ia; or Cause Shown (Ro 1:16). Rendering a reason for what is
said or done.

Affirmatio; or, Affirmation (Philppians 1:18). Emphasising words to affirm
what no one has disputed.

Ag’-an-ac-te’-sis; or Indignation (Ge 3:13. Ac 13:10). An expression of feeling
by way of indignation.

Al’-le-go-ry; or, Continued Comparison by Reprensentation (Metaphor) (Ge
49:9. Gal 4:22,24), and Implication (Hypocatastasis) (Mt 7:3-5). Teaching a truth
about one thing by substituting another for it which is unlike it.

Am-oe-bae’-on; or, Refrain (Ps 136). The repetition of the same phrase at
the end successive paragraphs.

Am’-phi-di-or-tho’-sis; or, Double Correction (1 Co 11:22). A correction
setting right both hearer and speaker.

Am’-pli-a’-tio; or, Adjournment (Ge 2:23. 1 Sa 30:5). A retaining of an old
name after the reason for it has passed away.

An-ab’-a-sis; or, Gradual Ascent (Ps 18:37,38). An increase of emphasis or
sense in successive sentences.

An-acho’-re-sis; or, Regression (Eph 3:14). A return to the original subject
after a digression.

An’-a-coe-no-sis; or, Common Cause (1 Corithians 4:21). An appeal to
others as having interests in common.

An’-a-co-lu’-thon; or, Non-Sequence (Ge 35:3. Mk 11:32). A breaking off the
sequence of thought.

An’-a-di-plo’-sis; or, Like Sentence Endings and Beginnings (Ge 1:1,2. Ps
121:1,2). The word or words concluding one sentence are repeated at the
beginning of another.

An’-a-mne’-sis; or, Recalling (Ro 9:3). An expression of feeling by way of
recalling to mind.

An-a’-pho-ra; or, Like Sentence Beginnings (Dt 28:3-6). The repetition of the
same word at the beginning of successive sentences.

An-a’-stro-phe; or, Arraignment (Ac 7:48). The position of one word
changed, so as to be out of its proper or usaul place in a sentence.

An’-e-sis; or Abating (2 Ki 5:1). The addition of a concluding sentence which
diminishes the effect of what has been said.

Ant-eis’-a-go-ge; or, Counter Question (Mt 21:23-25). The answering of one
quetion by asking another.

An-throp’-o-path-ei’-a; or, Condescension (Ge 1:2; 8:21. Ps 74:11. Jer 2:13.
Hos 11:10). Ascribing to God what belongs to human and rational beings,
irrational creatures, or inanimate things.

Ant-i-cat’-e-gor’-ia; or, Tu Quoque (Eze 18:25). Retorting upon another the
very insinuation or accusation he has made against us.

Ant’-i-me’-rei-a; or, Exchange of Parts of Speech.

1. Of the Verb. The Verb used istead of some other part of speech
(Ge 32:24. Lk 7:21).

2. Of the Adverb. The Adverb used instead of some other part of
speech (Ge 30:33. Lk 10:29).

3. Of the Adjective. The Adjective used instead of some other part
of speech (Ge 1:9. Heb 6:17).

4. Of the Noun. The Noun used instead of some other part of speech
(Ge 23:6. Jas 1:25).

Ant-i-me-tab’-o-le; or, Counterchange (Ge 4:4,5. Isa 5:20). A word or words
repeated in a revers order, with the object of opposing them to one another.

Ant-i-met-a-the’-sis; or, Dialogue (1 Co 7:16). A transference of speakers; as
when the reader is addressed as if actually present.

Ant-i’-phras-is; or, Permutation (Ge 3:22). The use of a word or phrase in a
sense opposite to its original signification.

Ant’-i-pros-o’-po-poe-i-a; or Anti-Personification (2 Sa 16:9). Persons
represented as inanimate things.

Ant’-i-ptos’-is; or, Exchange of Cases (Ex 19:6, compare to 1 Pe 2:9). One
Case is put for another Case, the governing Noun being used as the Adjective
instead of the Noun in regimen.

Ant-i’-stro-phe; or, Retort (Mt 15:26,27). Turning the words of a speaker
against himself.

Ant-i’-thes-is; or, Contrast (Pr 15:17). A setting of one phrase in contrast
with another.

Ant’-o-no-ma’-si-a; or, Name Change (Ge 31:21). The putting of a proper
name for a Appellative or common Noun, or the reverse.

Aph-aer’-e-sis; or, Front Cut (Jer 22:24). The cutting off of a letter or
syllable from the beginning of a word.

Ap’-o-di-ox’-is; or, Detestation (Mt 16:23). An expression of feeling by way
of destestation.

Ap-o’-phas-is; or, Insinuation (Phm 19.). When, professing to suppress certain
matters, the writer adds the insinuation negatively.

A-po’-ria; or, Doubt (Lk 16:3). An expression of feeling by way of doubt.

Ap-o-si-opes’-is; or, Sudden Silence It may be associated with:

1. Some great promise (Ex 32:32).

2. Anger and threatening (Ge 3:22).

3. Grief and complaint (Ge 25:22. Ps 6:3).

4. Inquiry and deprecation (Jn 6:62).

Ap-o’-stro-phe; or, Apostrophe When the speaker turns away from the real
auditory whom he is addressing to speak to another, who may be

1. God (Ne 6:9).

2. Men (2 Sa 1:24,25).

3. Animals (Joel 2:22).

4. Inanimate things (Jer 47:6).

Association; or, Inclusion (Ac 17:27). When the speaker associates himself
with those whom he addresses, or of whom he speaks.

As’-ter-is’-mos; or, Indicating (Ps 133:1). Employing some word which
directs special attention to some paticular point or subject.

A-syn’-de-ton; or, No-Ands (Mk 7:21-23. Lk 14:13). The usual conjunction is
omitted, so that the point to be emphasised may be quickly reached and
ended with an emphatic climax (compare to Polysyndeton, and Lk 14:21).

Bat-to-log’-i-a; or, Vain Repetition (1 Ki 18:26). Not used by the Holy Spirit:
only by man.

Ben’-e-dic’-ti-o; or, Blessing (Ge 1:22,28. Mt 5:3-11). An expression of
feeling by way of benediction or blessing.

Bra-chy’-lo-gi-a; or, Brachyology A special form of Ellipsis (Ge 25:32). See
Ellipsis I.3.

Cat-a’-bas-is; or, Gradual Descent (Php 2:6-8). The opposite of Anabasis.
Used to emphasise humiliation, sorrow, etc.

Cat’-a-chres-is; or, Incongruity One word used for another, contrary to the
ordinary usage and meaning of it.

1. Of two words, where the meanings are remotely akin (Lev 26:30).

2. Of two words, where the meanings are different (Ex 5:21).

3. Of one word, where the Greek receives its real meaning by
permutation from another language (Ge 1:5. Mt 8:6).

Cat’-a-ploc’-e; or, Sudden Exclamation (Eze 16:23). This name is given to a
parenthesis when it takes the form of a sudden exclamation.

Chleu-as’-mos; or, Mocking (Ps 2:4). An expression of feeling by mocking
and jeering.

Chron’-o-graph’-i-a; or, Description of Time (Jn 10:22). The teaching of
something important by mentioning the time of an occurrence.

Climax; or, Gradation (2 Pe 1:5-7). Anadiplosis repeated in successive
sentences (see “Anadiplosis”, above).

Coe’-no-tes; or, Combined Repetition (Ps 118:8,9). The repetition of two
different phrases, one at the beginning, and the other at the end of successive
paragraphs.

Correspondence. This term is applied to repetition of a subject or subjects,
which reappear in varying order, thus determing the “Structure” of any portion
of the Sacred Text. This Correspondence is found in the folowing forms:-

1. Alternate. Where the subjects of the alternate members
correspond with each other, either by way of similarity or
contrast.

a. Extended. Where there are two series, but each consisting of
several members (Ps 72:2-17. Ps 132.).

b. Repeated. Where there are more than two series of subjects,
either consisting of two members each (Ps 26. Ps 145.), or
consisting of more than two members each (Ps 24).

1. Introverted. Where the first subject of the one series of
members corresponds with the last subject of the second (Ge
43:3-5. Lev 14:51,52).

2. Complex or Combined. Where both Alternation and Introversion
are combined together in various ways (Ex 20:8-11. Ps 105).

Cy-clo-id’-es; or, Circular Repetition (Ps 80:3,7,19). The repetition of the
same phrase at regular intervals.

De’-i-sis; or, Adjuration (Dt 4:26). An expression of feeling by oath or
asseveration.

Dep-re-ca’-ti-o; or, Deprecation (Ex 32:32). An expression of feeling by the
way of deprecation.

Di’-a-log-is-mos; or, Dialogue (Isa 63:1-6). When one or more persons are
represented as speaking about a thing, instead of saying it oneself.

Di’-a-syrm-os; or, Raillery (Mt 26:50). Tearing away disguise, and showing up
a matter as it really is.

Di-ex’-od-os; or, Expansion (Jude 12,13). A lengthening out by copious
exposition of facts.

Ec’-pho-ne’-sis; or, Exclamation (Ro 7:24). An outburst of words, prompted
by emotion.

Ei’-ron-ei-a; or, Irony. The expression of thought in a form that naturally
conveys its opposite.

1. Divine Irony. Where the speaker is Divine (Ge 3:22. Jdg 10:14).

2. Human Irony. Where the speaker is a human being ( Job 12:2).

3. Peirastic Irony. By way of trying or testing (Ge 22:2).

4. Simulated Irony. Where the words are used by man in
dissimulation (Ge 37:19. Mt 27:40).

5. Deceptive Irony. Where words are clearly false as well as
hypocritical (Ge 3:4,5. Mt 2:8).

E-jac’-u-la’-ti-o; or, Ejaculation (Hos 9:14). A parenthesis which consists of
a short wish or prayer.

El-eu’-ther-i’-a; or, Candour (Lk 13:32). The speaker, without intending
offence, speaks with perfect freedom and boldness.

El-lips’-is; or, Omission When a gap is purposely left in a sentence through
the omissiion of some word or words.

I. Absolute Ellipsis. Where the omitted word or words are to be
supplied from the nature of the subject.

1. Noun and Pronouns (Ge 14:19,20. Ps 21:12).

2. Verbs and participles (Ge 26:7. Ps 4:2).

3. Certain connected words in the same member of a passage (Ge
25:32. Mt 25:9). Called Brachyology.

4. A whole clause in a connected passage (Ge 30:27. 1 Ti 1:3,4).

II. Relative Ellipsis.

1. Where the omitted word is to be supplied from a cognate word
in the context (Ps 76:11).

2. Where the omitted word is to be supplied from a related or
contrary word (Ge 33:10. Ps 7:11).

3. Where the omitted word is to be supplied from analogous or
related words (Ge 50:23. Isa 38:12).

4. Where the omitted word is contained in another word, the one
word comprising the two significations (Ge 43:33).

III. Ellipsis of Repitition.

1. Simple; where the Ellipsis is to be supplied from a preceding or a
succeding clause (Ge 1:30. 2 Co 6:16).

2. Complex; where the two clauses are mutually involed, and the
Ellipsis in the former clause is to be supplied from the latter; and,
at the same time, an Ellipsis in the latter clause it be supplied
from the former (Heb 12:20).

E-nan-ti-o’-sis; or, Contraries (Lk 7:44-46). Affirmatation or negation by
contraries.

En’-thy-me-ma; or, Omission of Premiss (Mt 27:19). Where the conclusion is
stated, and one or both of the premisses are omitted.

Ep-i-dip’-lo-sis; or, Double Encircling (Ps 47:6). Repeated Epanadiplosis (see
below).

Ep’-an-a-di-plo’-sis; or, Encircling (Ge 9:3. Ps 27:14). The repetition of the
same word or words at the beginning and end of a sentence.

Ep’-an-a-leps’is; or, Resumption (1 Co 10:29. Php 1:24). The repetition of
the same word after a break or parenthesis.

Ep-an’-od-os; or, Inversion (Ge 10:1-31. Isa 6:10). The repetition of the same
word or words in an inverse order, the sense being unchanged.

Ep’-an-or-tho-sis; or, Correction (Jn 16:32). A recalling of what has been
said in order to substitute something stronger in its place.

Ep-i’-bo-le; or, Overlaid Repetition (Ps 29:3,4,5,7,8,9). The repetition of
the same phrase at irregular intervals.

Ep’-i-cri’-sis; or, Judgement (Jn 12:33). A short sentence added at the end by
way of an additional conclusion.

Ep’-i-mo-ne; or, Lingering (Jn 21:15-17). Repetition in order to dwell upon,
for the sake of impressing.

Ep’-i-pho-ne’-ma; or, Exclamation (Ps 135:21). An exclamation at the
conclusion of a sentence.

Ep-i’-pho-za; or, Epistrophe in Argument (2 Co 11:22). The repetition of the
same word or words at the end of successive sentences used in argument.

Ep-i-stro-phe; or, Like Sentence-Endings (Ge 13:6. Ps 24:10). The repetition
of the same word or words at the end of successive sentences.

Ep-i’-ta-sis; or, Amplification (Ex 3:19). Where a concluding sentence is
added by way of increasing the emphasis.

Ep’-i-ther-a-pei’-a; or, Qualification (Php 4:10). A sentence added at the end
to heal, soften, mitigate, or modify what has been before said.

Ep-i’-the-ton; or, Epithet (Ge 21:16. Lk 22:41). The naming of a thing by
describing it.

Ep’-i-ti-me’-sis; or, Reprimand (Lk 24:25). An expression of feeling by way of
censure, reproof, or reproach.

Ep’i-tre-chon; or, Running Along (Ge 15:13. Jn 2:9). A sentence, not
complete in itself, thrown in as an explanatory remark. A form of Parenthesis
(see below).

Ep’-i-troch-as’-mos; or Summarising (Heb 11:32). A running lightly over by
way of summary.

Ep-i’-trop-e; or, Admission (Ecc 11:9). Admission of wrong, in order to gain
what is right.

Ep’-i-zeux’-is; or, Duplication (Ge 22:11. Ps 77:16). The repetition of the
same word in the same sense.

Er’-o-te-sis; or, Interrogating (Ge 13:9. Ps 35:10). The asking of questions,
not for information, or for an answer. Such questions may be asked (1) in
positive affirmation, (2) in negative affirmation, (3) in afffirmative negation,
(4) in demonstration, (5) in wonder and admiration, (6) in rapture, (7) in
wishes, (8) in refusals and denials, (9) in doubts, (10) in admonition, (11), in
expostulation, (12) in prohibition or dissuasion, (13) in pity and commiseration,
(14) in disparagement, (15) in reproaches, (16) in lamentation, (17) in
indignation, (18) in absurdities and impossibilities, (19) double questions.

Eth’-o-poe’-i-a; or, Description of Manners (Isa 3:16). A description of a
person’s peculiarities as to manners, caprices, habits, etc..

Eu’-che; or, Prayer (Isaih 64:1,2). An expression of feeling by way of
prayer,curse, or imprecation.

Eu’-phem-is’-mos; or, Euphemy (Ge 15:15). Where a pleasing expression is
used for one that is unpleasant.

Exemplum; or, Example (Lk 17:32). Concluding a sentence by employing an
example.

Ex-er-gas’-i-a; or Working Out (Zec 6:12,13). A repetition so as to work out
or illustrate what has already been said.

Ex’-ou-then-is’-mos; or, Contempt (2 Sa 6:20). An expression of feeling by
way of contempt.

Gno’-me; or, Quotation The citation of a well-known saying without quoting
the author’s name.

1. Where the sense originally intended is preserved, though the
words may vary (Mt 26:31).

2. Where the original sense is modified in the quotation or
reference (Mt 12:40).

3. Where the sense is quite different from that which was first
intended (Mt 2:15).

4. Where the words are from the Hebrew or from the Septuagint
(Lk 4:18).

5. Where the words are varied by omission, addition, or
transposition (1 Co 2:9).

6. Where the words are changed by a reading, or an inference, or in
number, person, mood, or tense. (Mt 4:7).

7. Where two or more citations are amalgamated (Mt 21:13).

8. Where Quotations are from books other than the Bible (Ac 17:28).

Hen-di’-a-dys; or, Two for One (Ge 2:9. Eph 6:18). Two words used, but one
thing meant.

Hen-di’-a-tris; or, Three for One (Da 3:7). Three words used, but one thing
meant.

Her-men’-ei-a; or, Interpretation (Jn 7:39). An explanation immediately
following a statement to make it more clear.

Het’-er-o’-sis; or, Exchange of Accidence. Exchange of one voice, mood,
tense, person, number, degree, or gender for another.

1. Of forms and voices (1 Pe 2:6).

2. Of moods (Ge 20:7. Ex 20:8).

3. Of tenses (Ge 23:11. Matthew 3:18 ).

4. Of persons (Ge 29:27. Da 2:36).

5. Of adjectives (degree) and adverbs (2 Ti 1:18).

6. Of nouns (number), adjectives, and pronouns (Ge 3:8. Heb 7:7).

Ho-moe-o’-pto-ton; or, Like Inflections (2 Ti 3:2,3). Similar endings arising
from the same inflection of verbs, nouns, etc. . This figure belongs peculiarly to
the original languages.

He-moe-o-pro’-pher-on; or, Alliteration (Jdg 5). The repetiton of the same
letter or syllable at commencement of successive words.

Heo’-moe-o-tel-eu’-ton; or, Like Endings (Mk 12:30). The repetition of the
same letters or syllables at the end of successive words. Used also of an
omision in the text caused by such-like endings: the scribe’s eye going back to
the latter of such similar words, instead of the former. See Jos 2:1.

Hyp-al’-la-ge; or, Interchange (Ge 10:9. 1 Ki 17:4). A word logically
belonging to one connection is grammatically united with another.

Hyp-er’bat-on; or, Transposition (Ro 5:8). The placing of a word out of its
usual order in a sentence.

Hy-per’-bo-le; or Exaggeration (Ge 41:47. Dt 1:28). When more is said than
is literally meant.

Hy’-po-cat-as’-ta-sis; or, Implication (Mt 15:13; 16:6). An implied
resemblance or representation.

Hy-po-ti-me’-sis; or, Under Estimating (Ro 3:5). Parenthetic addition by way
of apology or excuse.

Hy’-po-ty-po’-sis; or, Word Picture (Isa 5:26-30). Representation of objects
or actions by words.

Hys’-ter-e-sis; or, Subsequent Narration (Ge 31:7,8. Ps 105:8). When later
record gives supplemental or new particulars, not inserted in the historical
record.

Hys’-ter-o-log’-ia; or, The First Last (Ge 10 and 11. 2 Sa 24). A prior mention
of a subsequent event.

Id-i-o’-ma; or, Idiom The peculiar usage of words and phrases, as illustrated
in the language peculiar to one nation or tribe, as opposed to other languages or
dialects.

1. Idiomatic usage of verbs (Ge 42:38. 1 Jn 1:10).

2. Special idiomatic usages of nouns and verbs (Ge 33:11. Jer 15:16).

3. Idiomatic degrees of comparison (Lk 22:15).

4. Idiomatic use of prepositions (Lk 22:49).

5. Idiomatic use of numerals (Ps 103:2).

6. Idsiomatic forms of quotations (Ps 109:5).

7. Idiomatic forms of question (Lk 22:49).

8. Idiomatic phrases (Ge 6:2,4. Mt 11:25).

9. Idioms arising from other figures of speech (see notes in margin).

10. Chages of usage of words in the Greek language (Ge 43:18. Mt
5:25).

11. Changes of usage of words in the English language (Ge 24:21. 2 Ki
3:9).

In’-ter-jec’-ti-o; or, Interjection (Ps 42:2). Parenthetic addition by way of
feeling.

Mal’-e-dic’-ti-o; or, Imprecation (Isa 3:11). Expression of feeling by way of
malediction and execration.

Mei-o’-sis; or a Belittleing (Ge 18:27. Nu 13:33). A belittleing of one thing to
magnify another.

Me-ris’-mos; or, Distribution (Ro 2:6-8). An enumeration of the parts of a
whole which has been just previously mentioned.

Mes-ar-chi’-a; or, Beginning and Middle Repetition (Ecc 1:2). The repetition
of the same word or words at the beginning and middle of successive
sentences.

Mes-o-di-plo’-sis; or, Middle Repetition (2 Co 4:8,9). The repetition of the
same word or words in the middle of successive sentences.

Mes-o-tel-eu’-ton; or, Middle and End Repetition (2 Ki 19:7). The repetition
of the same word or words in the middle and at the end of successive
sentences.

Met-a’-bas-is-; or, Transition (1 Co 12:31). A passing from one subject to
another.

Met’-a-lep’-sis; or, Double Metonymy (Ge 19:8. Ecc 12:6. Hos 14:2). Two
metonymies, one contained in the other, but only one expressed.

Met-al’-la-ge; or, a Changing Over (Hos 4:18). A different subject of thought
substituted for the original subject.

Met’-a-phor’; or, Representation (Mt 26:26). A declaration that one thing is
(or represents) another: while Simile resembles it, and Hypocatastasis implies
it.

Met-a-sta-sis; or, Counter-Blame (1 Ki 18:17,18). A transferring of the blame
from one’s self to another.

Met-o’-ny-my; or, Change of Noun When one name or noun is used instead
of another, to which it stands in a certain relation.

1. Of the Cause. When the cause is put for the effect (Ge 23:8. Lk
16:29).

2. Of the Effect. When the effect is put for the cause producing it
(Ge 25:23. Ac 1:18).

3. Of the Subject. When the subject is put for something pertaining
to it (Ge 41:13. Deutronomy 28:5).

4. Of the Adjunct. When something pertaining to the subject is put
for the subject itself (Ge 28:22. Job 32:7).

Mi-me-sis; or, Description of Sayings (Ex 15:9). Used when the sayings and
etc., of another are described or imitated by way of emphasis.

Neg-a’-ti-o; or, Negattion (Gal 2:5). A denial of that which has not been
affirmed.

Oe’-on-is’-mos; or, Wishing (Ps 55:6). An expression of feeling by way of
wishing or hoping for a thing.

Ox’-y-mor-on; or Wise-Folly (1 Ti 5:6). A wise saying that seems foolish.

Pae-sn’-si’-mos; or, Exultation (Zep 3:14). Calling on others to rejioce over
something.

Pal’-in-od’-i-a; or, Retracting (Rv 2:6). Approval of one thing after reproving
for another thing.

Par-a-bol-a; or, Parable i.e., Continued Simile (Lk 14:16-24). Comparison by
continued resemblance.

Par’-a-di-a’-stol-e; or, Neithers and Nors (Ex 20:10. Ro 8:35,38,39). The
repetition of the disjunctives niether and nor, or, either and or.

Par’-ae-net’-ic-on; or, Exhortation (1 Ti 2). An expression of feeling by way
of exhortation.

Par-a-leips-is; or, a Passing By (Heb 11:32). When a wish is expressed to pass
by a subject, which is, notwithstanding, briefly alluded by subsequently.

Parallelism; or Parallel Lines The repetition of similar, synonymous, or
opposite thoughts or words in parallel or successive lines. Compare to
“Correspondence”.

1. Simple synonymous, or gradational. When the lines are parallel in
thought, and in the use of synonymous words (Ge 4:23,24. Ps 1:1).

2. Simple antithetic, or opposite. When the words are contrasted in
the two or more lines, being opposed in sense the one to the
other (Pr 10:1).

3. Simple synthetic, or constructive. When the parallelism consists
only in the similar form of construction (Ps 19:7-9).

4. Complex alternate. When the lines are placed alternately (Ge
19:25. Pr 24:19,20).

1. Complex repeated alternation. The repetition of two parallel
subjects in several lines (Isa 65:21,22).

2. Complex extended alternation. Alternation extended so as to
consist of three or more lines (Jdg 10:17).

3. Complex introversion. When the parallel lines are so placed that
the first corresponds with the last, the second with the last but
one, etc. (Ge 3:19. 2 Ch 32:7,8).

Par-ec’-bas-is; or, Digression (Ge 2:8-15). A temporary turning aside from
one subject to another.

Par-e-che’-sis; or, Foreign Paronomasia (Ro 15:4). The repetition of words
similar in sound, but different in language.

Par-eg’-men-on; or, Derivation (Mt 16:18). The repetition of words derived
from the same root.

Par-em’-bol’-e; or, Insertion (Php 3:18,19). Inseration of a sentence
between others which is independent and complete in itself.

Par-en’-the-sis; or, Parenthesis (2 Pe 1:19). Insertion of a word or sentence,
parenthetically, which is necessary to explain the context.

Par-oe’-mi-a; or Proverb (Ge 10:9. 1 Sa 10:12). A wayside-saying in common
use.

Par’-o-moe-o’-sis; or, Like-Sounding Inflections (Mt 11:17). The repetition of
inflections similar in sound.

Par-o-no-ma’-si-a: or, Rhyming Words (Ge 18:27). The repetition of words
similar in sound, but not necessarily in sense.

Path’-o-poe’-i-a; or, Pathos (Lk 19:41,42). The expression of feeling or
emotion.

Per-i’-phras-is; or, Circumlocution (Ge 20:16. Jdg 5:10). When a description
is used instead of the name.

Per-i’-stas-is; or, Description of Circumstances (Jn 4:6).

Ple’-on-asm; or, Redundancy Where what is said is, immediately after, put
in another or opposite way to make it impossible for the sense to be missed.

The Figure may affect (1) words (Ge 16:8); or (2) sentences (Ge 1:20. Dt
32:6).

Plok’-e; or, Word-Folding (Jer 34:17). The repetition of the same word in a
different sense, implying more than the first use of it.

Po-ly-o-ny’-mi-a; or, Many Names (Ge 26:34,35. 2 Ki 23:13). Persons or
places mentioned under different names.

Po-ly-pto’-ton; or, Many Inflections The repetition of the same part of
speech in different inflections.

1. Verbs (Ge 50:24. 2 Ki 21:13).

2. Nouns and pronouns (Ge 9:25. Ro 11:36).

3. Adjectives (2 Co 9:8).

Po’ly-syn’de-ton; or, Many Ands (Ge 22:9,11. Jos 7:24. Lk 14:21). The
repetition of the word “and” at the beginning of successive clauses, each
independent, important, and emphatic, with no climax at the end (Compare
Aysndeton and Lk 14:13).

Prag’-mato-graph-i-a; or Description of Actions (Joel 2:1-11).

Pro-ec’-the-sis; or Justification (Mt 12:12). A sentence added at the end by
way of justification.

Pro-lep’s-is, (Ampliatio); or, Anticipation (Heb 2:8). Anticipating what is
going to be, and speaking of future things as present.

Pro-lep’s-is, (Occupatio); or, Anticipation. Answering an argument by
anticipating it before it is used.

1. Open. When the anticipated objection is both answered and
stated (Mt 3:9).

2. Closed. When the anticipated objection is either not plainly stated
or not answered (Ro 10:18).

Pros-a-po’-do-sis; or, Detailing (Jn 16:8-11). A return to previous words or
subjects for purposes of definition or explanation.

Pros’-o-po-graph’-i-a; or, Description of Persons (Mt 3:4). A vivid
description of a person by detailed delineation.

Pros’-o-po-poe’-i-a; or, Personification Things represented as persons.

1. The members of the human body (Ge 48:14. Ps 35:10).

2. Animals (Ge 9:5. Job 12:7).

3. The products of the earth (Na 1:4).

4. Inanimate things (Ge 4:10).

5. Kingdoms, countries, and states (Ps 45:12).

6. Human actions, etc., attributed to things, etc. (Ge 18:20. Ps 85:10).

Pro’-ther-a-pei’-a; or, Conciliation (Mt 19:16). Conciliating others, by way
of precaution, because of something we are about to say.

Pro’-ti-me-sis; or, Description of Order (1 Co 15:5-8). The enumeration of
things according to their places of honour or importance.

Repeated Negation; or Many Noes (Jn 10:28). The repetition of divers
negatives.

Repetitio; or, Repetition (2 Ch 20:35-37. Jn 14:1-4). Repetition of the same
word or words irregularly in the same passage.

Sim’-i-le; or, Resemblance (Ge 25:25. Mt 7:24-27). A declaration that one
thing resembles another. (Compare Metaphor, above.)

Sim’-ul-ta’-ne-um; or Insertion (Rv 16:13-16). A kind of historical
parenthesis, an event being put out of its historical place between two others
which are simultaneous.

Syl-leps’-is; or, Combination (2 Ch 31:8). The repetition of the sense without
the repetition of the word.

Syl-leps’-is; or, Change in Concord (Jn 21:12). A change in the grammatical
concord in favour of a logical concord.

Syl’-lo-gis’-mus; or, Omission of the Conclusion (1 Sa 17:4-7). The conclusion,
though implied, is unexpressed, in order to add emphasis to it.

Symbol (Isa 22:22). A material object substituted for a moral, or spiritual
truth.

Sym’-per-as’-ma; or, Concluding Summary (Mt 1:17). When what has been
said is briefly summed up.

Sym’-plo-ke; or, Interwining (1 Co 15:42-44). The repetition of different
words in successive sentences in the same order and the same sense.

Syn’-ath-roes’-mos; or, Enumeration (1 Ti 4:1-3). The enumeration of the
parts of a whole which has not been mentioned.

Syn’-cho-re’-sis; or, Concession (Hab 1:13). Making a concession of one point
in order to gain another.

Syn’-cri-sis; or, Repeated Simile (Isa 32:2). Repetition of a number of
resemblances.

Syn-ec’-do-che; or, Transfer The exchange of one idea for another
associated idea.

1. Of the Genus. When the genus is put for the species, or universals
for particulars (Ge 6:12. Mt 3:5).

2. Of the Species. When the species is put for the genus, or
particulars for universals (Ge 3:19. Mt 6:11).

3. Of the Whole. When the whole is put for a part (Ge 6:12).

4. Of the Part. When a part is put for the whole (Ge 3:19. Mt 27:4).

Syn’-oe-cei-o’-sis; or, Cohabitation (Mt 19:16,17). The repetition of the
same word in the same sentence with an extended meaning.

Syn-o-ny-mi-a; or, Synonymous Words (Pr 4:14,15). The repetition of words
similar in sense, but different in sound and origin.

Syn’-the-ton; or, Combination (Ge 18:27). A placing together of two words
by usage.

Ta-pei-no’-sis; or, Demeaning (Ge 27:44. Ro 4:19). The lessoning of a thing
in order to increase and intensify that same thing. (Compare Meiosis.)

Thau-mas’-mos; or, Wondering (Ro 11:33). An expression of feeling by way
of wonder.

Tme’-sis; or, Mid-Cut (Eph 6:8). A change by which one word is cut in two,
and another word put in between.

Top’-o-graph’-i-a; or, Description of Place (Isa 10:28-32). Throwing light on
the subject dealt with by alluding to locality.

Type (Ro 5:14). A figure or ensample of something future, and more or less
prophetic, called the Anti-type.

Zeug’-ma; or, Unequal Yoke When one verb is yoked on to two subjects,
while grammatically a second verb is required.

1. Proto-zeugma, or, Ante-yoke or Fore-yoke (Ge 4:20. 1 Ti 4:3).

2. Meso-zeugma, or, Middle yoke (Lk 1:64).

3. Hypo-zeugma, or End yoke (Ac 4:27,28).

4. Syne-zeugmenon, or, Joint yoke (Ex 20:18).

Appendix 7

ITALIC TYPE IN THE REVISED VERSION

The Revisers ill-advisedly decided that “all such words, now printed in italics, as are plainly implied in the Hebrew,
and necessary in English, be printed in common type.”

One of the consequences of this decision is that the very “to be” is not distinguished from the verb “to become”, so
that the lessons conveyed by the A. V. “was” and “was” in Ge 1:2; 3 and 4; 9 and 10; 11 and 12, are lost. See the notes on
Gen 1:2.

For the general uses of various types in the English Bible see Ap. 48.

Appendix 8

THE SO-CALLED “CREATION TABLETS”

The Cosmogony of Genesis is in flat, contradiction to that of the so-called “Creation Tablets ,” preserved in an epic
poem in honor of Merodach, the patron god of Babylon. If Genesis looks back to Creation, it is to put on record the
profound contrast between them, and to give, instead of the corruption of primitive truth, which had been handed
down by tradition, the Divine account by Him Who created all things, by the hand and pen of Moses.

The word “without form” (Heb. tohu) is used of a subsequent event which, we know not how long after the
Creation, befell the primitive creation of Ge 1:1. It occurs in Ge 1:2. Dt 32:10. 1 Sa 12:21 (twice). Job 6:18; 12:24;
26:7. Ps 107:40. Isa 24:10; 29:21; 34:11; 40:17,23; 41:29; 44:9; 45:18,19; 49:4; 59:4. Jer 4:23. The Heb. bohu, rendered
“void”, means desolate, and occurs in Ge 1:2. Isa 34:11. Jer 4:23. The two words together occur in Ge 1:2. Isa 34:11. Jer
4:23.

1. The Tablets begin with chaos. The Bible with perfection (Ge 1:1).

2. The Tablets make the heavenly bodies to be gods. Genesis makes them created matter.

3. The Tablets are all polytheistic mythology. Genesis is a monotheistic truth.

4. The Tablets make all the work of a craftsman. In Genesis, God speaks, and it is done.

5. In the Tablets we meet everywhere with the puerilities of a grotesque superstition. In Genesis we find the
grand and solemn realities of righteousness and holiness.

Appendix 9

THE USAGE OF RUACH, SPIRIT

The word ruach occurs 389 times in the Hebrew O.T. n the A.V. it is rendered spirit in 237 passages (and no other
word is rendered spirit except neshamah, “breath”, in Job 26:4 and Pr 20:27. See Ap. 16). In the remaining 152 places it
is translated in 22 different ways, which are to be carefully distinguished.

[In the R.V. ruach is rendered spirit 224 times, and in the remaining 165 passages is rendered in many different
ways.] The meaning of the word is to be deduced only from its usage. The one root idea running through all the
passages is invisible force. As this force may be exerted in varying forms, and may be manifested in divers ways, so
various renderings are necessitated, corresponding thereto.

Ruach, in whatever sense it is used, always represents that which is invisible except by its manifestations. These are
seen both externally to man, as well as internally within man. As coming from God, it is the invisible origin of life. All
apart from this is death. It comes from God, and returns to God (Ecc 3:19,20). Hence, ruach is used of:

I. GOD, as being invisible. “The Spirit of Jehovah” is Jehovah Himself, in His manifestation of invisible power. 2 Sa
23:2. Ps 139:7 ( = Thee). Isa 40:13.

II. THE HOLY SPIRIT: the Third Person of the Trinity. 2 Sa 23:2. 1 Ki 18:12; 22:24. 2 Ki 2:16. 2 Ch 18:23. Ne 9:20,30. Job
26:13; 33:4. Isa 40:13; 48:16; 59:19,21; 61:1; 63:10,1

4. Eze 3:12,14 (1 st); 8:3; 11:1, 24; 37:1; 43:5. Mic 2:7; 3:8. Zec 4:6; 6:8; 7:12. Mal 2:15.

III. INVISIBLE DIVINE POWER MANIFESTING ITSELF In creation. Ge 1:2. In giving life. Eze 37:14. In executing
judgment–“blast.” Ex 15:8. Isa 37:7. “breath.” 2 Sa 22:16. 2 Ki 19:7. Job 4:9; 15:30. Ps 18:15; 33:6. Isa 11:4; 30:28.
“spirit.” Isa 4:4; 28:6; 34:16; 40:7.

IV. INVISIBLE “POWER FROM ON HIGH”, MANIFESTING ITSELF AS DIVINE POWER in giving spiritual gifts . Spoken of as
coming upon, clothing, falling on, and being poured out. Rendered “Spirit”, but should be “spirit”. Ge 41:38. Ex 28:3;
31:3; 35:31. Nu 11:17,25,26,29; 24:2; 27:8. Dt 34:9. Jdg 3:10; 6:34; 11:29; 13:25; 14:6,19; 15:14. 1 Sa 10:6,10; 11:6;
16:13,14; 19:20,23. 2 Ki 2:9,15. 1 Ch 12:18; 28:12. 2 Ch 15:1; 20:14; 24:20. Ps 51:11,12; 143:10. Pr 1:23. Isa 11:2; 30:1;
32:15; 42:1,5; 44:3; 59:21; 61:1; 63:11. Eze 2:2; 3:24; 11:5,19; 36:27; 39:29. Da 4:8; 9:18; 5:11,12,14. Joel 2:28,29. Hag
2:5. Zec 12:10.

V. THE INVISIBLE PART OF MAN (Psychological). Given by God at man’s formation at birth, and returning to God at his
death. “Breath.” Ge 6:17; 7:15,22. Job 9:18; 12:10; 17:1. Ps 104:29; 135:17; 146:4. Ecc 3:19. Jer 10:14; 51:17. Lam
4:20. Eze 37:5,6,8,9,10. Hab 2:19. Zec 12:1. “spirit.” Ge 6:3. Nu 16:22; 27:16. Job 27:3; 34:14. Ps 31:5; 104:30. Ecc
3:21; 8:8; 11:5; 12:7. Isa 42:5. “Wind.” Eze 37:9.

VI. THE INVISIBLE CHARACTERISTICS OF MAN; manifesting themselves in states of mind and feeling (by the Fig.
Metonymy. See Ap. 6, p.11). “Mind.” Ge 26:35. Pr 29:11. Eze 11:5; 20:32. Da 5:20. Hab 1:11. “Breath.” Job 19:17 ( =
manner). “Courage.” Jos 2:11. “Anger.” Jdg 8:3. “Blast.” Isa 25:4. “Spirit.” Ge 41:8; 45:27. Ex 6:9; 35:21. Nu 5:14,30;
14:24. Jos 5:1. Jdg 15:19. 1 Sa 1:15; 30:12. 1 Ki 10:5; 21:5. 1 Ch 5:26. 2 Ch 9:4; 21:16; 36:22. Ezr 1:1,5. Job 6:4; 7:11;
10:12; 15:13; 20:3; 21:4; 32:8,18. Ps 32:2; 34:18; 51:10,11,12,17; 76:12; 78:8; 142:3; 143:4,7. Pr 11:13; 14:29; 15:4,13;
16:2,18,19,32; 17:22,27; 18:14; 25:28; 29:23. Ecc 1:14,17; 2:11,17,26; 4:4,6,16; 6:9; 7:8,9; 10:4. Isa 19:3,14; 26:9;
29:10,24; 33:11; 38:16; 54:6; 57:15,16; 61:3; 65:14; 66:2. Jer 51:11. Eze 13:3. Da 7:15. Hos 4:12; 5:4. Mic 2:11 (by
Hendiadys (Ap. 6), for a false of lying spirit).

Appendix 10

THE SPIRITUAL SIGNIFICANCE OF NUMBERS

Numbers are used in Scripture, not merely as in Nature, with supernatural design, but with spiritual significance,
which may be summarized as follow (The whole subject may be studied in Dr. Bullinger’s work on Number in
Scripture):—

ONE . Denotes unity, and commencement. The first occurrences of words or utterances denote their essential
significance, in interpretation. Words that occur only once, in the originals, are emphatic and important. First day,
Light. The first occurrences of all important words and expressions are noted in the margin.

TWO . Denotes difference. If two different persons agree in testimony it is conclusive. Otherwise two implies
opposition, enmity, and division, as was the work of the Second day. Compare the use of the word “double” applied to
“heart”, “tongue”, “mind”, &c.

THREE . Denotes completeness, as three lines complete a plane figure. Hence, three is significant of Divine
perfection and completeness. The third day completes the fundamentals of creation-work. The fourth, fifth, and sixth
days are the counterpart and repetition of the first, second, and third, and correspond respectively. (See the structure
of Ge 1, p. 3.) The number, three, includes resurrection also; for on the third day the earth rose up out of the deep,
and the fruit rose up out of the earth.

FOUR . Denotes creative works (3+1), and always has reference to the material creation, as pertaining to the earth,
and things “under the sun”, and things terrestrial.

FIVE . Denotes Divine grace. It is 4+1. It is God adding His gifts and blessing to the works of His hands. The Heb.
Ha’aretz (the earth), by “Gematria” (i.e. the addition of the numerical value of the letters together) is a multiple of
four, while Hashamayim (the heavens) is a multiple of five. The Gematria of Caris (charis), the Greek for Grace, is
also a multiple of five. It is the leading factor in the Tabernacle measurements.

SIX . Denotes the human number. Man was created on the sixth day; and this first occurrence of the number makes it
(and all multiples of it) the hall-mark of all connected with man. He works six days. The hours of his day are a multiple
of six. Athaliah usurped the throne of Judah six years. The great men who have stood out in defiance of God (Goliath
and Nebuchadnezzar and Antichrist) are all emphatically marked by this number.

SEVEN . Denotes spiritual perfection. It is the number or hall-mark of the Holy Spirit’s work. He is the Author of God’s
Word, and seven is stamped on it as the water-mark is seen in the manufacture of paper. He is the Author and Giver of
life; and seven is the number which regulates every period of Incubation and Gestation, in insects, birds, animals, and
man.

EIGHT . Denotes resurrection, regeneration; a new beginning or commencement. The eighth is a new first. Hence
the octave in music, color, days of the week, &c. It is the number which has to do with the LORD, Who rose on the
eighth, or new “first-day”. This is, therefore, the Dominical number. By Gematria (see above),
<START GREEK> )Ihsou=$
<END GREEK> (Jesus) makes
the number 888. It, or its multiple is impressed on all that has to do with the Lord’s Names, the Lord’s People, the Lord’s
works.

NINE . Denotes Finality of judgment. It is 3 x3, the product o 989 f Divine completeness. The number nine, or its
factors or multiples, is seen in all cases when judgment is the subject.

TEN . Denotes Ordinal perfection. Another new first; after the ninth digit, when numeration commences anew.

ELEVEN . Denotes disorder, disorganization, because it is one short of the number twelve (see below).

Appendix 11

THE WORD “DAY” IN Ge 1

The word “day”, when used without any limiting words, may refer to a long or prolonged period: as, the “day of
grace”, the “day of visitation”, the “day of salvation”, the “day of judgment”, the “day of the Lord”, “man’s day”, &c. But
when the word “day” is used with a numeral (cardinal or ordinal), as one, two, three, &c., or first, second, third, &c.,
“evening and morning” (Ge 1), or the “seventh day” (Ex 20:9,11, &c.), it is defined, limited, and restricted to an ordinary
day of twenty-four hours.

The word “day” is never used for a year. Sometimes a corresponding number of days is used for a corresponding
number of years, but in that case it is always expressly stated to be so used; as in Nu 14:33,34. But, even in these cases,
the word “day” means a day, and the word “year” means a year. It is not said that a day means a year; but the number
of the forty years is said to be “after the number of the days in which ye searched the land, even forty days”.

It is the same in Eze 4:5, where the years of Israel’s iniquity were laid on Ezekiel “according to the number of the
days”. In this case also, the word “days” means days, and the word “years” means years.

There is no Scriptural warrant for arbitrarily assuming this to be a general principle in the absence of any statement to
that effect.

Appendix 12
“THE STARS ALSO”

In the first mention of the heavenly bodies , the purpose of the Creator is clearly stated. Ge 1:14-19 reveals the fact
that they were created, not only “to divide the day from the night, and to give light upon the earth”; but, they were
set “for SIGNS, and for SEASONS, and for days and years”.

The figure Polysyndeton (see Ap. 6) emphasizes these four purposes, and bids us single them out and consider them
separately and independently.

They are “for SIGNS”.

Heb. ‘oth, from ‘athah, to come. Signs, therefore, of something or some One to come. Those who understand them
are enlightened by them. Those who do not may well be “dismayed” (Jer 10:2). The stars are numbered and named.
There are twelve signs of the Zodiac, called “the stars” in Ge 37:9 (eleven of which bowed down to Joseph’s, the
twelfth). The word Zodiac means the degrees or steps, which mark the stages of the sun’s path through the heavens,
corresponding with the twelve months.

The stars were all named by God (Ps 147:4). Most of these names have been lost; but over 100 are preserved
through the Arabic and Hebrew, and are used by astronomers to-day, though their meaning is unknown to them. Many of
them are used in Scripture as being well known, though the translations are somewhat speculative: e.g. Job 9:9. Heb.
‘ash (Arcturus, R.V. the Bear), kesil (A.V. Orion), kimah (Pleiades). Job 38:31,32, mazzaroth (margin, Zodiac). Cp. 2 Ki
23:5, ‘ash (Arcturus with her sons, R.V. the Bear with her train, both versions being incorrect as to the names). See
also Isa 13:10. Am 5:8.

These names and the twelve “signs” go back to the foundation of the world. Jewish tradition, preserved by Josephus,
assures us that this Bible astronomy was invented by Adam, Seth, and Enoch.

We see evidence of it as early as Ge 11:4, where we read of the Tower of Babel having “his top with the heavens”.
There is nothing about the wrongly supplied italics “may reach unto”. The words, doubtless, refer to the signs of the
Zodiac, pictured at the top of the Tower, like the Zodiacs in the Temples of Denderah, and Esneh in Egypt.

The Babylonian “Creation Tablets” refer to them, though their primitive meaning had been either corrupted or lost.
It is the same with the Greek mythology, which is a corruption of primitive truth which had been lost and perverted.
We have to remember that our written Scriptures began with Moses, say in 1490 B.C.: and thus, for more that 2,500
years, the revelation of the hope which God gave in Ge 3:15 was preserved in the naming of the stars and their
grouping in Signs and Constellations.

These groupings are quite arbitrary. There is nothing in the positions of the stars to suggest the pictures originally
drawn around them. The Signs and Constellations were first designed and named; then, the pictures were drawn
around them respectively. Thus the truth was enshrined and written in the heavens, where no human hand could touch
it. In later years, when Israel came into the possession of the written “Scriptures of truth”, there was no longer any
need for the more ancient writing in the heavens. Hence, the original teaching gradually faded away and the heathen,
out of the smattering they had heard by tradition, evolved their cosmogonies and mythologies.

Ps 19 contains a vivid reference to these two Books of revelation. That is why there is the very sudden change of
subject at verse 7; a change which still perplexes and baffles all the skill of commentators. he teaching is preserved in
the structure of the Psalm, where we have

A | 1-4-. The Heavens.
B | -4-6. “In them, the sun”.
A | 7-10. The Scriptures.
B | 11-14. “In them (the same Heb. as in v. 4.), Thy servant”.

In this structure every line emphasizes the elaboration of the design: for, while, in the first half, all the terms are
literary, in the latter half they are all astronomical, thus welding the two portions of the Psalm into one harmonious
whole.

For the meaning of the words, reference must be made to the Psalm itself. We can only note here that the first part
does not refer to the wonders of creation, but to the eloquence of its teaching and revelation: they “declare”, tell, or
narrate (Ge 24:66. Ps 71:15), they “utter speech”, but without words (omit “where” in v. 3); they prophesy “day by
day”, “night by night”. The question is: What do they prophesy? What knowledge do they show forth? What glory do
they tell of?

The answer is — Ge 3:15. The one great central truth of all prophecy — the coming of the One, Who, though He
should suffer, should in the end crush the head of the old serpent, the Devil. But, where are we to open this book?
Where are we to break into this circle of the Zodiacal signs?

Through the “precession of the Equinoxes” the sun gradually shifts its position a little each year, till in about every
2,000 years it begins the year in a different sign. This was foreseen; and it was also foreseen that succeeding
generations would not know when and where the sun began its course, and where the teaching of this Heavenly Book
commenced, and where we were to open its first page. Hence the “Sphinx” was invented as a memorial. It had the head
of a woman and the body and tail of a lion, to tell us that this Book, written in the Heavens, began with the sign
“Virgo”, and will end with the sign “Leo”. The word “sphinx” is from the Greek sphingo, to join; because it binds
together the two ends of this circle of the heavens.

The number of the Signs is twelve, the number of governmental perfection or “rule”: cp. Ge 1:18 (Ap. 10). They are
divided into three books of four chapters (or signs) each: twelve being the product of 3 x4, i.e. of Divine truth working
in the heavens and in the earth (see Ap. 10).

Each book, therefore, consists of four signs; and these are all arranged, by structure, in exactly the same way. Each
is an introversion. Thus we have the three books:

First Book. The Redeemer. (His first coming) A | VIRGO. The prophecy of the promised seed. B | LIBRA. The
Redeemer’s work (grace). B | SCORPIO. The Redeemer’s conflict. A | SAGITTARIUS. The prophecy fulfilled.

Second Book. The Redeemed. (His work and its results) C | CAPRICORNUS. The prophecy of deliverance. D |
AQUARIUS. Results of work bestowed. D | PISCES. Results of work enjoyed. C | ARIES. The prophesied deliverance
fulfilled.

Third Book. The Redeemer. (His Second Coming) E | TAURUS. The prophecy of coming judgment. F | GEMINI. The
Redeemer’s reign in glory. F | CANCER. The Redeemer’s position safe. E | LEO. The prophecy of triumph fulfilled.

Each of the four chapters in each of these three Books consists of three sections; and each section is represented by
a Constellation. There are thus thirty-six (3 x12) Constellations, which, with the twelve Signs, make forty-eight (4 x12)
in all.

They may thus be set forth:

The First Book. The Redeemer. “The sufferings of Christ.”


I. VIRGO (A) The prophecy of the promised seed.

1. COMA ( = The desired). The woman and child the desired of all nations (in the most ancient Zodiacs).

2. CENTAURUS (with two natures). The despised sin-offering.

3. BOOTES. The coming One with branch.

II. LIBRA (B). The Redeemer’s atoning work.

1. CRUX. The Cross endured.

2. LUPUS. The Victim slain.

3. CORONA. The Crown bestowed.

III. SCORPIO (B). The Redeemer’s conflict.

1. SERPENS. Assaulting the man’s heel.

2. OPHIUCHUS. The man grasping the serpent.

3. HERCULES. The mighty man victorious.

IV. SAGITTARIUS (A). The Redeemer’s triumph.

1. LYRA. Praise prepared for the Conqueror.

2. ARA. Fire prepared for His enemies.

3. DRACO. The dragon cast down.

The Second Book. The Redeemed.


I. CAPRICORNUS (C). The result of the Redeemer’s sufferings.

1. SAGITTA. The arrow of God sent forth.

2. AQUILLA. The smitten one falling.

3. DELPHINUS. The dead One rising again.

II. AQUARIUS (D). The Blessings assured.

1. PISCIS AUSTRALIS. The blessings bestowed.

2. PEGASUS. The blessings quickly coming.

3. CYGNUS. The Blesser surely returning.

III. PISCES (D). The Blessings in abeyance.

1. THE BAND. The great enemy, “Cetus.”

2. ANDROMEDA. The redeemed in bondage.

3. CEPHEUS. The Deliverer coming to loosen.

IV. ARIES (C). The Blessings consummated.

1. CASSIOPEIA. The captive delivered.

2. CETUS. The great enemy bound.

3. PERSEUS. The “Breaker” delivering.

The Third Book. The Redeemer. “The glory that should follow.”


I. TAURUS (E). Messiah coming to rule.

1. ORION. The redeemer breaking forth as Light.

2. ERIDANUS. Wrath breaking forth as a flood.

3. AURIGA. Safety for His redeemed in the day of wrath.

II. GEMINI (F). Messiah as Prince of princes.

1. LEPUS. The enemy trodden under foot.

2. CANIS MAJOR. The coming glorious prince.

3. CANIS MINOR. The exalted Redeemer.

III. CANCER (F). Messiah’s redeemed possessions.

1. URSA MINOR. The lesser sheepfold.

2. URSA MAJOR. The fold and the flock.

3. ARGO. The pilgrim’s arrival at home.

IV. LEO (E). Messiah’s consummated triumph.

1. HYDRA. The old serpent destroyed.

2. CRATER. The cup of wrath poured out.

3. CORVUS. The birds of prey devouring.

It will be noted that the modern names are used, but only for the purposes of readier identification. Some of these
names were given in ignorance, by those who had lost the primitive signification of the twelve Signs and of the
thirty-six Constellations.

The Hebrew and Arabic names of these, and of the principal stars contained in them, are full of truth, and eloquent
in their teaching. Thus:

VIRGO (the Virgin). Here we have the star Al Zimach. Heb. Zemach, the branch. Isa 4:2. Jer 23:5,6. Zec 3:8; 6:12.
All the other stars have cognate meanings.

· COMA. The Desired (Hag 2:7). Nu 24:17. (Egyptian Shes-nu = the desired son.)

· CENTAURUS, Al Beze, the despised (Isa 53:3).

· BOOTES (Heb. bo’, to come), Ps 96:13. Heb. Arcturus (Job 9:9 = He cometh). Egyptian = Smat, one who
rules.

LIBRA was anciently the Altar (accadian = Tulki). The two bright stars are today called in Arabic Zuben al Genubi =
the price which is deficient, and Zuben al Chemali = the price which covers.

· CRUX. Heb. karath, cut off (Da 9:26).

· LUPUS. Greek name Thera, a beast. Lat. Victima. Heb. sabah, slain. In the Zodiac of Denderah = Sura, a
lamb.

· CORONA. Heb. ‘atarah, a royal crown. Arab. Al iclil, a jewel. Its brightest star = Al phena, the shining one.

SCORPIO. Heb. ‘akrab (Ps 91:13). Coptic name = Isidis = the attack of the enemy. Arabic = Al aterah, the wounding of
the coming One. The brightest star is Antares (Arab. = wounding). Heb. Lezuth, perverseness.

· SERPENS. The brightest star is called (Heb.) ‘anak = encompassing. Heb. kelalah = the accursed. Arab. Al
hay, the reptile.

· OPHIUCHUS is from Arab. Afeichus = the serpent held. The brightest star is Ras al hagus = the head of him
who holds. Other names are Megeras = contending. In the Zodiac of Denderah he is Api-bau = the chief
who cometh. Other stars are Triophas = treading under foot; Saiph = bruised; Carnebas = bruised.

· HERCULES. In the Zodiac of Denderah called Bau = who cometh. Arab. Al giscale, the strong one. The
brightest star, Ras al Gethi = the head of him who bruises.

SAGITTARIUS. Heb. kesheth (an archer) (Ge 21:20). The brightest star, Heb. channun = the gracious one (Ps 45:2).
Accadian, Nun-ki = Prince of the earth. In Zodiac of Denderah, Pi-maere = graciousness, and Knem, He conquers.

· LYRA. (Ps 65:1.) The brightest star Vega = He shall be exalted. In Zodiac of Denderah = Fent-kar = the
serpent ruled. Originally an eagle, from confusion between Heb. nesher, and shir (song, or music).

· ARA, and alter upside down, pointing to Tartarus (Isa 63:4,5). Arab. Al mugamra = the completing or
finishing (Ps 21:9-12).

· DRACO. Ends the first book. The dragon cast down. CETUS ends the second book. Leviathan bound.
HYDRA ends the third book. The old serpent destroyed. Draco = trodden on. (Ps 91:13; 74:12-14. Isa 27:1).
In Zodiac of Denderah it is a serpent under the fore-feet of Sagittarius and called Her-fent = the serpent
accursed. The brightest star c 1000 alled Thuban = the subtle.

CAPRICORNUS = the goat of atonement. In Zodiac of Denderah and Esneh, Hupenius = the place of the sacrifice.
Heb. Gedi, the kid, or Gada, cut off. The brightest star is Al-gedi = the kid. The next is Deneb al gedi = the sacrifice of
the kid.

· SAGITTA, the arrow. (Ps 38:2. Isa 53:4,5.) Heb. Shamad, or shamem = destroying.

· AQUILA, the eagle, pierced and wounded and falling. The brightest star, Al tair = wounding. All the others
are similar.

· DELPHINUS. Always a fish full of life, the head upwards. Heb. Dalaph = the pouring out of water. Arab.
Dalaph = coming quickly.

AQUARIUS. In the Zodiac of Denderah he has two urns. The fish seems to have come out of one of them. Heb. name
Dali = water-urn or bucket (Nu 24:7). Brightest star Sa’ad al Melik = the record of the pouring forth. The next Sa’ad al
Sund = who goeth and returneth (cp. Isa 32:1,2; 35:1,6; 41:18; 44:2-6; 51:3).

· PISCIS AUSTRALIS. The southern fish. Arab. Fom al haut = the mouth of the fish. Zodiac of Denderah = Aar,
a stream.

· PEGASUS. The winged horse. Zodiac of Denderah Pe and ka = Peka, or pega. Heb. pehah = the chief, and
sus, a horse; name thus come down. The brightest is Markab, Heb. merhak = returning from afar.

· CYGNUS. In the Zodiac of Denderah, Tes-ark = this from afar. A mighty bird, not falling dead like Aquila.
Brightest star Deneb = the Judge; called also Adige = flying swiftly. The second, Al Bireo = flying quickly.
Two others: Azel = who goes and returns quickly, and Fafage = gloriously shining forth.

PISCES. Egyptian name in the Zodiac of Denderah = Pi-cot Orion or Pisces Hori = the fishes (i.e. swarms and
multitudes) or Him Who cometh. Heb. Dagim, the fishes (Ge 48:16). Syr. name, Nuno = lengthened out (i.e. in
posterity). Cp. Isa 53:10. Ps 33:12; 37:22; 115:14,15. Isa 61:9; 65:23; 26:15; 9:3. Jer 30:19. Eze 36:10,11; 37:26. Note
the two fishes = the earthly and heavenly callings (one fish horizontal, the other looking upward). 113 stars much of
the same magnitude. The brightest star is Okda = the united. The next (Arabic) Al samaca = the upheld. (Isa 41:8-10.)

· THE BAND. Egyptian name U-or = He cometh binding them together (Hos 11:4); and breaking the band
which binds them to their old enemy Cetus.

· ANDROMEDA. Name in the Zodiac of Denderah is Set, which means seated as a queen. Also, Sirco = the
chained. The brightest star is Al Phiratz = the broken down. The next, Mirach = the weak. The next, Al
amok (Arab) = stuck down. (Isa 54:11-14; 51:21-52:3. Jer 14:17.)

· CEPHUS. The king. In the Zodiac of Denderah Pe-ku-hor = this one cometh to rule. Cepheus is Greek from
the Heb. zemah = the Branch. Ethiopian name, Hyh = a king. The brightest star is Al Deramin = coming
quickly. The next is Al Phirk – the Redeemer. The next, Al Rai’ = who bruises or breaks. (Jer 31:1.)

ARIES. The ram or lamb full of vigor. Not falling in death like Capricornus. The name in the Zodiac of Denderah
Tametouris Ammon = the reign of rule of Ammon. Heb. name Taleh = the lamb. Arab. Al 1000 Hamel = the sheep. Syr.
Amroo, as in Jn 1:29. The Accadian name was Bar-Ziggar = the altar making right = the sacrifice of righteousness. The
brightest star is El nath, or El natik = wounded, or slain. The next, Al Sharatan = the bruised, or wounded. Cp. Rv 5:9-12.

· CASSIOPEIA. The enthroned woman. Arabic name El seder = the freed. In the Zodiac of Denderah Set =
seated as queen. Arabic Ruchba = the enthroned. The brightest star is Schedir = the freed. The next, Kaph
(Heb.) = the branch. (Isa 54:5-8; 62:3-5. Jer 31:3-12. Ps 45:9-17. Isa 61:10,11.)

· CETUS. The sea monster. The great enemy bound (Rv 20:10; cp. 20: 1-3). The name in the Zodiac of
Denderah is Knem = subdued. The brightest star is Menkar = the enemy chained. The next is Diphda, or
Deneb Kaitos = overthrown, or thrustdown. Another is Mira = the rebel. (Job 41:1-10. Isa 51:22,23;
26:21-27:1. Ps 74:12-14.)

· PERSEUS. The Breaker. Heb. Perez. Greek, Perses, or Perseus (Ro 16:12. Mic 2:12,13). Name in the Zodiac
of Denderah is Kar Knem = he who fights and subdues. The brightest star is Mirfak = who helps. The next,
Al Genib = who carries away. The next is Athik = who breaks.

TAURUS. Messiah coming in judgment. Chald. Tor. Hence, Arabic Al thaur; Greek, Tauros; Lat. Taurus. The common
Heb. name is Shur = coming and ruling, and Re’em = pre-eminence. The brightest star is Al Debaran = The Leader or
Governor. The next is El nath = wounded or slain. The group Pleiades is Kimah = heap or accumulation. (Job 9:9;
38:31,21. Am 5:8.) A bright star is Al Cyone = the centre. Heb. and Syr. name is Succoth = booths. Another group,
Hyades = the congregated. (Dt 33:17. Ps 44:5. Isa 13:11-15; 34:2-8; 26:21.)

· ORION. The coming Prince. Light breaking forth, through the Redeemer. In the Zodiac of Denderah it is
Ha-ga-t = this is He Who triumphs. Oarion = Heb. ‘Or, light; or coming forth as light (cp. Job 9:9; 38:31. Am
5:8). Heb. Kesil = a strong one (translated “Orion” in Job 9:9; 38:31. Am 5:8). The brightest star is
Betelgeuz = the coming of the Branch (Mal 3:2). The next is Rigel or Rigol = the foot of him that crusheth.
The next is Bellatrix = swiftly destroying. Another is Al Nitak = the wounded One. Many others with names
of cumulative meanings. (See Isa 42:13,14; 60:1-3.)

· ERIDANUS. the river of judgment. In the Zodiac of Denderah it is Pehta-t = the mouth of the river. The
brightest star is Achernar = the after part of the river. So with the other names, going forth, flowing on
(to the lower regions of the south). Da 7:9-11. Ps 97:3-5; 50:3. Hab 3:5. Isa 30:27-33. Na 1:5,6. Isa
66:15,16. 2 Th 1:7,8.

· AURIGA. The Shepherd. (Isa 40:10,11. Eze 34:22). Auriga = Charioteer. The brightest star is Alioth = a
she-goat. Modern Lat. name is Capella, same meaning. The next is Menkilinon = the band of the goats;
bound, never to be again lost. (Jn 10:11.) In the Zodiac of Denderah, the shepherd carries a sceptre
(Trun), the top with a goat, and bottom with a cross. (Mal 4:1-3. Ps 37:38-40).

GEMINI. The Twins. Name in the Zodiac of Denderah is Clusus, or Claustrum Hori = the place of Him Who cometh.
The old Coptic name was Pi-Mahi = the united. Heb. Thaumim (from ta’am) = double. The root used in Ex 26:24 (twinned
together). The brightest star is Apollo = ruler or judge. The next is Hercules = who cometh to labour and suffer. Another
is Al henah = hurt, wounded. (Isa 4:2; 32:1,2. Jer 23:5,6; 33:14,15.)

· LEPUS (the enemy trodden under foot). In the Zodiac of Denderah the name is Bashti-beki = falling
confounded. Aratus says “chased eternally”. The brightest star is Arnebo = the enemy of Him Who cometh.
Other stars are Nibal = the mad; Takis, the bound; Sugia, the deceiver. (Isa 63:3,4.)

· CANIS MAJOR. Sirius, the Prince. In Zodiac of Denderah it is Apes = the head. In Persian Planisphere = a
wolf (Heb. Ze’eb). The brightest star is Sirius = the Prince. In Persian Tistrya or Tistar = the chieftain. The
next is Mirzam = the prince. Another is Wesen = the shining, and another Adhara = the glorious. Many
other cognate names. (Isa 9:6; 55:4. Da 8:23,25.)

· CANIS MINOR. The second Dog. In the Zodiac of Denderah it is Sebak = conquering, victorious. The
brightest star is Procyon = Redeemer. The next is Gomeisa (Arabic) = the burdened, bearing for others.
Many other cognate names. (Isa 49:24-26; 59:19,20; 53:12.)

CANCER. The Crab. Messiah’s possessions held fast. In the Zodiac of Denderah and Esneh it is a sacred beetle. Its
name there give is Klaria = cattle-folds. Arabic name is Al Sarta’n = He Who holds or binds together (Ge 49:11). The
Greek name is Karkinos = encircling; the same as the Lat. Cancer, from Arabic Khan an Inn, and Ker, or Cer = encircling.
The ancient Accadian is Su-kul-na = the seizer, or possessor of seed. A bright cluster is called Praesepe = a multitude or
offspring. The brightest star is Tegmine = holding. Another is Acubene = the sheltering or hiding-place. Another,
Ma’alaph = assembled thousands. North and south of Praesepe are two bright stars, Assellus North and Assellus South;
their sign is 69, and called the two asses, thus connecting it with Cancer, which is the sign of Issachar (cp. Ge 49:14. Nu
2:5).

· URSA MINOR. The little Bear = the lesser sheep-fold. The brightest star of Ursa Minor is Dubheh = a herd.
Arabic Dubah means cattle. Heb. Dober = a fold, from dobe’ = rest or security, rendered “strength” in Dt
33:25. See R.V. marg. All points to this (cp. Jdg 5:16). The Heb. Dob = a bear. So Arabic Dub, and Persian
Deeb or Dob. Hence the mistake. The brightest star is Al riccaba = the turned or ridden on, denoting it as
the Polar star. The Greeks called it Kunosoura = Cynosure, but this word is Accadian. An-nas-sur-ra = high in
rising; or high in heavenly position. The next bright star is Kochab = waiting Him Who cometh.

· URSA MAJOR. The great Bear = the Fold and the Flock (Ob 17-19). In Job 9:9 and 38:31, 32 it is called ‘Ash
and her offspring. A.V. = Arcturus and her sons. R.V. = Bear and his train (marg., sons). Arabs still call it Al
Naish or Annaish = the assembled together as in a fold. The brightest star is D 1000 ubhe = a flock, which
gives its name to the two constellations. The next is Merach = the flock (Arabic = purchased). The next is
Phaeda or Pharda = numbered or guarded (Ps 147:4). Another is called Benet Naish = daughters of the
assembly. Another, Al Kaid = the assembled. Many other cognate names. (Cp. Eze 34:12-16.)

· ARGO. The Ship = the Pilgrims, safe at home. In the Egyptian Planisphere there are two ships (like the
two folds). they occupy one-half of the south meridians. The brightest star is Canopus = the possession of
Him Who cometh. Other names are Sephina = the multitude. Tureis = the possession. Asmidiska = the
released who travel, &c. (Jer 30:10,

11. Isa 60:4-9.)

LEO. The Lion. Messiah’s consummated triumph. In the Zodiac of Denderah it is Pi Mentikeon = the pouting out (of
Divine wrath). The tree constellations crystallize the truth:

1. Hydra = the old serpent destroyed.

2. Crater = the cup of wrath poured out on him.

3. Corvus = the bird of prey devouring him.

The Denderah picture exhibits all four in one. The Syr. name is Aryo = the rending lion. Arab. Al Asad = the lion
leaping forth as a flame. The brightest star is Regulus = treading under foot (as pictured). The next is Denebola = the
Judge or Lord Who cometh. The next is Al Giebha = the exaltation.

Another is Zosma = shining forth. All the others are cognate. (Ge 49:8,9. Nu 24:8,9. Am 3:4,8. Isa 42:13.)

· HYDRA. The Old Serpent. Hydra = he is abhorred. The brightest star is Cor Hydra = the heart of Hydra. Its
ancient name is Al phard = the put away. Another is Al Drian = the abhorred. Another is Minchar al Sugia =
the piercing of the deceiver.

· CRATER. The Cup [of wrath poured out]. (Ps 75:8; 11:6. Rv 14:10; 16:19.) The constellation has thirteen
stars, (cp. Ap. 10).

· CORVUS. The Raven. The birds of prey devouring. The name in the Zodiac of Denderah, Her-na = the
enemy breaking up. there are nine stars (see Ap. 10). The brightest star is Chiba (Nu 23:8) = accursed.
Another is Minchar al Gorab = the raven tearing to pieces.

Thus end the Scriptures of the Heavens. This is the story they tell forth. This is the “speech” they “utter”. This is the
“knowledge” they “shew forth”. There is no articulate speech or voice; and no words are heard; but, their sayings have
gone out into all the world (Ps 19:1-6).

They are “for SEASONS”.

Not only are the stars made for signs (‘othoth, from the root ‘athah = to come), but for Seasons. These are not the
four seasons of the year, but Cycles of time. The figure Polysyndeton (see Ap. 6) in gen. 1:14 emphasizes this: “and for
seasons, and for days, and years”. The word means appointed times. (Cp. Ge 17:21; 18:14; 21:2.) Thus the sun, moon,
and stars are for “signs” (things to come), and for “seasons” (appointed times).

There are no less that ten of these cycles, all of them different; not concentric, but yet all of them coinciding at
creation, but never since: like a number of hoops of different sizes hanging from a nail. This shows that they must
have had a given simultaneous start.

1. They cycle of 24 hours for the day, an evening and morning.

2. The revolution of the Moon round the earth.

3. The lunar cycle, which began at the same moment as the solar cycle.

4. The daily revolution of the Sun, which places him on the meridian at noon each day.

5. The Solar Cycle, coinciding with the first of the seven years of lunar motion and repeating itself every 365
days.

6. The beginning of a Week of seven days on the first day of the week, of the first month of the first year of
the first solar cycle.

7. The first Eclipse of a cycle of eighteen years and eleven days, to which the ancient astronomers gave the
name of Saros; each Saros containing an average of seventy eclipses, divided into two portions of 594
years and 666 years, making together 1,260 years.

8. Besides these, there is the period of the Heliacal rising of Sirius, in a cycle of 162 years.

9. The Transits of Venus.

10. And the grand cycle known as the Precession of the Equinoxes.

All these combine and unite in showing that the chronology of Archbishop Usher was substantially correct. And this
proves that the inflated chronology of modern historians and theologians is entirely un-scientific, being the hypothesis
of men who dabbled in things outside their own sphere, and of which they were incompetent to form a correct
judgment.

Appendix 13
THE USE OF NEPHESH IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

The word Nephesh occurs 754 times in the Hebrew Old Testament. Each occurrence is noted in the margin, but it
will be useful for the Bible student to have a complete list.

In the A.V. and R.V. it is translated “soul” 472 times, while in the other 282 places it is represented by forty-four
different words or phrases. In fifty-three of these places there is a marginal rendering which calls attention to the fact
that the word is “Nephesh”, while in 229 passages the English reader has hitherto been left in ignorance of the fact. The
English word “soul” is in every occurrence the rendering of the Hebrew Nephesh, except in Job 30:15 and Isa 57:16.
See the notes. the time has come to “open the book”, and let it speak for itself. Henceforth, every one who uses The
Companion Bible will have complete information as to the facts, and can use it in determining his definitions, making
his own classifications, and formulating his doctrines as to the Biblical use of the word.

Though, with these two exceptions, the English word “soul” always represents the Hebrew Nephesh, Nephesh is not
always translated “soul”.

This Appendix will exhibit all the varieties of translation; and, while it is not intended to teach either Theology or
Psychology, it will give such information as will enable every Bible reader to form his own views and come to his own
conclusions on an important subject, about which there is such great controversy. his can be done only by giving every
occurrence of the Hebrew word Nephesh.

Each occurrence is noted in the margin of The Companion Bible; but it is well to present a complete, separate, and
classified list of the recognized Lexical usages of the word; and the reader will be left to form his own judgment as to
how far the following classification is correct.

The usage of the word Nephesh by the Holy Spirit in the Word of God is the only guide to the true understanding of
it. It will be seen that the word “soul”, in its theological sense, does not cover all the ground, or properly represent the
Hebrew word “Nephesh”. The English word “soul” is from the Latin solus = alone or sole, because the maintenance of
man as a living organism, and all that affects his health and well-being, is the one sole or main thing in common with
every living thing which the LORD God has made. The correct Latin word for the theological term “soul” (or Nephesh)
is anima; and this is from the Greek anemos = air or breath, because it is this which keeps the whole in life and in
being.

[The usage of the corresponding New Testament word psuche will be presented in a later Appendix.] The first
occurrence of Nephesh is in Ge 1:20, “the moving creature that hath life (Nephesh)”. (*1)

The following are twelve classifications of Nephesh:

I. Nephesh is used of the lower animals only, in twenty-two passages, and is rendered in nine different ways:—

1. “creature” Ge 1:21,24; 2:19; 9:10,12. Lev 11:46.

2. “thing” Lev 11:10. Eze 47:9.

3. “life” Ge 1:20,30.

4. “the life” Ge 9:4. Dt 12:23. Pr 12:10.

5. “beast” Lev 24:18. (See margin.)

6. “the soul” Job 12:10. (See margin.)

7. “breath” Job 41:21.

8. “fish” Isa 19:10. (See margin.)

9. “her” Jer 2:24.

II. Nephesh is used of the Lower Animals and Man in seven passages, and rendered in three different ways:—

1. “creature” Ge 9:15,16.

2. “the life” Lev 17:11,14.

3. “soul” Nu 31:28.

III. Nephesh is used of Man, as an individual person, in 53 passages, and is rendered in six different ways:—

1. “soul” Ge 2:7; 12:5; 46:15,18,22,25,26,27. Ex 1:5; 12:4. Lev 22:11. Ps 25:20. Pr 10:3; 11:25,30; 14:25; 19:15;
22:23 (R.V. life); 25:25; 27:7. Jer 38:16. Lam 3:25. Eze 13:18,20; 18:4

2. “person” Ge 14:21; 36:6 (R.V. souls). Ex 16:16. Lev 27:2. Nu 31:40,46. Dt 10:22. Jer 43:6; 52:29,30. Eze
16:5; 27:13.

3. “persons” Nu 31:35.

4. “any” Dt 24:7.

5. “man” 2 Ki 12:4

6. “and” 1 Ch 5:21

Not rendered Nu 31:35 (Lit. “and the soul of man…were 32,000 souls.”)

IV. Nephesh is used of Man, as exercising certain powers, or performing certain acts (may be often well rendered by
emphatic pronouns), in ninety-six passages, and with eleven different renderings:—

1. “soul” Ge 27:4,19,25,31. Lev 4:2; 5:1,2,4,15,17; 6:2; 7:18,20,21,27; 16:29,31; 17:12,15; 20:6,25; 22:6;
23:27,30,32. Nu 15:27,28,30; 19:22; 29:7; 30:2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13. Dt 13:6. Jdg 5:21. 1 Sa 1:26; 17:55;
18:3; 20:3,17; 25:26. 2 Sa 11:11; 14:19. 2 Ki 2:2,4,6; 4:30. Job 16:4; 31:30 (R.V. life). Ps 35:13; 120:6. Pr
6:32; 8:36; 11:17; 13:2; 15:32; 16:17; 19:8,16; 20:2 (R.V. life); 21:23; 22:5; 29:24. Ecc 4:8; 6:2. Isa 51:23;
58:3,5. Jer 4:19. Eze 4:14. Mic 6:7.

2. “man” Ex 12:16.

3. “any” Lev 2:1.

4. “one” Lev 4:27.

5. “yourselves” Lev 11:43,44. Jer 17:21.

6. “person” Nu 5:6.

7. “themselves” Est 9:31. Isa 46:2.

8. “himself” Job 18:4 (R.V. thyself); 32:2.

9. “he” Ps 105:18.

10. “herself” Jer 3:11.

11. “Himself” Jer 51:14 &c; Am 6:8 (used of Jehovah).

V. Nephesh is used of Man, as possessing animal appetites and desires, in twenty-two passages, rendered in five
different ways:—

1. “soul” Nu 11:6 (dried away). Dt 12:15 (lusteth), 20 (longeth to eat flesh), 20 (lusteth after), 21 (lusteth);
14:26 (lusteth), 26 (desireth); 21:5 (loatheth). 1 Sa 2:16 (desireth). Job 6:7 (refused); 33:20 (abhorreth).
Ps 107:18 (abhorreth). Pr 6:30 (hunger); 13:25 (satisfying). Isa 29:8 (empty), 8 (hath appetite). Mic 7:1
(desired…figs).

2. “pleasure” Dt 23:24.

3. “lust” Ps 78:18.

4. “appetite” Pr 23:2. Ecc 6:7.

5. “greedy” Isa 56:11.

VI. Nephesh is used of Man, as exercising mental faculties, and manifesting certain feelings and affections and
passions, in 231 passages, and rendered in twenty different ways:—

1. “soul” Ge 34:3 (clave), 8 (longeth); 42:21 (anguish); 49:6 (come not). Lev 26:11 (not abhor), 15 (abhor), 30
(abhor), 43 (abhor). Nu 21:4 (discouraged). Dt 4:9 (keep), 29 (seek); 6:5 (love); 10:12 (serve); 11:13
(love), 18 (lay up in); 13:3 (love); 26:16 (keep); 30:2 (return), 6 (love), 10 (turn). Jos 22:5 (serve); 23:14
(know). Jdg 10:16 (Used of God) (grieved); 16:16 (vexed). 1 Sa 1:10 (bitterness of), 15 (poured out); 18:1
(knit with), 1 (loved as); 20:4 (desireth); 23:20 (desire); 30:6 (grieved). 2 Sa 5:8 (hated). 1 Ki 2:4 (walk);
8:48 (return); 11:37 (desired). 2 Ki 4:27 (vexed); 23:3 (keep), 25 (turned). 1 Ch 22:19 (seek). 2 Ch 6:38
(return); 15:12 (seek); 34:31 (keep). Job 3:20 (bitter); 7:11 (bitterness); 9:21 (know) (R.V. myself); 10:1
(weary), 1 (bitterness); 14:22 (mourn); 19:2 (vex); 21:25 (bitterness); 23:13 (Used of God) (desireth); 24:12
(wounded); 27:2 (vexed); 30:16 (poured out), 25 (grieved). Ps 6:3 (sore vexed); 11:5 (Used of God)
(hateth); 13:2 (take counsel); 19:7 (converting); 24:4 (not lifted up); 25:1 (lifted up), 13 (dwell at ease);
31:7 (in adversities), 9 (consumed with grief); 33:20 (waiteth); 34:2 (boast); 35:9 (be joyful); 42:1
(panteth), 2 (thirsteth), 4 (pour our), 5 (cast down), 6 (cast down), 11 (cast down); 43:5 (cast down);
44:25 (bowed down); 62:1 (waileth), 5 (wait); 63:1 (thirsteth), 5 (satisfied), 8 (followeth hard); 69:10
(chastened); 77:2 (refused comfort); 84:2 (longeth); 86:4 (rejoiced), 4 (lift up); 88:3 (full of troubles);
94:19 (delight); 103:1, 2, 22; 104:1, 35 (bless); 107:5 (fainted), 9 (satisfied), 9 (filled with goodness), 26
(melted); 116:7 (return to rest); 119:20 (longing), 25 (cleaveth unto the dust), 28 (melteth for heaviness),
81 (fainteth), 129 (keep), 167 (kept); 123:4 (filled with scorning); 130:5 (wait), 6 (waiteth); 131:2
(quieted); 138:3 (strengthened); 139:14 (knoweth); 143:6 (thirsteth), 8 (lifted up), 11 (bring out of
trouble), 12 (afflict); 146:1 (praise). Pr 2:10 (knowledge pleasant); 3:22 (be life to); 13:4 (desireth), 4
(made fat), 19; 16:24 (sweet to); 19:2 (without knowledge), 18 (spare) (R.V. heart); 21:10 (desireth);
22:25 (get a snare to); 24:14 (wisdom unto); 25:13 (refresheth); 29:17 (give delight). Ecc 2:24 (enjoy
good); 6:3 (not filled); 7:28 (seeketh). SS 1:7; 3:1,2,3,4 (loveth); 5:6 (failed); 6:12 (Used of God) (made
me like chariots). Isa 1:14 (hateth); 26:8 (desire), 9 (desire); 32:6 (made empty); 38:15 (bitterness of);
42:1 (Used of God); 55:2 (delight); 58:10 (drawn out), 10 (afflicted), 11 (satisfied); 61:10 (joyful); 66:3
(delighteth). Jer 4:31 (wearied); 5:9, 29 (avenged); 6:8 (depart), 16 (find rest); 9:9 (Used of God)
(avenged); 12:7 (dearly beloved of); 13:17 (shall weep); 14:19 (loathed); 31:12 (watered), 14, 25
(satiated), 25 (sorrowful); 32:41 (Used of God) (whole); 50:19 (satisfied). Lam 3:17 (removed), 20
(humbled), 24 (saith). Eze 7:19 (satisfied); 24:21 (pitieth). Jnh 2:7 (fainted). Hab 2:4 (not upright). Zec
11:8 (lothed), 8 (abhorred).

2. “mind” Ge 23:8 (your). Dt 18:6 (desire); 28:65 (sorrow). 1 Sa 2:35 (Used of God). 2 Sa 17:8 (chafed). 2 Ki
9:15. 1 Ch 28:9 (willing). Jer 15:1 (Used of God). Eze 23:17 (R.V. soul), 18 (Used of God) (R.V. soul), 18
(Used of God) (soul), 22 (R.V. soul), 28 (R.V. soul) (alienated); 24:25 (R.V. heart) (set); 36:5 (R.V. soul)
(despiteful).

3. “heart” Ex 23:9. Lev 26:16. Dt 24:15. 1 Sa 2:23 (grieve). 2 Sa 3:21 (desireth). Ps 10:3 (desire). Pr 23:7 (R. V.
himself); 28:25 (proud heart) (R.V. greedy spirit); 31:6 (heavy heart.) (R.V. bitter in soul). Jer 42:20
(dissembled) (R.V. souls). Lam 3:51 (affected) (R.V. soul). Eze 25:6 (rejoiced) (R.V. soul), 15 (despiteful)
(R.V. soul); 27:31 (bitterness). Hos 4:8 (set).

4. “hearty” Pr 27:9 (counsel).

5. “will” Dt 21:14 (she will). Ps 27:12; 41:2. Eze 16:27.

6. “desire” Ecc 6:9. Jer 22:27; 44:14. Mic 7:3 (R.V. soul). Hab 2:5.

7. “pleasure” Ps 105:22. Jer 34:16.

8. “lust” Ex 15:9.

9. “angry” Jdg 18:25.

10. “discontented” 1 Sa 22:2.

11. “thyself” Est 4:13.

12. “myself” Ps 131:2.

13. “he” Pr 16:26 (R.V. appetite)

14. “his own” Pr 14:10 (R.V. its own).

15. “Him” Pr 6:16 (Used of God)

16. “himself” Jnh 4:8.

17. “herself” Isa 5:14 (R.V. her desire).

18. “yourselves” Jer 37:9.

19. “man” Isa 49:7.

20. “so would we have it” Ps 35:25.

VII. Nephesh is used of Man, (a) as being “cut off” by God; (b) and as being slain of killed by man, in fifty-four
passages: and is rendered in eight different ways:—

(a) Soul cut off by God, in twenty-two passages, and rendered: “soul” Ge 17:14. Ex 12:15,19; 31:14. Lev
7:20,21,25,27; 17:10; 18:29; 19:8; 20:6; 22:3; 23:29,30. Nu 9:13; 15:30,31; 19:13,20. Eze 18:4,20.

22

(b) Slain or killed by man, in thirty-two passages, rendered in eight different ways:–

1. “soul” Jos 10:28,30,32,35,37,37,39; 11:11. Jer 2:34. Eze 13:19; 22:25,27.

2. “person” Dt 27:25. Jos 20:3,9. 1 Sa 22:22. Pr 28:17. Eze 17:17; 33:6.

3. “any” Lev 24:17.

4. “any person” Nu 31:19; 35:11,15,30,30.

5. “him” Ge 37:21. Dt 19:6; 22:26.

6. “mortally” Dt 19:11.

7. “life” 2 Sa 14:7.

8. “thee” Jer 40:14,15.

VIII. Nephesh is used of Man as being mortal, subject to death of various kinds, from which it can be saved and
delivered and life prolonged, in 243 passages, rendered in eleven different ways:—

1. “soul” Ge 12:13; 19:20. Ex 30:12,15,16. Lev 17:11,11 (R.V. life). Nu 16:38 (R.V. lives); 31:50. 1 Sa 24:11;
25:29,29,29; 26:21 (R.V. life). 2 Sa 4:9. 1 Ki 1:29; 17:21,22. Job 7:15; 27:8. Ps 3:2; 6:4; 7:2,5; 11:1; 17:13;
22:20,29; 23:3; 25:20; 26:9; 33:19; 34:22; 35:3,4,12,17; 40:14; 41:4; 49:8,15; 54:3,4; 55:18; 56:6,13; 57:4;
59:3; 63:9; 66:9,16; 69:1,18; 70:2; 71:10,13,23; 72:13,14; 74:19; 78:50; 86:2,14; 88:14; 94:21; 97:10;
106:15; 109:20,31; 116:4,8; 119:109,175; 120:2; 121:7; 124:4,5,7; 141:8; 142:4,7; 143:3. Pr 18:7; 24:12;
29:10. Isa 3:9; 10:18; 44:20; 53:10,11,12; 55:3. Jer 4:10; 20:13; 26:19; 38:17,20; 44:7; 51:6 (R.V. life), 45
(R.V. yourselves). Lam 1:11,16,19; 2:12; 3:58. Eze 3:19,21; 13:18,19; 14:14,20; 18:27; 33:5,9. Hos 9:4
(R.V. appetite). Jnh 2:5. Hab 2:10.

2. “life, lives” Ge 9:5,5; 19:17,19; 32:30; 35:18; 44:30,30. Ex 4:19; 21:23,23,30. Nu 35:31. Dt 19:21,21; 24:6.
Jos 2:13,14; 9:24. Jdg 5:18; 9:17; 12:3; 18:25,25. Ru 4:15. 1 Sa 19:5,11; 20:1; 22:23,23; 23:15; 26:24,24;
28:9,21. 2 Sa 1:9; 4:8; 16:11; 18:13; 19:5,5,5,5; 23:7. 1 Ki 1:12,12; 2:23; 3:11; 19:2,2,3,4,10,14;
20:31,39,39,42,42. 2 Ki 1:13,13,14; 7:7; 10:24,24. 1 Ch 1:11. Est 7:3,7; 8:11; 9:16. Job 2:4,6; 6:11 (R.V. be
patient); 13:14; 31:39. Ps 31:13; 38:12. Pr 1:18,19; 6:26; 7:23; 13:3,8. Isa 15:4 (R.V. soul); 43:4. Jer 4:30;
11:16; 19:7,9; 21:7,9; 22:25; 34:20,21; 38:2,16; 39:18; 44:30,40; 45:5; 46:26; 48:6; 49:37. Lam 2:19; 5:9.
Eze 32:10. Jnh 1:14; 4:3.

3. “ghost” Job 11:20. Jer 15:9.

4. “person” 2 Sa 14:14 (R.V. life).

5. “tablets” Isa 3:20 (R.V. perfume boxes) (Heb. “houses of the soul” = boxes of scent for the nose).

6. “deadly” Ps 17:9 (Heb. “enemies against my Nephesh”).

7. “himself” 1 Ki 19:4. Am 2:14,15.

8. “me” Nu 23:10. Jdg 16:30. 1 Ki 20:32.

9. “they” Job 36:14.

10. “themselves” Isa 47:14.

11. “yourselves” Dt 4:15. Jos 23:11.

IX. Nephesh is used of man, as actually dead, in thirteen passages, and is rendered in three different ways:—

1. “the dead” Lev 19:28; 21:1; 22:4. Nu 5:2; 6:11.

2. “dead body” Nu 9:6,7,10.

3. “body” Lev 21:11. Nu 6:6; 19:11,13. Hag 2:13.

X. Nephesh, in thirteen passages (all rendered “soul”), is spoken of as going to a place described by four different
words, rendered as shown below :–

i. “sheol” = THE grave (as distinct from keber, A grave), gravedom (or the dominion of death), in five passages,
rendered in this connection in two different ways:—

1. “grave”. Ps 30:3 (R.V. “Sheol”); 89:48 (R.V. “Sheol”, marg. grave). (Cp. Ps 49:15). (2)

2. “hell”. Ps 16:10 (R.V. “Sheol”); 86:13 (marg. grave. R.V. “pit”, marg. lowest Sheol). Pr 23:14 (R.V. “Sheol”,
marg. the grave). (3)

ii. “shachath” = a pit (for taking wild beasts); hence, a grave. The Septuagint and New Testament take it in the
sense of corruption; but, if so, not implying putridity, but destruction. Occurs in six passages, and is rendered
in two different ways:—

1. “pit”. Job 33:18,28,30. Ps 35:7. Isa 38:17. (5)

2. “grave”. Job 33:22 (R.V. “pit”).

iii. “shuchah” = a deep pit (cp. all the occurrences, Pr 22:14; 23:27. Jer 2:6; 18:20,22). In one passage only:—

1. “Pit.” Jer 18:20.

iv. “dumah” = silence. Ps 94:17.

Appendix 14
THE SYNONYMOUS WORDS USED FOR “MAN”

There are four principal Hebrew words rendered “man”, and these must be carefully discriminated. Every occurrence
is noted in the margin of The Companion Bible. They represent him from four different points of view:—

1. ‘Adam, denotes his origin, as being made from the “dust of the Adamah” ground (Lat. homo).

2. ‘Ish, has regard to sex, a male (Lat. vir).

3. ‘Enosh, has regard to his infirmities, as physically mortal, and as to character, incurable.

4. ‘Geber, has respect to his strength, a mighty man.

I.
°A~d¹m
, without the article, denotes man or mankind in general (Ge 1:26; 2:5; 5:1, followed by plural pronoun).
With the article, it denotes the man, Adam, though rendered “man” in Ge 1:27; 2:7 (twice), 8,15,16,19 (marg.), 22
(twice); 3:12, 22, 24; 5:1; 6:1 (rendered “men”), 2,3,4. After this, the Hebrew ‘Adam = man or men, is used of the
descendants of Adam. Hence, Christ is called “the son of Adam”, not a son of Enosh.

With the particle <START HEBREW>ta
<END HEBREW> (‘eth) in addition to the article it is very emphatic, and means self, very, this same, this very.
See Ge 2:7 (first occurrence), 8,15.

Rendered in the Septuagint (anthropos) 411 times; (aner) eighteen times (fifteen times in Proverbs); (brotos),
mortal (all in Job); once (gegenes), earth-born, Jer 32:20.

II.
°I~sh
. First occurrence in feminine, Ge 2:23, ‘ishah = woman. Therefore, ‘ish = male, or husband; a man, in contrast
with a woman. A great man in contrast with ordinary men (Ps 49:2, where “low” are called the children of Adam, and
the “high” = children of ‘ish. So Ps 62:9 and Isa 2:9; 5:15; 31:8). When God is spoken of as man, it is ‘ish (Ex 15:3. So Jos
5:13. Da 9:21; 10:5; 12:6,7. Zec 1:8, &c.). Also, in such expressions as “man of God”, “man of understanding”, &c. In the
early chapters of Genesis we have it in chapters 3:33, 34 and 4:1.

Translated in Septuagint 1,083 times by
<START GREEK>a)nh/r
<END GREEK> (aner), Latin vir, and only 450 by
<START GREEK>a&nqrwpo$
<END GREEK> (anthropos), Latin homo.

It is rendered “husband” sixty-nine times, “person” twelve times, and once or twice each in thirty-nine different
ways.

III.
°Enœsh
. First occurrence Ge 6:4, men of name. Always in a bad sense (Isa 5:22; 45:14. Jdg 18:25). Morally =
depraved, and physically = frail, weak. It is from ‘anash, to be sick, wretched, weak, and denotes inability, for
strength, physically; and for good, morally (cp. 2 Sa 12:15. Job 34:6. Jer 15:18; 17:9; 30:12,15. Mic 1:9). Note the
contrasts, Isa 2:11 and 17, “The lofty looks of man (‘Adam) shall be humbled, and the haughtiness of men (‘Enosh) shall be
bowed down” (Cp. Isa 13:12. Job 25:6. Ps 8:4; 90:3; 144:3. Job 4:17; 10:5; 7:17. Da 4:16). Other instructive passages are
Isa 8:1; 66:24. Eze 24:17 (afflicted, or mourners. Cp. Jer 17:16, “day of man”). In 1 Sa 4:9 it is probably plural of ‘Ish (so
probably Ge 18 and 19, where the indefinite plural must be interpreted by the context, because ‘Adam would have
denoted human, and ‘Ish, males).

It is rendered “man” 518 times, “certain” eleven times, and once or twice each in twenty-four other and different
ways.

IV.
Geber
. First occurrence in Ge 6:4 (*1), mighty men, and denotes man in respect of his physical strength, as ‘Enosh
does in respect of the depravity of his nature. It is rendered “man” sixty-seven times, “mighty” twice, “man-child” once,
“every one” once. In the Septuagint rendered fourteen times
<START GREEK>a&nqrwpo$
<END GREEK> (anthropos) and the rest by
<START GREEK>a)nh/r
<END GREEK> (aner).

For illustrative passages see Ex 10:11; 12:37. 1 Sa 16:18. 2 Sa 23:1. Nu 24:3,15. 1 Ch 26:12; 28:1. 2 Ch 13:3. Ezr 4:21;
5:4,10; 6:8.

V.
M®th£m
(plural) = adults as distinguished from children, and males as distinguished from females. Occurs Ge 34:30.
Dt 2:34; 3:6; 4:27; 26:5; 28:62; 33:6. 1 Ch 16:19. Job 11:3,11; 19:19; 22:15; 24:12; 31:31. Ps 17:14; 26:4; 105:12. Isa
3:25; 5:13; 41:14. Jer 44:28.

*1 In Ge 6:4, we have three out of the above four words: “daughters of men” ( = daughters of [the man] ‘Adam;
“mighty men” = (geber); “men of renown” = Heb. men (‘Enosh) of name, i.e. renowned for their moral depravity.

Appendix 15
LAWS BEFORE SINAI

The existence of Laws in the book of Genesis and Exodus is evident, though there is no formal record of their
delivery. Cp. Ex 18:16. Doubtless some were made known to mankind, as such, by God, e.g.

1. The Law of the Sabbath (Ge 2:3).

2. The days noted in connection with the flood are all sabbaths except one, Ge 8:5, Tuesday. See note on
gen. 8:10, 12, 14.

3. The law of the place to worship (Ge 4:3,4,16).

4. The law of offerings (Ge 4:4), &c.

But, side by side with these special Divine communications, the Babylonian laws were codified in the age of
Abraham. In A.D. 1901, the Code of Amraphel (Khammurabi), Ge 14:1, was discovered in Susa by M. J. de Morgan. The
latest date for this code is 2139 B.C. Eight hundred years before Moses, these laws governed the peoples from the
Persian Gulf to the Caspian Sea, and from Persia to the Mediterranean, and were in force throughout Canaan.

This discovery overthrew the two main pillars of the “higher critics”, one of which was that such writing was
unknown before Moses; the other, that a legal code was impossible before the Jewish kings. Hence, we have now
before us both codes; and are in a position to answer Jehovah’s question in Dt 4:8, “What nation is there so great, that
hath statutes and judgments so righteous as all this law, which I set before you this day?”

Khammurabi calls his laws the “judgments of righteousness”, but some of them, at least, are both unrighteous and
unequal, as the following brief contrast shows at a glance:—We see the laws of Khammurabi operating in Genesis in the
following instances:—

1. The law of adoption made Eliezer Abram’s heir (Ge 15). § 191.

2. The giving of Hagar to Abraham (Ge 16); and of Bilhah (Ge 30:4) and Zilpah (Ge 30:9) to Jacob, accorded
with this code. § 146.

3. The purchase of Machpelah by Abraham (Ge 23) was conducted in strict conformity with its commercial
enactments. § 7.

4. The taking of life for stealing, proposed by Jacob to Laban (Ge 31:32), was enacted by this code, which
punished sacrilege with death. § 6.

5. The taking of life by burning, with which Judah threatened his daughter-in-law Tamar (Ge 38:24), is also
according to the Babylonian code. § 110.

6. The proposal of Joseph’s steward, that the one with whom the cup was found should die (Ge 44:9),
harmonized with the law punishing with death any theft from a palace. § 6.

7. The giving of a special portion by Jacob to his favorite son Joseph (Ge 48:22) was provided for by this
code. § 165.

8. The cutting off of Reuben from his birthright (Ge 49:4) was the prescribed way of punishing his offense
according to Khammurabi’s law. § 158.

9. The inability of Abram to see Hagar (Ge 16:6). § 119.

The following is a list of thirty-four laws seen in force in Genesis, given by Jehovah, and subsequently confirmed in
the Mosaic code:—

· The law of the sabbath (Ge 2:3). Ex 16:23; 20:10; 31:13-17. Dt 5:14.

· The law of the place to worship (Ge 3:24; 4:3,4,16; 9:26,27). Ex 25:8. Dt 12:5-7. Lev 17:3,4.

· The law of the acceptance of sacrifice by fire from heaven (Ge 4:4,5). Cp. strange fire, Ex 30:9. Lev 6:9;
10:1.

· The law of sacrifices (Ge 4:4; 15:9; 22:2,13). Ex 29:36. Lev 1:2-5.

· The law of clean and unclean (Ge 7:2; 8:20). Lev 11. Dt 14:3-20.

· The law of the altar (Ge 8:20; 12:7,8; 13:4,18; 22:9; 26:25). Ex 20:24.

· The law of eating flesh (Ge 9:3). Dt 12:20.

· The law against eating blood (Ge 9:4). Lev 7:26; 17:10-14.

· The law against murder (Ge 9:5,6). Ex 20:13. Dt 5:17.

· The law of parental authority (Ge 9:25; 18:19; 22; 37:13). Ex 20:12. Lev 19:3. Dt 5:16.

· The law of monogamy (Ge 12:18; 16:1). Dt 24:1,2.

· The law against adultery (Ge 12:18; 20:3,9; 26:10,11; 38; 39:9; 49:4). Lev 20:10.

· The law as to (1) priesthood (Ge 14:18). Ex 28:1. (2) priestly garments (Ge 27:15; 37:3). Ex 28:4.

· The law of tithes (Ge 14:20; 28:22). Lev 27:30-32.

· The law as to covenant-making (Ge 15:10,18; 21:27,32). Ex 34:27; 19:5.

· The law of intercession (Ge 17; 18; 20:17; 24.)

· The law of righteousness (Ge 17:1). Dt 18:13.

· The law of circumcision (Ge 17:9,10). Lev 12:3.

· The law of hospitality (Ge 18). Lev 19:33,34. Dt 10:18,19.

· The law against licentiousness (Ge 18:20). Lev 18.

· The law against fornication (Ge 34:7).

· The law as to oaths (Ge 21:23; 24:41; 26:28). Ex 22:11. Nu 5:19.

· The law of binding sacrifices (Ge 22:9). Ps 118:27.

· The law of birthright (Ge 25:33). Dt 21:16,17.

· The law of anointing with oil (Ge 28:18; 31:13). Ex 40:15.

· The obligation of vows (Ge 28:20-22; 31:13). Dt 23:21. Nu 30:2.

· The law against idolatry (implied in the word “dominion”, Ge 1:26; 31:32,35). Ex 20:3-6. Dt 5:7-10.

· The law of uncleanness (Ge 31:35). Lev 15.

· The law against marriage between circumcised and uncircumcised (Ge 34:14). Dt 7:3.

· The law of ceremonial cleansing for worship (Ge 35:2). Ex 19:10.

· The law of drink offerings (Ge 35:14). Ex 29:40. Lev 23:18.

· The law of marrying the brother’s widow (Ge 38:8). Dt 25:5-10.

· The law of preaching (2 Pe 2:5). Lev 10:11. Dt 33:10.

· The law of dowry (Ge 34:12). Ex 22:16.

Appendix 16

THE OCCURRENCES OF <START HEBREW>hm*v*n+<END HEBREW> (N®sh¹m¹h), “BREATH”


Ge 2:7; 7:22. Dt 20:16. Jos 10:40; 11:11,14. 2 Sa 22:16. 1 Ki 15:29; 17:17. Job 4:9; 26:4; 27:3; 32:8; 33:4; 34:14;
37:10. Ps 18:15; 150:6. Pr 20:27. Isa 2:22; 30:33; 42:5; 57:16. Da 5:23; 10:17.

Appendix 17
THE GENITIVE CASE

“Of” is usually the sign of the Genitive Case, though it is used also to represent fourteen different Greek words, viz.,
from, around, away, under, beside, upon, over, in, into, down, through, towards, with, before. Where, however, it
represents the Genitive Case of a noun, the Holy Spirit uses it in a variety of different senses, the recognition of which
is necessary to an intelligent appreciation of the passage.

These several usages may be conveniently grouped in the following nine classes, it being borne in mind that
sometimes a Genitive may belong to more than one class; and also, that a study of the context will prove the surest way
of determining to which class a particular Genitive belongs, where, at first sight, it seem difficult to classify.

1. The Genitive of Character. Here the emphasis is always on the adjectival particle, which appears in the
original as a noun in the Genitive Case. Ps 2:6, Heb. “the hill of My holiness” = “My holy hill”. Eph 2:2,
“Children of disobedience” = “disobedient children”. 2 Th 1:7, Greek “angels of His might” = “His mighty
angels”.

2. The Genitive of Origin. This marks the source from which anything has its origin. Eze 1:1, “Visions of
God” = Visions proceeding from God. Ro 4:11,13, “Righteousness of faith” = Righteousness coming through
faith. 2 Co 11:26, “Perils of waters” = Perils occasioned by waters.

3. The Genitive of Possession. This is, perhaps, the most frequent, and is generally unmistakable; though
some occurrences are difficult to identify. It may be said to answer the question “Whose?” Lk 2:49, Greek
“The business of My Father” = My Father’s business. Rv 14:12, “The patience of the saints” = the patience
possessed by the saints. Eph 6:16, “The shield of faith” = faith’s shield, which is the living Word, Christ,
Ge 15:1. Eph 6:17, “The sword of the Spirit” = the Spirit’s sword, which is the written Word, the
Scriptures.

4. The Genitive of Apposition. Here the “of” is equivalent to “that is to say”, or, “consisting of”. Ge 2:7, “The
breath of life” = the breath, that is to say, life. Jn 2:21, “The temple of His body” = the temple, that is to
say, His body. Ro 4:11, “The sign of circumcision” = the sign, that is to say, circumcision. 2 Co 5:1, “The
house of our tabernacle” = the house, that is to say, our tabernacle. 2 Co 3:17,18, “The spirit of the Lord” =
the spirit, that is to say, the Lord (Christ) Who is the life of the old covenant, as the body without the
spirit is dead (Jas 2:26). 1 Pe 1:1, “Sojourners of the Dispersion” = sojourners, that is to say, the Dispersion.

5. The Genitive of Relation. This is, perhaps, the most interesting of all; and the manner of expressing the
particular relation must be gathered from the context. Frequently the “of” is the equivalent to “pertaining
to”. It may be objective, subjective, or both, e.g. 2 Co 5:14, “The love of Christ”, which may be the love
Christ bears to us (subjective); the love we bear to Christ (objective); or both may be true, and the
truth. Ge 2:9, “The tree of life” i.e. the tree which preserved life. Isa 55:3. Ac 13:34, “The sure mercies
of David” = pertaining, or made, to David. Mt 6:28, “Lilies of the field” = which grow in the field. Ro
8:36, “Sheep of slaughter” = sheep destined for slaughter. Heb 11:26, “Reproach of Christ” = reproach for
Christ’s sake.

6. The Genitive of Material. Denoting that of which anything is made, hence the “of” here is equivalent to
“made of”. Ge 6:14, “An ark of gopher wood”. Ps 2:9, “A rod of iron”. Da 2:38, “This head of gold”.

7. The Genitive of Contents. Denoting that with which anything is filled, or which it contains, hence the “of”
is equivalent to “filled with”, or “containing”. 1 Sa 16:20, “A bottle of wine”. Mt 10:42, “A cup of cold
water”. Mt 26:7, “An alabaster box of very precious ointment”. The Genitive of the contents always
follows the verb “to fill”, while the vessel filled takes the Accusative case, and the filler is put in the
Dative case, e.g. Ro 15:13, “Now the God of hope fill you (Accusative case) with all joy and peace
(Genitive case) in (or by) believing (Dative case)”. Eph 5:18, “Filled with the Spirit” is the Dative case,
and therefore = “by the Spirit” –the Filler. Therefore, not “with”, which would have required the Genitive
case.

8. The Genitive of Partition. Separation, where this denotes a part taken from the whole; the “of” being
equivalent to such expressions as “share in”, “part of”, or “from among”. Lk 20:35, Greek “To attain of that
world” = to attain a place in that world. 1 Co 15:9, “The least of the Apostles” = the least among the
Apostles.

9. Two Genitives depending on one another. Ac 5:32, “We are witnesses of (Genitive of possession) Him of
(i.e. in relation to, Genitive of relation) these things”. Ac 20:24, “The Gospel of (i.e. concerning, Genitive
of relation) the grace of (Genitive of origin or possession) God”.

Appendix 18

“IN THE DAY” (Ge 2:17)

B®yœm
= when. It is the figure Synecdoche, by which a part is put for the whole, or the whole for a part (see Ap.
6). What that “part” is must be determined by the context in each particular case.

· In Ge 2:4, it is put for the whole six days.

· In Nu 7:84, it is put for the whole twelve days of the dedication of the altar.

· In Lev 13:14, it is rendered “when”. R.V. whensoever. Nu 28:26, see notes.

· In Lev 14:57, it is rendered “when”, both in A.V. and R.V. Cp. Dt 21:16. 1 Sa 20:19. 2 Sa 21:12.

· In 1 Ki 2:37, it is rendered “on the day”, but v. 41 shows that Shimei had been to Gath and back before
Solomon executed the sentence (vv. 37, 42).

· In Ps 18:18, it is rendered “in the day”, but evidently means at the time when.

· In Isa 11:16, it includes the whole period of the Exodus.

· In Jer 11:4,7, it includes the Exodus and the whole time of giving the law at Sinai. Cp. ch. 7:22; 31:32;
34:13.

· In Eze 20:5,6 (*1), it includes the whole time of God’s choice of Israel.

· In Eze 36:33, it includes the whole time of rebuilding the waste places of Israel in the future restoration.
Cp. ch. 38:18 (*2). A.V. = at the same time. R.V. = in that day.

1. In verse 6 it has the definite article (bayom), and denotes the specific day when Jehovah delivered
them, in contrast with the indefinite past time of His choice.

2. Here the definite article is used to mark a specific occasion. See A.V.

Appendix 19
THE SERPENT OF Ge 3

In Ge 3 we have neither allegory, myth, legend, nor fable, but literal historical facts set forth, and emphasized by
the use of certain Figures of speech (see Ap. 6).

All the confusion of thought and conflicting exegesis have arisen from taking literally what is expressed by Figures,
or from taking figuratively what is literal. A Figure of speech is never used except for the purpose of calling attention
to, emphasizing, and intensifying, the reality of the literal sense, and the truth of the historical facts; so that, while the
words employed may not be so strictly true to the letter, they are all the more true to the truth conveyed by them, and
to the historical events connected with them.

But for the figurative language of verses 14 and 15 no one would have thought of referring the third chapter of
Genesis to a snake: no more than he does when reading the third chapter from the end of Revelation (ch. 20:2).
Indeed, the explanation added there, that the “old serpent” is the Devil and Satan, would immediately lead one to
connect the word “old” with the earlier and former mention of the serpent in Ge 3: and the fact that it was Satan
himself who tempted “the second man”, “the last Adam”, would force conclusion that no other than the personal Satan
could have been the tempter of “the first man, Adam”.

The Hebrew word rendered “serpent” in Ge 3:1 is Nachash (from the root Nachash, to shine), and means a shining
one. Hence, in Chaldee it means brass or copper, because of its shining. Hence also, the word Nehushtan, a piece of
brass, in 2 Ki 18:4. In the same way Saraph, in Isa 6:2,6, means a burning one, and, because the serpents mentioned in Nu
21 were burning, in the poison of their bite, they were called Saraphim, or Saraphs.

But with the LORD said unto Moses, “Make thee a fiery serpent” (Nu 21:8), He said, “Make thee a Saraph”, and, in
obeying this command, we read in v. 9, “Moses made a Nachash of brass”. Nachash is thus used as being interchangeable
with Saraph. Now, if Saraph is used of a serpent because its bite was burning, and is also used of a celestial or
spirit-being (a burning one), why should not Nachash be used of a serpent because its appearance was shining, and be
also used of a celestial or spirit-being (a shining one)?

Indeed, a reference to the structure of Ge 3 (on p. 7) will show that the Cherubim (which are similar celestial or
spirit-beings) of the last verse (Ge 3:24) require a similar spirit-being to correspond with them in the first verse (for
the structure of the whole chapter is a great Introversion). The Nachash, or serpent, who beguiled Eve (2 Co 11:3) is
not spoken of as “an angel of light” in v. 14. Have we not, in this, a clear intimation that it was not a snake, but a
glorious shining being, apparently as angel, to whom Eve paid such great deference, acknowledging him as one who
seemed to possess superior knowledge, and who was evidently a being of a superior (not of an inferior) order?
Moreover, in the description of Satan as “the king of Tyre” (*1) it is distinctly implied that the latter being was of a
supernatural order when he is called “a cherub” (Eze 28:14,16, read from vv. 11-19). His presence “in Eden, the garden
of ‘Elohim” (v. 13), is also clearly stated, as well as his being “perfect in beauty” (v. 12), his being “perfect in his ways
from the day he was created till iniquity was found in him” (v. 15), and as being “lifted up because of his beauty” (v.
17).

These all compel the belief that Satan was the shining one (Nachash) in Ge 3, and especially because the followin
1000 g words could be addressed to him :–“Thing heart was lifted up because of thy beauty, thou hast corrupted thy
wisdom by reason of thy brightness: I will cast thee to the ground, I will lay thee before kings, that they may behold
thee” (v. 17). Even supposing that these things were spoken to, and of, an exalted human being in later days (in Eze
28), still “the king of Tyre” is not compared to a being who was nonexistent; and facts and circumstances which never
happened are not introduced into the comparison.

There is more about “the king of Tyre” in Eze 28:11-19 than was literally true of “the prince of Tyre” (vv. 1-10). The
words can be understood only of the mightiest and most exalted supernatural being that God ever created; and this for
the purpose of showing how great would be his fall. The history must be true to make the prophecy of any weight.

Again, the word rendered “subtle” in Ge 3:1 (see note) means wise, in a good sense as well as in a bad sense. In Eze
28:12 we have the good sense, “Thou sealest up the sum, full of wisdom”; and the bad sense in v. 17, “thou hast
corrupted thy wisdom” (referring, of course, to his fall). So the word rendered “subtle” is rendered “prudent” in Pr 1:4;
8:12; 12:23; 14:8; and in a bad sense in Job 15:5. 1 Sa 23:22. Ps 83:3.

The word “beast” also, in Ge 3:1, chay, denotes a living being, and it is as wrong to translate zoa “beasts” in Rv 4, as
it is to translate chay “beast” in Ge 3. Both mean living creature. Satan is thus spoken of as being “more wise than any
other living creature which Jehovah Elohim had made”. Even if the word “beast” be retained, it does not say that
either a serpent or Satan was a “beast”, but only that he was “more wise” than any other living being. We cannot
conceive Eve as holding converse with a snake, but we can understand her being fascinated (*2) by one, apparently “an
angel of light” (i.e. a glorious angel), possessing superior and supernatural knowledge.

When Satan is spoken of as a “serpent”, it is the figure Hypocatastasis (see Ap. 6) or Implication; it no more means
snake than it does when Dan is so called in Ge 49:17; or an animal when Nero is called a “lion” (2 Ti 4:17), or when Herod
is called a “fox” (Lk 13:32); or when Judah is called “a lion’s whelp”. It is the same figure when “doctrine” is called
“leaven” (Mt 16:6). It shows that something much more real and truer to truth is impressively; and is intended to be a
figure of something much more real than the letter of the word.

Other Figures of speech are used in vv. 14, 15, but only for the same purpose of emphasizing the truth and the
reality of what is said. When it is said in v. 15, “thou shalt bruise His heel”, it cannot mean His literal heal of flesh and
blood, but suffering, more temporary in character. When it is said (v. 15), “He shall crush thy head”, it means something
more than a skull of bone, and brain, and hair. It means that all Satan’s plans and plots, policy and purposes, will one day
be finally crushed and ended, never more to mar or to hinder the purposes of God. This will be effected when Satan
shall be bruised under our feet (Ro 16:20). This again, will not be our literal feet, but something much more real.

The bruising of Christ’s heel is the most eloquent and impressive way of foretelling the most solemn events; and to
point out that the effort made by Satan to evade his doom, then threatened, would become the very means of insuring
its accomplishment; for it was through the death of Christ that he who had the power of death would be destroyed;
and all Satan’s power and policy brought to an end, and all his works destroyed (Heb 2:14. 1 Jn 3:8. Rv 20:1-3,10). What
literal words could portray these literal facts so wonderfully as these expressive Figures of speech?

It is the same with the other Figures used in v. 14, “On thy belly shalt thou go”. This Figure means infinitely more than
the literal belly of flesh and blood; just as the words “heel” and “head” do in v. 15. It paints for the eyes of our mind the
picture of Satan’s ultimate humiliation; for prostration was ever the most eloquent sign of subjection. When it is said
“our belly cleaveth unto the ground” (Ps 44:25), it denotes such a prolonged prostration and such a depth of submission
as could never be conveyed or expressed in literal words.

So with the other prophecy, “Dust shalt thou eat”. This is not true to the letter, or to fact, but it is all the more true
to truth. It tells of constant, continuous disappointment, failure, and mortification; as when deceitful ways are spoken
of as feeding on deceitful food, which is “sweet to a man, but afterward his mouth shall be filled with gravel” (Pr 20:17).
This does not mean literal “gravel”, but something far more disagreeable. It means disappointment so great that it would
gladly be exchanged for the literal “gravel”. So when Christians are rebuked for “biting and devouring one another” (Gal
3:14,15), something more heart-breaking is meant than the literal words used in the Figure.

When “His enemies shall lick the dust” (Ps 72:9) they will not do it on their knees with their literal tongues; but they
will be so prostrated and so utterly defeated, that no words could literally depict their overthrow and subjugation. If a
serpent was afterward called a nachash, it was because it was more shining than any other creature; and if it became
known as “wise”, it was not because of its own innate positive knowledge, but of its wisdom in hiding away from all
observation; and because of its association with one of the names of Satan (that old serpent) who “beguiled Eve” (2 Co
11:3,14).

It is wonderful how a snake could ever be supposed to speak without the organs of speech, or that Satan should be
supposed able to accomplish so great a miracle (*3). It only shows the power of tradition, which has, from the infancy
of each one of us, put before our eyes and written on our minds the picture of a “snake” and an “apple”: the former
being based on a wrong interpretation, and the latter being a pure invention, about which there is not one word said
in Holy Scripture.

Never was Satan’s wisdom so craftily used as when he secured universal acceptance of this traditional belief: for it
has succeeded in fixing the attention of mankind on the letter and the means, and thus blinding the eyes to the solemn
fact that the Fall of man had to do solely with the Word of God, and is centered in the sin of believing Satan’s lie
instead of Jehovah’s truth.

The temptation of “the first man Adam” began with the question “Hath God said?” The temptation of “the second man,
the Lord from heaven” began with the similar question “If thou be the Son of God”, when the voice of the Father had
scarcely died away, which said “This IS My beloved Son”. All turned on the truth of what Jehovah had said. The Word of
God being questioned, led Eve, in her reply, (1) to omit the word “freely” (3:2, cp. 2:16); then (2) to add the words
“neither shalt thou touch it” (3:3, cp. 2:17); and finally (3) to alter a certainty into a contingency by changing “thou
SHALT SURELY die” (2:17) into “LEST ye die” (3:3).

It is not without significance that the first Ministerial words of “the second Man” were “It is written”, three times
repeated; and that His last Ministerial words contained a similar threefold reference to the written Word of God (Jn
17:8,14,17). The former temptation succeeded because the Word of God was three times misrepresented; the latter
temptation was successfully defeated because the same Word was faithfully repeated.

The history of Ge 3 is intended to teach us the fact that Satan’s sphere of activities is in the religious sphere, and
not the spheres of crime and immorality; that his battlefield is not the sins arising from human depravity, but the
unbelief of the human heart. We are not to look for Satan’s activities to-day in the newspaper press, or the police
courts; but in the pulpit, and in professors’ chairs. Whenever the Word of God is called in question, there we see the
trail of “that old serpent, which is the Devil, and Satan”. This is why anything against the true interests of the Word of
God (as being such) finds a ready admission into the newspapers of the world, and is treated as “general literature”. This
is why anything in favor of its inspiration and Divine origin and its spiritual truth is rigidly excluded as being
“controversial”.

This is why Satan is quite content that the letter of Scripture should be accepted in Ge 3, as he himself accepted the
letter of Ps 91:11. He himself could say “It is written” (Mt 4:6) so long as the letter of what is “written” could be put
instead of the truth that is conveyed by it; and so long as it is misquoted or misapplied. This is his object in
perpetuating the traditions of the “snake” and the “apple”, because it ministers to the acceptance of his lie, the hiding
of God’s truth, the support of tradition, the jeers of the infidel, the opposition of the critics, and the stumbling of the
weak in faith.

1. Eze 28:11-19, who is quite a different being from “the Prince of Tyre”, in vv. 1-10, who is purely human.

2. It is remarkable that the verb nachash always means to enchant, fascinate, bewitch; or of one having and
using occult knowledge. See Ge 30:27; 44:5,15. Lev 19:26. Dt 18:10. 1 Ki 20:33. 2 Ki 17:17; 21:6. 2 Ch 33:6.
So also is the noun used in Nu 23:23; 24:1.

3. Greater than that wrought by God Himself, who opened the mouth of Balaam’s ass.

Appendix 20

THE POSTERITY OF CAIN

It is important to note that the posterity of Cain comes in the First Toledoth, vis., that of “the generations of the
heavens and the earth”; and not in “the book of the generations of Adam.”

The posterity of Seth commences with “the generations of Adam”: showing that the two accounts are distinct, and
deal with two different subjects. See the Structures on pp. 3 and 5 (Ge 2:4-4:26; 5:1-6:8).

The generations of the heavens and the earth (2:4-4:26).

J1 | 2:4-25. Before the Fall.

J2 | 3:1-34. The Fall.

J3 | 4:1-26. After the Fall.

The expansion of J3. “After the Fall” (4), p. 8.

L | 1-16. Adam’s sons: Cain and Abel.

M | 17-24. Cain’s son: Enoch.

L | 25. Adam’s son: Seth.

M | 26. Seth’s son: Enos.

There were 130 years before Seth was born and substituted for Abel in the line of the promised seed.

In those 130 years after Cain, Adam must have begotten “sons and daughters”, as in the 800 years after Seth.

If Abel dies in A.M. 125, and Abel and Cain had children before that year, even supposing they had no descendants
till they reach the age of sixty-five, Adam could have had 130 children. And if each of these could have a child at
sixty-five years of age, one in each successive year, there would have been 1,219 in A.M. 130. If we suppose Adam’s
earlier sons and daughters to have had children at the age of twenty-one instead of at sixty-five, there would have
been over half a million in the 130 years, without reckoning the old or young, and this at a very moderate rate of
increase.

It is generally assumed that Adam and Eve had no children beyond those named. But, as in the line of Seth, it is clear
from Ge 5:4 that they had, we may well conclude that the same was the case in the line of Cain. it is a gratuitous
assumption that Abel had no posterity.

It is manifest that the history assumes a considerable population; and the fact that there is no attempt to explain it
proves its genuineness, and shows that we are left to explain it for ourselves in the only natural way by which it can be
explained.

Appendix 21
ENOS. (Ge 4:26.) “CALLING ON THE NAME OF THE LORD.”

“Then began men to call upon the name of Jehovah.” If this refers to Divine worship it is not true: for Abel and Cain both began, and their descendants doubtless followed their example.

What was really begun was the profanation of the Name of Jehovah. They began to call something by the Name of Jehovah. The A. V. suggests “themselves”, in the margin. But the majority of the ancient Jewish commentators supply the Ellipsis by the words “their gods”; suggesting that they called the stars and idols their gods, and worshipped them.

The Targum of Onkelos explains it: “then in his days the sons of men desisted from praying in the Name of the Lord.”

The Targum of Jonathan says: “That was the generation in whose days they began to err, and to make themselves idols, and surnamed their idols by the Name of the Word of the Lord.”

Kimchi, Rashi, and other ancient Jewish commentators agree with this. Rashi says: “Then was there profanation in calling on the Name of the Lord.”

Jerome says that this was the opinion of many Jews in his days. Maimonides, in his Commentary on the Mishna (a constituent part of the Talmud), A.D. 1168, in a long treatise on idolatry, gives the most probably account of the origin of idolatry in the days of Enos. The name Enos agrees with this, for his name means frail, weak, sickly, incurable. The sons of men, as “Enosh”, are so called for a similar reason (Job 7:17; 15:14. Ps 9:20; 103:15. Da 2:43). See Ap. 14.

If Jonathan, the grandson of Moses, became the first idolatrous priest in Israel (see notes on Judg 18:30), what wonder that Enos, the grandson of Adam, introduced idolatry among mankind.

Moreover, what “ungodliness” did Enoch, “the seventh from Adam” have to prophesy about in Jude 14,15, if purity of worship was begun in the days of Enos, instead of profanation in calling on the Name of the Lord? Surely this is sufficient evidence that this profanation of the Name of the Lord was the reason why Enoch was raised up to prophesy against it.

Appendix 22
THE ANTEDILUVIAN PATRIARCHS, AND THE FLOOD-DATE
(Ge 5.)

Appendix 23 “THE SONS OF GOD” IN Ge 6:2,4
It is only by the Divine specific act of creation that any created being can be called “a son of God”. For that which is “born of the flesh is flesh”. God is spirit, and that which is “born of the Spirit is spirit” (Jn 3:6). Hence Adam is called a “son of God” in Lk 3:38. Those “in Christ” having “the new nature” which is by the direct creation of God (2 Co 5:17. Eph 2:10) can be, and are called “sons of God” (Jn 1:13. Ro 8:14,15. 1 Jn 3:1). (*1)
This is why angels are called “sons of God” in every other place where the expression is used in the Old Testament. Job 1:6; 2:1; 38:7. Ps 29:1; 89:6. Da 3:25 (no art.). (*2) We have no authority or right to take the expression in Ge 6:2,4 in any other sense. Moreover, in Ge 6:2 the Sept. renders it “angels”. Angels are called “spirits” (Ps 104:4. Heb 1:7,14), for spirits are created by God.
That there was a fall of the angels is certain from Jude 6.
· The nature of their fall is clearly stated in the same verse. They left their own oiketerion. This word occurs only in 2 Co 5:2 and Jude 6, where it is used of the spiritual (or resurrection) body.
· The nature of their sin is stated to be “in like manner” to that of the subsequent sins of Sodom and Gomorrha, Jude 7.
· The time of their fall is given as having taken place “in the days of Noah” (1 Pe 3:20. 2 Pe 2:7), though there may have been a prior fall which caused the end of “the world that then was” (Ge 1:1,2. 2 Pe 3:6).
· For this sin they are “reserved unto judgment”, 2 Pe 2:4, and are “in prison”, 1 Pe 3:19.
· Their progeny, called Nephilim (translated “giants”), were monsters of iniquity; and, being superhuman in size and character, had to be destroyed (see Ap. 25). This was the one and only object of the Flood.
· Only Noah and his family had preserved their pedigree pure from Adam (Ge 6:9, see note). All the rest had become “corrupt” (shachath) destroyed [as Adamites]. the only remedy was to destroy it (de facto), as it had become destroyed (de jure). (It is the same word in v. 17 as in vv. 11, 12.) See further under Ap. 25 on the Nephilim.
This irruption of fallen angels was Satan’s first attempt to prevent the coming of the Seed of the woman foretold in gen. 3:15. If this could be accomplished, God’s Word would have failed, and his own doom would be averted.
As soon as it was made known that the Seed of the woman was to come through ABRAHAM, there must have been another irruption, as recorded in Ge 6:4, “and also after that” (i.e. after the days of Noah, more than 500 years after the first irruption). The aim of the enemy was to occupy Canaan in advance of Abraham, and so to contest its occupation by his seed. For, when Abraham entered Canaan, we read (Ge 12:6) “the Canaanite was then (i.e. already) in the land.”
In the same chapter (Ge 12:10-20) we see Satan’s next attempt to interfere with Abraham’s seed, and frustrate the purpose of God that it should be in “Isaac”. This attempt was repeated in 20:1-18.
This great conflict may be seen throughout the Bible, and it forms a great and important subject of Biblical study. In each case the human instrument had his own personal interest to serve, while Satan had his own great object in view. Hence God had, in each case, to interfere and avert the evil and the danger, of which his servants and people were wholly ignorant. The following assaults of the great Enemy stand out prominently:—
· The destruction of the chosen family by famine, Ge 50:20.
· The destruction of the male line in Israel, Ex 1:10,15, &c. Cp. Ex 2:5. Heb 11:23.
· The destruction of the whole nation in Pharaoh’s pursuit, Ex 14.
· After David’s line was singled out (2 Sa 7), that was the next selected for assault. Satan’s first assault was in the union of Jehoram and Athaliah by Jehoshaphat, notwithstanding 2 Ch 17:1. Jehoram killed off all his brothers (2 Ch 21:4).
· The Arabians slew all his children, except Ahaziah (2 Ch 21:17; 22:1).
· ? When Ahaziah died, Athaliah killed “all the seed royal” (2 Ch 22:10). the babe Joash alone was rescued; and, for six years, the faithfulness of Jehovah’s word was at stake (2 Ch 23:3).
· Hezekiah was childless, when a double assault was made by the King of Assyria and the King of Terrors (Isa 36:1; 38:1). God’s faithfulness was appealed to and relied on (Ps 136).
· In Captivity, Haman was used to attempt the destruction of the whole nation (Est 3:6,12,13. Cp. 6:1).
· Joseph’s fear was worked on (Mt 1:18-20). Notwithstanding the fact that he was “a just man”, and kept the Law, he did not wish to have Mary stoned to death (Dt 24:1); hence Joseph determined to divorce her. But God intervened: “Fear not”.
· Herod sought the young Child’s life (Mt 2).
· At the Temptation, “Cast Thyself down” was Satan’s temptation.
· At Nazareth, again (Lk 4), there was another attempt to cast Him down and destroy Him.
· The two storms on the Lake were other attempts.
· At length the cross was reached, and the sepulcher closed; the watch set; and the stone sealed. But “God raised Him from the dead.” And now, like another Joash, He is seated and expecting (Heb 10:12,13), hidden in the house of God on high; and the members of “the one body” are hidden there “in Him” (Col 3:1-3), like another Jehoshaba; and going forth to witness of His coming, like another Jehoiada (2 Ch 23:3).
The irruption of “the fallen angels” (“sons of God”) was the first attempt; and was directed against the whole human race.
· When Abraham was called, then he and his seed were attacked.
· When David was enthroned, then the royal line were attacked.
· And when “the Seed of the woman” Himself came, then the storm burst upon Him.
1. The word “offspring” in Ac 17:28 is quite different. It is genos, which means merely kin or kind, our genus as being originated by God.
*1 In Hos 1:10, it is not beni-ha-Elohim, as here, but beni-el-chai.

Appendix 24
THE 120 YEARS OF Ge 6:3

These are generally taken as meaning 120 years before the Flood. But this mistake has been made by not observing that the word for “men” in Ge 6:1,2 is in the singular number with the definite article, as in v. 3 “man”, and means THE MAN ADAM. The word “also” clearly refers to him. It has no meaning if “men” be read, in the plural. It means, and can mean, only that Adam himself, “also”, as well as the rest of mankind,. 1 If “men” be the meaning, then it may be well asked, who are the others indicated by the word “also”?

In Ge 2:17, the Lord God had declared that Adam should die. Here, in Ge 6, it was made more clear that though he had lived 810 years he should surely die; and that his breath, or spirit of life from God should not for ever remain in him. See the notes on Gen 6.

This fixes the chronology of v. 3, and shows that long before that time, A.M. 810, and even before Enoch, this irruption of fallen angels had taken place. This was the cause of all the “ungodliness” against which the prophecy of Enoch was directed in Jude 14, and which ultimately brought on the fulfillment of his prophecy in the Judgment of the Flood. See Ap. 23 and 25.

1. (bshaggam) because that also is so pointed in the Codex Hilleli. This makes it the Inf. Kal. of shagag, to transgress, go astray, and means, “because that in their going astray, he (Adam) also is flesh”.

Appendix 25 THE NEPHILIM, OR “GIANTS” OF Ge 6, &c
The progeny of the fallen angels with the daughters of Adam (see notes on Gen 6, and Ap. 23) are called in Ge 6, Ne-phil-im, which means fallen ones (from naphal, to fall). What these beings were can be gathered only from Scripture. They were evidently great in size, as well as great in wickedness. They were superhuman, abnormal beings; and their destruction was necessary for the preservation of the human race, and for the faithfulness of Jehovah’s Word (Ge 3:15).
This was why the Flood was brought “upon the world of the ungodly” (2 Pe 2:5) as prophesied by Enoch (Jude 14).
But we read of the Nephilim again in Nu 13:33: “there we saw the Nephilim, the sons of Anak, which come of the Nephilim”. How, it may be asked, could this be, if they were all destroyed in the Flood? The answer is contained in Ge 6:4, where we read: “There were Nephilim in the earth in those days (i.e. in the days of Noah); and also AFTER THAT, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bare children to them, the same became [the] mighty men (Heb. gibbor, the heroes) which were of old, men of renown” (lit. men of the name, i.e. who got a name and were renowned for their ungodliness).
So that “after that”, i.e. after the Flood, there was a second irruption of these fallen angels, evidently smaller in number and more limited in area, for they were for the most part confined to Canaan, and were in fact known as “the nations of Canaan”. It was for the destruction of these, that the sword of Israel was necessary, as the Flood had been before.
As to the date of this second irruption, it was evidently soon after it became known that the seed was to come through Abraham; for, when he came out from Haran (Ge 12:6) and entered Canaan, the significant fact is stated: “The Canaanite was then (i.e. already) in the land.” And in Ge 14:5 they were already known as “Raphain” and Emim”, and had established themselves at Asteroth Karnaim and Shaven Kiriathaim.
In ch. 15:18-21 they are enumerated and named among Canaanite Peoples: “Kenites, and the Kenizzites, and the Kadmonites, and the Hittites, and the Perizzites, and the Rephaims, and the Amorites, and the Girgashites, and the Jebusites” (Ge 15:19-21; cp. Ex 3:8,17; 23:23. Dt 7; 20:17. Jos 12:8).
These were to be cut off, and driven out, and utterly destroyed (Dt 20:17. Jos 3:10). But Israel failed in this (Jos 13:13; 15:63; 16:10; 17:18. Jdg 1:19,20,28,29,30-36; 2:1-5; 3:1-7); and we known not how many got away to other countries to escape the general destruction. If this were recognized it would go far to solve many problems connected with Anthropology.
As to their other names, they were called Anakim, from on Anak which came of the Nephilim (Nu 13:23), and Rephaim, from Rapha, another notable one among them. From Dt 2:10, they were known by some as Emim, and Horim, and Zamzummim (v. 20, 21) and Avim, &c.
As Rephaim they were well known, and are often mentioned: but, unfortunately, instead of this, their proper name, being preserved, it is variously translated as “dead”, “deceased”, or “giants”. These Rephaim are to have no resurrection. This fact is stated in Isa 26:14 (where the proper name is rendered “deceased,” and v. 19, where it is rendered “the dead”). It is rendered “dead” seven times (Job 26:5. Ps 88:10. Pr 2:18; 9:18; 21:16. Isa 14:8; 26:19). It is rendered “deceased” in Isa 26:14.
It is retained as a proper name “Rephaim” ten times (two being in the margin). Ge 14:5; 15:20. Jos 12:15 (marg.). 2 Sa 5:18,22; 23:13.& b31 nbsp; 1 Ch 11:15; 14:9; 20:4 (marg.). Isa 17:5. In all other places it is rendered “giants”, Ge 6:4; Nu 23:33, where it is Nephilim; and Job 16:14, where it is gibbor (Ap. 14. iv). By reading all these passages the Bible student may know all that can be known about these beings.
It is certain that the second irruption took place before Ge 14, for there the Rephaim were mixed up with the five nations or peoples, which included Sodom and Gomorrha, and were defeated by the four kings under Chedorlaomer. Their principal locality was evidently “Ashtaroth Karnaim”; while the Emim were in the plain of Kiriathaim (Ge 14:5).
Anak was a noted descendant of the Nephilim; and Rapha was another, giving their names respectively to different clans. Anak’s father was Arba, the original builder of Hebron (Ge 35:27. Jos 15:13; 21:11); and this Palestine branch of the Anakim was not called Arbahim after him, but Anakim after Anak. They were great, mighty, and tall (Dt 2:10,11,21,22,23; 9:2), evidently inspiring the ten spies with great fear (Nu 13:33). Og king of Bashan is described in Dt 3:11.
Their strength is seen in “the giant cities of Bashan” to-day; and we know not how far they may have been utilized by Egypt in the construction of buildings, which is still an unsolved problem. Arba was rebuilt by the Khabiri or confederates seven years before Zoan was built by the Egyptian Pharoahs of the nineteenth dynasty. See note on Num 13:22.
If these Nephilim, and their branch of Rephaim, were associated with Egypt, we have an explanation of the problem which has for ages perplexed all engineers, as to how those huge stones and monuments were brought together. Why not in Egypt as well as in “the giant cities of Bashan” which exist, as such, to this day?
Moreover, we have in these mighty men, the “men of renown,” the explanation of the origin of the Greek mythology. That mythology was no mere invention of the human brain, but it grew out of the traditions, and memories, and legends of the doings of that mighty race of beings; and was gradually evolved out of the “heroes” of Ge 6:4. The fact that they were supernatural in their origin formed an easy step to their being regarded as the demi-gods of the Greeks.
Thus the Babylonian “Creation Tablets”, the Egyptian “Book of the dead”, the Greek mythology, and heathen Cosmogonies, which by some are set on an equality with Scripture, or by others adduced in support of it, are all the corruption and perversion of primitive truths, distorted in proportion as their origin was forgotten, and their memories faded away.

Appendix 26
NOAH “PERFECT”. (Ge 6:9)

The Heb. word tamim means without blemish, and is the technical word for bodily and physical perfection, and not moral. Hence it is used of animals of sacrificial purity. It is rendered without blemish in Ex 12:5; 29:1. Lev 1:3,10; 3:1,6; 4:3,23,28,32; 5:15,18; 6:6; 9:2,3; 14:10; 22:19; 23:12,18. Nu 6:14; 28:19,31; 29:2,8,13,20,23,29,32,36. Eze 43:22,23,25; 45:18,23; 46:4,6,13.

Without Spot. Nu 19:2; 28:3,9,11; 29:17,26.

Undefiled. Ps 119:1.

This shows that Ge 6:9 does not speak of Noah’s moral perfection, but tells us that he and his family alone had preserved their pedigree and kept it pure, in spite of the prevailing corruption brought about by the fallen angels. See Ap. 23 and 25.

Appendix 27 WINE
There are eight Hebrew words translated wine. A careful observation of their use will tell us all that there is to be known on the subject
I. Yayin, from the root yayan, to ferment, used of every sort of wine. The word occurs 142 time, and includes fermented wine of all kinds.
The first occurrence is: Ge 9:21. “Noah planted a vineyard and drank yayin and was drunken.”
Ge 14:18. “Melchizedek … brought forth bread and wine.” 1 Sa 25:36,37. Nabal drank yayin and “was very drunken.” Isa 28:1. “The drunkards of Ephraim … are overcome (i.e. knocked down) with yayin.” Jer 23:9. “I am like a drunken man, and like a man whom yayin hath overcome”.
It is perfectly certain, therefore, from these passages, that yayin was fermented, and was intoxicating. Yayin was also used for sacred purposes and for blessing.
Ge 49:12. “His (Judah’s) eyes shall be red with yayin, and his teeth white with milk.” Am 9:13. “I will bring again the captivity of my people, and they shall plant vineyards and drink the yayin thereof.” (v. 14 is No. V.)
Ecc 9:7. “Drink thy yayin with a merry heart, for God now accepteth thy works.”
The Nazarite, at the expiration of his vow, drank yayin. See Nu 6:13-20. It was used at the Feasts of Jehovah (Dt 14:24-26), and was poured out as a drink-offering to Jehovah (Ex 29:40. Lev 23:13. Nu 15:5).
II. Tirosh, from yarash, to possess = must, or new wine, so called because it gets possession of the brain. It occurs thirty-four times in the Old Testament.
Hos 4:11. “Whoredom and yayin and tirosh take away the heart” (i.e. they blunt the feelings, derange the intellect).
Some say that tirosh means grapes, and is used as solid food, because in Ge 37:28 we read of “tirosh and corn”. We might as well say that when we speak of “bread and water”, that water is also a solid, because bread is a solid. On the contrary, “tirosh and corn” mean liquids and solids, by the figure of Synecdoche (of Genus), Ap. 6.
Pr 3:10. “Thy presses shall burst out with tirosh.”
Isa 62:8. “The sons of the stranger shall not drink thy tirosh.”
Joel 2:24. “The fats (vats) shall overflow with tirosh and oil.”
Mic 6:15. “Thou shalt tread … tirosh, but shalt not drink yayin.”
III. Chemer, from chamar, to ripen. Hence used of strong red wine. It occurs eight times.
Dt 32:14. “The pure chemer of the grape.”
Isa 27:2,3. “A vineyard of chemer. I the Lord do keep it”.
Ezr 6:9. Cyrus and Artaxerxes commanded that chemer should be given to the people of Israel for the service of the God of Heaven.
The Rabbins called it neat wine, because, unmixed with water, it disturbs the head and brain.
IV. Shekar = strong drink (from shakar, to get drunk), a very intoxicating drink made from barley, honey, or dates.
Nu 28:7. “In the holy place shalt thou cause the shekar (strong wine) to be poured unto the Lord for a drink offering.”
Dt 14:25,26. “Thou … shalt go unto the place which the Lord thy God shall choose: and thou shalt bestow that money for whatsoever thy soul lusteth after, for oxen, or for sheep, of for yayin (wine), or for shekar (strong drink), or for whatsoever thy soul desireth: and thou shalt eat there before the Lord thy God, and thou shalt rejoice, thou, and thine household”.
V. ‘Asis (from ‘asas, to tread) new or sweet wine of the vintage year.
Isa 49:26. “They shall be drunken with their own blood, as with ‘asis (sweet wine)”.
The drinking of this was held out by God as a blessing conferred by Him. Joel 3:17,18. Am 9:13.
VI. Sob’e, any kind of strong intoxicating drink: from sab’a, to drink to excess, become drunk: occurs twice.
Isa 1:22. “Thy silver is become dross, thy sob’e (wine) mixed with water”.
Hos 4:18. “Their sob’e (drinking bout or carouse) is over” (A. V. their drink is sour (marg. gone). (R.V. marg. their carouse is over).
VII. Mimsak, mixed or spiced wine.
Pr 23:30. “They that tarry long at the yayin; they that go to seek mimsak (mixed wine).”
Isa 65:11. “That prepare a table for Fortune, and that fill up mingled wine (mimsak) unto Destiny” (R.V.).
VIII. Shemarim, from shamar, to keep, preserve, lay up; hence, old wine, purified from the lees and racked off. Ps 75:8. “but the shemarim (dregs), all the wicked of the earth shall wring them out, and drink them.”
Isa 25:6. “Wines on the lees.”
Zep 1:12. “I will … punish the men that are settled on their shemarim (lees)”. Jer 48:11. “Moab … hath settled on his lees.”
N.B. The word translated “flagons of wine” is ‘ashishah, from ‘ashash, to press; hence a hardened syrup made of grapes, a sweet cake of dried grapes or pressed raisins. It occurs in 2 Sa 6:19. 1 Ch 16:3. SS 2:5. Hos 3:1.
With these data it will be seen that the modern expression, “unfermented wine”, is a contradiction of terms. If it is wine, it must have fermented. If it has not been fermented, it is not wine, but a syrup.
Leaven is sour dough, and not wine. It is that which causes the fermentation. There can be no leaven after the process of fermentation has ceased.

Appendix 28
NIMROD. Ge 10:8,9; 1 Ch 1:10

Josephus (Ant. Jud. i. c. 4. 2) says:

“Nimrod persuaded mankind not to ascribe their happiness to God, but to think that his own excellency was the source of it. And he soon changed things into a tyranny, thinking there was no other way to wean men from the fear of God, than by making them rely upon his own power.”

The Targum of Jonathan says:

“From the foundation of the world none was ever found like Nimrod, powerful in hunting, and in rebellions against the Lord.”

The Jerusalem Targum says:

“He was powerful in hunting and in wickedness before the Lord, for he was a hunter of the sons of men, and he said to them, ‘Depart from the judgment of the Lord, and adhere to the judgment of Nimrod!’ Therefore is it said: ‘As Nimrod [is] the strong one, strong in hunting, and in wickedness before the Lord.'”

The Chaldee paraphrase of 1 Ch 1:10 says:

“Cush begat Nimrod, who began to prevail in wickedness, for he shed innocent blood, and rebelled against Jehovah.”

Nimrod was the founder of Babylon, which partook of his character as being the great antagonist of God’s Truth and God’s People. We cannot fail to see, in Nimrod, Satan’s first attempt to raise up a human universal ruler of men. There have been many subsequent attempts, such as Nebuchadnezzar, Alexander, Napoleon, and others. He will finally succeed in the person of the Antichrist.

Appendix 29
THE GENERATIONS OF TERAH, ISAAC, AND JACOB

Appendix 30 THE MASSORAH
Al the oldest and best manuscripts of the Hebrew Bible contain on every page, beside the Text (which is arranged in two or more columns), a varying number of lines of smaller writing, distributed between the upper and lower margins. This smaller writing is called the Massorah Magna or Great Massorah, while that in the side margins between the columns is called the Massorah Parva or Small Massorah.
The illustration given on p. 32 is a reduced facsimile of a Hebrew MS. (16 1/4 inches x 12 3/8), written in a German hand, about the year A.D. 1120. The small writing in the margins in this particular MS. is seen to occupy seven lines in the lower margin, and four lines in the upper; while in the outer margins and between the three columns is the Massorah Parva.
The word Massorah is from the root masar, to deliver something into the hand of another, so as to commit it to his trust. Hence the name is given to the small writing referred to, because it contains information necessary to those who trust the Sacred Text was committed, so that they might transcribe it, and hand it down correctly.
The Text itself had been fixed before the Massorites were put in charge of it. This had been the work of the Sopherim (from saphar, to count, or number). Their work, under Ezra and Nehemiah, was to set the Text in order after the return from Babylon; and we read of it in Ne 8:8 1* (cp. Ezr 7:6,11). The men of “the Great Synagogue” completed the work. This work lasted about 110 years, from Nehemiah to Simon the first, 410 – 300 B.C.
The Sopherim were the authorized revisers of the Sacred Text; and, their work being completed, the Massorites were the authorized custodians of it. Their work was to preserve it. The Massorah is called “A Fence to the Scriptures,” because it locked all words and letters in their places. It does not contain notes or comments as such, but facts and phenomena. It records the number of times the several letters occur in the various books of the Bible; the number of words, and the middle word; the number of verses, and the middle verse; the number of expressions and combinations of words, &c. All this, not from a perverted ingenuity, but for the set purpose of safeguarding the Sacred Text, and preventing the loss of misplacement of a single letter or word.
This Massorah is not contained in the margins of any one MS. No MS. contains the whole, or even the same part. It is spread over many MSS., and Dr. C. D. Ginsburg has been the first and only scholar who has set himself to collect and collate the whole, copying it from every available MS. in the libraries of many countries. He has published it in three large folio volumes, and only a small number of copies has been printed. These are obtainable only by the original subscribers.
When the Hebrew Text was printed, only the large type in the columns was regarded, and the small type of the Massorah was left, unheeded, in the MSS. from which the Text was taken. When translators came to the printed Hebrew Text, they were necessarily destitute of the information contained in the Massorah; so that the Revisers as well as the Translators of the Authorized Version carried out their work without any idea of the treasures contained in the Massorah; and therefore, without giving a hint of it to their readers.
This is the first time that an edition of the A.V. has been given containing any of these treasures of the Massorah, that affect so seriously the understanding of the Text. A vast number of the Massoretic notes concern only the orthography, and matters that pertain to the Concordance. But many of those which affect the sense, or throw any additional light on the Sacred Text, are noted in the margin of The Companion Bible.
Some of the important lists of words which are contained in the Massorah are also given, viz. those that have the “extraordinary points” (Ap. 31); the “eighteen emendations” of the Sopherim (see Ap. 33); the 134 passages where they substituted Adonai for Jehovah (see Ap. 32); and the Various Readings called Severin (see Ap. 34). These are given in separate Appendixes; but other words of any importance are preserved in our marginal notes.
Readers of The Companion Bible are put in possession of information denied to former generations of translators, commentators, critics, and general Bible students. For further information on the Massorah see Dr. Ginsburg’s Introduction the the Hebrew Bible, of which only a limited edition was printed; also a small pamphlet on The Massorah published by the King’s Printers.
1* The Talmud explains that “the book” meant the original text; “distinctly” means explaining it by giving the Chaldee paraphrase; “gave the sense” means the division of words, &c. according to the sense; and “caused them to understand the reading” means to give the traditional pronunciation of the words (which were then without vowel points).

Appendix 31
THE FIFTEEN EXTRAORDINARY POINTS OF THE SOPHERIM

There are fifteen words which present an abnormal appearance in the printed Hebrew Bibles. These are of the utmost importance, as they represent the most ancient result of Textual Criticism on the part of the Sopherim.

Ten of these words are in the Pentateuch, and five occur in the Prophets and Hagiographa.

Some are without effect as to translation or interpretation; others are more important, and will be noted in the passages were they occur. The following is the list. (For further information see Dr. Ginsburg’s Introduction to the Hebrew Bible, pp. 318-34):

· Ge 16:5.

· Ge 18:9.

· Ge 19:33,35.

· Ge 33:4.

· Ge 37:12.

· Nu 3:39.

· Nu 9:10.

· Nu 21:30.

· Nu 29:15.

· Dt 29:29.

· 2 Sa 19:29.

· Isa 44:9.

· Eze 41:20.

· Eze 46:22.

· Ps 27:13.

Appendix 32 THE 134 PASSAGES WHERE THE SOPHERIM ALTERED “JEHOVAH” TO “ADONAI”
Out of extreme (but mistaken) reverence for the Ineffable Name “Jehovah”, the ancient custodians of the Sacred Text substituted in many places “Adonai” (see Ap. 4. viii. 2). These, in the A.V. and R.V., are all printed “Lord”. In all these places we have printed it “LORD*”, marking the word with an asterisk in addition to the note in the margin, to inform the reader of the fact.
The official list given in the Massorah (§§ 107-15, Ginsburg’s edition) contains the 134.
· Ge 18:3,27,30,32; 19:18; 20:4.
· Ex 4:10,13; 5:22; 15:17; 34:9,9.
· Nu 14:17.
· Jos 7:8.
· Jdg 6:15; 13:8.
· 1 Ki 3:10,15; 22:6.
· 2 Ki 7:6; 19:23.
· Isa 3:17,18; 4:4; 6:1,8,11; 7:14,10; 8:7; 9:8,17; 10:12; 11:11; 21:6,8,16; 28:2; 29:13; 30:20; 37:24; 38:14,16; 49:14.
· Eze 18:25,29; 21:13; 33:17,29.
· Am 5:16; 7:7,8; 9:1.
· Zec 9:4.
· Mic 1:2.
· Mal 1:12,14.
· Ps 2:4; 16:2; 22:19,30; 30:8; 35:3,17,22; 37:12; 38:9,15,22; 39:7; 40:17; 44:23; 51:15; 54:4; 55:9; 57:9; 59:11; 62:12; 66:18; 68:11,17,19,22,26,32; 73:20; 77:2,7; 78:65; 79:12; 86:3,4,5,8,9,12,15; 89:49,50; 90:1,17; 110:5; 130:2,3,6.
· Da 1:2; 9:3,4,7,9,15,16,17,19,19,19.
· Lam 1:14,15,15; 2:1,2,5,7,18,19,20; 3:31,36,37,58.
· Ezr 10:3.
· Ne 1:11; 4:14.
· Job 28:28.
(See Ginsburg’s ed. of The Massorah, §§ 107-115.)
To these may be added the following, where “Elohim” was treated in the same way:—
· 2 Sa 5:19-25. 2 Sa 6:9-17.
Where the A.V. has “LORD.”
· 1 Ch 13:12. 1 Ch 14:10,11,14,16. 1 Ch 16:1. Ps 14:1,2,5. Ps 53:1,2,4,5.
Where in A.V. and R.V. it still appears as “God”. It is printed “GOD*” in the Companion Bible.

Appendix 33 THE “EIGHTEEN EMENDATIONS” OF THE SOPHERIM
The Massorah (Ap. 30), i.e. the small writing in the margins of the standard Hebrew codices, as shown in the plate on p. 32, consists of a concordance of words and phrases, &c., safeguarding the Sacred Text. A note in the Massorah against several passages in the manuscripts of the Hebrew Bible state: “This is one of the Eighteen Emendations of the Sopherim,” or words to that effect.
Complete lists of these emendations are found in the Massorah of most of the model or standard codices of the Hebrew Bible, and these are not always identical; so that the total number exceeds eighteen: from which it would appear that these examples are simply typical. The Siphri (*1) adduces seven passages; the Yalkut (*2), ten; the Mechiltha (*3), eleven; the Tanchuma (*4), seventeen; while the St. Petersburg Codex gives two passages not included in any other list (Mal 1:12; 3:9; see below).
These emendations were made at a period long before Christ, before the Hebrew text had obtained its present settled form, and these emendations affect the Figure called Anthropopatheia. See. Ap. 6.
The following is a list of the eighteen “Emendations,” together with eight others not included in the official lists. Particulars will be found on consulting the notes on the respective passages.
· Ge 18:22.
· Nu 11:15.
· Nu 12:12.
· 1 Sa 3:13.
· 2 Sa 12:14.
· 2 Sa 16:12.
· 1 Ki 12:16.
· 1 Ki 21:10.
· 1 Ki 21:13.
· 2 Ch 10:16.
· Job 1:5.
· Job 1:11.
· Job 2:5.
· Job 2:9.
· Job 7:20.
· Job 32:3.
· Ps 10:3.
· Ps 106:20.
· Ecc 3:21.
· Jer 2:11.
· Lam 3:20.
· Eze 8:17.
· Hos 4:7.
· Hab 1:12.
· Zec 2:8 (12).
· Mal 1:13.
· Mal 3:9.
(*1) An ancient commentary on Leviticus (circa A.D. 219-47).

(*2) A catena of the whole Hebrew Scriptures, composed in the eleventh century, for ancient sources by Rabbi Simeon.

(*3) An ancient commentary on Exodus, compiled about A.D. 90 by Rabbi Ishmael ben Elisa.

(*4) A commentary on the Pentateuch, compiled from ancient sources by Rabbi Tanchuma ben Abba, about A.D. 380.

Appendix 33 THE “EIGHTEEN EMENDATIONS” OF THE SOPHERIM
The Massorah (Ap. 30), i.e. the small writing in the margins of the standard Hebrew codices, as shown in the plate on p. 32, consists of a concordance of words and phrases, &c., safeguarding the Sacred Text. A note in the Massorah against several passages in the manuscripts of the Hebrew Bible state: “This is one of the Eighteen Emendations of the Sopherim,” or words to that effect.
Complete lists of these emendations are found in the Massorah of most of the model or standard codices of the Hebrew Bible, and these are not always identical; so that the total number exceeds eighteen: from which it would appear that these examples are simply typical. The Siphri (*1) adduces seven passages; the Yalkut (*2), ten; the Mechiltha (*3), eleven; the Tanchuma (*4), seventeen; while the St. Petersburg Codex gives two passages not included in any other list (Mal 1:12; 3:9; see below).
These emendations were made at a period long before Christ, before the Hebrew text had obtained its present settled form, and these emendations affect the Figure called Anthropopatheia. See. Ap. 6.
The following is a list of the eighteen “Emendations,” together with eight others not included in the official lists. Particulars will be found on consulting the notes on the respective passages.
· Ge 18:22.
· Nu 11:15.
· Nu 12:12.
· 1 Sa 3:13.
· 2 Sa 12:14.
· 2 Sa 16:12.
· 1 Ki 12:16.
· 1 Ki 21:10.
· 1 Ki 21:13.
· 2 Ch 10:16.
· Job 1:5.
· Job 1:11.
· Job 2:5.
· Job 2:9.
· Job 7:20.
· Job 32:3.
· Ps 10:3.
· Ps 106:20.
· Ecc 3:21.
· Jer 2:11.
· Lam 3:20.
· Eze 8:17.
· Hos 4:7.
· Hab 1:12.
· Zec 2:8 (12).
· Mal 1:13.
· Mal 3:9.
(*1) An ancient commentary on Leviticus (circa A.D. 219-47).

(*2) A catena of the whole Hebrew Scriptures, composed in the eleventh century, for ancient sources by Rabbi Simeon.

(*3) An ancient commentary on Exodus, compiled about A.D. 90 by Rabbi Ishmael ben Elisa.

(*4) A commentary on the Pentateuch, compiled from ancient sources by Rabbi Tanchuma ben Abba, about A.D. 380.

Appendix 35 “SHEOL”. HEBREW, SHEOL.
The first occurrence of this word is in Ge 37:35, where it is rendered “grave”. It occurs sixty-five times in the Hebrew of the Old Testament; and only by studying each passage by itself can the student hope to gather the Biblical usage of the word. All heathen or traditional usages are not only worthless, but mischievous. The following are all the passages where the word “Sheol” occurs, with the rendering in each passage indicated thus:
1. Ge 37:35.1. Ge 42:38.1. Ge 44:29,31.2. Nu 16:30,33.3. Dt 32:22.1. 1 Sa 2:6.3. 2 Sa 22:6.1. 1 Ki 2:6,9.1. Job 7:9.3. Job 11:8.1. Job 14:13.1. Job 17:13.2. Job 17:16.1. Job 21:13.1. Job 24:19.3. Job 26:6.1. Ps 6:5.3. Ps 9:17.3. Ps 16:10.3. Ps 18:5.1. Ps 30:3.1. Ps 31:17.1. Ps 49:14,14,15.3. Ps 55:15 (marg. grave).3. Ps 86:13 (marg. grave).1. Ps 88:3.1. Ps 89:48.3. Ps 116:3.3. Ps 139:8.1. Ps 141.7.1. Pr 1:12.3. Pr 5.5.3. Pr 7:27.3. Pr 9:18.3. Pr 15:11,24.3. Pr 23:14.3. Pr 27:20.1. Pr 30:16.1. Ecc 9:10.1. SS 8:6.3. Isa 5:14.3. Isa 14:9 (marg. grave).1. Isa 14:11.3. Isa 14:15.3. Isa 28:15,18.1. Isa 38:10.1. Isa 38:18.3. Isa 57:9.1. Eze 31:15.3. Eze 31:16,17.3. Eze 32:21,27.1. Hos 13:14,14.3. Am 9:2.3. Jnh 2:2 (marg. grave).3. Hab 2:5.
1 = Grave 2 = Pit 3 = Hell
As meaning “THE grave,” it is to be distinguished from keber, A grave, or, burying-place (from kabar, to bury, first occurrence Ge 23:4): and bor, a pit, generally hewn in the rock, hence used of a cistern (Ge 37:20) or a dungeon, &c., when dry. (See note on the word “well” in Ge 21:19.)

Appendix 36
“THY SALVATION” (Ge 49:18).

“I have waited for Thy salvation, O Jehovah.”

These words are repeated three times (and in three different ways) by every pious Jew, morning and evening.

In the note on Gen 49:18 it is pointed out that by the Fig. Metonymy (of Effect), see Ap. 6, “salvation” is put for Him Who brings it. The meaning is beautifully put, thus, in the Jerusalem Targum:-

“Not to they salvation wrought by Gideon, the son of Joash, does my soul look, for it is temporal. Not to they salvation wrought by Samson, the son of Manoah, is my longing directed, for it is transient: but to the salvation, the completion of which Thou hast promised, by Thy everlasting Word, to bring to Thy people the descendants of Israel.

To Thy salvation, O Jehovah, to the salvation of Messiah the son of David, Who will one day redeem Israel and bring her back from the dispersion, to that salvation my soul looks forward; for Thy salvation is an everlasting salvation.”

Appendix 37
THE PHARAOHS OF GENESIS AND EXODUS.

It was intended to include a list of the Pharaohs mentioned in Genesis and Exodus, and an elaborate table had been drawn up. But, as the data are still incomplete, and scholars and explorers are not fully agreed, it is felt to be wiser to postpone a subject which is still a subject of controversy.

The title “Pharaoh,” being an appellative, leaves the dynasties and individuals referred to open to question and doubt.

Of only one thing we are assured; that, when all the real facts have been discovered, they will be confirmed and attested by “the scriptures of truth.”

[Note (1925). Inscriptions recently found by an American archaeological explorer at Bethshan (now Beisan) show that it was one time under Egyptian rule. One of these inscriptions confirms the view that the Bondage of Israel occurred under Rameses II, whose son, Meneptah, would be the Pharaoh of the Exodus.]

Appendix 38
“LEAVEN”

Its first occurrence in Ex 12:15 significantly marks it as something to be “put away.” There is no dispute as to the meaning of the word, which is sour or fermenting dough. The difference lies in its interpretation. This can be gathered only from its usage by the Holy Spirit.

1. It is used of its work in permeating the whole of that with which it is mixed (Mt 13:33; Lk 13:21; 1 Co 5:6; Gal 5:9; Hos 7:4).

2. It is used of the bread which is made from the meal so permeated (Ex 12:15,19,20,34,39; 13:7).

3. It is used in connection with sacrifices, as never to be offered to God with any offering made by fire (Lev 2:11; 6:17; 10:12).

4. It is used by Metaphor (see Ap. 6) for doctrine (Mt 16:12. Mk 8:15. Gal 5:9).

5. It is used of the effects of evildoers (1 Co 5:6-8; 15:33).

6. In Lev 23:17 it is used in that which symbolizes mankind, and in a proper sense of being corrupted. The sin-offering associated with the leaven in the two wave-loaves corresponds with this.

7. In Am 4:4,5 it is either the language or Figure of Irony (see Ap. 6); or, it shows that the “thanksgiving with leaven” is symbolical of the sin which is ever present even in the worshippers of God.

Thus in every instance it is associated with, and symbolical of, only that which is evil.

Appendix 39
THE DECALOGUE. Ex 20:2-17

The Ten Commandments have been divided in various ways. The table below exhibits the principal differences.

The difference between the Roman Catholic and Lutheran is this: that the Roman Catholic makes Commandment IX protect the wife, while the Lutheran makes it protect the house. The Massoretic divisions agree with the Roman Catholic. The English Reformed division agrees with the Jewish and Talmudical division in including v. 2, but differs in including v. 3 in Commandment I instead of in Commandment II. The Structure proves this to be correct.

It is interesting to note here, that Christ put His seal upon each one of the ten, in the following passages:—

I. Mt 22:37.

II. Jn 4:24.

III. Mt 5:34.

IV. Mk 2:27. Lk 13:14-16.

V. Mt 15:4-6; 19:19. Mk 7:10.

VI. Mt 5:21.

VII. Mt 5:28; 19:9,18.

VIII. Mt 15:19.

IX. Mt 12:34-37.

X. Mt 5:28.

In Mt 19:18, the Lord omitted Commandment X in order to convict His questioner, who said, “ALL these have I kept.” Upon which the Lord’s command in v. 21 convicted him of its breach, as shown by the man’s sorrow in v. 22.

Appendix 40
THE NAMES OF THE TABERNACLE.

It is important to distinguish the different words used by the Holy Spirit to describe the Tabernacle, and to express His design. They are variously translated in the A.V. They are distinguished severally in the notes; and are here brought together, so that the different shades of meaning may be compared and understood. It is called:

1. The House. (Beth).

2. The Tabernacle (Mishkan) = dwelling-place from shakan, to dwell: or, habitation, indicating it as containing the presence of Jehovah in the Light, called Shechinah, cp. Ex 25:8.

3. The Tent (‘Ohel). Erected as a special place of worship before the Tabernacle was set up. Hence to be always distinguished from the Tabernacle proper. Its full title was:

4. ‘Ohel Moh’ed = Tend of assembly, or of the congregation.

5. The Tabernacle of witness, ‘ohel ha-eduth. = The Tent as containing the tables of the Law, which were an abiding witness to their covenant with Jehovah. (See Ex 16:32-34; 25:21.)

6. Sanctuary. Heb. kodesh, or holy place.

In this connection it is well to notice that congregation is ‘edah, which is general; while assembly is kahal, which is more local and partial.

Appendix 41 THE CHERUBIM
It is hopeless to arrive at the meaning of the Cherubim from etymology. Only by the usage of the whole of Scripture can we form an approximately true idea. Their description is twice given (Eze 1:5-14; 10:20; and Rv 4:6-9). By a process of elimination we arrive at the fact that they are a celestial order of spirit-beings, and we can form no more notion of them than we can of other heavenly orders which are named, but not explained, and for the want of better words are called “Thrones,” “Dominions,” “Principalities,” “Powers,” &c. They are to be distinguished from the symbolic figures of them, which were made to represent them.
Negatively, we may note:
1. That they cannot be the Godhead, or Divine in their nature, for (1) likeness of any kind was strictly forbidden (Dt 4:15,16, &c.); and (2) the Godhead is distinguished from them by being mentioned at the same time.
2. Though heavenly, or celestial and spiritual in their nature and character, they are distinguished from the angels (who, as their name implies, were spirits used as messengers). Compare Rv 5:8,11 and 7:11, where, first the cherubim offer worship, and then the angels. They must therefore be real spirit-beings, for they could hardly be represented emblematically and really in the same verse. Moreover, they are never dismissed on errands as angels are, and are never seen apart from the Throne.
3. They cannot be merely symbols, for, though symbolic and emblematic representations of them were allowed to be made, they themselves are not symbolic, or we should have symbolic symbols of symbols, and no reality at all.
4. They cannot be a symbol of the “Church” or any portion of redeemed humanity, for they are distinguished from them in Rv 5:9,10, according to the best readings of the most ancient MSS. and critical Greek texts, where the “us” of v. 9 should be omitted, and the “us” and “we” of v. 10 should be “them” and “they.” Compare also Rv 7:9-11.
5. For the same reason they cannot be symbols of “the four gospels” or books of any kind, for the cherubim are ministers associated with wrath; and call for the judgment plagues. See Rv 6 and 15:7. Moreover, there is no connection between these and the presence of the cherubim in Eden, in the Tabernacle, in the Temple, and the Throne of God.
Positively, we may note:
1. That the three root letters of kerub, = b, are the root letters of the word KaRaB, which reappear in our GRiP, GRaB, GRiPe, GRasP. In a passive sense the notion would be that of holding something in safe keeping: and, as a matter of fact, the symbolic representation of them were held fast to the mercy-seat, being made out of the same piece of gold (Ex 25:18,23).
2. In Ge 3:24 they were placed to KEEP (or guard) the way to the tree of life, and preserve the hope of re-genesis for a ruined creation (cp. Ge 2:15, where we have the word “keep” in this sense).
3. Their presence on the mercy-seat binds this hope with atonement, and with Israel.
4. On the vail the hope is bound up with the coming of the Christ in incarnation and redemption.
5. They are four in number, and four is the number of Creation (see. Ap. 10).
6. They are represented by the symbolic heads of the four great divisions of animate creation: the lion (of wild beasts), the ox (of tame beasts), the eagle (of birds), man (of humanity).
7. They are beneath the Throne, for the earth is Jehovah’s footstool.
8. Their song, when they speak, is of creation (Rv 4:11), and is in connection with the earth. Redemption is a “new song” for them, relating to others.
9. We conclude therefore, that the cherubim are celestial or real spirit-beings, associated in some way with the embodiment of creation’s hope as expressed in Ro 8:19-23. The emblematic representations made of them connect that hope with “the hope of Israel” and associate it with the blood-sprinkled mercy-seat, and the rent vail (Heb 10:10,20.)

Appendix 42 THE ‘ASHERAH
The word ‘Asherah is from the root ‘ashar, to be straight, erect, or upright. From this comes the meaning, in a moral sense, to be upright, hence, to prosper or be happy. The ‘Asherah was so called because it was something set upright or erect in the ground, and worshiped. The word occurs forty times, and only a careful study of each passage will give a correct view.
Compared with this, all that men may think or say about the ‘Asherah is of little value. The word is always rendered grove or groves in the A.V.; and always left as a proper name in the R.V.
From a conspectus of the passages, we learn that it was either a living tree with the top cut off, and the stump or trunk fashioned into a certain shape (Dt 16:21); or it was artificially fashioned and set erect in the ground (Isa 17:8. 1 Ki 14:15; 16:33). It was made of wood (Jdg 6:26) or stone. What the shape was is indicated in 1 Ki 15:13, and 2 Ch 15:16, where in the A.V. “an idol in a grove”, should be (as in the R.V.) “an abominable image for an ‘Asherah”. It could be “cut down” (Ex 34:13, the first occurrence of the word); “plucked up” (Mic 5:14); “burnt” (Dt 12:3); or “broken in pieces” (2 Ch 34:4).
It is often coupled with mazzevoth, or stone “pillars” (R.V.) (and rendered images in A.V.), connected with Baal-worship. That it could not have been in a “grove” is clear from 2 Ki 17:10, where it is forbidden to set one up “under any green tree”. While it is distinguished from Ashtoreth the goddess, it is yet associated with that goddess, Ashtoreth being representative of the productive (or passive) principle of life; and Baal being representative of the generative (or active) principle.
The image which represents the Phoenician Ashtoreth of Paphos, as the sole object of worship in her temple, was an upright block of stone, anointed with oil, and covered with an embroidered cloth. Such stones are to be met with all over the Semitic world; especially in Babylonia, in Syria, Palestine and Arabia. Even the Mahommedan sacred stone (kaaba) at Mecca remains an object of reverence. The place Beth-el was so called because of its anointed stone. There was another Beth-el in Northern Israel.
Two columns of stone stood before every Phoenician temple. Those at Tyre are described by Herodotus (ii. 44); and the “pillars of the sun” are mentioned in 2 Ch 34:4. Isa 17:8, &c. Like every form of “religion,” it had to do with the “flesh;” and hence, by the law of evolution (which is seen operating only in human affairs) it soon became corrupted. Evolution is seen in the progress of man’s works, because he begins from ignorance, and goes on learning by his mistakes and failures. From the moment he ends his works devolution at once sets in and deterioration begins. This is specially true in the “religious” sphere. All religions have become corrupt.
So with the ‘Asherah. Originally a tree, symbolical of the “tree of life,” it was an object of reverence and veneration. Then came the perversion of the earlier idea which simply honored the origin of life; and it was corrupted and debased into the organ of procreation, which was symbolized by the form and shape given to the ‘Asherah. It was the Phallus image of Isa 57:8, and the “image of the male”, Eze 16:17. These symbols, in turn, became the incentive to all forms of impurity which were part of its libidinous worship, with the swarms of “devotees” involved in its obscene orgies.
The serpent was accepted as the symbol of the nexus, and was thus associated with the “pillar” and the “tree”. Hence, it too became an object of worship. The principal factor in this form of Canaanite idolatry is that it was not a primitive conception of a religious rite, but the corruption of an earlier idea which began with honoring the origin of life. All the ancient systems of idolatry, connected with Astrology and Mythology, &c., were, in the same way, not original inventions of what was new; but the corruption of what was old, and the perversion of primitive truth.
There can be no doubt about its being, in its essence, Phallic worship pure and simple, whatever may have been its origin. This abomination was common to all the ancient nations; and relics of it are found to-day in various forms, in India and elsewhere. The menhirs of the Celtic religion are the true descendants of the ‘Asherim.
At first it was created in the Canaanitish nations; and from them it spread to the others. It was the great abomination of Canaan, and that is one reason why the Canaanites, as the descendants of the Nephilim, had to be destroyed by the sword of Israel. The other reason was the origin of those nations themselves (see Ap. 23 and 25), with which it was closely connected. The first mention of the ‘Asherah stamps it as being the special object of Jehovah’s hatred. It is given to explain His name as “jealous”; for that is the name He takes in denouncing it. Compare His threats in 1 Ki 14:15; 15:13; 16:32,33; 2 Ch 36:14, &c. It led to Israel’s banishment from the land; and subsequently to that of Judah’s.
It is still preserved in veiled language in secret fraternities, Freemasonry, Theosophy 1, and in the Roman Church; language so conceals it that probably those who use it to-day have little idea of what they are perpetuating; while the ancient symbols I O proclaim “sex as the true God of Hosts,” as the Kabbala declares. A recrudescence of this is more than hinted at; and it will be better understood when “the abomination” of Antichrist shall stand once again 2 in the Temple at Jerusalem (Mt 24:15).
The following passages will show further the nature of this form of idolatry:—Jer 5:7; 7:30,31; 19:4,5; 37:34-35. Hos 4:12-14. Am 2:7-9. The word ‘Asherah is noted in the margin of each passage where it occurs in The Companion Bible, but the following complete list is given to put the student in possession of the whole of the data; and thus to enable him to form his own conclusions.
· Ex 34:14.
· Dt 7:5; 12:3; 16:21.
· Jdg 3:7; 6:25,26,28,30.
· 1 Ki 14:15,23; 15:13; 16:33; 18:19 (sing.).
· 2 Ki 13:6; 17:10,16; 18:4; 21:3,7; 23:4,6,7,14,15.
· 2 Ch 14:3; 15:16; 17:6; 19:3; 24:18; 31:1; 33:3,19; 34:3,4,7.
· Isa 17:8; 27:9.
· Jer 17:2.
· Mic 5:14.
1 See The Perfect Way, p. 2, and The Computation of 666, pp. 105-9.

2 Mt 24:15; cp. Da 9:27; 12:11.

Appendix 43 “OFFER” AND “OFFERINGS”.
There are some twenty-four Hebrew words, more or less synonymous, which are translated “offer” and “offering” in the Hebrew Old Testament. These Hebrew words are also translated in other ways, so that it is important for the truth-seeker to know, in every passage, which word is used.
The various words are noted in the margin, except when they are clearly translated by their distinctive meanings, such as burnt-offering, peace-offering, heave-offering, &c.
I. The VERB “to offer”.
1. Karab means to draw near, but in the Hiphil conjugation, to make to approach, or draw near: hence, to bring near. See Korban, No. 1 below.
2. Nagash = to come near, after having been so brought, i.e., to enjoy the presence which the Korban (see below II. i.) has secured. Cp. Jer 30:21 where we have both words. Hence used of coming near with offerings. Cp. Greek engizo, Heb 7:19, and prosphero, Mt 2:11; 5:23; 8:4. Mk 1:44. Lk 5:14. Jn 16:2. In the Epistle to the Hebrews it is used twenty times in a sacrificial sense, except Heb 12:7, “God brings you near as sons”. See also Heb 9:14,28. Used also of the sinner’s approach to God by offering, Heb 4:16; 7:25; 10:1,22; 11:6.
3. ‘Asah, to make ready or prepare a victim for sacrifice; to make a victim a specific offering. Hence, to offer. First occurrence in Ex 10:25 (sacrifice). Then Ex 29:36,38,39 (offer), &c.
4. Zabach, to slay [and offer up]; hence to offer what has been slain; to sacrifice. Hence No. xii. below.
5. Shahat, to kill or slay (as a butcher); used of men as well as of animals. Jdg 12:6. 1 Ki 18:40. First occurrence Ge 22:10; 37:31. Then Ex 12:6.
6. ‘Alah = to offer up, especially a burnt offering, form its name in II. ii. below.
7. Katar = to burn or turn into vapor. Used of the incense which = Kethoreth, but also of the ‘Olah (II. ii.) and parts of the Minchah (II. iii.) and the Zebach (II. xii.) because these ascended to Jehovah.
8. Saraph is used of burning up (or rather, down) the sin-offering, because nothing ascended up to God in that offering.
9. Rum, to offer up as a heave-offering.
II. The NOUN “offering”.
1. Korban = a gift, or an admittance-offering: from I. i. above. It is the present brought, to this day in the East, in order to secure an audience, or to see the face of the superior, and find access to his presence. Hence called to-day, “the face-offering”. When the admittance has been secured and entrance has been obtained, then the real offering or present has to be given. Hence Korban is essentially an admittance-offering; securing the entree. Cp. the verb, Jdg 3:18. Cp. its use in the New Testament, Mt 5:23; 8:4; 23:18. Mk 7:11. Heb 5:1.
2. ‘Olah = the burnt offering: so called from the Hiphil of the verb ‘alah, to cause the ascend [as the flame and smoke ascend by burning]. In Greek holocausta, which conveys its meaning as being wholly burnt.
3. Minchah = the Meal offering = a present, as such. Hence a gift-offering, not necessarily to secure admittance, but to secure favor. It might be sacrifice by blood, or more generally and later, without blood. It is used of the offerings of Cain and Abel (Ge 4:3,4,5), of Jacob’s present to Esau (Ge 32:13-21), &c. In Exodus and Leviticus it acquires a special limitation, and is the only word rendered “meat”, or better (with R.V.), “meal offering” (though it has a wider signification that literal “meal”).
4. Shelem = the Peace offering, from the root Shalam, which conveys the idea of peace on the ground of perfection of compensation of recompense. Hence connected with the thought of rendering payment of vows or praises because of peace enjoyed. Sometimes combined with Zebach (No. xii, below). It is eucharistic rather than propitiatory.
5. Chattath = the Sin offering, from chat’a, to sin by coming short of, by missing the mark in sins of commission. In the Piel it means to purge from such sin (Ps 51:7). In the ‘Olah (II. ii) the blood went upward, in the chattath it went downward and outward “without the camp”. The former was burnt up on the altar, the latter went down on the ground.
6. ‘Asam = the Trespass offering. Relates to sins of omission, while chattath, relates to sins of commission = sin in general; ‘Asham sin in relation to Mosaic Law; sins of error arising from ignorance or negligence.
7. Nedabah = Free-will or Voluntary offerings. See Lev 22:18, &c. It refers not to the nature or mode of the offering, but to the motive. Not the same as Lev 1:4, “voluntary will”, which = “for his acceptance”.
8. Terumah = the Heave offering. So called because it was lifted up on high in presentation to Jehovah for Himself alone. See I. ix. above and Ex 29:27.
9. Tenuphah = the Wave offering, because it was waved to and fro (not up and down like No. viii), and presented for the four quarters of the earth.
10. Nesek = the Drink offering. From nasak, to pour out. Cp. Ps 2:6 (set). Php 2:17. 2 Ti 4:6.
11. ‘Ishsheh = any offering made by fire (cp. Ex 29:18. Lev 24:7,9).
12. Zebach = any offering slain (from No. II. iv, above). The proper word for a victim, slain and offered. The Hebrew name for altar (mizbeah) is derived from the same root, and denotes the place of slaughter. Cp. Ge 22.

Appendix 44 SIN, TRESPASS, INIQUITY, &c
There are many synonymous words to represent the outworking of man’s fallen nature. As these are not always translated by the same English word, it is necessary that we should distinguish them. The student, by reference to the following list, will be able to do so:—
1. chat’a, to sin; to miss the mark (as in Jdg 20:16). Also of the feet, to stumble and fall (Pr 19:2). Hence, morally, a coming short, blameworthiness — not necessarily willful. An act of thought, word, or deed, not a condition. Usually (but by no means always) rendered sin, and other words also so rendered.
2. ‘asham, trespass, to sin through error or ignorance. Cp. Lev 4:13; 5:2. Nu 5:6,7. Jdg 21:22. 1 Ch 21:3. 2 Ch 19:10; 28:10,13. ‘Asham is a breach of commandment, done in ignorance, but, when the guilt is proved, requiring atonement.
3. ‘aven, iniquity, specially connected with idolatry. Used because an idol is nothing and vanity (cp. Hos 4:15; 5:8; 10:5,8. Am 5:5, marg.). Hence, ‘aven comes to mean vanity (cp. Job 15:35. Ps 10:7. Pr 22:8, &c.). The word has many renderings, which are pointed out in the passages when it occurs. ‘Aven is rather a course of bad conduct flowing from the evil desires of fallen nature, that breaches of the law as such.
4. ‘avah, perverseness, from the root to be bent, or crooked. English wrong, i.e. wrung out of course, expresses it (cp. 1 Sa 20:30. 2 Sa 19:19. 1 Ki 8:47. Job 33:37, &c.).
5. ‘amal, trouble, labor, toil. Sin viewed in the light of the trouble it causes; and of its burden; and its grievousness (Isa 10:1. Hab 1:3). Often rendered perverseness (Nu 23:21), also mischief (Job 15:35).
6. ‘aval, unjust, unfairness, sin in its nature as deceitful, dishonesty, that which is not equal and right, unfairness in dealings. Rendered unjust (Ps 43:1; 82:2. Pr 29:27. Isa 26:10), unrighteous (Lev 19:15,35).
7. ‘abar, to pass beyond, transgress. Hence, transgression (Ps 17:3. Hos 6:7; 8:1).
8. ra’a’, wicked, injurious. From its root, which indicates its nature as breaking up all that is good or desirable; injurious to all others. In Greek poneros, evil, or kakos, bad. Hence especially of moral depravity and corruption, and lewdness. English “good-for-nothing” (1 Sa 17:28), naughty (2 Ki 2:19. Pr 20:14. Jer 24:2).
9. pash’a, revolt, rebellion. Sin against lawful authority. Often rendered transgression (Ps 51:13. Pr 28:21. Isa 43:27). In Pr 10:12 the action of love or mercy shown stands in strong contrast to this character of the sin.
10. rasha’, wickedness, in the sense of the restless activity of fallen nature (Job 3:17. Isa 53:9; 57:20,21); where it refers to the activity of the impious and ungodly, or robbers.
11. ma’al, treachery, unfaithfulness, breach of trust, often rendered trespass and transgression. It is used of Achan (Jos 7:1; 22:20). Cp. Jos 22:16. 2 Ch 26:18; 28:22; 33:19. Ezr 9:2,4. Ne 13:27, &c.
12. shagag, erring from imprudence, rashness, being deceived, not willfully; and shagah, erring willfully through passion or wine, hence, to go astray. As sin it is to be distinguished from presumptuous or high-handed sin. Cp. Lev 4:13. Nu 15:22, &c., with Nu 15:30. Ps 119:21.
13. zimmah, meditated, wickedness, plotted, planned, and designed; wicked, or lewd purpose, especially of sins of unchastity.
14. chasad = shameful. A Homonym, meaning (1) Here, and Job 37:13 (where it is rendered “mercy” in A.V. and R.V.). But “lightning” is not “mercy” but chastisement. (2) The other meaning is mercy, lovingkindness, or grace. See note on Lev 20:14.
15. shal, fault, committed inadvertently through negligence.

Appendix 45
THE ORDER AND GROUPING OF THE TWELVE TRIBES

There are twenty different lists given of the Twelve Tribes. These vary according to the different objects with which they are given, and the different connection in which they stand, according to birth: mothers, encampment, numeration, blessing, geographical relation, &c. All are worthy of attention and study. They may be thus presented:—

* Joseph omitted, he being in Egypt.

† Levi omitted.

‡ This is the only order which occurs three times. Levi mentioned in ch. 2:17 after Gad. The order is that of importance. || Eastern Tribes omitted.

§ Simeon omitted. Benjamin before Joseph, because the order is geographical. §§ Here the Tribes are in the four groups which are to furnish cities for the four classes of Priests.

¶ Judah and Simeon omitted. ** Zebulun and Dan omitted, unless Dan is read in 7:12.

†† Gad and Asher omitted.

‡‡ Dan omitted.

1 Two orders mentioned but not detailed. (1) The order “according to birth”, on the two stones of the High Priest’s shoulders (the place of strength). (2) The order on the twelve stones of the High Priest’s breastplate (the place of love). This was according to their tribes, as chosen by Jehovah’s love.

Appendix 46
DEUTERONOMY.

References to Deuteronomy in the New Testament, quoted by Jesus Christ in His conflict with Satan. Dt 6:13,16; 8:3; 10:20. Cp. Mt 4:4,7,10. The following important passages are referred to:—

1:31. Ac 13:18 (R.V. margin).
4:24. Heb 12:29.
4:35. Mk 12:32.
6:4,5. Mt 22:37,38. Lk 10:27.
10:17. Ac 10:34. Ro 2:11. Gal 2:6. Eph 6:9. Col 3:25. 1 Pe 1:17.
17:6. Mt 18:16. 2 Co 13:1. Heb 10:28.
18:15. Ac 3:22; 7:37.
19:15. Dt 17:6, above.
21:23. Gal 3:13.
24:1. Mt 5:31; 19:7.
25:4. 1 Co 9:9. 1 Ti 5:18.
27:26. Gal 3:10.
29:4. Ro 11:8.
29:18. Heb 12:15.
30:4. Mt 24:31.
30:11-14. Ro 10:6-8.
31:6-8. Heb 13:5 (cp. Jos 1:5).
32 and 33. Rv 15:3.
32:17. 1 Co 10:20.
32:21. Ro 10:19. 1 Co 10:22.
32:35,36. Heb 10:30.
32:43 (Sept.). Heb 1:6. Ro 15:10.

Any variations in the laws, as compared with those given nearly forty years before, are explained (1) either by reference to different events (cp. 1:13,18 with Ex 18 and Nu 11); (2) or, repeated with a different object, and from a different point of view (cp. 1:22 with Nu 13:1-3); (3) or, because wilderness laws were not suitable for the Land (cp. 12:15 with Lev 17:3,4); (4) or, modified for the same reason (cp. 1, 12 and 16 with Lev 23 and Nu 28 and 29). Other variations are complementary (1:45; 3:4; 25:17,18).

Appendix 47 “THE BOOK OF THE LAW”
It is an allegation of the “Higher” Criticism (which dispenses with documentary or MS. evidence, and therefore differs altogether from “Textual” Criticism) that the five books known as the Pentateuch were not written by, or during the time of Moses, but in the time of a king Manasseh, or even as late as Ezra.
But a definite “book” is spoken of throughout the Old Testament as being constantly written in, with directions how it was to be added to and kept up by the prophets raised up from time to time for that purpose, among others.
The first occurrence is in Ex 17:14. To this, in the margin, all the others are referred back. They are given below, so that the chain may be examined link by link and its completeness and perfection seen.
1. Ex 17:14. Written by Jehovah’s command (cp. Dt 25:19). Heb. “the book” (bassepher).
2. Ex 24:4,7. Written by Moses, and “the book of the covenant sprinkled”, with the people.
3. Ex 34:27. Jehovah’s command, “Write thou”.
4. Nu 33:1,2. Written by Moses “by the commandment of Jehovah”. From the first three months of the first year to last quarter of the fortieth year (cp. Dt 1:2,3 with 2:14).
5. Dt 1:5. The word “declare” = set forth plainly, and implies writing (the word occurs only in Dt 27:8 and Hab 2:2), and includes from Dt 1:6 to 33:29.
6. Dt 4:8 includes more than this book of Deuteronomy, and 4:2 must refer to what was then written (cp. 26:16; 29:21).
7. Dt 17:18. The book kept “before the priests the Levites”, and to be copied by the king. This was the standard copy (ch. 31:9, 25, 26); to be read at the Feast of Tabernacles in the Sabbatic years (ch. 31:10-13).
8. Dt 31:19,22,24. “The song of Moses” to be written (cp. the reason, vv. 16-18). Ascribed to Jehovah.
9. Jos 1:8. “This book of the law” came into custody of Joshua (cp. 1-8) as distinct from the book of Joshua, and containing, not Deuteronomy merely, but the whole “book of the law” as thus traced above (cp. Ps 1:2. Lk 24:44).
10. Jos 8:30-35. A copy of the law made from “the book” on the rocks in mount Ebal.
11. Jos 23:6,7 again referred to.
12. Jos 24:26. Joshua himself “wrote in the book”, and doubtlessly added Dt 34.
13. 1 Sa 10:25. Samuel continued the writing in “the book”. (So the Hebrew.)
14. 1 Ki 2:1-4. David charges Solomon with regard to this “written” law of Moses.
15. 2 Ch 17:7-9. Jehoshaphat sent the princes, Levites, and priests, and they “taught in Judah, and had the book of the law of Jehovah with them”.
16. 2 Ch 23:11 (2 Ki 11:12). It was given to Joash according to Dt 17:18.
17. 2 Ch 25:4 (2 Ki 14:6). Amaziah spared the children of his father’s murderers according to “that which was written in the book of the law of Moses” (cp. Dt 24:4).
18. 2 Ch 30:2,5,18. Hezekiah’s passover kept in second month as “it is written:. This was written in Nu 9:6-14.
19. 2 Ch 35:12. Josiah’s passover kept “as it is written in the book of Moses”.
20. 2 Ki 17:37. “The law … which He wrote for you”, i.e., Jehovah (cp. v. 35).
21. 2 Ki 22:8. “Hilkiah, the high priest … found the book of the law in the house of the Lord”. In v. 10, “Shaphan read it before the king” (Josiah). Huldah the prophetess confirms this reference (vv. 14-20). In 2 Ch 34:14 it is described as “the book of the law of Jehovah by the hand of Moses”.
22. Jeremiah refers to this event when he speaks, as in ch. 15:16.
23. Isaiah refers to this book as, in 574 his day, a “sealed” book (ch. 29:1113). The Lord Jesus refers to this as opposed to the “precepts of man” (Mt 15:1-9. Mk 7:1-13).
24. Ezra ascribes the law of Moses. Cp. 3:2 (Nu 28; 29); 6:18; 7:6, 10, 14, 21, 25. And all is to be done according to it (cp. 10:3 with 9:11, 12. Lev 18:24-30, and Dt 23:3-6).
25. In Est 3:8, the laws were extant, and known as “diverse from all people”.
26. Nehemiah (1:7-9) speaks to Jehovah of the “statutes and judgments He gave by Moses”.
27. Ne 8:8. The book is read according to its requirements.
28. Ne 8:14,17. The Feast of Tabernacles was kept according to Lev 23:39-43.
29. Ne 10:28,29. A solemn covenant was made “to walk in God’s law, which was given by Moses the servant of God”.
30. Ne 13:1. “They read in the book of Moses” concerning the law as written in Dt 23:3,4.
31. Daniel in his prayer (ch. 9:11) refers to the curse fulfilled on the nation as “written in the law of Moses the servant of God”.
32. Mal 4:4 completes the cycle, and refers all to Horeb where the people received the law (as distinct from Sinai, where Moses received it), and to Moses by whom it was given (not to Ezra or to some “Redactors” of a later day).

Appendix 48 THE USE OF VARIOUS TYPES IN THE ENGLISH BIBLE
The practice of indicating, by different types, words and phrases which were not in the Original Text, was, it is believed, first introduced by Sebastian Münster, of Basle, in a Latin version of the Old Testament published in 1534.
The English New Testament (published at Geneva, 1557) and the Geneva Bible (1560) “put in that word which, lacking, made the sentence obscure, but set it in such letters as may easily be discerned from the common text.” The example was followed and extended in the Bishops’ Bible (1568, 1572), and the roman and italic 1 types of these Bibles (as distinguished from the black letter and roman type of previous Bibles) were introduced into the A.V. (1611).
The following seem to have been the principles guiding the translators of the A. V.:—
1. To supply the omissions under the Figure Ellipsis, or what they considered to be Ellipsis.
2. To supply the words necessary to give the sense, when the Figure Zeugma is employed.
3. Once, at least, to indicate a word or words of doubtful MS. authority, 1 Jn 2:23 (first introduced in Cranmer’s Bible — doubtless from the Vulgate). Perhaps also Jdg 16:2 and 20:9.
4. Where the English idiom differs from that of the Originals, and requires essential words to be added, which are not necessary in the Hebrew or Greek.
For the use of italic type in the R.V. see Ap. 7.
The use of large capital letters for certain words and phrases originated with the A.V. None of the previous or “former translations” have them.
The revisers abandoned this practice, but have not been consistent in the plan they substituted for it. In most of the cases they have used small capital letters instead of the large capitals; but in three cases (Jer 23:6. Zec 3:8; 6:12) they have used ordinary roman type.
The use of large capitals by the translators of the A.V. is destitute of any authority, and merely indicates the importance which they attached to such words and phrases thus indicated.
The following is a complete list:—
· Ex 3:14. “I am that I am.”
· Ex 3:14. “I am.”
· Ex 6:3. “Jehovah.”
· Ex 28:36; 39:30. “Holiness (R.V. “Holy”) to the Lord.”
· Dt 28:58. “The Lord thy God.”
· Ps 68:4. “Jah.”
· Ps 83:18. “Jehovah.”
· Isa 26:4. “Jehovah.”
· Da 5:25-28. “Mene, Mene, Tekel, Upharsin.” (v. 28, “Peres”.)
· Zec 14:20. “Holiness (R.V. “Holy”) unto the Lord.”
· Mt 1:21. “Jesus.”
· Mt 1:25. “Jesus.”
· Mt 27:37. The inscriptions on the Cross. Also Mk 15:26. Lk 23:38. Jn 19:19.
· Lk 1:31; 2:21. “Jesus.”
· Ac 17:23. “To the (R.V. “an”) unknown God.”
· Rv 17:5. “Mystery, Babylon the Great, the Mother of (R.V. “the”) Harlots and (R.V. “the”) Abominations of the Earth.”
· Rv 19:16. “King of Kings, and Lord of Lords.”
Large capitals in A.V. Small roman letters in R.V.
· Jer 23:6. “The Lord our Righteousness.”
· Zec 3:8. “Branch.”
· Zec 6:12. “Branch.”
The word italic means relating to Italy, and is used of a kind of type dedicated to the States of Italy, by Aldus Manutius, about the year 1500.

Appendix 49 “THE MAN OF GOD”
The first occurrence of this expression is in Dt 33:1, and is used of Moses. Its use in connection with Moses (Ps 90, title), who was, par excellence, the prophet, like unto whom Christ was to be “raised up” (Dt 18:15-19), shows that it is to be understood of what Moses was, viz., “the prophet”. He was so called, not because he foretold, but because he spoke FOR God. This is the meaning of the word “prophet” as taught by its first occurrence in Ge 20:7. The prophet was God’s “spokesman” (Ex 4:16. Cp. Ex 7:1).
God’s spokesman could know what to speak for Him only (1) from His Spirit (Ne 9:30. Cp. Hos 9:7, margin, and see Nu 11:16,17,25-29); (2) from Jehovah making Himself known (Nu 12:6. Eze 3:17. Jer 15:19. Cp. 2 Ch 36:12); and (3) from God’s written word. This is why Timothy is the only one called a “man of God” in the New Testament (1 Ti 6:11), and why, today, one, and only one who knows “all scripture”, which is so profitable, can be called a “man of God” (2 Ti 3:17).
All such are God’s spokesmen because they alone know what He wishes to be spoken. They are His witnesses (Ac 1:8; 22:15). Christ was THE prophet because He spoke only those things which were give Him to speak (see note on Deut 18:18), and He alone is “the faithful Witness” (Rv 1:5).
It was for the above reasons that the expression “the man of God” (i.e. God’s man) became the general name for a prophet among the common people. See all the occurrences:—
· Dt 23:1.
· Jos 14:6.
· Jdg 13:6,8.
· 1 Sa 2:27.
· 1 Sa 9:6,7,8,10.
· 1 Ki 12:22.
· 1 Ki 13:1,4,5,6,7,8,11,12,14,14,21,26,29,31.
· 1 Ki 17:18,24.
· 1 Ki 20:28.
· 2 Ki 1:9,10,11,12,13.
· 2 Ki 4:7,9,16,21,22,25,25,27,27,40,42.
· 2 Ki 5:8,14,15,20.
· 2 Ki 6:6,9,10,15.
· 2 Ki 7:2,17,18,19.
· 2 Ki 8:2,4,7,8,11.
· 2 Ki 13:19.
· 2 Ki 23:16,17.
· 1 Ch 23:14.
· 2 Ch 8:14.
· 2 Ch 11:2.
· 2 Ch 25:7,9,9.
· 2 Ch 30:16.
· Eze 3:2,2.
· Ne 12:24,36.
· Ps 90, title.
· Jer 35:4.
Number of occurrences:—
Pentateuch 1 Prophets 65 Other books 12 78 = 6 x 13 (see Ap. 10).
New Testament 2
80 = 8 x 10 (see Ap. 10).

Appendix 50 CHRONOLOGICAL CHARTS AND TABLES
INTRODUCTION.

1. Systematic tabulation being the only satisfactory method, to eye and understand alike, of presenting Biblical, or any other numbers, this course has been adopted in the following charts. To ensure accuracy, “Section” paper has been used throughout. The importance of this is, that, for the first time, (it is believed) Bible readers will have placed in their hands a series of Chronological Tables of the main dated events in the Old Testament, which they can test and check for themselves. As a rule, the Chronological Charts already available are set before the reader, either on a scale so minute that they must be received or rejected as a whole, or else so encumbered with extraneous matter relating to Babylon, Egypt, Greece, Rome, &c., as to be hopelessly bewildering to the ordinary Bible reader.
2. The problems of Biblical Chronology cannot be solved by mere computation, after the manner of some. Neither must they be dealt with by arbitrarily adopting a particular date, and reckoning from that onward to Christ, and back to Adam. This is a position that cannot be maintained; as the charts will show.
3. Again, the use of the “Sothic cycles”, eclipses, and other astronomical methods for “settling” Biblical dates, has not been sought. On the contrary, any appeals for aid from such sources have been carefully avoided. If the record of the Scripture as to its own times and numbers is not self-contained, then it must be hopeless to supplement it by guesses and “explanations” as to the movements of the heavenly bodies, used mainly in support of human arguments and assumptions.
4. The position occupied in The Companion Bible is that all Scripture is “given by inspiration of God,” qeovpneusto (theopneustos) = God breathed. Therefore, the record of the dates and periods stated in the Bible are as much inspired as any other portion of it; and are as much to be relied on for accuracy as those statements upon which we rest in hope of eternal salvation. They must be as unreservedly received and believed as any other statements contained in its pages.
5. When it is stated that a certain king began to reign in such and such a year of the reign of another king, and that he reigned for so many years, it is accepted, and charted down accordingly.
6. One of the greatest difficulties which chronologers have to face is, and always has been, the apparent conflict between the record in 1 Ki 6:1, that Solomon’s temple was commenced “in the four hundred and eightieth year after the children of Israel were come out of the land of Egypt”; while in Ac 13:17-22 the same amounts to 573 years, a difference of ninety-three years.
In the majority of cases 1 Ki 6:1 has been adopted by chronologists as being correct, St. Paul’s reckoning being left to take care of itself; or, they say that he was “misinformed”, or “only speaking generally.” The simple fact is both are right. The solution of the difficulty is that St. Paul’s statement is according to Anno Mundi years (573) — the other, on the principle of what we may call Anno Dei reckoning (480). (See the “Lo-Ammi” periods chart, 50. vii. 11).
The charts show that, on the plain and straight-forwad statements of the Scriptures themselves, the actual Anno Mundi period from the Exodus to the commencement of Solomon’s temple was exactly 573 years, thus agreeing with St. Paul, and absolutely verifying the reckoning in Ac 13:17-22. But the four hundred and eightieth year of 1 Ki 6 is also as absolutely correct, only it is reckoned from the Exodus on a different principle — viz. according to God’s reckoning. The difference in years between the two statements is, as already said, the ninety-three years of the servitudes.
Now, to ignore ninety-three years in the lifetime of the world cannot be done without upsetting all other dates. Yet this is precisely what is generally done. Understanding the “four hundred and eightieth year” as being on Anno Mundi reckoning instead of according to Anno Dei reckoning, chronologers are compelled, in order to make things “agree”, to handle and compress the figures and facts of the Judges period in the most arbitrary manner.
St. Paul’s testimony is that “God gave (them) Judges about 450 years until Samuel the prophet”. (Ac 13:20.) The adverb of time here translated until (e]w”, heos, until, as long as), marks the completion of an action up to the time of the commencement of another. Here, it denotes the fulfilment of the times of the Judges, ending with the close of Samuel’s forty years, and the commencement of the kingdom. (Cp. the use of e] w”– heos — in Mt 1:25, “until she had brought forth her firstborn son.”)
The chart 50. iv. exactly coincides with St. Paul’s statement. The Judgeship period ends, and the kingdom time begins with Saul in 1000 B.C.
7. The advantage of the SECTIONAL LINES in the charts will be apparent to all students of the Word of God. The difficulty experienced in making the two lines of the kings of Judah and Israel “agree” is overcome quite simply by setting the Davidian dynasty, and those of the kings of Israel, on what may be termed and interlocking system, by the use of the parallel horizontal section lines.
When, for instance, it is stated in 2 Ki 8:16, “In the fifth year of Joram the son of Ahab king of Israel (Jehoshaphat being then king of Judah began to reign”: Chart 50. vii shows this; and, while vindicating the accuracy of the statement in the text — followed in the A.V. and R.V. (with a doubtful note in the latter) as to Jehoshaphat being at that time king of Judah — it shows further that Jehoshaphat had joined his son with him in associate-kingship in the third year before his death.
The extreme value to the student of this principle will be seen in this and other instances, especially in the Ezra-Nehemiah period. See Chart 50. vii. 5.
8. In Chart 50, vii. 7, 8, 9, 10, are given a few of the significant periods of 430, 450, 490, and 1,000 years. The Tables will enable others to follow up these figures on the same lines; and doubtless many other important periods will be noted by those who delight in searching into the wonders of the Word of Life. This, by means of the Section lines, can be done accurately.
9. In the Charts themselves the terminus a quo is the creation of Adam; while the terminus ad quem is the Crucifixion (although the charting is continued on to the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus). The unit of measurement is the number of years given as the lifetime of Adam: viz. 930. (Ge 5:5.)
Commencing with this, and taking each link as it follows, the chain is seen to extend in perfect sequence until it ends with the “cutting off of the Messiah” at the close of the sixty-ninth of the seventy sevens of Da 9:25,26 — in A.D. 29. That is 4,033 from the Creation. It shows also that the period from Adam to the Nativity was eighty jubilees (on Anno Mundi reckoning, but see note on p. 70) or 4,000 years. Each shaded column stands for 100 years (same in the detail charts) consisting of 10 sections of 10 years each. Every year, therefore, from beginning to end is shown, and nothing is left, in this respect, to chance or guesswork.
The figures to the left of this shaded column are B.C. dates: that is, they are reckoned from the common era of A.D. 0. But, all are agreed that the birth of Christ took place four years earlier :– therefore, for any date required from the Nativity itself, these four years must be deducted in each case.
On so small a scale it is almost humanly impossible to avoid some slight overlappings in connection with periods of the kings, owing to the use of the cardinal and ordinal numbers, and the absence in most cases of hints as to the time of year at which some of the reigns began or ended. But the “charting” has been done with the most careful and anxious exactitude, and the “interlocking” system, above referred to, has reduced such minutiae to (it is believed) the narrowest limits.
10. The principle employed in the Scriptures of this interlocking, or crosschecking, is of great significance and importance. On the charts these are set down exactly as they are given. No attempt is made to manipulate the figures, e.g. –
(a) When the record days “in the thirty and eighth year of Asa king of Judah began Ahab the son of Omri to reign over Israel, and Ahab … reigned over Israel in Samaria twenty and two years” (1 Ki 16:29), it is charted accordingly, and this shows that Ahaziah was joined in co-regency with his father Ahab two years before the death of the latter, in the seventeenth year of Jehoshaphat (1 Ki 22:51).
(b) In 2 Ki 14:23 it is stated — “in the fifteenth year of Amaziah, the son of Joash king of Judah Jeroboam (II) the son of Joash king of Israel began to reign in Samaria, (and reigned) forty and one years.”
Now, Amaziah’s twenty-nine years of reigning in Jerusalem (2 Ki 14:2) end, as the chart shows, in the fourteenth year of Jeroboam; and, as Uzziah, Amaziah’s son, began his reign in the twenty-seventh year of Jeroboam (2 Ki 15:1), it follows that a gap of thirteen years intervenes in the line of Judah between Amaziah and Uzziah. No attempt is made to bridge this gap, much less to curtail or ignore it. The Scriptures are silent as to the reason for this break. The interval stands there, a plainly recorded fact, and is charted down accordingly.
In the same way there is an interval of twenty-four years on the Israel side between Jeroboam II and his son Zechariah’s accession. But Scripture gives no detail as to how the intervening space was occupied. In the case of the Davidian dynasty, the periods omitted (shown in black) were not to be included in the Anno Dei reckoning.
11. The “LO-AMMI” periods. It will be noticed at once that, in many instances, from shortly after the entry into the Land and onwards, there are wide differences between the chart dates and the “received dates” for certain events. For instance, Jehoiakim’s fourth and Nebuchadnezzar’s first years (Jer 25:1) are charted as 496 B.C., whereas the generally “received” date is 606 B.C. (according to some, 605 or 604). This means a discrepancy of 108-110 years; and shortens the period between the year in which Judah became a tributary to Babylon, and the Gentile supremacy over the land of Jerusalem began, and the time of Christ, by those 108-110 years.
At once, it may be said, “Here is manifest error! We are told that leading chronologers are ‘agreed’ that the point of contact between sacred and profane chronology, and therefore the first certain date in Biblical history, is the accession of Nebuchadnezzar to the throne of Babylon in B.C. 625.” But the chart of the “Lo-Ammi” periods (50. VII. 11) shows that chronologists have mixed up Anno Mundi reckoning with the Anno Dei reckoning.
The black portions of the columns in the charts show the times when the children of Israel were in servitude or under usurped authority (as in Athaliah, &c.), and therefore such periods were not to be reckoned, while Israel was Lo-Ammi, “Not My People!”. Take, for example, from the Exodus to Jehoiachin’s Captivity. On “received” dates this period is 1491-599 = 892 years. According to the charts this period is 1491-489 = 1003 years. A difference of 110 years.
The explanation is in the charts, and shows that the Anno Mundi years include the ninety-three of servitude in the Judges, and the three intervals in the Kings (together twenty years), totaling 113 years. Deducting this 113 from 1002, or adding it to 892, we have 889 and 1005 respectively.
Allowing for the portions of years at the beginning and end of this period, and the overlapping at the intervals, it will be seen that these figures are practically identical.
The same Anno Dei reckoning removes the difficulty presented by “the four hundred and eightieth year,” and shows that every date from the time of Eli to the usurpation of Athaliah is ninety-three years out of place in the ordinary reckoning; from Joash to the end of Amaziah every date is ninety-nine years wrong; and from Uzziah’s death to the Captivity every date is 113 years wrong.
This is not inference but fact, as those who use the charts can test for themselves. This one date in 1 Ki 6:1, having been accepted by almost all the “leading chronologers” as representing literal Anno Mundi years, has become the pivot upon which all chronology, “sacred” and secular, has been made to turn, and all “received” dates gathered from “monumental” or other sources, as well as by “computation”, have been forced to “fit in” accordingly.
12. This also applies to the JUBILEE YEARS. On Anno Mundi reckoning, from the entry into the Land till the Nativity, there are exactly twenty-nine jubilees; but on Anno Dei reckoning there are only twenty-five jubilees (the number of grave again, 5 x 5, i.e., 52. See Ap. 10): and the Sabbatic years accordingly, as shown on the charts.
13. THE SCALES of the detailed charts explain themselves.
14. The EZRA-NEHEMIAH period (50. vi. and vii. 5). According to “received” dates, the building of the second Temple was begun in 536 B.C., and finished in 516-515 B.C., and the walls of Jerusalem were built by Nehemiah in 444 B.C., that is seventy-two years later, and ninety-one years from the going forth of the decree to build Jerusalem.
Now, in the second year of DARIUS HYSTASPES (Hag 1:1) the LORD’S HOUSE was not built. Hence the word of Jehovah: “Is it time for you to dwell in your ceiled houses, and this house lie waste?” (1:4). “Go up and BUILD the House” (v. 8). If this be so, we may ask — When was Jerusalem rebuilt? On “received” dates we are asked to believe that this was completed by Nehemiah in 444, i.e. seventy-two years later. According to this dating the Temple was finished and dedicated in 516 B.C., seventy-two years before the houses and walls of Jerusalem were built!
The key to this period — indeed, to the whole of Scripture chronology — is in Da 9:25, “From the going forth” of the decree to BUILD JERUSALEM. Not a word is said about the Temple in this important passage; whereas the decree of Cyrus is entirely concerned with the Temple, “the House of the LORD GOD of Israel … which is in Jerusalem.” Ezr 1:3.
The charts show that the going forth of the decree to build JERUSALEM was issued in the twentieth year of Artaxerxes (ASTEIAGES = “Darius the Median,” — the father of Cyrus), and in the forty-second year of Nebuchadnezzar’s reign. This was just at the close of the great king’s seven years of “madness.”&nbs 51 b p; (See the Structures of Ezra-Nehemiah, and Ap. 58.). This decree to build Jerusalem was in 454 B.C.; and the decree of Cyrus to build the Temple was issued in 426 B.C.; twenty-eight years later.
An illustration from the Book of Exodus may help to illustrate the principle on which the books of Ezra-Nehemiah are placed in the Jewish (and our own) Bible. The specification of the Tabernacle, its materials and furniture, is placed first (canonically), beginning with the ARK. Then the construction itself follows. The order is reversed in actual building; and the chronological order comes first.
It is the same here. The building of the House of God being paramount, the decree, &c., concerning it comes first (canonically), on the same Divine principle. Afterwards we have the detail of the setting for the gem, so to speak — the building of Jerusalem. Just as the Tabernacle was (chronologically) built first (Ex 36) to contain the ark, so here, this city was built first to contain, guard, and protect the “House of Jehovah”. Finally, the best explanation of the charts will be found in the charts themselves. For further information see Ap. 86.
VIII. SUMMARY OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS
B.C.4004 Adam created.3874 Seth b. “Adam begat a son in his own likeness” (Ge 5:3).3769 Enos b.3679 Cainan b.3609 Mahalaleel b.3544 Jared b.3382 Enoch b. “seventh from Adam” (Jude 14).3317 Methuselah b.3194 Adam’s “day of grace” begins when he is 810 (Ge 6:3).3130 Lamech b.3074 Adam d. (930).3017 Enoch translated, fifty-seven years after Adam’s d.2962 Seth d. (912).2948 Noah b.2864 Enos d. (905).2769 Cainan d. (910).2714 Mahalaleel d. (895).2582 Jared d. (962).2448 Japheth b.2447 Ham b.2446 Shem b. (Noah 502).2353 Lamech d. (777).2348 Methuselah d. (969) in the first month of the Flood year.2348-2347 The Flood year. (Noah’s 600 th year. Ge 7:6,11.)2346 Arphaxad b. “two years after the Flood”.2311 Salah b.2281 Eber b.2247 Peleg b. “In his days the earth was divided” (Ge 10:25). See note on 50. II.2217 Reu b.2185 Serug b.2155 Nahor b.2126 Terah b.2056 Terah’s “generations” begin with the b. of Haran.2008 Peleg d. (239).2007 Nahor d. (148).1998 Noah d. (950).1996 Abraham b. (1,992 years from the Nativity).1978 Reu d. (239).1955 Serug d. (230).1946? Abraham’s First “Call”, in Ur of the Chaldees (Ac 7:2-4)1921 Terah d. (205). Abraham’s Second “Call” (Haran). The 430 year sojourning begin. (See note on Gen 12:1, and Ap. 50. III).1920-1912 Abraham goes down into Egypt. Attempted destruction of the Seed (see note on Gen 12:10, and Ap. 23). Abraham returns from Egypt.1911 Abraham (85) marries Hagar (Ge 16:3).1910 Ishmael b. (Abraham 86).1897 Covenant of Circumcision. (Abraham 99).1896 Isaac b. (Abraham 100).1891 Isaac becomes “the Seed” (Ge 21:10; 12:7). Ishmael “cast out”. The 400 years of Ac 7:6 begin.1878 Salah d. (433).1863? Isaac (33) offered up.1859 Sarah d. (127). The only woman whose age is given in Scripture. For significance of this, cp. Gal 4. In Sarah’s age we have, allegorically, the period of duration of the Old Covenant.1856 Isaac (40) marries Rebekah.1846 Shem (Melchizedek?) d. (600). Abraham (150) marries Keturah?1836 Jacob b. (Isaac 60).1821 Abraham d. (Isaac 75. Jacob 15).1817 Eber d. (464), outlives Abraham by four years.1812? The famine of Ge 26:1. The cause of sale of the birthright?1796 Esau (40) marries Hittite wives.1773 Ishmael d. (137. Jacob 63).1759 Jacob (77) gets the Blessing, and flees to Padanaram.1758 His “servitude” begins.1752 His marriages.1751 Reuben b.1750 Simeon b.1749 Levi and Dan b.1748 Judah and Naphtali b.1747 Gad b.1746 Asher and Issachar b.1745 Zebulun and Dinah (twins?) and Joseph b.1742 Jacob’s bargain about the cattle.1739 Jacob flees from Padan-aram.1738 Jacob meets Esau.1737 Jacob at Succoth.1736 Jacob comes to Shechem.(1732-1727) (The six years of “Jacob’s trouble” in the Land.)1732 Dinah raped. Another attempt to destroy the “Seed”, by raising the country against the “tribe”. (Cp. Ge 34:30; 35:5; and see Ap. 23.)1731 Jacob at Beth-el.1728 Rachel d. Benjamin b. Reuben forfeits the birthright to Joseph (17), to whom it rightly belonged. (Cp. 1 Ch 5:1,2.)1727 Joseph sold (18).1726 Jacob (110) joins his father Isaac (170) at Hebron (after a separation of thirty-three years).1717 Joseph (28) in Egypt. Interprets butler’s dream.1716 Isaac d. (180. Jacob 120. Joseph 29).1715 Joseph (30) interprets Pharaoh’s dream.1707 First year of the famine.1706 Second year of the famine. Jacob (130) goes down into Egypt. The 215 years of the sojourning in Egypt begin. (Half of the 430 years from Ge 12:4.)1705 Third year of the famine.1704 Fourth year of the famine.1703 Fifth year of the famine.1702 Sixth year of the famine.1701 Seventh year of the famine.1689 Jacob d. (147), after seventeen years in Egypt. (Joseph 56. Benjamin 39.)1635 Joseph d. (110).1612 Levi d. (137).1635-1571 Gap of sixty-four years from d. of Joseph to b. of Moses.1571 Moses b.1544 Joshua b. (Moses 27).1529 Caleb b.1491 The Exodus. 430 years from Ge 12:4, and 400 years from Ge 21:10.1490 The Tabernacle set up. This year the people should have entered the Land.1452 Miriam, Aaron, and Moses d.1451 Entry into the Land.1444 The “Wars of the Lord” end (Jos 14:15). Caleb 85. Joshua hands over the leadership to Eleazar.1444-1443 First Sabbatic year.1434 Joshua d. (110).1431 First servitude. Mesopotamia 81423 Othniel. 401393-1392 First Jubilee year (Anno Dei reckoning).1383 Second servitude. Moab 181365 Ehud. 801285 Third servitude. Canaan 201265 Barak. 401225 Fourth servitude. Midian 71218 Gideon. 401178 Tola. 231155 Jair. 41151 Jephthah. 6 (*) 1145 Ibzan. 71138 Elon. 101128 Abdon. 81120 Fifth servitude. Philistine. 401080 Eli, 40 years.1040 Samuel, 40 years.1020 The “Reformation”. 1 Sa 7.1000 Ends the 45 years of Ac 13:20, and 490 years from the year they should have entered into the Land.1000 THE KINGDOM. Saul, 40 years.990 David b.974 David’s first anointing (16).960 David, 40 years. Second anointing (30).953 David’s third anointing (37).920 Solomon, 40 years.917 The Temple begun. 573 years after the Exodus. (Cp. Ac 13:20-23).910 The Temple finished.897 At the end of twenty years, the “two houses” finished (1 Ki 9:10).880 The Disruption. Rehoboam, 17 years.863 Abijam, 3 years.860 Asa, 41 years.819 Jehoshaphat, 25 years.796 Jehoram’s accession.794 Jehoshaphat d.789 Ahaziah’s accession.788 Ahaziah slain by Jehu.788-782 Gap, 6 years. Athaliah’s usurpation.782 Jehoash, 41 years.743 Amaziah, 29 years.714 Amaziah ends.714-701 Gap, 13 years.701 Uzziah, 52 years.687 Hosea’s prophecies begin?649 Gap. One year between Uzziah’s death and Jotham’s accession.647 Jotham, 16 years.634 Micah’s prophecies begin?632 Ahaz, 16 years.617 Hezekiah’s accession.616 Ahaz d.615 Hosea ends?613 Siege of Samaria begun.611 Samaria taken and Israel ends.603 Sennacherib invades Judah in the fourteenth year of Hezekiah (2 Ki 18:13).588 Manasseh, 55 years.584 Isaiah killed? (Cp. Isa 7:6).533 Amon, 2 years.531 Josiah, 31 years.530 Zephaniah?518 Jeremiah’s prophecies begin in Josiah’s thirteenth year.513 The Book “found” and the Passover in Josiah’s eighteenth year.500 Jehoahaz, 3 months.499 Jehoiakim, 11 years.497 Nebuchadnezzar’s first siege of Jerusalem.496 Jehoiakim’s fourth year, Nebuchadnezzar’s first. Daniel taken to Babylon.495 Jehoiakim burns the roll.494 Nebuchadnezzar’s second year. His dream of the Great Image. Daniel interprets.489 Jehoiachin, 3 months. Captivity begins in Nebuchadnezzar’s eighth year (second siege).488 Zedekiah, 11 years.484 Ezekiel’s prophecies begin.478 Nebuchadnezzar’s third siege of Jerusalem begins.477 Jerusalem taken and Temple destroyed in Nebuchadnezzar’s nineteenth year. Jeremiah ends.473 Punishment for the murder of Gedaliah (Jer 52:30).462 Ezekiel’s last dated prophecy.461-454 Nebuchadnezzar’s seven years of “madness”.454 Twentieth year of Asteiages (Artaxerxes). The commandment to rebuild Jerusalem. (See 50. VI, VII. 5, 12.) Nehemiah’s first visit to Jerusalem.452 Nebuchadnezzar d. after forty-four years’ reign.452 Evil-Merodach. Jehoiachin’s captivity ends.446 Nabonidus.429 Belshazzar, 3 years.426 Belshazzar slain. “Darius the Median” (Asteiages) takes the kingdom. Cyrus (Asteiages’ son) issues the Decree to rebuild the Temple. Daniel’s vision of the “seventy sevens”. The “seven sevens” begin. Foundations of the Temple laid. Nehemiah’s second visit to Jerusalem.421 Cyrus ends.418 Cambyses makes Nehemiah governor. Nehemiah’s third visit to Jerusalem.411 Darius Hystaspis re-enacts the decree of Cyrus.410 Haggai and Zechariah begin. The temple superstructure commenced and carried on to completion, from the second to the sixth year of Darius.408 Zechariah’s last date.405 The Temple finished and dedicated. The “seven sevens” end, and the “sixty-two sevens” commence.404 The Passover.403 Ezra’s last date : 1 st of Nisan.375? Darius Hystaspis d. (according to Herodotus, 63 years old).4 The Nativity.
A.D.0 The Common Era of A.D.29 The “sixty-nine sevens” end with the “cutting off of the Messiah”, 483 years from the “going forth of the commandment to build Jerusalem” in 454 B.C.69 Destruction of Jerusalem by Titus.

Appendix 51
MONEY AND COINS, WEIGHTS AND MEASURES

I. MONEY AND COINS.

1. Dram (Old Testament).

1. ‘Adarkon (Heb.). (1 Ch 29:7. Ezr 8:27.)

2. Darkemon (the Persian Daric). (Ezr 2:69. Ne 7:70,71,72.) A gold coin, value £1 28 0 d., or $5.28.

2. Farthing (New Testament).

1. Kodrantes (Mt 5:26. Mk 12:42). A bronze coin, value 3/4 of a farthing, or 3/8 of a cent.

2. Assarion (Mt 10:29. Lk 12:6). A bronze coin, value about 3 farthings, or 1.5 cents.

3. Mite (New Testament). (Mk 12:42. Lk 12:59; 21:2.) Lepton, a copper coin, value 3/8 of a farthing, or 3/16 of
a cent.

4. Penny (New Testament), so rendered in fourteen of the sixteen occurrences of Denarion. A silver coin, value 8
1/2 d., or 17 cents. Generally plural, is twice rendered “pennyworth.” (Mk 6:37. Jn 6:7.)

5. Piece of Money (Mt 17:27). Gr. Stater, a silver coin, value 28. 8 d., or 64 cents.

6. Piece of Silver. In Old Testament usually = a shekel of silver (see Weights), or may mean uncoined silver in 1 Sa
2:36. Ps 68:30. Jos 24:32. Job 42:11.

In New Testament:—

1. Argurion (Mt 26:15; 27:3,5,9. Ac 19:19). Value 28. 8 d., or 64 cents.

2. Drachme (Lk 15:8,9). Cp. IV, above. Value 8 1/2 d., or 17 cents.

7. Silver Piece. Gr. Argurion (Mt 27:6). See VI. 1, above.

8. Tribute Money. (New Testament.) (Mt 17:24.)

1. Didrachmon, a double Drachme, see VI. 2, above. A silver coin, value 18. 4 d., or 32 cents.

2. Kensos (Mt 22:19). Latin census = a poll-tax.

II. WEIGHTS.

1. Bekah. Heb. bek’a (Ex 38:26) = half a shekel (see V, below). Weight about 5 drams, Avoirdupois.

2. Gerah. Heb. gerath (Ex 30:13. Lev 27:25. Nu 3:47). Weight 1/20 of a shekel, or about 1/2 a dram,
Avoirdupois.

3. Maheh. Heb. maneh (Eze 45:12). See “Pound” (IV, 1), below.

4. Pound.

1. Maneh. Heb. maneh (1 Ki 10:17. Ezr 2:69. Ne 7:71,72). Weight = 100 shekels (cp. 1 Ki 10:17 with 2 Ch 9:16).

2. Mna. Gr. Lat. mina (Lk 19:13,16,16,18,18,20,24,24,25). Weight about 16 ozs., Avoirdupois.

3. Litra. Gr. Lat. libra (Jn 12:3; 19:39). Weight about 12 ozs., Avoirdupois.

5. Shekel. Heb. shekel (Ex 30:13, and frequently). Weight about 10 drams, Avoirdupois. There is a shekel of the
sanctuary (Ex 30:13), and the shekel of the king (2 Sa 14:26). Their precise relative weights unknown.

6. Talent (Ex 25:39, and frequently).

1. Heb. kikkar. Weight = 3,000 shekels of the sanctuary (Ex 38:25,26). Talent of the king = 158 lb. Troy.
Talent of gold = 131 lb. Troy. About £6,150; $290.85. Talent of silver = 117 lb. Troy.

2. Gr. talantos (in N.T.). About 114 lb. Avoirdupois.

III. MEASURES.

1. DISTANCE.

1. Day’s Journey. About 30 English miles.

2. Furlong. Gr. stadios (Lk 24:13. Jn 6:19; 11:18. Rv 14:20; 21:16). About 202 English yards.

3. Mile. Gr. mileon (Mt 5:41). About 1,616 English yards.

4. Pace. Heb. za’ad (2 Sa 6:13). Rather more than an English yard.

5. Sabbath day’s journey. About 2,000 English yards.

2. LENGTH.

1. Cubit. Length still in dispute.

a. Heb. ‘ammah. Ranging between 21 and 25 inches.
b. Heb. yomed (only in Jdg 3:16).

2. Fathom. Gr. orguia. The length of the arms outstretched = about six feet (Ac 27:28).

3. Reed. Heb. kaneh (Eze 40 and 41). About 6 cubits, or about 3 1/2 English yards.

4. Span. Heb. zereth (Ex 28:16; 39:9. 1 Sa 17:4. Isa 40:12. Eze 43:13). About half a cubit, or about 10 1/2
inches.

3. CAPACITY.

1. Bath. Heb. bath (1 Ki 7:26,38. 2 Ch 2:10; 4:5. Ezr 7:22. Isa 5:10. Eze 45:10,11,14). About 6 English gallons
(liquid).

2. Bushel. Gr. modios (Mt 5:15. Mk 4:21. Lk 11:33). About 1 peck English.

3. Cab. Heb kab (2 Ki 6:25). About 1 quart, English dry measure.

4. Cor. Heb. kor (Eze 45:14). About 8 bushels.

5. Ephah. Heb. ‘ephah (Ex 16:36. Lev 5:11; 6:20; 19:36. Nu 5:15; 28:5. Jdg 6:19. Ru 2:17. 1 Sa 1:24; 17:17. Isa
5:10. Eze 45:10,11,13,24; 46:5,7,11,14. Am 8:5. Zec 5:6,8). About 3 pecks, English.

6. Firkin. Gr. metretes (Jn 2:6). About 9 gallons, English liquid measure.

7. Half homer. Heb. letheh (Hos 3:2). About 4 bushels.

8. Hin. Heb. hin (Ex 29:40; 30:24. Lev 19:36; 23:13. Nu 15:4,5,6,7,9,10; 28:5,7,14. Eze 4:11; 45:24;
46:5,7,11,14). About 1 gallon, liquid measure.

9. Homer. Heb. chomer (Lev 27:16. Nu 11:32. Isa 5:10. Eze 45:11,11,11,13,13,14,14. Hos 3:2) = 10 ephahs.
Cp. No. 12. See No. 5, above. About 8 bushels, English.

10. Log. Heb. log (Lev 14:10,12,15,21,21). About 2/3 of a pint, liquid measure.

11. Measure. The rendering of six Hebrew and four Greek words:

1. ‘eyphah (Dt 25:14,15. Pr 20:10. Mic 6:10), measure. See No. 5, above.
2. Cor. Heb. kor (1 Ki 4:22; 5:11. 2 Ch 2:10; 27:5. Ezr 7:22). See No. 4, above.
3. Madad. Used of any hollow measure: of capacity as well as length = to mete out.
4. Mesurah (Lev 19:35. 1 Ch 23:29. Eze 4:11,16). A measure of liquids.
5. Se’ah (Ge 18:6. 1 Sa 25:18. 1 Ki 18:32. 2 Ki 7:1,16,18. Isa 27:8). About 1 peck.
6. Shalish (Ps 80:5. Isa 40:12) = a third. Probably the third part of an ephah. See No. 5, above.
7. Batos (Gr.), same as Heb. bath (Lk 16:6). About 6 gallons (liquid).
8. Koros (Gr.), same as Heb. cor (Lk 16:7). See No. 4, above.
9. Saton (Gr.), same as Heb. se’ah (Mt 13:33. Lk 13:21.) See No. 7, above.
10. Choenix (Gr.), (Rv 6:6). An Attic dry measure: the daily allowance of corn for a slave, about 1 quart
(dry).

12. Omer. Heb. ‘omer (Ex 16:16,18,22,32,33,36). The 1/10 of ephah. Cp. Eze 45:11.

13. Tenth deal. Heb. ‘isaron (Ex 16:36; 29:40. Lev 14:10,21; 23:13,17; 24:5. Nu 15:4,6,9; 28:9,13,20,28;
29:3,4,9,10,14,15). About 1/2 a gallon (dry).

IV. TIME.

1. Beginning of the Watches (Lam 2:19). About 9 p.m.

2. Cock-crowing (Mk 13:35). There were two: one after midnight, and one before dawn. Both are mentioned
in Mk 14:30. The latter was “THE” cock-crowing.

3. Cool of the Day (Ge 3:8). From about 2 to about 6 p.m.

4. Day. Reckoned from sunset to sunset.

5. Eleventh Hour (Mt 20:6,9). About 5 p.m.

6. Fourth Watch (Mt 14:25). From about 3 a.m. till about 6 a.m.

7. Heat of the Day (Ge 18:1). From about 10 a.m. till 2 p.m.

8. Middle Watch (Jdg 7:19). From about midnight till about 3 a.m.

9. Morning Watch (Ex 14:24). From about 3 a.m. till 6 a.m.

10. Night. The natural night was from sunset to sunrise.

11. Ninth hour (Mt 20:5; 27:45,46. Mk 15:33,34. Lk 23:44. Ac 3:1; 10:3,30). About 3 p.m.

12. Second Watch (Lk 12:38). About 9 to 12 p.m.

13. Seventh hour (Jn 4:52). About 1 p.m.

14. Sixth hour (Mt 20:5; 27:45. Mk 15:33. Lk 1:26,36; 23:44. Jn 4:6; 19:14. Ac 10:9). About 12 midday.

15. Tenth hour (Jn 1:39). About 4 p.m.

16. Third hour (Mt 20:3. Mk 15:25. Ac 2:15; 23:23). About 9 a.m.

17. Third Watch (Lk 12:38). From about midnight till about 3 a.m.

18. Watch. Three hours.

Old Testament. First Watch, 9 p.m. till midnight. Middle Watch, midnight till 3 a.m. Morning Watch, 3
a.m. till 6 a.m.

New Testament. First Watch, 6 p.m. to 9 p.m. Second Watch, 9 p.m. to midnight. Third Watch, midnight
to 3 a.m. Fourth Watch, 3 a.m. to 6 a.m.

Appendix 52
PROPER NAMES

A great latitude has to be allowed in any attempt to indicate the correct pronunciation of the Proper Names in the
Bible. Our knowledge of their original pronunciation is imperfect; and names have undergone changes in becoming
transliterated from one language into another. Custom also has in many cases sanctioned a pronunciation which, while
incorrect according to the original languages, is yet so universal that any interference with it would be pedantic, not to
say intolerable. Again, we sometimes meet with a varying pronunciation of the same name in different English-speaking
countries. Thus, an exhaustive list of Biblical names, with a perfect and final system of syllabification and pronunciation,
is not practicable.

There are, however, a certain number of names too uncommon for custom to have fixed their pronunciation, and
hence, generally acknowledged to present difficulties to the general reader. Some 250 of these are here gathered
together, and presented in alphabetical order, with such division of syllables and accentuation as approximate to the
original tongues, and will serve as a guide to their more or less correct pronunciation.

The hyphen ( -) marks the division of syllables, and the accent ( ‘) the syllable to be emphasized. It has been thought
better to present them in an Appendix, and in one list, than to burden the text with an innumerable variety of hyphens
and accents, which, while attempting to remove one difficulty, would introduce a greater.

Ab-i-sha’lom
A-cel’da-ma
A-chai’a
A-cha’i-cus
Ada’dah
A-da’iah
Ad-i-tha’im
A-do’ni-be’zek
A-do’ni-ze’dek
Ad’ram-me’lech
Ad-ra-myt’ti-um
A-gee’
A-has-u-e’rus
A-hi-e’zer
A-hi-sa’mach
A-hi-sha’har
A-hi-tho’phel
A’iah
A’lmon-dib-la-tha’im
A’lam-me’lech
Am-mi-shad’dai
Am-mi-za’bad
A-na’har’ath
A’nam-me’lech
A-pel’les
A-phar’sa-chites
A-phar
A-phar-sath’chites
Ap’phi-a
Aq’ui-la
Ar’che-vites
A-re-o-pa’gus
Ar-is-to-bu’lus
Ar-tax-er’xes
A-sar-e’lah
As-nap’per
A-syn’cri-tus
Ba-ase’iah
Bak’bu-kiah
Ba’rach-el
Be-el-ia’da
Be’er-la-hai’-ro’i
Bel-te-shaz’zar
Ber-ni’ce
Be-ro’dach-ba’la-dan
Be-so’de-iah
Beth-bi’re-i
Bo’che-ru

Appendix 53
THE SIEGES OF JERUSALEM

The first occurrence of the name “Jerusalem”, as a city (*1), is in Jdg 1:8, and confirms the fact that the first
occurrence contains an epitome of its subsequent history. The history of the city has been a record of its sieges. No
fewer than twenty-seven go to complete the list. This number is striking in the light of Appendix No. 10; being
composed of 3 x 9, the factors being those of Divine completeness (3), and judgment (9) respectively ( = 33).

A cycle of ordinal completeness is marked by the 10 th and 20 th (2 x 10) sieges. These were the two characterized
by the destruction of the Temple by fire, which is accord with the number 10, being that of ordinal perfection. (See
Ap. 10.) Both also were foretold: the former by Jer. and Ezek.; the latter by our Lord.

Seven is the number of spiritual perfection, and it is worthy of note that the 7 th, 14 th (2 x 7), and the 21 st (3 x 7)
sieges were each the subject of Divine prophecy. Further, a 28 th (4 x 7) siege, yet future, is foretold in Zec 14, &c.
While 14 (2 x 7) of the sieges are recorded in Holy Scripture, 13 are recorded in profane history.

The following is a complete list of the sieges:

1. By the tribe of Judah against the Jebusites, about 1443 B.C. This was some 700 years before Rome was
founded. It was only partial, for in David’s reign we still find the Jebusites occupying the citadel (the
future Zion). The solemn words in Jdg 1:8, describing this first siege, vividly portray the after history of
the city.

2. By David against the Jebusites (2 Sa 5:6-10; 1 Ch 11:4-7), about 960 B.C.

3. By Shishak king of Egypt, against Rehoboam (1 Ki 14:25,26. 2 Ch 12:2-12), about 875 B.C. To this there was
only a feeble resistance; and the Temple was plundered.

4. By the Philistines, Arabians, and Ethiopians, against Jehoram (2 Ch 21:16,17), about 794 B.C. In this siege
the royal palace was sacked, and the Temple again plundered.

5. By Jehoash king of Israel, against Amaziah king of Judah (2 Ki 14:13,14), about 739 B.C. The wall was
partially broken down, and the city and Temple pillaged.

6. By Rezin king of Syria, and Pekah king of Israel, against Ahaz (2 Ch 28), about 630 B.C. The city held out,
but Ahaz sought the aid of Tiglath-Pileser king of Assyria, for whom he stripped the Temple.

7. By Sennacherib king of Assyria, against Hezekiah (2 Ki 24:10-16), about 603 B.C. In this case the siege was
raised by a Divine interposition, as foretold by Isaiah the prophet.

8. By Nebuchadnezzar king of Babylon, against Jehoiakim (2 Ch 36:6-7), about 496 B.C., when the Temple
was partly pillaged.

9. By Nebuchadnezzar again, against Jehoiachin (2 Ch 36:10), about 489 B.C., when the pillage of the
Temple was carried further, and 10,000 people carried away.

10. By Nebuchadnezzar, against Zedekiah (2 Ch 36:17-20), 478-477 B.C. In this case the Temple was burnt with
fire, and the city and the Temple lay desolate for fifty years.

11. By Ptolemy Soter king of Egypt, against the Jews, 320 B.C. More that 100,000 captives were taken to
Egypt.

12. By Antiochus the Great, about 203 B.C.

13. By Scopus, a general of Alexander, about 199 B.C., who left a garrison.

14. By Antiochus IV, surnamed Epiphanes, 168 B.C. This was the worst siege since the 10 th. The whole city
was pillaged; 10,000 captives taken; the walls destroyed; the altar defiled; ancient manuscripts perished;
the finest buildings were burned; and the Jews were forbidden to worship there. Foretold Da 11.

15. By Antiochus V, surnamed Eupator, against Judas Maccabaeus, about 162 B.C. This time honorable terms
were made, and certain privileges were secured.

16. By Antiochus VII, surnamed Sidetes king of Syria, against John Hyrcanus, about 135 B.C.

17. By Hyrcanus (son of Alex. Jannaeus) and the priest Aristobulus. The siege was raised by Scaurus, one of
Pompey’s lieutenants, about 65 B.C.

18. By Pompey against Aristobulus, about 63 B.C. The machines were moved on the Sabbath, when the Jews
made no resistance. Only thus was it then reduced; 12,000 Jews were slain. [Antigonus, son of Aristobulus,
with a Parthian army, took the city in 40 B.C.; but there was no siege, the city was taken by a sudden
surprise.]

19. Herod with a Roman army besieged the city in 39 B.C. for five months.

20. By Titus, A.D. 69 (See Ap. 50. VI, p. 61). The second Temple (Herod’s) was burnt, and for fifty years the
city disappeared from history, as after the 10 th siege (Jer 20:5).

21. The Romans had again to besiege the city in A.D. 135 against the false Messiah, Bar-Cochebas, who had
acquired possession of the ruins. The city was obliterated, and renamed AElia Capitolina, and a temple
was erected to Jupiter. For 200 years the city passed out of history, no Jews being permitted to
approach it. This siege was foretold in Lk 19:43,44; 21:20-24.

22. After 400 years of so-called Christian colonization, through the country; thousands were massacred, and
the Church of the Holy Sepulchre was destroyed. The Emperor Heraclius afterwards defeated him, and
restored the city and the church.

23. The Caliph Omar, in A.D. 636-7, besieged the city against Heralius. It was followed by capitulation on
favorable terms, and the city passed into the hands of the Turks, in whose hands it remains to the present
day.

24. Afdal, the Vizier of the Caliph of Egypt, besieged the two rival factions of Moslems, and pillaged the city
in 1098.

25. In 1099 it was besieged by the army of the first Crusade.

26. In 1187 it was besieged by Saladin for seven weeks.

27. The wild Kharezmian Tartar hordes, in 1244, captured and plundered the city, slaughtering the monks and
priests.

28. There will be a 28 th according to Zec 14, which will be raised by Messiah, even as the 7 th was by
Jehovah.

*1 The king of Jerusalem had been mentioned in Jos 10:1, &c. but not the city as such.

Appendix 54
THE MOABITE STONE

This ancient monument was discovered by the Rev. F. Klein in 1868 at Diban (the Dibon of the O.T.) in Moab. The
inscription consists of thirty-four lines (the last two being undecipherable), and was written by Mesha king of Moab to
commemorate his successful revolt from the yoke of Israel, recorded in 2 Ki 1:1 and chapter 3; and to honor his god
Chemosh, to whom he ascribed his successes.

The writing is in the ancient Hebrew characters, which continued in use down to quite 140, 139 B.C., but was
gradually replaced by the modern square Hebrew characters which are in use to-day. The inscription is proved to be
genuine by the Bible account, the two throwing light on each other. See the notes on 2 Kings 3.

The following translation, by Dr. Neubauer, is taken from Records of the Past (New Series), Vol. II, pp. 200, &c.:

1. “I, Mesha son of Chemosh-Melech king of Moab, the Di-

2. bonite. My father reigned over Moab thirty years and I reign-

3. ed after my father. I made this monument to Chemosh at Korkhah. A monument of sal-

4. vation, for he saved me from all invaders, and let me see my desire upon all my enemies. Om-

5. ri [was] king of Israel, and he oppressed Moab many days, for Chemosh was angry with his

6. land. His son followed him, and he also said: I will oppress Moab. In my days Che[mosh] said;

7. I will see my desire on him and his house. And Israel surely perished for ever. Omri took the land of

8. Medeba (*1) and [Israel] dwelt in it during his days and half the days of his son (*2), altogether forty years.
But there dwelt in it

9. Chemosh in my days. I built Baal-Meon (*3) and made therein the ditches; I built

10. Kirjathaim (*4). The men of Gad dwelt in the land of Ataroth (*5) from of old, and built there the king of

11. Israel Ataroth; and I made war against the town and seized it. And I slew all the [people of]

12. the town, for the pleasure of Chemosh and Moab: I captured from thence the Arel (*6) of Dodah and tore

13. him before Chemosh in Kerioth (*7): And I placed therein the men of Sh (a)r(o)n, and the men

14. of M(e)kh(e)rth. And Chemosh said to me: Go, seize Nebo (*8) upon Israel; and

15. I went in the night and fought against it from the break of dawn till noon: and I took

16. it, and slew all, 7,000 men, [boys?], women, [girls?]

17. and female slaves, for to Ashtar-Chemosh I devoted them. And I took from it the Arels (*6) of Yahveh,
and tore them before Chemosh. And the king of Israel built

18. Jahaz (*9), and dwelt in it, while he waged war against me; Chemosh drove him out before me. And

19. I took from Moab 200 men, all chiefs, and transported them to Jahaz, which I took,

20. to add to it Dibon. I built Korkhah, the wall of the forests and the wall

21. of the citadel: I built its gates, and I built its towers. And

22. I built the house of Moloch, and I made sluices of the water-ditches in the middle

23. of the town. And there was no cistern in the middle of the town of Korkhah, and I said to all the people,
Make for

24. yourselves every man a cistern in his house. And I dug the canals for Korkhah by means of the prisoners

25. of Israel. I built Aroer (*10), and I made the road in [the province of] the Arnon. [And]

26. I built Beth-Bamoth (*11), for it was destroyed. I built Bezer (*12), for in ruins

27. [it was. And all the chiefs] of Dibon were 50, for all Dibon is subject; and I placed

28. one hundred [chiefs] in the towns which I added to the land: I built

29. Beth-Medeba and Beth-diblathaim (*13), and Beth-Baal-Meon (*14), and transported thereto the
[shepherds]?…

30. and the pastors] of the flocks of the land. And at Horonaim (*15) dwelt there

31. …And Chemosh said to me, Go down, make war upon Horonaim. I went down [and made war]

32. …And Chemosh dwelt in it during my days. I went up from thence…”

(*1) Nu 21:30; Isa 15:2. (*2) “son” = successor. (*3) Now, Tell M’ain, Nu 32:38. Jos 13:17. (*4) Nu 32:37. Jos
13:19. (*5) Nu 32:3. Jos 16:2. (*6) Arel, two lions, or, lion-like men (?) Cp. 2 Sa 23:20. (*7) Now, Khan el Kureitin
(?); Jer 48:24. Am 2:2. (*8) Nu 32:3,38. Isa 15:2. (*9) Isa 15:4. (*10) Now, ‘Ar’air, Dt 2:36; 3:12; 4:48. (*11) Nu
21:19. Isa 15:2. (A.V. “high places”), cp. Jos 13:17. (*12) Dt 4:43. (*13) Jer 48:22. (*14) Jos 13:17. Jer 48:23.
(*15) Isa 15:5. Jer 48:3,5,34.

Appendix 55

THE DYNASTY OF OMRI

Athaliah was thus the granddaughter of Omri, king of Israel (2 Chron. 22:20 ), and daughter of Jezebel. The marriage
between Jehoram and Athaliah was part of Satan’s design to introduce idolatry into Judah, so that Athaliah might do for
Judah what her mother Jezebel had done for Israel, and thus secure the same result.

Jehoshaphat began by strengthening himself against Israel (2 Ch 17:1), but married his son to the daughter (an
idolatress) of Ahab, the worst of Israel’s kings. The leaven worked, morally and politically; and was then used by Satan
for the destruction of the line by which “the seed of the woman” was to come into the world. See Ap. 23 and 25.

Jehoram, king of Judah, began by killing off all his brethren (2 Ch 21:4). The Arabians came and slew all his sons, save
the youngest, Ahaziah (2 Ch 22:1), called also Joash, Jehoahaz (2 Ch 21:17), and Azariah (2 Ch 22:6).

Athaliah slew all the sons of Ahaziah on his death (2 Ki 11:1. 2 Ch 22:10), or thought she did; but the infant Joash was
rescued.

Joash (called also Jehoash) was hid for six years, while the faithfulness of Jehovah’s word hung upon the Divine
preservation of that infant’s life. Hence Jehoiada’s text (2 Ch 23:3). See, on the whole subject, Ap. 23. And, note the
parallel in the history of England, by James I marrying his son Charles to (an idolatress) Henrietta of France, with similar
political results.

Appendix 56
PARALLEL PASSAGES OF THE HISTORICAL BOOKS

The following table, showing one hundred and eleven parallel passages between the books of Samuel and Kings on
the one hand, and the books of Chronicles on the other, will be useful.

1. It will show the mutual relation of the selections, and will enable the reader to find at a glance the corresponding
portions, and thus serve the purpose of ordinary and ready reference.

2. It will help to exhibit the special design of the two great principles governing the whole of these books. In the
former (Samuel and Kings) we have the history from the exoteric point of view; in the latter (Chronicles) we have,
for the most part, the same history, but from the esoteric point of view. In the former we have the events viewed
from the human standpoint, as they would be seen by the natural eye; in the latter we have the same events viewed
from the Divine standpoint, and as seen and understood by the spiritual mind.

Consequently, while in the former we have the event in its historical aspect; in the latter we have it in its moral
aspect. In the former we have the historic record; in the latter we have the Divine reason for it, or the Divine
“words” and judgment on it. (Cp. Saul’s death, 1 Sa 31:6, and 1 Ch 10:13,14).

It is this principle which determines the amount of literary space accorded to the same historic event. For example:
in the former books we have three chapters (or 88 verses) given to the secular events of Hezekiah’s reign (2 Ki 8; 19,
and 20), and only three verses (2 Ki 18:4-6) given to his great religious reformation. In Chronicles this is exactly
reversed. Three chapters (or 84 verses) are devoted to his reformation (2 Ch 29-31), while one chapter (or 32 verses)
suffices for the secular events of his reign.

In the same way Jehoshaphat’s three alliances with Ahab can be spiritually and morally understood only from 2 Ch 17,
of which there is not a word in Kings.

3. This principle determines also the order in which the events are treated. In the books of Kings the events are
recorded in chronological order; while in Chronicles this order is sometimes ignored, in order to bring the moral causes
or consequences of the two events together, for the purposes of comparison or contrast. (Cp. the list of David’s
mighty men; David’s numbering the People, and the account of the plague).

4. The object of these two great principles is further seen in the fact that in the design of the former is to give the
whole history of Israel’s kingdom complete; while the design of the latter is to give only that which pertains to the
house of David and the tribe of Judah, as being founded on Jehovah’s covenant in 2 Sa 7 and 1 Ch 17.

5. The conclusion is that the book of Chronicles is entirely independent of the books of Samuel and Kings; and that
the differences between them are independent and designed. The critics create their own difficulties by first assuming
that the books ought to be alike; and then, because they are not what they are assumed to be, treating the variations
as “discrepancies,” or “corruptions of the text:, instead of as being full of Divine instruction “written for our learning”.

The following is the table:

1 Sa 27. 1 Ch 12:1-7.
29:1-3. 12:19-22.
31. 10.
2 Sa 5:1-5. 11:1-3.
5:6-10. 11:4-9.
5:11-16. 14:1-7.
5:17-25. 14:8-17.
6:1-11. 13.
6:12-23. 15 & 16.
7. 17.
8:18.
10. 19.
11. 20:1.
12:29-31. 20:1-3.
23:8-39. 11:10-47.
24:1-9. 21:1-6.
24:1-9. 27:23,24.
24:10-17. 21:7-17.
24:18-24. 21:18-22:1.
1 Ki 2:1. 23:1.
2:1-4. 28:20,21.
2:10-12. 29:23-30.
2:46. 2 Ch 1:1.
3:4-15. 1:2-13.
5. 2.
6. 3:1-14; 4:9.
7:15-21. 3:15-17.
7:23-26. 4:2-5.
7:38-46. 4:6,10,17.
7:47-50. 4:18-22.
7:51. 5:1.
8. 5:2-7:10.
9:1-9. 7:11-22.
9:10-28. 8.
10:1-13. 9:1-12.
10:14-25. 9:13-24.
10:26-29. 9:25-28; 1:14-17.
11:41-43. 9:29-31.
12:1-19. 10.
12:21-24. 11:1-4.
12:25. 11:5-12.
12:26-31. 11:13-17.
14:22-24. 12:1.
14:25-28. 12:2-12.
14:21,29-31. 12:13-16.
15:1. 13:1,2.
15:6. 13:2-21.
15:7,8. 13:22; 14:1.
15:11,12. 14:1-5.
15:13-15. 15:16-18.
15:16-22. 16:1-6.
15:23,24. 16:11-14.
22:1-20,44. 18.
22:41-43. 17:1; 20:31-33.
22:45. 20:34.
22:47-49. 20:35-37.
22:50. 21:1.
2 Ki 1:1; 3:4,5. 20:1-3.
8:16-19. 21:2-7.
8:20-22. 21:8-15.
8:23,24. 21:18-20.
8:25-27. 22:1-4.
8:28,29; 9:1-28. 22:5-7,9.
10:11-14. 22:8.
11:1-3. 22:10-12.
11:4-20. 23.
11:21; 12:1-3. 24:1-3.
12:6-16. 24:4-14.
12:17,18. 24:23,24.
12:19-21. 24:25-27.
14:1-6. 25:1-4.
14:7. 25:11-16.
14:8-14. 25:17-24.
14:17-20. 25:25-28.
14:21,22; 15:1-4. 26:1-15.
15:6,7,27,28. 26:22,23.
15:32-35. 27:1-8.
15:38. 27:9.
16:1,2. 28:1,2.
16:3,4,6. 28:2-8.
16:7. 28:16-19.
15:29. 28:20.
16:8-18. 28:21-25.
16:19,20. 28:26,27.
18:1-3. 29:1,2.
18:13. Isa 36:1.
18:14-16. 2 Ch 32:2-8.
20:1-11. 2 Ch 32:24.

Isa 38.
20:12-19. Isa 39.
18:17-37. 2 Ch 32:9-19.

Isa 36:2-22.
19:1-5. 2 Ch 32:20.

Isa 37:1-4.
19:6,7. Isa 37:6,7.
19:8-19. 2 Ch 32:17.

Isa 37:8-20.
19:20-37. 2 Ch 32:21.

Isa 37:21-38.
20:20,21. 2 Ch 32:32,33.
21:1-16. 33:1-9.
21:17,18. 33:18-20.
21:19-26. 33:21-25.
22:1,2. 34:1-7.
22:3-20. 34:8-28.
23:1-3. 34:29-32.
23:21-23. 35:1-19.
23:24-26. 34:33.
23:28-30. 35:20-27.
23:30-33. 36:1-3.
23:34-37. 36:4,5.
24:8,9. 36:9.
24:15-17. 36:10.
24:18,19. 36:11,12.
24:20. 36:13-16.
25:8-21. 36:18-21.

Appendix 57
THE GENEALOGY OF THE PERSIAN KINGS

The main sources of information on this subject are Herodotus, Xenophon, Ctesias, Nicolas of Damascus (all B.C.); and
Arrian (cent. 2 A.D.). The writers of a former generation were occupied in unraveling and piecing together the varying
accounts of these ancient historians without the knowledge of the still more ancient Inscriptions recently discovered,
which were caused to be written by the persons concerned in the events recorded.

In 1846 Major (afterward Sir Henry) Rawlinson published a complete translation of the trilingual Persian text on the
isolated rock of Behistun, (or more correctly Bahistun) which rises 1,700 feet out of the Plain, on the high road from
Babylonia to the East; in which DARIUS HYSTASPIS gives his own genealogy.

This famous rock (of which a view is given on page 82 by the kind permission of Messrs. Longmans & Co., the
publishers of Canon Rawlinson’s Memoir of Major-General Sir H.C. Rawlinson) derives its name from the village of
Bisitun or Bisutun, near its foot. It is on the high road from Baghdad to Teheran, about sixty-five miles from Hamadan
(on the site of the ancient Ecbatana). On this rock, on a prepared surface about 500 feet from the level of the plain,
and most difficult of access, DARIUS HYSTASPIS caused to be carved the principal events of his reign; and he
commences with an account of his genealogy.

The following is the translation of the Persian text (*1):—

§ I. “I am Darius, the great king, the king of kings, the king of Persia, the king of the provinces, the son of
Hystaspes, the grandson of Arsames the Achaemenian.

§ II. (Thus) saith Darius the king: My father is Hystaspes; the father of Hystaspes was Arsames; the father of
Arsames was Arkyaramnes; the father of Ariyaramnes was [Teispes]; the father of Teispes was Achaemenes.

§ III. (Thus) saith Darius the king: On that account are we called Achaemenians; from antiquity are we
descended; from antiquity hath our race been kings.

§ IV. (Thus) saith Darius the king: Eight of my race were kings before (me); I am the ninth (*2). In two lines
(*3) have we been kings”, &c.

It must be noted that the confusion which has hitherto been experienced arises from the fact that appellatives have
been mistaken for proper names; to say nothing of the confusion arising from their transliteration or translation into
other languages. These appellatives are, like Pharaoh and Abimelech, the general titles of a line of kings, such as the
modern Czar, Sultan, Shah, &c. Hence

AHASUERUS means “the Mighty”, and “is the name, or rather the title, of four Median and Persian monarchs” (Kitto,
Bib. Encycl. I, p. 91). “In every case the identification of the person named is a matter of controversy”. See The Encycl.
Brit., 11 th (Cambridge) edn., vol. i, p. 429.

ARTAXERXES means Great King, or Kingdom, and is synonymous with Artachshast (Arta = Great, and Kshatza =
Kingdom, preserved in the modern “Shah”). According to Prideaux he is identified with the Ahasuerus of Est 1:1 (vol. i,
p. 306).

DARIUS means the Restrainer (Her. VI. 98); or, according to Professor Sayce, the Maintainer. DARIUS “appears to be
originally an appellative meaning ‘king’, ‘ruler'”, (Herbelot, Biblioth. Orient., Article ‘Dara’); Herodotus (VI. 98) renders it
Erxeies = Coercer. “It was assumed as his throne-name by Ochus ( = Darius Nothus), son and successor of Artaxerxes
Longimanus (Ctesias, de Reb. Pers., 48, 57, Muller)”. See Kitto, Bib. Cycl., vol. i, p. 625. XERXES, in his inscription at
Persepolis, actually calls himself “DARIUS”; one paragraph begi 1000 nning “XERXES the great king,” and the next
beginning “DARIUS the king.” This is why DARIUS HYSTASPIS is thus called, to denote him as DARIUS the son of
HYSTASPES; and to distinguish him from “Darius the Mede”, who was ASTYGES his grandfather.

ASTYAGES.

is the Persian monarch with which this Appendix is concerned. According to Herodotus, ASTYAGES was the son of
CYAXARES, who was the son of PHRAORTES (II), who was the son of DEIOKES (Bk. I. 73), who, again, was the son of
PHRAORTES (I). (Bk. I. 96.) In the genealogy given by CYRUS on the Cuneiform Cylinder, he calls his great-grandfather
TEISPES (see below). This TEISPES is to be identified with TEISPES the son of ARCHAEMENES in the Behistun Rock
genealogy of DARIUS HYSTASPIS.

The ACHAEMENES of DARIUS, identified with DEIOKES of Herodotus (I. 96), was the real founder of the Achaemenian
dynasty of which Darius speaks, although his father (PHRAORTES I) was the first of the line. Herodotus describes him
(DEIOKES) as a man “famous for wisdom”, of great ambition, “aiming at the aggrandisement of the Medes and his own
absolute power” (I. 96).

PHRAORTES I. would therefore be the first of the eight kings before DARIUS HYSTASPIS, who speaks of himself as the
ninth. See translation given above.

ARSAMES.

As the grandfather of DARIUS HYSTASPIS, he is (according to the Behistun Inscription) to be identified with the
ASTYAGES of Herotodus. At the close of the Lydio-Median War “Syannesis the Cilician and Labynetus (or Nabonnedus) the
Babylonian (identified by Prideaux, vol. i, p. 82 note, and pp. 135, 136, 19 th edn., with Nebuchadnezzar) persuaded
ALYATTES to give his daughter ARYENIS in marriage to ASTYAGES, son of KYAXARES” (Her. 1. 74). Of this marriage came
HYSTASPES and DARIUS his son.

CYRUS.

In the Cuneiform Cylinder account of the capture of Babylon, CYRUS states:—

“I am CYRUS the king … the great king, the mighty king, king of Tintir (Babylon), king of Sumir, and Akkad,
king of the regions of the earth, the son of CAMBYSES the great king, king of the city of Anzan, grandson of
CYRUS, the great king, king of the city of Anzan, great-grandson of TEISPES, the great king of the city of
Anzan, of the ancient seed of royalty, whose dominion (reign, i.e. of Cyrus himself) Bel and Nebo had exalted
according to the beneficence of their hearts” (E. Wallis Budge, Babylonian Life and History, p. 87).

Here wa have the statement of Cyrus that his father was known as CAMBYSES, his grandfather as CYRUS, and his
great-grandfather under the name (or title), common to the Behistun Inscription and the Cylinder alike, of TEISPES.

TEISPES.

If TEISPES’ grandson was ARSAMES (according to the Behistun Inscription), and this TEISPES and the TEISPES of Cyrus’s
Cylinder are one and the same, — then, it follows that the CAMBYSES of the Cylinder and the ARSAMES of the Inscription
must be one and the same person, well known under different names, titles, or appellatives (*4).

Moreover, if the TEISPES of the Behistun Inscription and the one of the Cylinder of Cyrus are to be identified with
the PHRAORTES (II) of Herodotus (I. 73), then the grandson of this PHRAORTES (II) must be ASTYAGES.

Consequently we have, under these three names, titles, or appellatives, from Greek, Median, and Persian sources,
three persons, called by Herodotus ASTYAGES, by Daruis ARSAMES, and by Cyrus CAMBYSES (*5), who are in reality one
and the same. But, if the father of CYRUS was CAMBYSES, by Esther (see the Table of the Genealogy, below), then it
follows that not only does CAMBYSES = ARSAMES = ASTYAGES, but = also the AHASUERUS of the book of Esther (Prideaux
i, p. 306).

Therefore in the presence of all these identifications from independent sources and authorities, we have:—all one
and the same person.

We now give the Genealogy, according to the Inscription of DARIUS HYSTASPIS on the Behistun rock, referred to
above. The names in large capitals are the Greek names given by HERODOTUS. Those in small capitals are the
corresponding Persian names as given by DARIUS HYSTASPIS on the Behistun rock, and by CYRUS on his Cylinder; while
the names in ordinary small type are the appellatives.

THE LINE OF THE PERSIAN KINGS ACCORDING TO THE ROCK OF BEHISTUN, IN PERSIA, SHOWING THE INSCRIPTION OF DARIUS HYSTASPIS (see pages 79-81).

(*1) For full particulars see the handsome volume published by the Trustees of the British Museum, The Sculptures
and Inscription of Darius the Great on the Rock of Behistun, in Persia. London, 1907. (Price 21 S.)

(*2) We have indicated this enumeration by placing the figures against the names on p. 81.

(*3) The “two lines” are the Lydian and the Medo-Persian, as shown in the Table on p. 81.

(*4) “Dareios the son of Hystaspes, who traces his descent through Arsames and Ariaramnes to Teispes the son of
Akhaemenes probably refers to the same Teispes” (Sayce, Ancient Empires of the East, p. 243).

(*5) “The names Kyros and Kambyses seem to be of Elamite derivation. Strabo, indeed, says that Kyros was
originally called Agradates, and took the name of Kurus or Kyros from the river that flows past Pasargadoe”
(Sayce, id. p. 243). Cyrus and Cambyses both seem to be territorial titles rather than names.

(*6) Herodotus says the ancestors of Candaules reigned for twenty-two generations, covering a period of 505
years (I. 7).

(*7) This marriage resulted in the birth of Cyrus, in fulfillment of Isa 44:25-45:4. And the part taken by Esther
and Mordecai in his training, explains all that we read of Cyrus in Ezra and Nehemiah.

(*8) Darius, in giving his own direct line, omits the names of Phaortes I, Cyrus, and Cambyses II, but he includes
them in the numbering of his eight predecessors. There was a still later “Cyrus” (the Cyrus of Xenophon). See
Her. VII. 11.

(*9) When Darius (Hyst.) says “in two lines we have been kings”, he must refer to the Lydian and Medo-Persian
lines.

Appendix 58
THE HARMONY OF THE EZRA-NEHEMIAH HISTORY

Appendix 59
THE TWELVE GATES OF JERUSALEM
(Nehemiah, chs. 3 and 12)

1. The Valley Gate (2:13; 3:13). Cp. 2 Ch 26:9.

2. The Gate of the Fountain (2:14; 3:15; 12:37), on Ophel at the Gihon spring (that mentioned in 2 Ki 25:4. Jer 39:4).

3. The Sheep Gate (3:1; 12:39). North of the Temple.

4. The Fish Gate (3:3; 12:39). Cp. 2 Ch 33:14. Zep 1:10.

5. The Old Gate (3:6; 12:39). Cp. 2 Ch 33:14, and 2 Ki 22:14, “college”. Called also the “First Gate” (Zec 14:10).

6. The Dung Gate (2:14; 3:14; 12:31). Probably same as Harsith Gate (Jer 19:2); sometimes rendered the Gate of Potsherds, from heres, a potter’s vessel. (N.B. Better = Pottery Gate) Leading to Hinnom. See Ap. 68 VIII, where the positions of the gates differ from the above and are more probably correct.

7. The Water Gate (3:25, 26).

8. The Horse Gate (3:28). Cp. 2 Ki 11:16. 2 Ch 23:15. Jer 31:40. South-east of the Temple, and close to the city and house of David.

9. The East Gate (3:29). East of the Temple, and connected with it.

10. The Gate of Miphkad (3:31). Probably north-east of Temple. ( = The Registry Gate.)

11. The Gate of Ephraim (8:16; 12:39). Cp. 2 Ch 25:23.

12. The Prison Gate (12:39), or Gate of the Guard (2 Ki 11:6,19).

(*1) In Ne 3. the first sixteen verses refer to Jerusalem, and the latter sixteen verses to Zion (or the city of David), south of Moriah. A study of these, and a comparison with ch. 12, will explain most of the difficulties connected with the topography of the city. See also the Plan of Zion, and Solomon’s buildings. Ap. 68, where the positions of the gates differ from the above and are more probably correct.

Appendix 60
THE NAME OF JEHOVAH IN THE BOOK OF ESTHER

It has been observed by many that no Divine Name or Title is found in the book of Esther. This is the more remarkable, since, in this short book of only 167 verses, the Median King is mentioned 192 times, his kingdom is referred to 26 times, and his name (*1) “Ahasuerus” is given 29 times.

Jehovah had declared (Dt 31:16-18) (*2), that if His People forsook Him, He would hide His face from them. Though the book reveals Him as overruling all, His Name is hidden. It is there for His People to see, not for His enemies to see or hear.

Satan was at work, using Haman to blot out the Nation, as once before he had used Pharaoh for the same purpose (see Ap. 23 and 25). Jehovah’s counsel must stand. His promise of Messiah, the coming “Seed” of the woman (Ge 3:15), must not fail. Therefore He must overrule all for the preservation of His People, and of the line by which that “Seed” was to come into the world.

His working was secret and hidden: hence, the name of “JEHOVAH” is hidden secretly four times in this book, and the name “EHYEH” (I am that I am) once. The Massorah (Ap. 30) has a rubric calling attention to the former fact; and (at least) (*3) three ancient manuscripts are known in which the Acrostic (*4) letters in all five cases are written Majuscular (or, larger than the others) so that they stand out boldly and prominently, showing the four consonant letters of the mane JeHoVaH. In the Hebrew <START HEBREW>y, h, w, h,<END HEBREW> or, as written in Hebrew from right to left, <START HEBREW>h, w, h, y<END HEBREW>. In English, L, O, R, D. Also the four letters of the fifth Acrostic, “EHYH”.

THE FOUR ACROSTICS.


The following phenomena are noticed in examining the four Acrostics which form the name “Jehovah”:

1. In each case the four words forming the Acrostic are consecutive.

2. In each case (except the first) the form a sentence complete in itself.

3. There are no other such Acrostics in the whole book, except the fifth Acrostic at the end; though there is
one other, forming another Divine Title, in Ps 96:11. (See note there.)

4. In their construction there are not two alike, but each one is arranged in a manner quite different from
the other three.

5. Each is uttered by a different speaker. The first by Memucan (1:20); the second by Esther (5:4); the third
by Haman (5:13); the fourth by the inspired writer (7:7).

6. The first two Acrostics are a pair, having the name formed by the Initial letters of the four words.

7. The last two are a pair, having the name formed by the Final letters of the four words.

8. The first and third Acrostics are a pair, having the name spelt backward.

9. The second and fourth are a pair, having the name spelt forward. They thus form an alternation:

A | Backward.
B | Forward.
A | Backward.
B | Forward.

10. The first and third (in which the name is formed backward) are a pair, being spoken by Gentiles.

11. The second and fourth (in which the name is spelt forward) are a pair, being spoken by Israelites. They
thus form an Alternation:—

C | Spoken by a Gentile (Memucan).
D | Spoken by an Israelite (Esther).
C | Spoken by a Gentile (Haman).
D | Spoken by and Israelite (the inspired writer).

12. The first and second form a pair, being connected with Queens and Banquets.

13. The third and fourth are a pair, being connected with Haman.

14. The first and fourth are a pair, being spoken concerning the Queen (Vashti) and Haman respectively.

15. The second and third are a pair, being spoken by the Queen (Esther) and Haman respectively. They thus
form and Introversion:—

E | Words concerning a Queen.
F | Words spoken by a Queen.
E | Words spoken by Haman.
F | Words concerning Haman.

16. It is remarkable also that, in the two cases where the name is formed by the initial letters, the facts
recorded are initial also, and are spoken of an even in which Jehovah’s overruling was initiated; while in
the two cases where the name is formed by the final letters, the events are final also, and lead rapidly up
to the end toward which Jehovah was working.

Thus in the two cases where the name is spelt backward (*5), Jehovah is seen overruling the counsels of Gentiles for
the accomplishment of His own; and where the name is spelt forward (*5), He is ruling directly in the interests of His
own People unknown to themselves.

THE FIRST ACROSTIC (1:26).

is formed by the initial letters, for the even was initial; and the name is spelt backward because Jehovah was turning
back and overruling the counsels of man. The whole clause reads as follows; the words forming the Acrostic being put
in italic type:—

“And when the king’s decree which he shall make, shall be published throughout all his empire, (for it is great,) all
the wives shall give to their husbands honor, both to great and small.” The four words we give, 1 st, in the Hebrew type
(with the Majuscular letters at the beginning of each word); 2 nd, with the Transliteration; and 3 rd, in English
paraphrase, reproducing the sentence in the word LORD with the initial letters backward:—

shall give to their husbands, both to great and small.”

THE SECOND ACROSTIC (5:4).

is formed, as before, by the initial letters, for Jehovah is initiating His action; but the name is spelt forward because
He is ruling and causing Esther to act; and take the first step, which was to lead up to so great an end.

The four words are:

this day be graced by the king and Haman.”


The name of Jehovah is read in the invitation, intimating that there would be a fourth at that banquet.”

THE THIRD ACROSTIC (5:13).

is the beginning of the end; for Haman had gone forth from that banquet “joyful and with a glad heart” (5:9) “that day.”
Yet it was to be his last. Hence the third Acrostic is formed with the final letters, for the end was approaching; and the
name is spelt backward, for Jehovah was overruling Haman’s gladness, and turning back Haman’s counsel.


The four words are:

The English may be freely rendered “Yet am I

THE FOURTH ACROSTIC (7:7).

is formed, like the third, by the final letters, for Haman’s end had come. But it is spelt forward like the first, for
Jehovah was ruling and bringing about the end He had determined. Haman saw there was cause for fear. A fourth is
there –Jehovah Himself! And when Esther pleads for her life (7:3), the king asks “Who is he and where is he?” which
brings in Jehovah’s own ineffable name — the Acrostic of the five final letters spelling in Hebrew “I am” (see the fifth
Acrostic below). Esther replies: “The adversary and enemy is this wicked Haman.” The king, filled with wrath, rises, and
goes forth into the palace garden. Haman, filled with fear, rises, “to make request for his life to Esther the queen, for he saw

that evil was determined against him

by the king.”

This was the climax, the end had come. Hence the name is spelt by the final letters:

Translated, as before, the Acrostic appears in English thus: “For he saw that there was

against him by the king.”


THE FIFTH ACROSTIC (7:5).

in this book does not form the name “Jehovah,” but the remarkable name E H Y H which means

“I AM.”

It is noted in some manuscripts by Majuscular letters, which have Massoretic authority (see Ap. 30). The Acrostic is
formed by the final letters, and the name is spelt backward. The king asks “Who is he, and where is he, that durst
presume in his heart to do so?”: i.e. to sell for destruction Queen Esther and her People. In saying this he unconsciously
gives the name of Him who came down to deliver His People out of the hand of Pharaoh, and had then come down to
deliver them again out of the hand of Haman, “the Jews’ enemy”, who, like Pharaoh, sought to destroy the whole
nation (cp. Ex 2:23-25 with 3:14, 15). The great enemy of the Messiah — the living Word — was seeking to destroy all
hope of His promised coming (Ge 3:15), and make void the repeated promise of Jehovah.

Ahasuerus only pointed to human agency, but his words point us to the Satanic agency which was behind it. The
Acrostic is in the final letters of his question “Who is he, and where is he?” Only the great “I am that I am” could know
that, and could answer that question. Esther and Mordecai knew the human instrument, but none could know who was
directing him but the One Who sees the end from the beginning. The words forming the Acrostic are

“who durst presume in his heart to do so”: that is to say, to conspire against the life of the Queen and her People.

We may English it thus:

presume in his heart to do this thing?”

Thus was the name of the great “I AM” of Ex 3:14 presented to the eye, to reveal the fact that He who said of E H Y
H “this is My Name for ever, and this is My Memorial unto all generations” (v. 15), was there to remember His People.
Here was a “generation” in Persia who experienced the truth and the power of this Name, as a former “generation” had
done in Egypt.

The same “I AM” had indeed come down to deliver them from Haman; as He had from Pharaoh, and from the great
“enmity” (of Ge 3:15) which instigated both to accomplish the Satanic design of exterminating the Nation of Israel.

In these five Acrostics we have something far beyond a mere coincidence; we have design. When we read the
denunciation in Dt 31:16-18, and see it carried out in Persia, we learn that though God was not among His people
there, He was for them. Though He was not acting as Jehovah, “that dwelleth between the Cherubim,” He was “the God
of Heaven, ruling and over-ruling all in the Heaven above and in the Earth beneath” for the fulfillment of His purposes,
and in the deliverance of His People. Hence, though His name, as well as His presence, is HIDDEN, yet, it is there, in
the Word; and so wonderfully interwoven that no enemy will ever know how to put it out.

(*1) In the note on Est 1:1 this Ahasuerus is identified with Astyages, who is the same as Darius the Mede. See
notes on p. 618, and Ap. 57.

(*2) The Talmud (Kelim 139) says “Where do we get Esther in the Law?” And the answer is “Dt 31:18, ‘and I will
surely hide my face'”. So here, the outward form of the revelation takes on the form of its inward and spiritual
meaning. For the same reason we have the Divine Title “the God of heaven” as characterizing the book
Exra-Nehemiah. See note on 2 Chron 36:23.

(*3) How many more there may be will be ascertained only when all the special scrolls of Esther shall be examined.

(*4) Fo 116 r other examples of Acrostics in the Hebrew text, see Ap. 63. vii.

(*5) In the use of these terms, “backward” and “forward” the English reader must bear in mind that Hebrew is read
from right to left both in the spelling and wording.

Appendix 61
QUOTATIONS FROM THE BOOK OF JOB IN THE OTHER BOOKS OF THE BIBLE

The quotations from, and references to, the book of Job in the other books of the Bible show that it was well known
and read in the days of David and Solomon and the Prophets, and cannot be referred to as late a period as the 7 th-4 th
centuries B.C., as most of the “higher” critics do.

The following table will enable the reader to judge for himself. There are 65 passages referred to: 37 in the Psalms;
18 in Proverbs; 9 in the Prophets; and 1 in the N.T.

JOB. Quoted or referred to in other books.
3:16. Ps 58:8.
3:21. Pr 2:4.
5:3. Ps 37:35,36.
5:13. 1 Co 3:19.
5:14. Isa 59:10.
5:20. Ps 33:19; 37:19. Heb 12:5.
5:21. Ps 31:20.
5:25. Ps 72:16; 112:2.
6:4. Ps 38:2.
7:7. Ps 78:39.
7:10. Ps 103:16.
7:17. Ps 8:4; 144:3.
8:13. Pr 10:28.
8:22. Ps 35:26; 109:29.
9:34. Ps 39:10.
10:3. Ps 138:8.
10:8. Ps 119:73.
10:10,11. Ps 139:14-16.
10:20,21. Ps 39:5,13.
11:17. Ps 37:6.
11:18,19. Isa 17:2. Eze 34:28. Mic 4:4. Zep 3:13.
13:21,28. Ps 39:10,11.
14:1,2. Ps 90:3,5,6.
15:35. Ps 7:14. Isa 59:4.
16:10. Ps 22:13. Mic 5:1.
17:7. Ps 6:7; 31:9.
18:5. Pr 13:9; 24:20.
19:5-9,13. Ps 38:16; 88:8; 89:44.
19:13,14. Ps 88:8,18.
19:26. Ps 17:15.
19:29. Ps 58:10,11.
21:30. Pr 16:4. Zep 1:15-18. 2 Pe 2:9.
23:10. Ps 66:10.
23:11. Ps 44:18.
24:14,15. Ps 10:8,11; 11:4.
24:23. Pr 15:3.
26:8. Pr 30:4.
28:13, &c. Pr 3:13, &c.
28:15. Pr 3:14,15.
28:28. Pr 1:7; 9:10. Ps 111:10.
29:18. Ps 30:6.
30:9. Ps 69:12.
30:16. Ps 42:4.
31:7. Ps 44:18,21.
32:8. Pr 2:6.
32:21. Pr 24:23.
34:11. Pr 24:12.
35:12. Pr 1:28.
36:19. Pr 11:4.
36:26,27,32. Ps 90:2; 147:8.

Appendix 62

THE SEPTUAGINT ENDING OF THE BOOK OF JOB

In the Septuagint translation of the Old Testament into Greek, there is a long subscription. A similar subscription is
found in the Arabic Version. It professes to be taken out of “the Syriac book”; but there is nothing to be found of it in
the Syriac Version as published in Walton’s Polyglot. It was doubtless written B.C. It is interesting, especially when
compared with the notes on p. 666, but what authority there is for it is not stated. The last verse of Job (42:17), “And
Job died, an old man, and full of days,” reads on as follows:

“And it is written that he will rise up again with those whom the Lord raises up.

“This man is described in the Syriac book as dwelling in the land of Ausis, on the borders of Idumea and Arabia; and
his name before was Jobab; and having taken an Arabian wife, he begat a son whose name was Ennon. He himself was
the son of his father Zara, a son of the sons of Esau, and of his mother Bosorrha, so that he was the fifth (*1) from
Abraham. And these were the kings who reigned in Edom, which country he also ruled over. First Balak the son of Beor,
(*2) and the name of his city was Dennaba. After Balak, Jobab, who is called Job: and after him, Asom, who was
governor out of the country of Thaeman; and after him Adad, the son of Barad, that destroyed Madiam in the plain of
Moab; and the name of his city was Gethaim. And the friends that came to him were Eliphaz of the sons of Esau, king
of the Thaemanites, Baldad sovereign of the Sauchaens, Sophar, king of the Minaeans”.

(*1) Fifth. If he was the son of Issachar this corresponds with what is said in the notes on p.666.

(*2) So the Sinaitic MS. The Alexandrian MS. reads “Semphor,” which is probably the same as “Zippor”.

Appendix 63
THE BOOK OF PSALMS. MISCELLANEOUS PHENOMENA

I. THE TITLE OF THE BOOK.

The name given to the Book of Psalms as a whole by the Jews is Tehillim; but it is not recognized by this name in
the Book itself. Our English name “Psalms” is a transliteration of the Greek Title of the Septuagint, “Psalmoi” (*1), which
means “songs”; while the word “Psalter” is from the Greek Psalterion, a harp, or other stringed instrument. There is no
correspondence between the Greek and the Hebrew in these cases. Only once does a Psalm bear this word in its title,
and that is Ps 145 (sing. Tehillah).

Tehillim is invariably rendered “praises”. It is a verbal noun from the root halal, to make a jubilant sound. To make
ellell means to rejoice. Cp. German hallen and English halloo, yell. Tehillim has, therefore, a wide meaning, and
includes all that is worthy of praise or celebration; and, especially the works and ways of Jehovah.

Hence, in this book, we have these Divine works and ways set forth as they relate to the Divine counsels of God (1)
as to Man, (2) as to Israel, (3) as to the Sanctuary, (4) as to the Earth, and (5) as to the Word of Jehovah. See the
Structure of the separate Books of the Psalms, p. 720. In those Structures light is thrown upon the “ways” of God. The
need for this instruction is seen from the meaning of halal, which in the Hithpael and Hithpolel means to praise of boast
of one’s self, hence to be foolish. Cp. 1 Ki 20:11; Job 12:17; Isa 44:25 (mad); Pr 20:14 (*2). This instruction is given
concerning God’s ways and works exhibited in the Word of God from the beginning to the end.

(*1) The word occurs seven times in the N.T. (Lk 20:42; 24:44. Ac 1:20; 13:33. 1 Co 14:26. Eph 5:19. Col 3:16),
four referring to the Book of Psalms, and the last three to Psalms in general.

(*2) As it is foolish to the glory in any object except in Jehovah (Jer 4:2; 9:23,24), so to boast of oneself is to be
foolish in this case (Ps 49:6. Pr 27:1. See Ps 5:5; 73:3; 75:4; and cp. 44:8).

II. THE QUOTATIONS FROM THE PSALMS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.

(i) THE FORMULAS USED IN DIRECT QUOTATIONS.

“As it is written”; or “It is written”: Mt 4:6 (*1) (91:11). Jn 2:17 (69:9); 6:31 (78:24,25). Ac 13:33 (2:7). Ro 3:4 (51:4).
2 Co 4:13 (116:10). “David”, or “in David” (*2): Mt 21:43 (110:1). Ac 2:25 (16:8), 34 (110:1). Ro 4:6 (32:1,2); 11:9,10
(69:22,23). Heb 4:7 (95:7). “He (God) saith”, “said”, or “spake”: Ac 13:35 (16:10). Eph 4:8 (68:18). Heb 1:10-12
(102:25-27); 4:3 (95:11); 5:5 (2:4); 5:6 (110:4). “He (God) limiteth”: Heb 4:7 (95:7). “He (God) testifieth”: Heb 7:17
(110:4). “In the Scriptures”: Mt 21:42 (118:2,3). “In their law” (*3): Jn 15:25 (35:10; 69:4). “In your law” (*3): Jn 10:34
(82:6). “One in a certain place testified”: Heb 2:6 (8:4; 144:3). “Spoken by (or through) the prophet”: Mt 13:35 (78:2).
“The Book of Psalms”: Ac 1:20 (69:25). “The mouth of David” (*4): Ac 1:16 (41:9); 4:25, 26 (2:1,2). “The scripture”: Jn
7:42 (132:11); 13:18 (41:9); 19:24 (22:18), 28 (69:21), 36 (34:20), 37 (22:16,17). “The second Psalm”: Ac 13:33 (2:7).

(*1) This (with Ps 91:13) was Satan’s quotation, mutilated by significant suppression and omission. (*2) In David.
The Fig. Ellipsis (Ap. 6), i.e. “in [the Psalm] of David”; or “in [the person] of David”. (*3) “Law” is used by Fig.
Metonymy (of the Part) for the whole of the O.T. (*4) David’s “mouth”, but not David’s words.

(ii) THE ADAPTATION OF WORDS OF THE PSALMS, WITHOUT A SPECIFIC QUOTATION, OR REFERENCE TO FULFILLMENT.

2:7 (Heb 1:5).
2:9 (Rv 2:27).
4:4 (Eph 4:26).
6:8 (Mt 7:32).
8:2 (Mt 21:16).
8:6 (1 Co 15:25,27. Eph 1:20,22).
9:8 (Ac 17:31).
19:4 (Ro 10:18).
22:1 (Mt 27:46. Mk 15:34).
22:8 (Mt 27:43). The chief priests.
22:21 (2 Ti 4:17).
24:1 (1 Co 10:26,28).
27:1 (Heb 13:6). See 118:6, below.
34:8 (1 Pe 2:3).
40:6-8 (Heb 10:5-7).
41:9 (Mk 14:18). (*1)
48:2 (Mt 5:35).
50:14 (Heb 13:15).
55:22 (1 Pe 5:7).
56:4,11 (Heb 13:6).
69:9 (Jn 2:17).
69:21,27 (Mt 27:34,38. Mk 15:36).
74:2 (Ac 20:28).
78:24,25 (Jn 6:31).
79:6 (2 Th 1:8).
89:27,37 (Rv 1:5; 3:14).
91:13 (Lk 10:19).
102:25-27 (Heb 1:10-12).
106:20 (Ro 1:23).
110:1 (Mk 16:19. 1 Co 15:25,27. Col 3:1. Eph 1:20,22).
110:4 (Heb 5:10).
116:10 (2 Co 4:13).
116:11 (Ro 3:4).
118:6 (Heb 13:6). See 27:1, above.
118:22 (Ac 4:11. Mt 21:42. 1 Pe 2:4,7).
118:26 (Mt 21:9).
125:5 (Gal 6:16).
143:2 (Gal 2:16).
146:6 (Ac 14:15).

(*1) John (13:18; 19:28, 29) uses the formula “that it might be fulfilled” because of the object of his Gospel
(20:31).

III. QUOTATIONS AS BEING THE DIRECT FULFILLMENT OF PROPHECIES IN THE PSALMS.

22:18 (Jn 19:23,24).
34:20 (Jn 19:36).
35:19 (Jn 15:25).
41:9 (Jn 13:18. Ac 1:16).
69:4 (Jn 15:25).
78:2 (Mt 13:35).
97:7 (Heb 1:6).
109:3 (Jn 15:25).
119:161 (Jn 15:25).

IV. QUOTATIONS AS BEING THE DIRECT UTTERANCES OF THE FATHER, THE SON, AND THE HOLY SPIRIT,
RESPECTIVELY.

THE FATHER.
2:7 (Heb 1:5,6. Ac 13:33).
45:6,7 (Heb 1:8,9).
89:26,27 (Heb 1:5).
97:7 (Heb 1:6).
102:25-27 (Heb 1:10-12).
104:4 (Heb 1:7).
110:1 (Heb 1:13).

THE SON.
18:2 (Heb 2:13).
22:1 (Mt 27:46. Mk 15:34).
22:22,25 (Heb 2:12).
40:6-8 (Heb 10:5-7,8,9).
45:6 (Heb 1:8).

THE HOLY SPIRIT.
41:9 (Ac 1:16).
95:7-11 (Heb 3:7-11).

V. DIVINE TITLES APPLIED DIRECTLY TO CHRIST IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.

9:8 (Ac 17:31).
45:6 (Heb 1:8).
34:8 (1 Pe 2:3).
62:12 (Mt 16:27).
74:2 (1 Pe 1:19).
96:13 (Ac 17:31).
97:7 (Heb 1:6).
98:9 (Ac 17:31).
102:25-27 (Heb 1:10
104:4 (Heb 1:7).

VI. THE BEATITUDES IN THE PSALMS.

The word rendered “blessed” in the “Beatitudes” is not always “barak,” to bless; but ‘ashrey, happinesses. Its first
occurrence is Dt 33:29. It is the plural of majesty or accumulation, and means “O the happinesses”, or, “O the great
happiness”, or “O How happy”.

‘Ashrey occurs twenty-six times in the book of Psalms. It is translated “blessed” nineteen times, and “happy” seven
times. In the list below, these latter are marked with an asterisk (*).

The following is the complete list: Ps 1:1; 2:12; 32:1,2; 33:12; 34:8; 40:4; 41:1; 65:4; 84:4,5,12; 89:15; 94:12; 106:3;
112:1; 119:1,2; 127:5*; 128:1,2*; 127:8*, 9*; 144:15*, 15*; 146:5*.

The word is distributed in the five books of the Psalms as follows: Book I, eight times; Book II, once; Book III, four
times; Book IV, twice; Book V, eleven times; making twenty-six in all.

VII. THE ACROSTIC PSALMS.

There are nine examples of Acrostics in the Book of Psalms, while eleven other Acrostic Scriptures are found in the
Old Testament (*1).

i. Ps 9 and 10 are linked together by an Acrostic which, like “the times of trouble” (the great tribulation), of which
the two Psalms treat, is purposely broken, and is irregular and out of joint. This Acrostic tells us that the subject of the
two Psalms is one, and that they are to be connected together. See notes there on the many expressions common to
both.

ii. Ps 25. Here, again, the Acrostic is designedly incomplete, a proof of its genuineness instead of its “corruption”. No
writer would or could omit a letter from carelessness. The Psalm has the same phenomena as Ps 34, where the same
letter w (Vau = V) is omitted, and the same letter p (Pe = P) is duplicated, in the word Padah, “redeem:. The last verse
is thus, in each case, made to stand out prominently by itself.

iii. Ps 34. See under ii, above.

iv. Ps 37. In this Psalm the series is perfect and complete. Every letter has two verses of two lines each, except
three: vv. 7 (d, Daleth = D), 20 (k, Kaph = K), and 34 (q, Koph = K).

v. Ps 111. In this Psalm the series is complete. The Psalm has twenty-two lines, each line commencing with the
successive letters of the alphabet.

vi. Ps 112 is formed on the model of Ps 111, the two Psalms forming a pair (*2); Ps 111 being occupied with Jehovah,
and Ps 112 with the man that revereth Jehovah. See the notes there.

vii. Ps 119. This Psalm consists of twenty-two groups, consisting of eight verses each. The eight verses in each
group begin with the same letter. For example: the first eight verses begin with a (Aleph = A, the eight verses of the
second group with b (Beth = B), and so through the whole Psalm of 176 verses (8 x 22. See Ap. 10).

It is impossible to reproduce this (or any of the other alphabetical Acrostics), seeing that the Hebrew and English
alphabets do not correspond, either in equivalents, order, or number of the letters. It so happens that in the group
beginning with T (vv. 65-72), each verse in the A.V. does begin with T, except vv. 67 and 71. These can be readily
conformed by changing “Before” to “Till” in v. 67; and “It is” to “Tis” in v. 71.

The first two letters being the same in both alphabets can be thus presented:

Ah! the happinesses of the perfect in the way,
Such as walk by the Law of Jehovah.
Ah! the happinesses of the keepers of His testimonies,
Who seek Him with their whole heart.
Assuredly they have not worked iniquity:
In His ways they have ever walked.
As to Thy commandments — Thou hast commanded us,
That we should diligently keep them.
Ah Lord, that my ways were prepared
To keep Thy statutes;
Ashamed, then, should I never be,
While I have respect unto all Thy commandments.
All my heart shall praise Thee in uprightness,
While I learn the judgments of Thy righteousness.
All Thy statutes also I will keep:
Leave me not utterly.

By what means shall a young man cleanse his way?
By taking heed thereto according to Thy word.
By every means my heart hath sought Thee:
Let me not err from Thy commandments.
Besides, I have laid up Thy Word in my heart,
That I might not sin against Thee.
Blessed are Thou, O Jehovah:
Teach me Thy statutes.
By my lips have I recounted
All the judgments of Thy mouth.
By walking in Thy mandates’ way,
I found joy beyond all wealth.
By Thy precepts shall I guide my musings,
And shall pore over Thy paths.
By Thy statutes shall I be delighted:
Thy Word I shall not forget.

viii. Ps 145. In this Psalm the Acrostic is perfect, with the exception of the letter n (Nun = N), which should come
between vv. 13 and 14. See note there. Through the infirmity of some transcriber, the verse was probably omitted by
him. It must have been in the more ancient manuscripts, because it is preserved in the ancient Versions: viz. the Sept.,
Syr., Arabic, Ethiopic, and Vulgate. One Heb. Codex is know with contains it, as follows :

“The LORD is faithful in all His words,
And holy in all His works.”

Moreover, the Structure of the Psalm shows that it originally had its proper place in the Psalm. See the notes on Ps
145:13 Ps 145:14.

ix. For the other Acrostic in the Psalms, see the note on Ps 96:11.

(*1) There are five in the Book of Esther, each giving the Divine names in the form of an Acrostic. (See Ap. 60.)
One other Divine name in Ps 96:11. See note there. One perfect Acrostic in Pr 31:10-31. See note there.

In the Book of Lamentations, each of the first four chapters is characterized by an Acrostic. See notes there. (*2)
With the further peculiarity that the first three verses in each Psalm consist of two portions: the last two, of three
portions.

VIII. THE AUTHORS NAMED IN THE PSALMS.

1. The Psalms bearing the name of “DAVID” are seventy-three in all: thirty-seven in Book I (3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41); eighteen Psalms in Book II (51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 68, 69, 70);
one in Book III (Ps 86); two in Book IV (101 and 103); and fifteen in Book V (108, 109, 110, 122, 124, 131,
133, 138, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 145).

2. By “Asaph”, twelve Psalms: one being in Book II (Ps 50), and eleven in Book III (73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79,
80, 81, 82, 83).

3. By “the sons of Korah”, eleven Psalms: seven being in Book II (42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49); and four in Book
III (84, 85, 87, 88), as set out in The Companion Bible. In Ps 46 and 88 it is repeated as the sub-scription of
Ps 45 and 87, and is not the super-scription of 46 and 88 as in all the Versions.

4. For, or of “Solomon”, two Psalms: one in Book II (Ps 72), and one in Book V (Ps 127).

5. “By Heman the Ezrahite”, one in Book III (Ps 88).

6. By “Ethan the Ezrahite”, one in Book III (Ps 89).

7. By “Moses the man of God”, one in Book IV (Ps 90).

IX. THE DISPENSATIONAL CHARACTER OF THE PSALMS.

In reading the Book of Psalms, we must constantly bear in mind the character of the Dispensation to which they
belong. The word “Dispensation” means “administration”: and God’s principles of administration varied according as man
was in a Dispensation of innocence, or mankind was “without Law”, or Israel was “under Law”, or as we are under grace
in this present Dispensation.

God’s principles of administration have varied with each of these: and in the future they will vary yet more: in the
coming Dispensation of judgment, and in the Dispensation of millennial glory by which it will be followed. If we read
what pertains to one Dispensation into another which is administered on different lines, we shall have only confusion.
Unless they be rightly divided, we shall not find “the truth” (2 Ti 2:15).

Much of what we read in the Psalms is truth for all time: but, some things are peculiar to that Dispensation of Law,
and are neither suitable nor appropriate for the present Dispensation of grace. That is why many readers stumble when
they judge “the imprecatory Psalms” from the standpoint of grace. Those Psalms were appropriate for the past
Dispensation of works, as they will be for the coming Dispensation of judgment; but they are not appropriate for the
present Dispensation, in which God’s administration is on the principles of grace (according to Mt 5:44-48). It was true,
in the former Dispensation of Law, that “when the wicked man turneth away from his wickedness, and doeth that
which is lawful and right, he shall save his soul alive” (Eze 18:27). But that is not the way of salvation now. The
Scriptures for this present Dispensation are written and contained in the Pauline Epistles (fulfilling the promise of the
Lord in Jn 16:13(; and these declare with one voice that we are not saved by works, but by grave (Ro 3:23,24; 11:6.
Eph 2:3-9. Tit 3:5-8).

Even so with the “imprecatory Psalms”, and similar expressions in other Psalms: they were true and appropriate for
that Dispensation, but are equally inappropriate for this.

X. THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE DIVINE TITLES IN THE FIVE BOOKS.

It may conduce to the completeness of the study of the usage of the Divine Titles, in relation to the Dispensational
character of the five Books of the Psalms, if we give a connected list. They are given under the Structure of each
Book separately. A comparison of these numbers will show that they correspond with the subject of each Book as
exhibited in the Structure prefixed to each Book. When “God” is used, the thought is of the Creator and His creatures.
When “Jehovah” is used, it speaks of a Covenant God, in covenant relation with His own People.

i. THE GENESIS BOOK. (Ps 1-41), p. 720.

Jehovah occurs 279 times, Elohim only forty-eight (nine of them connected with Jehovah).

ii. THE EXODUS BOOK. (Ps 42-72), p. 720. Jehovah occurs only thirty-seven times, Elohim occurs 262 times (twice in
connection with Jehovah). El occurs fourteen times, and Jah once.

iii. THE LEVITICUS BOOK. (Ps 73-89), p. 720. In the First Selection (A1) Jehovah occurs only fifteen times, while
Elohim occurs sixty-five times (twice with Jehovah). In the Second Selection (A2) Jehovah occurs fifty times, while
Elohim occurs only 28 times (four of which are connected with Jehovah). El occurs five times.

iv. THE NUMBERS BOOK. (Ps 90-106), p. 720. Jehovah occurs 126 times, and Elohim only thirty-one times (in ten of
which it is combined with Jehovah). El occurs six times.

v. THE DEUTERONOMY BOOK. (Ps 107-150), p. 720. Jehovah occurs 293 times, while Elohim occurs only forty-one
times (in four of which it is combined with Jehovah). Jah occurs thirteen times. El occurs ten times. Eloah twice.

XI. THE PRAYER BOOK VERSION OF THE PSALMS.

The Authorized Version of the Bible of 1611 was preceded by several other Versions made into the English tongue.

1. The earliest was that by John Wycliffe, about A.D. 1380. This existed only in MS. until 1831, when the
N.T. was printed for the first time, followed by the O.T. in 1848. The complete Bible was not published
till 1850.

2. Tyndale’s Version. The N.T. was published in 1525, and the Pentateuch in 1530.

3. Coverdale’s Version followed in 1535, and was the first complete printed English Bible.

4. Matthew’s Bible (largely based on Tyndale) was published under this assumed name in 1537 by John Rogers.

5. The Great Bible followed in 1539. It was Coverdale’s Version revised by himself, and was in large folio,
which gave it its name. In 1540 Cranmer wrote a preface; and hence this and subsequent editions (*1)
became known as “Cranmer’s Bible”. It was from this Version that the Psalms and other portions of Scripture
were taken, and used in the Prayer Book, from the edition of 1552 to the last revision in 1662.

When the A.V. was published in 1611, it was “authorized (or appointed) to be read in churches” (hence its name),
instead of the Versions which had preceded it, and which were thenceforth superseded. Extracts from it, such as the
opening sentences, and the Epistles and Gospels, were at the same time substituted for those previously in use (*2).
But it was found that, from the use of the Psalms in Public Worship, people had become so accustomed to the older
Version (many being able to sing or say them from memory), that when the last revision of the Prayer Book was made
in 1662 the Psalter was retained, it being deemed unwise to make a change which would be so revolutionary.

This is why the Prayer Book Version differs from the Bible Version. This is also the reason why a change in “the
names and order” of the Books of the Bible to the order of the Hebrew Canon is likewise now impossible. The
translators of the Septuagint arbitrarily adopted a different order, and gave the books different names. This was
followed by the Vulgate and all subsequent Versions (*1). No change in these respects would now be tolerated.

In comparing the two Versions, regard must be had:

1. To the NUMBERS OF THE VERSES, as these are not the same in each, and differ sometimes in the
numeration. For example, Ps 19:14 in A.V. is 19:14, 15 in the Prayer Book Version; and Ps 18:1,2 in A.V. is
18:1 in the Prayer Book Version. The reference to the Psalms in The Companion Bible and its Appendixes
is always to the A.V., not to the Prayer Book Version.

2. As to OBSOLETE WORDS in the Prayer Book Version, the following is a list of the more important, which
will show the extent of the changes made in 1611:

Abjects, worthless persons, 35:15. after (prep), according to, 90:15. apace, swiftly, 58:6. at large, loose, without
restraint, 118:5. brawn, muscle, boar’s flesh, 119:70. cast their heads, consult, conspire, 83:5. certify, to make certain,
39:5 (v. 4 in A.V.); to show knowledge, 19:2. comfortable, consoling, 54:6. conversation, mode of life, 50:23. darling,
favorite, A.S. dear-ling, 22:20; 35:17. discovereth, strippeth of leaves, 29:8 (v. 9 in A.V.). dragons, serpents, 74:14 (v.
13 in A.V.). due, appointed, 9:9. ensue, pursue, 34:14. eschew, avoid, shun, 34:14. fain, glad, 71:21 (v. 23 in A.V.).
fie, Lat. phy, an expression of disgust, 35:21; 40:18. flittings, wanderings, 56:8. froward, perverse, 18:26; 58:3; 64:2.
glory, tongue (which gives glory), 16:10. graven, dig, digged, 7:16. ground, bottom, 68:26. harnessed, armed, root =
made of iron, 78:10. health, salvation, 51:14; 67:2; 119:123. hell, grave, 49:14, 15. hold of, hold to, 31:7. holpen,
helped, 22:5; 86:17. horn, head, 75:5, 6, 12; 89:18. inditing, dictating, 45:1. inquisition, search, inquiry, 9:12.
knappeth, snappeth, 46:9. laud (Lat.), praise, 135:1. lay to, apply, 119:126. learn, teach, 25:4, 8; 119:66. leasing,
falsehood, 4:2; 5:6. lien, lain, 68:13. lighten, enlighten, 13:3; 34:5. make thou all his bed, nurse, 41:3. minished,
lessened, 12:1; 107:39. mistake, take wrongly, 56:5. nethermost, lowest, 86:13. noisome, noxious, 91:3. ordereth,
arrangeth, 40:6. pate, crown of the head, 7:17. pit, grave, 6:5; 9:15; 69:16. poor, oppressed, 34:6; 69:30. ports,
gates, 9:14. potsherd, broken pottery, 22:15. prevent, precede, anticipate, 18:18; 21:3; 119:148, &c. quick, living,
alive, 55:16. quicken, make alive, 119:25, &c. refrain, restrain, 76:12. reins, kidneys, 7:10, &c. require, ask, 27:4;
38:16. room, place, 18:36; 31:9. runagates, rebels, 68:6. set by, esteem highly, 15:4. set in, put in the way of, 38:17.
shawms, wind instruments, 98:7. simple, undesigning, artless, 72:4, 13. simpleness, artlessness, guilelessness, 69:5. still,
silent, 62:1. stomach, pride, 101:7. stool, seat, 94:20. strange, foreign, 18:45; 114:1. tell, count, 22:17; 56:8.
thereafter, according, 90:11. thievish, given to theft, 10:8. treadings, footsteps, 73:2. tush, an expression of
impatience, like pish, or tut, 10:6, &c. unto, in comparison with, 16:2. vengeance, vindication or avengement, 79:11.
water-pipes, cataracts or torrents, 42:9. weights (upon the), scales; i.e. when weighed, 62:9. whet, sharpen, 7:13.
wholesome, saving, 20:6; 28:9. within, within doors, 45:14. wont, accustomed, 119:156. worship, worthy of honor,
3:3.

(*1) The other Versions published between this and the A.V. were The Geneva Bible in 1557-60; and Archbishop
Parker’s in 1568, known as the Bishops’ Bible; the Rhemish N.T. in 1582; and the Douai Bible in 1610, both the
latter being of Roman Catholic origin.

(*2) Except the “comfortable words” in the Communion Service, which appear to be original translations and not
wholly from any preceding Version, and have never been changed.

Appendix 64
“TO THE CHIEF MUSICIAN.”

The key to the interpretation of these words has been lost for over twenty-two centuries. Commentators and critics
have confessed that they can make only conjectures as to the primitive meaning and use of the word (for it is only one
word in Hebrew) lamenazzeah. The Ancient Versions attempt a rendering. The Sept. has eis to telos = unto, for, or,
with a view to the end. The Arabic, Ethiopic, and Vulgate render it “at the end”. The Chald. renders it (Ps 45) “to the
praise”. The Talmudists hold that it related to Him Who is to come; while Aquila (one of the Sept. Revisers, A.D. 130)
renders it “to Nikopoio” = to the giver of victory.

It is clear that a Person was intended by these various renderings; but they appear to be interpretations rather than
translations. Regarded as the former, they may be useful in showing us how the Psalms point to Christ; for He is the
end. It is He Who giveth victory; it is He Who is the Coming One: and, while the book is called Sepher Tehillim, the
Book of Praises, it is He Who “inhabiteth the praises of Israel” (Ps 22:3).

All ancient Hebrew manuscripts, with the early and best later printed editions, show no break whatever between the
lines of one Psalm and another. The Septuagint translators had been many years in Babylon, and the oldest among them
must have been very young when carried away thither. There was none who had full knowledge and experience of the
ancient usages of the Temple worship. Consequently, when they came to their task some 197 years after the latest
carrying away to Babylon, there was nothing to show them where one Psalm ended and where the next began.

Hence, when they came to the word lamenazzeah, “To the chief Musician”, they took it as being the first line of a
Psalm, instead of the last line of the preceding Psalm which they had just translated. All subsequent Versions, in all
languages, have followed them in this mistake. For mistake it was, as we may see from the only two examples of
independent Psalms given us in the Scriptures: viz. Isa 38:9-20, and Hab 3. In each of these isolated Psalms we have
the true models on which all the other Psalms are based.

In each case we have

1. The Super-scription, or Title proper.

2. The body of the Psalm itself.

3. The Sub-scription.

In each of these two cases the word lamenazzeah forms the sub-scription, and appears at the end of the Psalm. This
is the key thus discovered by Dr. J.W. Thirtle (*1) which had been lost for so many centuries; and The Companion
Bible is the first edition of the bible in which the Psalms are thus correctly presented in harmony with the two
Psalm-models, Isa 38:9-20, and Hab 3. The unspeakable importance of Dr. Thritle’s discovery is at once seen. For it
shows two things:

1. That, whatever the interpretation or application of the words may be, a Psalm which had this word in the
sub-scription had a use beyond its local, temporary, or original purpose; and, being considered appropriate
to the Director of the Temple worship with any instructions which might be necessary for its use.

2. That such word or words of instruction, which to-day stand in the Septuagint and all subsequent Versions
of the Bible as the super-scription, belong, not to that Psalm, but to the sub-scription of the Psalm
preceding it.

This, at one stroke, removes the great difficulty, and solves the heretofore insoluble problem and impossible task
which all Commentators have experienced, when they struggled in the attempt to find in one Psalm the explanation of
words which belong to another. Few problems so difficult and baffling have been removed by a solution so simple and
self-explanatory. This on feature, which by Dr. Thirtle’s kind permission, has been taken over into The Companion
Bible, must greatly enhance its value and usefulness, making it unique among all existing editions of the Bible.

(*1) These facts have been discovered, and admirably set forth by Dr. J.W. Thritle, in his two words on this
subject, viz. The Titles of the Psalms: their Nature and Meaning explained (1904), and Old Testament Problems
(1907). Both published by Henery Frowde, Oxford Bible Warehouse, London.

Appendix 65
THE PSALM-TITLES, AND WORDS EMPLOYED IN THEM.

From what is written in the preceding Appendix (64), it will be seen that, though the words “Psalm-Titles” are used
here in this Appendix in their ordinary traditional sense, our understanding of them must be seriously modified; all the
words used in them, and explained below, occur in the sub-scription of the preceding Psalm, and belong to that Psalm.
It is there we have placed them in The Companion Bible, and it is in those Psalms that we have to look for their
elucidation and find the key to the meaning of the words. (*1)

Commentators who revered the Word of God have struggled to find some logical, spiritual, or mystical meaning in
these “titles”; while modern critics do not seem able to rise beyond musical instruments and terminology, or
“catch-words” of popular songs or tunes.

The Teaching, which is deep and grand beyond all conception, they fritter down to some commonplace reference;
while the Text, which is clear, they mystify with their puerile guesses and vain imaginations. We look for something
more worthy of this work of the Holy Spirit of God; something more worthy indeed of the Bible, regarding it merely as
a literary production. We look for something more dignified than a “tom-tom” or a “catch-word”, and we shall find it.

The words used in these sub-scriptions (which no commentator of any repute regards as other than integral parts of
Holy Writ, being numbered, and forming as they do the first verse of each Psalm in the Hebrew text, and actually
quoted as Scripture in the N.T.) refer to momentous truths, and not to musical terms; to teaching, and not to tunes; to
instruction, and not to instruments; to sense, and not to sound. They are for those who have a heart for music, and not
merely an ear for music; they are for the Enochs who walk with God, and not for the Tubal-Cains who handle the harp
and the organ. They pertain to the things of the Spirit, and not to “things made with hands”.

We shall present these words and expressions in the spelling, and in the order in which the Bible reader will look for
them in this Appendix, viz. in alphabetical order. We may first note here that thirty-four Psalms have no title at all,
and are without super-scription or sub-scription: viz. Ps 1; 2; 10; 33; 43; 71; 91; 93; 94; 95; 96; 97; 99; 104; 105; 106;
107; 111; 112; 113; 114; 115; 116; 117; 118; 119; 135; 136; 137; 146; 147; 148; 149; 150.

The words in the super-scriptions and sub-scriptions are as follows, and are given in the spelling of the A.V. to which
English readers are accustomed.

I. AIJELETH-SHAHAR (The Day-Dawn).

This title, which in the versions has stood in the super-scription of Ps 22, now finds its proper place and stands (in
The Companion Bible) as the sub-scription to Ps 21. The meaning given both in A.V. and R.V. is “the hind of the
morning”. The Jewish commentators, Rashi (A.D. 1040-1145, Troyes) and Kimchi (A.D. 1160-1232, Narbonne) render it
“a hind fair as the morning”. Luther rendered it “the hind early chased”. The Targum has it “the morning sacrifice”. The
moment we regard it in the light of Ps 21 instead of Ps 22, a new field of inquiry presents itself.

The expression is a Figure of speech common in the East, and frequently met with in Arabian poetry. It is used of
the Day-Dawn, in which the beams of light from the rising sun are seen shooting up (like horns) above the horizon
before the sun actually appears. It is used in Ps 21 of the rays of Messiah’s coming glory, and tells of the dawn of His
approaching coronation which is the one great subject of Ps 21. See the Structure and notes.

It is the same DAY-DAWN that forms the theme of David’s “last words”. See the notes on 2 Sam 23:1-5 and Ps 72,
with the Structures and notes there; and compare 2 Pe 1:19.

II. AL ALAMOTH (relating to maidens).

There is no dispute or question as to the meaning of these words: ‘Al = relating to, or concerning, or connected with.
‘Al has a wide range of meaning, and we may select the one which lends itself best to the context. As to ‘Alamoth (fem.
pl.), there is a consensus of opinion that it can mean only damsels or maidens. ‘Almah occurs (in sing. and pl.) seven
times in the Heb. O.T., and is rendered “virgin” in Ge 24:43. SS 1:3; 6:8. Isa 7:14; “maid” in Ex 2:8. Pr 30:19; and
“damsel” in Ps 68:25. The proper word for virgin is bethulah (Ge 24:16, &c.), while ‘almah denotes a young woman of
marriageable age, still under the care of others. Every bethulah is an ‘almah, but not every ‘almah is, necessarily a
bethulah. (*2) In the plural, therefore, ‘alamoth can mean only maidens. There is no need to think about music, or to
restrict the use of the word here to “a maidens’ choir”, standing, as it now must stand, as the sub-scription to Ps 45, and
not as the super-scription of Ps 46. There is no connection between “maidens” and Ps 46, but there are many points in
the subject-matter of Ps 45 which link it on to that Psalm. There are references to the “king’s daughter”, and “honorable
women” (v. 9). It is a “daughter” that is addressed as the bride (v. 10). There is the “daughter of Tyre” (v. 12); “the
king’s daughter” (v. 13); and “the virgins her companions” (v. 14).

There are special reasons, therefore, in the subject-matter of Ps 45, which connect it with that Psalm; and make it
very appropriate that, even if the Psalms were intended to be sung by maidens, such singing need not be connected
with the Temple or its services. There was processional singing in the open air. And in 1 Ch 15 we have just the occasion
for the use of the word in this connection. In the procession in which the Ark was carried up from the house of
Obededom to Zion three bodies of singers are mentioned:

1. the Levites (vv. 16-19),

2. the maidens (v. 20); and

3. the Sheminith or men-singers (see No. XIX, p. 95) who brought up the rear of the procession (v. 21).

This is the very order which is mentioned in Ps 68:

1. the singers going before (1 Ch 15:16-19);

2. the players on instruments following after (v. 22); in the midst, “the damsels (the ‘Alamoth) playing with
timbrels” (v. 20).

Ps 68 begins with the words of Nu 10:35, which prescribes the formula for the setting forth of the Ark. The “goings”
of Ps 68:24 refer to the great going up of the Ark to Zion. The company of those who published the word of Jehovah
(v. 11) is fem. plural, and the reference is not to Ex 15:20 or 1 Sa 18:6, but to 1 Ch 15:20. From all this it is clear that
this Psalm (68) must be carried back to as early a date as 951-950 B.C., instead of being assigned to the later dates of
537 B.C. or 167 B.C. as demanded by modern criticism.

III. AL-TASCHITH = Destroy not.

There are four Psalms which have this sub-scription, viz. 56, 57, 58, and 74 (not

Ps 57; 58; 59, and 75, which in all the versions have is as the superscription). The first three are David’s, the fourth
is by Asaph. Two by David (56 and 57) are each connected with crisis in his life, while the third belongs to a peculiar
time of trouble. There is no dispute as to the meaning of the word.

It is rendered by A.V. and R.V. as “Destroy not”. It is a cry of distress, a cry at a crisis. But this cry is found, in the
Psalms to which we have placed it, as a subscription, and not in the others where it has formerly stood as a
super-scription.

Such a cry had been made by Moses at a great crisis (Ex 32:11-14, cp. Dt 9:25), and by David (2 Sa 24:16,17) where
we have the same Heb. word (shahath). David acted on the injunction of Dt 4:30,31; the reason being “for Jehovah
thy God is a MERCIFUL God, He will not forsake thee, neither DESTROY thee”. This is why Ps 56 and 57 begin “Be
merciful”.

For further references to this sub-scription compare Ps 56:1,9,10,11; 57:1-3,6,7; 58:3,6,7,11, and
74:1-3,10,11,18-20,22,23. Ps 74 is prophetic of the latter days (spoken of in Dt 4:30) when “Destroy not” will be an
appeal suited to “the day of Jacob’s trouble”.

David was a prophet (Ac 2:30), and spake of things yet future; why should not some Psalms speak prophetically and
proleptically of Zion before it was built, and of the Exile before it took place, instead of being styled “post-Exilic” by
the modern critics?

IV. GITTITH = Winepresses (relating to the Autumn Feast of Tabernacles).

There are three Psalms which have this word in the sub-scription. They are 7, 80, and 83 (not 8, 81, and 84, over
which they have hitherto stood as the superscription).

There is no doubt about Gittith meaning winepresses; from Gath (Jdg 6:11. Ne 13:15. Isa 63:2. Lam 1:15), not the
“vat” which receives the juice from the “press” (which is yekeb, Nu 18:27,30. Dt 15:14, &c.). The word speaks of the
autumn, just as Shoshannim, No. XX below (lilies), speaks of the spring. Hence Shoshannim (flowers) is associated with
the Spring Festival (the Passover), as Gittoth (fruit) is associated with the Autumn Festival (Tabernacles). The Passover
told of Jehovah’s goodness in Divine redemption; the Feast of Tabernacles told of Jehovah’s goodness in Divine
keeping. A study of the three Gittith Psalms (7, 80, and 83) in this connection will yield instruction and profit, and
remove all the perplexity involved in associating the word with the subject-matter of Ps 8; 81, and 84, with which it
has no connection.

There will be no longer need to be troubled with such guesses as “Gittite instruments”, or “Gittite guards”, or “Levites
of Gath-rimmon”, which are as meaningless as they are irrelevant. See further under Shoshannim (No. XX, below).

V. HIGGAION.

As this word occurs in the Text, see Ap. 66. I (p. 96).

VI. JEDUTHUN.

JEDUTHUN was one of the three directors (or the “chief Musicians”) or the Temple worship (1 Ch 16:41,42; 25:1-6; 2 Ch
5:12; 35:15). The three sons of Aaron were thus represented by the three men whose names occur in this category.
JEDUTHUN was a descendant of MERARI (1 Ch 26:10); while ASAPH was a descendant of GERSHOM; and HEMAN of
KOHATH.

JEDUTHUN seems to have had another name, “ETHAN” (1 Ch 15:17,19, compared with 16:41, 42; 25:1, 3, 6, and 2 Ch
35:15). That there was an “Ethan”, a Merarite, is seen from 1 Ch 6:44; 15:17. Since he is associated with those two men,
it is going out of one’s way to create a difficulty by supposing Jeduthun to be “a musical instrument”, or the “name of a
tune” (R.V. marg) or of a “measure”. In 2 Ch 35:15 he is called “the king’s seer”; and in 1 Ch 25:1 it was the duty of these
three men “to prophesy” and “to confess, and to praise Jehovah” (v. 3). This was according to the king’s order (v. 6).

There are three Psalms connected with JEDUTHUN (38, 61, and 76), and they will be found to fulfill these
conditions. By comparing these Psalms as set out in The Companion Bible, the confusion, caused by two of these Psalms
appearing to have the names of two different authors, vanishes. The sub-scription of each Psalm now stands “To the
chief Musician — Jeduthun.”

VII. JONATH-ELEM-RECHOKIM = The Dove in the distant Terebinths.

There is only one Psalm with this sub-scription, i.e. Ps 55 (not Ps 56, over which it hitherto stood in other Bibles and
Versions as the super-scription or title). There is general agreement that this Title means “Relating to the dove in the
distant terebinths (or oaks)”. David is the “dove”. He is far away in the distant woods, moaning over the trouble that
has come upon him through the rebellion of Absalom, recorded in 2 Sa 15-19.

There is no reference to a dove in Ps 56, but there is in Ps 55:6. In v. 2 he says, “I mourn in my complaint, and moan”
(R.V.). In Isa 38:14, Hezekiah, in trouble equally great, says, “I did moan as a dove” (the same word as in Ps 55:17 (R.V.).
Cp. Eze 7:16, where we have it again). David speaks further concerning this moaning in Ps 55:4-8; also in vv. 16, 17.
The desertion of Ahithophel at this crisis is alluded to in vv. 12-14. All Psalms of, or “relating to David”, refer to the true
David; so we may compare David’s desertion with Christ’s betrayal, and the end of Ahithophel (2 Sa 17:23) with the
end of Judas Iscariot (Mt 27:5-8. Ac 1:18,19).

VIII. LEANNOTH.

See No. x, below.

IX. MAHALATH (The great Dancing).

This word stands in The Companion Bible as the sub-scription of Ps 52, and not in the super-scription or title of Ps
53, as in all other Bibles and Versions.

The Septuagint translators could make nothing of the words (there being no vowel points); so they simply
transliterated the word, spelling it maeleth, which has no meaning whatever. AQUILA, a reviser of the Sept. (about
A.D. 160), supplied different vowels, and read the Hebrew as though it meant choreia, dancing. He must have take the
Hebrew Mecholoth to mean dancing (or, by the plural of majesty, the great dancing). SYMMACHUS, another reviser of
the Sept. (about A.D. 193-211), follows AQUILA.

This rendering, which takes the Hebrew as being Mecholoth (instead of Mahalath), at once connects Ps 52 with 1 Sa
18:6,7, the occasion being celebrated and known afterwards, as “the great dancing”. Twice, later in David’s life, this
event is referred to as a landmark in David’s history (1 Sa 21:11; 29:5). If we read Ps 52, we shall note the references to
Doeg’s mischievous tongue (in vv. 1-4); to David’s assertion (1 Sa 17:37) in v. 5; to David’s words, “all this assembly shall
know” (1 Sa 17:47); in vv. 6, 7 “the righteous also shall see and fear”. The victory is ascribed to God in v. 9, as it is in 1
Sam.

When we read these remarkable references, we shall not heed the modern critics’ talk about “catchwords of an
older song”, or the “name of a tune called ‘Sickness'”, or “the name of a choir at Abel-meholah”.

X. MAHALATH LEANNOTH (The great Dancing and Shouting).

These words are found as the sub-scription to Ps 87 in The Companion Bible (not as the super-scription or title to Ps
88 over which it stands in all other Bibles and Versions). As Mecholoth means dancing (see No. IX above), so all are
agreed that Leannoth means shoutings (and, with the pl. or majesty, the great shouting). (Cp. Ex 15:20,21; 32:17,18.
Nu 21:17. 1 Sa 18:6,7. Ezr 3:11). So that the combined words “The Great Shouting and Dancing” give us the
subject-matter of Ps 87.

We have only to read the Psalm in the light of 1 Sa 6:14,15 to see the obvious connection with David’s bringing the
Ark to Zion. In v. 2 there is a distinct allusion to the other places where the Ark had found a temporary dwelling, Shiloh
(1 Sa 1:3; 2:14; 3:21. Ps 78:60); Beth-shemesh (1 Sa 6:13); Kirjath-jearim (1 Sa 7:1); Gibeah (2 Sa 6:3,4); the house of
Obed-edom (vv. 10-12). But none of these was the dwelling-place Jehovah had chosen. Hence, Zion is celebrated as
“the Mount Zion which He loved”.

XI. MASCHIL. Understanding or Instruction. (Public.)

This word is found in the super-scription proper of thirteen Psalms (32, 42, 44, 45, 52, 53, 54, 55, 74, 78, 88, 89,
142). Unlike the “Michtam” Psalms (which are all by David, see No. XII below), these are by various authors.

· Six are by David (32, 52, 53, 54, 55, and 142).

· Three are by the sons of Korah (42, 44, and 45).

· Two are by Asaph (74 and 78).

· One is by Heman the Ezrahite (88).

· One is by Ethan the Ezrahite (89).

Maschil is from sakal, to look at, scrutinize, to look well into anything (1 Sa 18:30); hence the noun will mean
understanding arising from deep consideration (Pr 13:15. Ne 8:8). The Sept. rendering is suneseos = understanding and
eis sunesin = for understanding. It is the O.E. verb to skill.

The first of these Psalms (32) gives the basis of all true instruction and understanding. In v. 8 it is given:

“I will instruct thee And teach thee in the way thou shouldest go … Be not as the horse, or as the mule, which have
no understanding”.

Or Ps 44:1,

“We have heard”, &c.; or 45:10, “Hearken, O daughter, and incline thine ear”, &c.

The idea “to play skillfully” seems trivial in comparison with such “instruction” as this.

XII. MICHTAM (Engraven).

This word is found (in all Versions of the Bible) in the super-scription of six Psalms (16, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60). All are by
David. The last five form a group by themselves. See the Structure of “the Exodus Book” (or the Second Book) of the
Psalms (p. 759), where, in Group F1-F5, God’s People speak to Him as Israel’s Redeemer; and His work as telling of His
death and resurrection.

The word Michtam is from Katam, to cut in, or engrave, as in Jer 2:22, “thine iniquity is graven before me” (not
“marked”, as in A.V. and R.V.). The Sept. renders it stelographia = a sculptured writing. Hence, stele = a sepulchral
monument, on account of the inscription graven on it. The word, therefore, points to a graven and therefore a
permanent writing; graven on account of its importance (cp. Job 19:24). What that importance is can be gathered only
from the Michtam Psalms themselves.

The A.V. and R.V. derive the word from Kethem gold, either from its being precious, or hidden away. This meaning
is not far out; but it lacks the raison d’etre for this importance, which the other derivation gives in connecting with
death and resurrection.

The Michtam Psalms are all pervaded by the common characteristic of being Personal, Direct, and more or less
Private. This reference is to David’s Son and David’s Lord; and especially to His death and resurrection; or to a
deliverance from imminent danger, or death; or even from the grave itself. See Ps 16:10,11; 56:13; 57:3; 58:10,11;
59:16; 60:5,12. It is David who “being a prophet” (Ac 2:25-31), knew that God “would raise up Messiah to sit on his
throne”. Hence this is the truth engraven in the first of these Michtam Psalms (16).

XIII. MUTH-LABBEN (The Death of the Champion).

This, in The Companion Bible, stands now as the sub-scription of Ps 8, and not as the super-scription or title of Ps 9,
as in other Bibles and Versions. All are agreed that muth can mean only death. As to the other word labben, the matter
is not so simple. For ben means son, but there is nothing about a “son” in either Psalm (8 or 9): and, as it must relate
(like the other Titles) to subject-matter, and not to the name of a “song”, or a “tune”, or a “musical instrument”, there
must be another explanation of ben. Now ben may be beyn, written what is called “defective”, i.e. without the full sign
for its vowel (which is very often found in Hebrew).

In that case it would mean the separator, and thus be related to bayin = “between” which is the dual form of this
word in the designation of Goliath in 1 Sa 17:4,23, “the man between [the two hosts” of Israel and the Philistines], or
“the duellist”. Hence, labben (“for the son”) may be read labbeyn, “for the duellist” or “the champion”, or “the one
standing between”. Indeed, this is exactly how the words are given in the ancient Jewish commentary called the
Targum: “To praise; relating to the death of the man who went between the camps”. That is to say, the champion, as
he is called in 1 Sa 17:4,23. (*3)

Read in this light, Ps 8 stands out with quite a new signification, seeing it relates to “the death of the champion”,
Goliath of Gath. We may compare with this Ps 144, which in the Sept. version has this remarkable title, “by David,
concerning Goliath”: in v. 3 or which Psalm we have the very words of Ps 8:4. And in v. 10 the words, “Who
delivereth David His servant from the hateful sword”: i.e. of Goliath.

XIV. NEGINAH.

See “Neginoth”, No. XV below, of which it is the singular.

XV. NEGINOTH (Smitings).

This word, in The Companion Bible, stands in the sub-scriptions of eight Psalms, i.e. 3, 5, 53, 54, 60 (sing.), 66, 75,
and Hab 3. (Not in the super-scriptions of Ps 4; 6; 54; 55; 61 (sing. with ‘al instead of Beth), 67, and 76). “Neginoth” is
from nagan, to strike, or smite. Hence it has hitherto been associated with the striking of the strings of some musical
instrument! But why should the striking be connected with strings? Is there no other kind of smiting known? Why may it
not refer to the stroke of affliction, or the smiting with words? Indeed, it is so associated in Lam 3:63: “I am he whom
they smite [with their words]”.

In all these Neginoth Psalms there is the note of deliverance from personal smitings. See 3:2; 5:6; 53:1; 54:3; 60:3,
5, 11; 66:10-12; 75:4, 5. We have the verb again in 77:7, “I call to remembrance my song”, or my stroke of affliction. So
in Isa 38:20, “We will sing, or make songs”, or, we will make songs concerning my stroke, or afflictions. In Hab 3:19 we
may, in the same way, understand it as “relating to my smitings”, i.e. those referred to in v. 16.

XVI. NEHILOTH (Inheritances, or The Great Inheritance).

This word is found in The Companion Bible in the sub-scription to Ps 4 (not in the super-scription of Ps 5 as in other
Bibles and Versions). The word is Nehiloth, which has been taken from halal, to bore; but, even then, human
imagination does not seem able to rise higher than the boring of holes to make a flute!

The Sept. has “concerning her that inherits”. AQUILA in his revision (A.D. 160) has “Division of Inheritances”.
SYMMACHUS (A.D. 193-211) has “Allotments”; while the Latin Versions have similar renderings. This shows that they must
have had before them the consonants N, H, L, TH, with the vowel-points NehaLoTH which gives the intelligible
meaning, inheritances, or the great inheritance. In Ps 4 this reference is quite clear. Jehovah was the inheritance of
His People (Ps 16:5; cp. 73:26; 119:57; 142:5. Jer 10:16. Lam 3:24). Hence, in Ps 4:6, the question is asked, “Who will
show us [what] good [is]”? And the answer which follows is “Thou”. For, joy in Jehovah is greater than joy in harvest.
The same truth is seen in Ps 144. See notes on vv. 11-15-, with the true answer in v. -15.

XVII. PSALM (Heb. Mizmor).

This word is used in the super-scriptions forty-four times in all (Ps 3; 4; 5; 6; 8; 9; 12; 13; 15. 19. 20. 21, 22, 23, 24,
29, 31, 38, 39, 40, 41, 47, 49, 50, 51, 62, 63, 64, 73, 77, 79, 80, 82, 84, 85, 98, 100, 101, 109, 110, 139, 140, 141, 143. Of
these, twenty-one are in Book I, seven in Book II, seven in Book III, three in Book IV, and six in Book V.

Mizmor means, and is invariably rendered, “a Psalm”, and occurs nowhere but in the Psalm-Titles. It differs from Shir
(see below), which is “a Song”: i.e. for singing, whereas Mizmor may be for meditation, &c. Mizmor is joined with Shir
in thirteen Psalms (30, 65, 67, 68, 75, 76, 87, 92, preceding it; and 48, 66, 83, 88, 108, following it).

XVIII. SELAH.

See Ap. 66. II.

XIX. SHEMINITH. (The Eighth Division.)

This word occurs in the sub-scription of two Psalms (5 and 11 in The Companion Bible); not in the super-scription of
Ps 6 and 12, as in other Bibles and Versions. There is a general agreement that it means “the eighth”, and in its thirty-one
occurrences it is always so rendered, except in 1 Ch 15:21 and in these two sub-scriptions (Ps 5 and 11), where it is
transliterated “Sheminith”. The A.V. puts “the eighth” in the margin in all three cases. The R.V. puts “the eighth” only in
the case of the two Psalms.

Though it is agreed that the word means “eighth”, it is not agreed as to what “the eighth” refers to. It varies between
“the eighth mode”, “the eighth (or octave) below” (i.e. the bass), “the eighth day”, or year, or “an instrument with
eight strings”. The latter is out of the question, because, in 1 Ch 15:21, those with harps are set “over the Sheminith” (as
others are set “over the ‘Alamoth”), and we cannot speak of certain “instruments” being “set” over others. Moreover, the
Sheminith are additional to Neginoth in the sub-scription to Ps 5. 1 Ch 15:21 helps us to the solution. The ‘Alamoth being
maidens (v. 20), it would seem obvious that the Sheminith must be men (v. 21). But what class of men? The Talmud (*4)
suggests a class of true Israelites, i.e. those circumcised on the eighth day, and thus distinguished from all other Jews
or Gentiles; for other nations who practice circumcision always do so on a later day (*5), never on the eighth day.

As all others in the procession were, in this sense, Sheminith, and the Sheminith are distinguished from these as well
as the ‘Alamoth, Dr. Thirtle concludes that it must refer, as well, to a division in that procession. Everything points to
divisional order in such processions (cp. Ex 25:14. Nu 4:15; 7:9. So also in 1 Ch 24:1; 26:1,12). The definite article seems
conclusive. In 1 Ch 15:21 the Sheminith were to lead (R.V.), not “to excel” (as in A.V.). This is its general meaning (see
1 Ch 23:4. 2 Ch 34:12. Ezr 3:8,9), where it is rendered “set forward”.

An examination of Ps 5 and 11 show us that there is special emphasis on “righteous worshippers” as distinct from
others. Cp. 5:7, 11 with 11:1 and 7, and see the Structures of those Psalms.

XX. SHIGGAION (A crying aloud).

This word occurs only in the super-scription of Ps 7, and in the super-scription of the prayer in Hab 3:1, where it is
in its right place. The scope of the Psalm guides Dr. Thirtle to the choice of sha’ag, to cry aloud, in trouble, danger, or
pain, and to discard shagah, which means to wander, or go astray. There is nothing in the Psalm to agree with the
latter, and everything that points to the loud cry of David when he was in danger of being torn in pieces, and to the
loud cries (pl.) or Habakkuk: of pain in v. 16 and of praise in v. 18.

XXI. SHOSHANNIM (Lilies, or, The Spring Festival, Passover).

This word is found in the sub-scription of two Pss., i.e. 44 and 68, not in the super-scription of Ps 45 and 69, as it
stands in other Bibles and Versions. We have already seen under “GITTITH” (No. IV above) that, as the spring and autumn
were appropriately represented by flowers and fruit respectively, so lilies and winepresses were singled out from each.

The Passover and Feast of Tabernacles divided the year into two fairly equal parts; the former being the spring
festival and the latter the autumn. Israel is symbolized again and again by the vine (*6), and Dr. Thirtle refers us to 2
Esdr 5:23-28 (R.V.) for the use of the lily. It is the prayer of Esdras:

“O Lord That bearest rule of all the woods of the earth, and of all the trees thereof, Thou hast chosen Thy ONE
VINE; and of all the lands of the world Thou hast chosen the ONE COUNTRY; and of all the flowers of the world, ONE
LILY …; and among all its peoples Thou hast gotten the ONE PEOPLE …: now, O Lord, why hast Thou give this ONE
PEOPLE over unto many”, &c.

Lilies and pomegranates (spring flowers and autumn fruits) were everywhere seen in the Temple (1 Ki 7:20-22), and
the knops (or knobs) of flowers of Ex 25:31-34 were doubtless the same globe-like pomegranates and lilies. The Sept.
has “globes” and lilies. Cp. Ex 28:33,34; 39:25,26, where the “bell”-like flower is doubtless meant.

In the Jewish Prayer Book, at the Feast of Purim, Israel is spoken of as “the lily of Jacob”; and at the Feast of
Dedication (Chanucha) God is praised for delivering “the standard of the lilies” (i.e. of Israel). The Hebrew shekel had,
on one side, sometimes a lamb (Passover), and, on the other side, a wine-bowl (Tabernacles). The half-shekel had a
triple lily and a wine-bowl:

(SILVER SHEKEL OF SIMON MACCABAEUS.)

In old Jewish cemeteries, tombs are seen with the seven-branched candlestick with its knops and flowers, and
sometimes with the triple lily and pomegranate.

Interpreters who are guided by tradition see in these lilies only “poppy heads”, betokening eternal sleep! and “a
round fruit” or husk from which the kernel (or spirit) has fled! Thus Babylonian and Egyptian heathenism is forced to
interpret and replace Divine Biblical symbols. But we may as in this case: “Does not the lily say, ‘Here lies one of
Jehovah’s redeemed’? and the pomegranate, ‘Here lies one safe in Jehovah’s keeping'”?

Read, now, the two Shoshnnim Psalms (44 and 68), and the Passover story will be seen in all its fulness and beauty.

XXII. SHUSHAN, AND SHOSHANNIM EDUTH. (Instruction as to the Spring Festival, or the Second Passover.)

This title is found in the sub-scription of Ps 79 in The Companion Bible (not the super-scription of Ps 80, as in other
Bibles and Versions), while SHUSHAN (sing.) EDUTH is found in the sub-scription of Ps 59 in The Companion Bible (not
the super-scription of Ps 60, as in other Bibles and Versions).

The first of these two words refers to the Spring Festival (see under No. XXI above), the latter refers to some
testimony concerning it. There is no dispute as to the ‘Eduth meaning “testimony”. It is one of “the ten words” found
twenty-three times in Ps 119 (see Ap. 73). But what is the “testimony” to which these two Psalms refer? It must be
concerning something connected with the Spring Festival (Passover), and Dr. Thirtle sees in it the Law and the
“Testimony” respecting the keeping of the Passover in the second month, when, under special circumstances, it could
not be kept in the first month (see Nu 9:10,11, and cp. 2 Ch 30:1-3). Ps 59 and 79 treat of enemies being then in the
land, which might well have created a difficulty in keeping the Passover in the first month.

In any case, this interpretation is more reasonable, and more worthy of the dignity of the Sacred Text than the
unsupported guesses as to its being the name of “a popular song”, or “the name of a tune”, or a choir whose President
lived at Shushan.

XXIII. SONG.

Is always the rendering of Shir, and denotes words that are to be sung, as distinct from Mizmor (see No. XVII above).
It is joined with Mizmor thirteen times (see above). It is used by itself fifteen times (in the Songs of the degrees); and
in Ps 18 (shirah), 45 (with Maschil), and 46.

(*1) These facts have been discovered, and admirably set forth by Dr. J.W. Thirtle, in his two works on this
subject, viz. The Titles of the Psalms: their Nature and Meaning explained (1904), and Old Testament Problems
(1907). Both published by Henry Frowde, Oxford Bible Warehouse, London.

(*2) The Greek word parthenos, in Mt 1:23, shows that the ‘almah or Isa 7:14 must have been a virgin. The
Septuagint also renders ‘almah by parthenos in Isa 7:14. (*3) The word “champion” in verse 51 is not the same
word, but is gibbor. See Ap. 14. IV.

(*4) Yebamoth 43 b, cp. 53 b. Yebamoth is the first of seven treatises in the third book (Nashim) which treats of
the distinctive rights of men and women. (*5) Josephus, Ant. i. 12. (*6) Ps 80:8. Isa 5:1-7; 27:2-6. Jer 2:21;
12:10. Hos 10:1, &c.

Appendix 66
HEBREW WORDS IN THE TEXT OF THE PSALMS

Certain Hebrew words are retained in the body of the text of the Psalms, being transliterated instead of translated.
Not forming any part of the title, superscription or sub-scription, they are considered here in a separate Appendix.
They are two in number, i.e. HIGGAION and SELAH, and we preserve the spelling of the A.V. for the sake of
convenience.

I. HIGGAION = SOLILOQUY.


The word is found in three Psalms: viz. 9:16; 19:14, and 92:3.

· In 9:16 it is transliterated “Higgaion”.

· In 19:14 it is translated “meditation”; and

· In 92:3 it is rendered “solemn sound”.

The word occurs also in Lam 3:62, where it is rendered in the A.V. “device”, and in the R.V. “imagination”. It is
derived from hagah, and means to soliloquize, to speak to one’s self; hence, to meditate (Jos 1:8. So Ps 77:12 and
143:5). As a noun, it would mean a meditation, or a speaking in premeditated words; and therefore worthy of memory
or repetition. If the three Psalms be read in the light of this word, we shall note the subjects which are so worthy of
our meditation, and not think about music.

· In Ps 9:16 it is the judgment of Jehovah.

· In Ps 19:14 it is the words and the work of Jehovah.

· In Ps 92:2,3 it is the lovingkindness and faithfulness of Jehovah.

II. SELAH.

This word may be from one of two roots; from salah = to pause; or from salal = to lift up. There is no need to
descend to the guesses as to musical terms. A reference to Ap. 65 (p. 92, Int. Col 1) will lead us o connect it with
subject-matter, not with music; and with truth, not with tunes. Some say it occurs always at the beginning of a strophe;
others, always at the end. But this is a question of fact, and not of argument. The outstanding fact is that in four cases
it comes in the middle of a verse, i.e. Ps 55:19; 57:3; and Hab 3:3,9.

This is fatal to both theories, but yet it helps us to, and agrees with, the right conclusion, that both are the two
halves of one truth. Selah does connect the end of one strophe with the beginning of the next; and, indeed, in four
cases it connects the end of one Psalm with the beginning of the next, thus uniting the two Psalms (see Ps 3 with 4; 9
with 10; 24 with 25, and 46 with 47). Selah, therefore, neither ends nor begins a passage, but it CONNECTS the two
passages between which it is placed.

An examination of each occurrence will show what this connection is. It is neither the pausing on one subject; nor
the passing on from one subject to another: but it is the connecting of the two subjects together.

· Sometimes it is the Structures which are connected.

· Sometimes it is synthetic, and adds a development of thought by connecting a prayer with that which
forms the basis of it.

· Sometimes it is antithetic, and adds a contrast.

· Or it connects a cause with an effect, or an effect with a cause.

It is a thought-link, which bids us look back at what has been said, and mark its connection with what is to follow; or
to some additional consequent teaching. Thus, if it be derived from salah, to pause, it is not the instruments of music
which are to pause while the voices continue to sing; but it is our hearts which are to pause and to note the
connection of precious truths.

If it be derived from salal, to lift up, then, it is not the instruments which are to lift up their sound in a louder
degree, but our hearts which are to be lifted up to consider more solemnly the two truths which are about to be
connected. These connections, showing the importance and object of each “Selah”, are given in the notes on each
occurrence of the word. The phenomena connected with “Selah” may be thus stated:

· The word occurs seventy-four times in the Bible, and all are in the Old Testament.

· Of these, seventy-one are in the Book of Psalms, and three are in the model Psalm, “the prayer of
Habakkuk”, ch. 3.

· ? The use of the word is confined to thirty-nine Psalms our of the 150. In

· sixteen of these thirty-nine it occurs once (7, 20, 21, 44, 47, 48, 50, 54, 60, 61, 75, 81, 82, 83, 85, and
143): of these thirty-nine Psalms, thirty-one are in Psalms handed over to “the chief Musician”. (See Ap.
64.)

· In fifteen Psalms it occurs twice (4, 9, 24, 39, 49, 52, 55, 57, 59, 62, 67, 76, 84, 87, and 88).

· In seven Psalms it occurs thrice (3, 32, 46, 66, 68, 77, and 140).

· In one Psalm it occurs four times, viz. Ps 89.

· It is distributed over the five Books of the Psalms (see p. 720) as follows:

Book I (1-41), seventeen times in nine Psalms.
Book II (42-72), thirty times in seventeen Psalms.
Book III (73-89), twenty times in eleven Psalms.
Book IV (90-150), four times in two Psalms.

Appendix 67
THE SONGS OF THE DEGREES.

There is no difference of opinion as to the meaning of the word “degrees”. It means “steps”, but interpretations of the
use of the word in this connection manifest a great difference and discordance. Some think these Psalms were so
called because they were sung on the fifteen steps of the Temple. But there is no evidence that there were fifteen
steps. In Ezekiel’s Temple (Eze 40:22,31) there are to be two flights; one of seven steps in the outer court, and another
of eight steps in the inner court. But that Temple is the subject of prophecy, and is still future.

Others suggest “a Song of the higher choir”, “on the stairs of some high place”; others, “in a higher key”. Others
interpret them of “the going up of the Ark” to Zion; others, of “the going up of the tribes” to the feasts; others, “a Song
of high degree”. Others refer them to “a synthetic arrangement of the parallel lines”; others, that they refer to “the
going up from Babylon”, which makes them all “post-exilic”. Others regard them as referring to the yet future return of
Israel from their long dispersion; while yet others spiritualize all the expressions, and interpret them of the experiences
of the Church of God at all times, and in the present day.

One thing is clear, i.e. that all these interpretations cannot be correct. So we still look for one which shall be
worthy of the dignity of the Word of God as “written for our learning”; and one which shall produce and combine
intellectual enjoyment with experimental satisfaction. Dr. Thirtle (*1) has called attention to the use of the definite
article. The Hebrew reads “A Song of THE Degrees” (Shir hamma’aloth). In this simple fact lies the key to the solution of
the problem, which is as simple in its nature as it is grand in its results.

Once we note the use of the definite article, “THE Degrees”, we naturally ask what Degrees? The answer comes from
the Word of God itself, and not from the guesses and imaginations of men. The only “degrees” of which we read in the
Bible are “the degrees” on the sundial of Ahaz, by which the shadow of the sun went backward in the days of his son
Hezekiah, as a sign from Jehovah that he should recover from his sickness, while Jerusalem was surrounded by the
armies of the king of Assyria, and Hezekiah was under sentence of death from the King of Terrors (see 2 Ki 20:8-11, and
the Structure of the chapters in Isa 36-39). Scripture knows of no other steps or “degrees” that can be connected with
the shadow of the sun.

On recovery from his sickness, Hezekiah said (Isa 38:20):

“Jehovah was ready to save me:
Therefore we will sing MY SONGS (*2) to the stringed instruments
All the days of our life
In the house of Jehovah.” (*3)

More than 250 years ago (1602-75) this interpretation was suggested in a passing remark by Dr. John Lightfoot in his
work on Old Testament Chronology: but so far as Dr. Thirtle is concerned, it was his own independent discovery. The
number of these Psalms (fifteen) adds to its testimony to the certainty of this interpretation. It corresponds with the
number of the years (fifteen), which were added to Hezekiah’s life: while the number written by himself (ten)
corresponds with the number of “the degrees” by which “the shadow of the sun went backward”.

Hezekiah called them “MY songs”. There was no need to put his own name to them, but he put the names to the
other five. The one by Solomon is in the center, with two by David on either side. In each of the seven Psalms (on
either side of the central Psalm) the name “Jehovah” occurs twenty-four times, and “Jah” twice (once in the third Psalm
of each seven). In the central Psalm, “Jehovah” occurs three times.

There are five groups consisting of three Psalms each. The first of each group has Distress for its subject; the second
has Trust in Jehovah; while the third has Blessing and peace in Zion. In the notes on these Psalms, the passages in the
Kings, Chronicles, and Isaiah, to which they refer, are carefully supplied: the passages in the historical books also are
referred to in these Psalms. Here we give, in order, the facts of Hezekiah’s history which are referred to in these
Psalms. These fifteen points of contact can be used in connection both with the Psalms and the historical books.

We have noted fifteen events in the life of Hezekiah which find their counterpart, and are celebrated, in these
fifteen Psalms. Space forbids our giving here more that the bare references. Further details will be found in the notes in
the historical books, the prophet Isaiah, and the Psalms in question.

(i) RAB-SHAKEH’S BLASPHEMOUS TONGUE,

Which is mentioned in Isa 37:4, and 2 Ki 19:16, is referred to in Ps 120:2,3, and 123:3, 4.

(ii) SENNACHERIB’S REPROACHES,

Which we find in 2 Ki 19:25,26, and Isa 37:26,27, are repeated and practically quoted in Ps 129:5-7.

(iii) SENNACHERIB’S SHAME,

In 2 Ch 32:21. This is referred to in Ps 129:4,5.

(iv) HEZEKIAH’S EARNEST PRAYER.

Isa 38:3,10-20. 2 Ch 32:20, and 2 Ki 19:2,4,15-19; 20:2,3, finds more than its echo in Ps 120:1; 123:1-3; 130:1,2.

(v) GOD, “THE MAKER OF HEAVEN AND EARTH”,

Was He to Whom Hezekiah addressed his prayer. This was in retort to idolatrous railings of Rab-shakeh in 2 Ch 32:19.
See notes on Ps 121:1 Ps 121:2 Ps 121:6 Ps 123:1 (cp. 2 Ki 19:15. Isa 37:16); 124:8; 134:3.

(vi) HEZEKIAH’S DESIRE FOR PEACE

Is seen in Isa 38:17; and in Ps 120:6,7 we see the expression of it; for in 2 Ch 32:1-3 Sennacherib’s “face was for war”:
hence, when Hezekiah says “I am for peace”, who can doubt the reference to 2 Ki 18:19, &c. and Isa 36:5, &c. See
further Ps 122:6,7; 125:5, and 128:6, and his own last desire for peace in 2 Ki 20:19.

(vii) JEHOVAH’S PROMISED HELP.

In 2 Ki 19:32-34; 20:6, we have Jehovah’s own answer to Sennacherib’s challenge (2 Ch 32:10,15,17. Isa 36:20; 37:11).
Notice how Hezekiah treasured up this Divine pledge: Ps 121:2-8; 124:1-3,6; 125:2; 126:2,3; 127:1.

(viii) “FOR MY SERVANT DAVID’S SAKE”.

This was the ground of Jehovah’s promise (2 Ki 19:34) in answer to Hezekiah’s prayer in v. 14. See also 2 Ki 20:5,6.
Observe how these words are taken up in 132:1-10.

(ix) JEHOVAH’S SIGN TO HEZEKIAH.

In 2 Ki 19:29, and Isa 37:30 this sign is given; and we see it referred to in Ps 126:5,6; 128:2. The continued
perseverance of the sowers under great disappointment gives a picture of peaceful agriculturists at work at home, and
not of exiles in a foreign land, or on their way home from Babylon.

(x) HEZEKIAH’S TRUST IN JEHOVAH.

This is the first thing recorded of Hezekiah (2 Ki 18:5). It was the taunt of Rab-shakeh (2 Ki 18:28-31), and is
mentioned again and again (Isa 36:18; 37:10). Now compare Ps 121:2; 125:1-3; 127:1; 130:5-8.

(xi) HEZEKIAH LIKE A BIRD IN A CAGE.

This is not mentioned in Scripture; but Sennacherib has written it down for us, and it may be read to-day in the
British Museum in London, on a hexagonal cylinder of this very Sennacherib, King of Assyria (607-583 B.C.). (*4)

By the kind permission of the Oxford University Press, we are privileged to give a reproduction of a photograph of
this cylinder. It is “one of the finest and most perfect objects of its class and kind ever discovered, and its importance
as an historical document can hardly be overrated. It contains four hundred and eighty-seven lines of closely written by
legible cuneiform text, inscribed in the Eponymy of Belimuranni, prefect of Karkemish”.

The text records eight expeditions of Sennacherib. Among them is his description of this very siege of Jerusalem in
the reign of Hezekiah. By the same kind permission we are enabled to give a photographic facsimile of that portion of
the cylinder, beginning with the eleventh line of the central column, which is shown in the illustration below.

The words we wish to refer to are in the eleventh to the twenty-first lines. Sennacherib says:

1. “I fixed upon him. And of Hezekiah [king of the]
2. Jews, who had not submitted to my yoke,
3. forty-six of his fenced cities, and the strongholds, and the smaller cities
4. which were round about them and which were without number,
5. by the battering of rams, and the attack of engines
6. and by the assaults of foot soldiers, and ….. (*5)
7. I besieged, I captured, 200,150 people, small and great, male and female,
8. horses, and mules, and asses, and camels, and men,
9. and sheep innumerable from their midst I brought out, and
10. I reckoned [them] as spoil. [Hezekiah] himself like a caged bird within Jerusalem,
11. his royal city, I shut in, &c.

Now read the words of Hezekiah in Ps 124:7:

“Our soul is escaped as a bird out of the snare of the fowlers:
The snare is broken, and we are delivered”.

This takes the Psalm right back to the very days of Hezekiah and Sennacherib. Indeed, it takes us back beyond the
days of Hezekiah and Sennacherib: for it is a Psalm of David. Some 360 years before Hezekiah (964-603 B.C.), David
had found himself in similar trouble. He was hunted like a partridge in the mountains, pursued as a dog, and sought as a
flea, by Saul. He had been shut up in his hiding places (*6). At such a similar time of Hezekiah’s need, when he was shut
up in his house by sickness, and besieged in Jerusalem by Sennacherib, he was indeed “like a caged bird”. What Psalm
could more suitably express the sense of his need, and his praise for Divine deliverance?

He had no need himself to write another “Song”. Here was one ready to his hand. Indeed, David’s reference to his
escape “as a bird out of the snare of the fowlers” would be seized on by Hezekiah as exactly suited to express his
deliverance from the “snare”, as well as from the siege of Sennacherib. It makes the history live again before our eyes.
We can see the vain boasting of his enemies; and hear his own praise, as he exclaims:

“Blessed be Jehovah, Who hath not given us as prey to their teeth” (Ps 124:6).

(xii) THE CAPTIVITY OF ZION.

The foregoing statement of Sennacherib (see xi, p. 98), that he had taken away 200,150 captives from all the tribes
of Israel, enables us to understand Hezekiah’s prayer “for the remnant that are left”. There is no need to forcibly
introduce the captivity in Babylon. The “turning of captivity” was an idiomatic expression (by the Fig. Paronomasia
(*7), Ap. 6), used to emphasize the return of good fortune: not necessarily deliverance from a literal captivity of
bondage. Jehovah “turned the captivity of Job” (Job 42:10) by delivering him out of his troubles and giving him twice
as much as he had before. Ps 126:1-3 refers to the deliverance of Hezekiah and Zion, as well as to the captives
mentioned on the cylinder of Sennacherib (see p. 98).

(xiii) HEZEKIAH’S ZEAL FOR “THE HOUSE OF JEHOVAH”.

This was one of the most prominent features of Hezekiah’s character. It occupied his thoughts and filled his heart.
The first act of his reign was to “open the doors of the house of Jehovah” (2 Ch 29:3) which Ahaz his father had “shut
up” (2 Ch 28:24). This was “in the first year of his reign, in the first month”. See also Isa 37:1,14. 2 Ki 20:8. Isa 38:20,22.
Now read Ps 122:1,9 and 134:1, 2.

(xiv) HEZEKIAH CHILDLESS.

While the king of Assyria was besieging the gates of Zion, and the King of Terrors was besieging Hezekiah who was
on his bed of sickness, Hezekiah at that moment had no heir to his throne; and the promise of Jehovah to David (2 Sa
7:12) seemed about to fail. Like Abraham when he had “no seed” (Ge 15), Hezekiah must have been anxious at such a
crisis.

He trusted in Jehovah for victory over his enemies; and he trusted in Jehovah for His faithfulness as to His promise
to David. This is shown in Ps 132:11. In this crisis Jehovah sent Isaiah to Hezekiah with the promise of a son (2 Ki 20:18.
Isa 39:7). Not until three of the fifteen added years had passed was the promise fulfilled, in the birth of Manasseh. This
it is which accounts for Hezekiah’s anxiety.

There is nothing in the return from Babylon that can have any connection whatever with Ps 127 and 128. Rejoicing in
the multiplication of children in those sad days would be quite out of place. But in the case of Hezekiah, they stand out
in all their full significance, and furnish an undesigned coincidence of the greatest importance. Read 127:3-5, and the
whole of Ps 128, the last verse of which reflects Hezekiah’s words (Isa 39:8).

(xv) THE PASSOVER FOR “ALL ISRAEL”.

The proper time for keeping the Passover was already past, but rather than wait eleven months, Hezekiah resolved
to keep it in the second month, according to the provision made for such as occasion in Nu 9:1-11 (2 Ch 30:1-3).
Moreover, Hezekiah would have it for “all Israel” (2 Ch 30:5,6). So the tribes from the North came down and untied
with the tribes of the South (2 Ch 30:11,18). The hand of God was with them to give them “ONE HEART” (2 Ch 30:12).
Then we read in 2 Ch 30:25,26 of the happiness of it all.

Ps 133 celebrates this great event of Hezekiah’s reign; but it is a Psalm of David. Yes, but it celebrates another
occasion precisely similar, when David’s message “bowed the heart of all the men of Judah, even as the heart of ONE
MAN” (2 Sa 19:14; cp. v. 9). It was exactly suited, therefore, to Hezekiah’s circumstances. Hezekiah’s purpose was to
unite the tribes of the Northern Kingdom with the tribes of the South. Hermon’s dew was one with the dew on Zion.
The same cloud of the night mist united Israel and Judah; and we are invited to “Behold how good and pleasant it was
for brethren to dwell together AT ONE”.

These fifteen points put these “Songs of THE degrees” back into their historic setting, more than 600 years before
Christ; and rescues them from the hands of those who would bring them down to about 150 B.C. and force them to
have some connection with times and events for which no historical basis whatever can be found.

(*1) Old Testament Problems. London: Henry Frowde, 1907.

(*2) In the Psalms the word is shir (see Ap. 65. xxiii), while in Isa 38:20 it is neginah (see Ap. 65. xiv). But the
latter word, by the Fig. Metonomy (of the Subject), refers to the words, as shir does (Ps 69:12; 77:6. Lam 3:14,
and in v. 63) to the “musick”; and the two words are used synonymously in the superscriptions and sub-scriptions
of Ps 66 and 75.

(*3) Note the Fig. Epanadiplosis (Ap. 6), by which this statement is marked off, and its completeness emphasized
by beginning and ending with the same word, “Jehovah”.

(*4) According to “received” dating this is usually given as 705-681 B.C. Sennacherib’s siege of Jerusalem took
place in the 14 th year of Hezekiah (603 B.C. Ap. 50. V). According to Professor Sayce, “Bible and Monuments”
(Variorum Aids, p. 80), this invasion took place four years after his accession; and, as he is supposed to have
reigned twenty years afterward (twenty-four years in all), his true regnal period would be, according to The
Companion Bible dating (Ap. 50. V), 607-583 B.C. and not 705-681 B.C.

(*5) The three words at the end of this line are the proper names of military engines.

(*6) Read 1 Sa 23:1-13,19-24,12,14; 26:1-20.

(*7) veshabti, eth-shebuth. Cp. 2 Ch 28:11. Ne 8:17. Job 42:10. Ps 14:7; 53:6; 85:1; 126:1,4. Jer 30:3,18; 31:23;
32:44; 33:7,11,26; 48:47; 49:6,39. Lam 2:14. Eze 16:53; 29:14; 39:25. Am 9:14. Zep 2:7; 3:20.

Appendix 68
ZION

I. OPHEL, OR “THE CITY OF DAVID”.

II. THE JEBUSITE WATER-SUPPLY.

III. HEZEKIAH’S CONDUIT AND POOL.

IV. THE “SILOAM INSCRIPTION”.

V. THE TEMPLE OF SOLOMON ON MOUNT MORIAH.

VI. SOLOMON’S ROYAL BUILDERS ON MORIAH.

VII. SOLOMON’S ASCENT.

VIII. THE “DUNG GATE” OF NEHEMIAH.

I. OPHEL, OR “THE CITY OF DAVID”.

THAT Zion (Heb.) or Sion (Greek) was “the city of David” is clear from 2 Sa 5:7. That Ophel and Zion are equivalent
names applied to the highest point of mound of the hill ridge running due south from Mount Moriah is now generally
conceded. That Zion was the name of the original Jebusite fortress on this summit, almost directly above Gihon (now
known as “the Virgin’s Fount”) is also accepted by the majority of the authorities on the topography of Jerusalem.

It therefore becomes necessary to readjust some of the place-names which have been given to a Zion on the west
side of Jerusalem on traditionary accounts (which, from the time of Josephus onwards, have located Zion on the
south-western hill of the city), and to transfer them to a Zion south of Mount Moriah. This readjustment will transfer the
name to the true site and satisfy the requirements of fulfilled prophecy; which declares that “Zion shall be ploughed as a
field” (Jer 26:18. Mic 3:12). This is true of the site now claimed for it; but is not wholly true of the traditional site on
the south-west side of Jerusalem, which still has buildings upon it.

The general plan on p. 100 is from the Ordnance Map of Jerusalem, from the survey by Sir Charles Wilson, and shows
Moriah now occupied by the Haram ash Sharif, i.e. “The noble Sanctuary”, which stands on its rectangular “platform”
about the center of what is known as “the Haram area”. This and the other more or less ancient and modern buildings on
this area are shown in dotted lines on the plans.

Immediately to the south lies the ridged hill on the summit or “swelling” of which stood the Jebusite fortress or
citadel of Zion (or Ophel), from which the whole area immediately adjoining took its name, when captured by David,
as “the city of David”. Both name and title became in later times ascribed to the whole area of the city of Jerusalem.

The key to a right understanding of the whole question concerning the correct location of Zion is undoubtedly the
spring known in the O.T. as Gihon (the modern name being “the Virgin’s Fount”), with its underground rock-hewn
conduit constructed by Hezekiah to convey the waters of the Fount to the Pool of Siloam within the enclosing wall of
the city (see plan, p. 100).

Starting from the SE. angle of the “Haram area”, this enclosing wall ran southward on the steep slope of the Zion of
Ophel Hill, till it reached a point south of “the Old Pool” (Isa 22:11). Thence, turning sharply almost due N., the wall was
carried round the bottom of the western slope of the Zion Hill, and ran NE. till it reached the south-westerly end of
Moriah, at the corner of the present “Haram area”; and thence due E. till it completed the circuit at the SE. corner of
the Haram. The line of this wall is indicated on the plan (p. 100) by the thick dotted line (*1) thus – – – .

(*1) On the plan (p. 100) a point is marked at the south end of the conduit, as “Warren’s Shaft”. In his “Recovery
of Jerusalem”, Sir Charles Warren tells us that “at 450 feet from the Siloam end … we found a shaft leading
upwards apparently to the open air.” This is of great importance as it altars considerably the conjectured line of
wall that is shown on the P.E.F. plans as running due N. up the east slope of Ophel, from the great masonry dam
below the Old Pool. This shaft must have been within the city wall. Therefore, as 450 feet from the exit at Siloam
locates it as being beyond the first bend in the serpentine course, of the conduit, the city wall must necessarily
have been carried up at least 100 feet nearer to the east, and probably in the position it is shown in on the plan
on p. 100.

N.B. — All the plans on these pages have been specially made for The Companion Bible.

II. THE JEBUSITE WATER-SUPPLY.

The rock-hewn conduit from Gihon (or the Virgin’s Fount) is shown with remarkable accuracy on the Ordnance Survey
maps. If, as it is confidently asserted, Gihon (or the well-spring or Fount of the Virgin) is the only spring in the
immediate vicinity of Jerusalem, then Melchizedek, King of Salem, and, later, the Jebusites, would be in possession of
the only unfailing water-supply of the district. That the Jebusites had access to this well or spring from within their
wall and fortress is clear: but, in the end, it proved their undoing, for David’s men obtained possession of Jebus by
means of the tzinnor (A.V. “gutter”), i.e. the channel and shaft leading from the well into their citadel. (See notes on 2
Sam 5:6-8 and 1 Ch 11:6; also the Section on p. 102). (*1)

The spring is intermittent, overflowing periodically, thus pointing to the existence of either a natural chasm or
reservoir, or a made reservoir, whose site is at the present unknown. Possibly it is under Mount Moriah itself. Tradition
has much to say as to a deep well with an unfailing water-supply beneath the Temple area. (Cp. also Ps 46:4.) (*2)

The fortress or citadel of Zion was immediately above this well-spring, and its defenders could thus command their
water-supply from within, and also the security of the source without. Before the time of Hezekiah, “the city of David”
was dependent upon this source for its water-supply in times of danger threatened from without, in the same manner
that the Jebusites were, viz. they descended from Ophel by means of rock-hewn passages, with steps and slopes (still
in existence) till they reached the top of WARREN’S Shaft (see Section of David’s tzinnor or “gutter”, p. 102), and by
means of buckets drew their water from the unfailing well-spring some 40 to 50 feet below. At the top of this shaft is
still to be seen the iron ring employed for this purpose.

(*1) This Section, by Sir Charles Warren’s kind permission, is presented W. to E. (and facing north), like the other
plans on pp. 100 and 105, so as not to confuse the reader. In the Section, as shown on p. 102, it must be
understood that the opening to the canal running south is thus shown by way of accommodation.

(*2) The Heb. word nachar here is used of a constant flow of water in contrast with nahal, which means a wady or
summer stream dependent on rains.

III. HEZEKIAH’S CONDUIT AND POOL.

The rock-hewn tunnel or conduit discovered by SIR CHARLES WARREN in 1867, and first mentioned by him, conveyed
the overflow water (*1) from this spring to the Pool of Siloam.

That this conduit and pool were made by Hezekiah is now considered certain from the inscription found in the tunnel
itself (see the plan on p. 100). Hezekiah, before the Assyrian invasion, in 603 B.C. (see Ap. 50. V, p. 60), constructed
this tunnel and brought the water from Gihon to a new pool (above “the Old Pool” of Isa 22:11) that he had made for the
purpose (2 Ki 20:20). This pool henceforth became known as “the King’s Pool” (Ne 2:14). When the Assyrian army
approached, Hezekiah “stopped the waters of the fountains which were without the city” (2 Ch 32:3-5), i.e. he
concealed their extra-mural approaches and outlets.

THE SILOAM INSCRIPTION, discovered in 1880, on a stone on the right wall of the tunnel about 20 feet from its exit
into the Pool of Siloam, is undoubtedly the work of Hezekiah (see plate, p. 103). An interesting fact with regard to this
inscription is that it gives the length of the conduit in cubits, which, being compared with modern measurements in
English feet, shows that the cubit used was 17.5 inches or thereabouts.

If we knew for certain that the exact points from which Hezekiah measured exactly corresponded with those of the
moderns, them we should be able to settle the vexed question as to the length of the cubit used, at all events in secular
matters, by King Hezekiah. We do not, of course, know this, but it is of great interest to note the fact that the
Inscription’s 1,200 cubits, and the latest measurement of (about) 1,750 English feet yield a cubit of 17.5 inches (*2).

(*1) Before Hezekiah’s time the overflow water must have escaped from the Virgin’s Fount at a lower level than is
now possible, and flowed out and down the lower end of the Kidron valley, past the king’s garden, probably being
the feeder for Joab’s well (En-rogel?).

(*2) In a recent letter, Sir Charles Warren writes on this subject: “Stress must not be laid on the exactness of
measurements made under conditions so difficult to obtain absolute accuracy.” He adds, “it is impossible that any
of the plans of the aqueduct can be rigidly correct, because the roof is so low that your head is horizontal in
looking at the compass, so that you can only squint at it”. It is necessary to remember this warning, coming from
such a source. Nevertheless the figures, as above shown, are highly interesting.

IV. THE SILOAM INSCRIPTION.

According to The Companion Bible Chronology (see Ap. 50 and 86) the date of this Inscription (see § III, pp. 101,
102) is given as 608-7 B.C. for the following reasons. The fall of Samaria was in 611 B.C. Hezekiah, fore-seeing that
Judah’s turn would follow, started the work of making the “Pool” and the “conduit” of 2 Ki 20:20. This difficult
undertaking would probably occupy two or three years.

When the siege of Jerusalem by Sennacherib was begun in Hezekiah’s fourteenth year, this water-supply was
complete and in working order, as Hezekiah had stopped the extra-mural outlets (2 Ch 32:2-4). Therefore, the
rock-hewn conduit from Gihon (now known as “the Virgin’s Fountain”) to Siloam must have been constructed between
Hezekiah’s sixth and fourteenth years (611-603 B.C.).

If we assume that it was begun soon after the fall of Samaria and occupied three years in construction, and that the
Inscription was made on completion, as the record itself indicates, this gives us the date (above) 608-7 B.C. It is
graven in ancient Hebrew characters, similar to those of the Moabite Stone (see Ap. 54); and occupies six lines; the
translation of which is given below.

TRANSLATION OF THE SILOAM INSCRIPTION.

Line 1. [Behold] the excavation. Now this is the history of the breaking through. While the workman were still
lifting up Line 2. The pickax, each toward his neighbor, and while three cubits still remained to [cut through, each
heard] the voice of the other calling Line 3. to his neighbor, for there was an excess (or cleft) in the rock on the right
… And on the day of the Line 4. breaking through, the excavators struck, each to meet the other, pickax against
pickax; and there flowed Line 5. the waters from the spring to the pool over [a space of] one thousand and two
hundred cubits. And … Line 6. of a cubit was the height of the rock above the heads of the excavators.

V. THE TEMPLE OF SOLOMON ON MOUNT MORIAH.

The Plan on p. 105 shows the various buildings on the Temple area on the Moriah site to a larger scale. No attempt is
made either to “design afresh” or, with the ready and often disastrous zeal of the modern iconoclast, to “restore”
Solomon’s Temple in this plan. The efforts put forth in the majority of cases by those who, with the best intentions,
set forth their “ideas”, result in melancholy exhibitions, from the crudely unhappy delineations of the earnest student,
who works in entire ignorance of scales of measurement or the simplest requirements of the builder’s art, to the
redundantly fanciful productions of the professional designer, who, by his very acquaintance with the requirements of
architecture, is often led to try and set before us what he imagines the Temple of Solomon, &c., ought to be.
Accordingly, we have on the one hand bald representations of a Temple of practical impossibility, or, on the other, the
most elaborate architectural confections from all sorts of sources — Phoenician, Egyptian, Grecian, Roman, and even
Gothic.

Not content with these “styles” of architecture for Solomon’s Temple, it is not unusual for illustrators of this subject to
import into their designs all the details they can possibly assimilate from the specification of the Millennial Temple
given by Ezekiel, and to add these on to the meager details given of the Temple of Solomon!

One moment’s serious attention to David’s solemn statement in 1 Ch 28:12,19, that he had received direct instruction
from Jehovah for “the pattern of all that he had by the Spirit”, and “in writing” — in other words, both model and
specification from on High — ought to preserve us from such mistakes. The Temple was built from a heavenly plan and
specification, and there is an entire absence of every detail that would enable us to “restore” such a building. Just as,
in the case of the Tabernacle, the essential details are omitted, so that men may not copy the Mishkan (or habitation)
of Jehovah, so, in the case of Solomon’s Temple, we are placed in the same position.

The plan therefore given on p. 105 deals mainly with the figures given in the sacred records in bulk, merely
arranging the various buildings in accordance with the position of the altar of burnt offering and the Temple in relation
thereto.

The Altar of Burnt Offering is shown on the site of the “Sacred Stone”, which is exactly under the center of the
present Moslem Sanctuary over it, know as “the Dome of the Rock”. (*1) This is the traditional site of David’s altar on
“the threshing-floor of Araunah the Jebusite”. The Temple with its porch, the twin pillars Jachin and Boaz, and the
molten sea, are shown to the west of the altar, and the wide open space, the Court of the Temple, is left blank — for
the best of all reasons: we have no revelation as to how the space was occupied. Josephus and the Jewish rabbinical
writings are alike useless for the purpose of informing us about Solomon’s Temple. The simple fact is that we know
next to nothing, and beyond the statements of “block” measurements, so to speak, we have no guide as to details. That
there was an inner and outer court to the Temple is most probably, although there is no mention of courts until a later
date.

(*1) This and the other main buildings on Haram area are shown on the plans by dotted lines.

VI. SOLOMON’S ROYAL BUILDINGS ON MOUNT MORIAH. With regard to these the case is
different. We are not told that David or Solomon received a

Divine plan and specification for “the house of the forest of Lebanon”, &c. Therefore it is permissible to try and
arrange these buildings, according to the very slight details given, and according to the dictates of common sense.

It seems to be forgotten by some modern “Restorers” of Solomon’s house, and other buildings, that the great king had
received specially the gift of “wisdom”. He was a man with “a wise and understanding heart”, so that there was none
like him before and after. Therefore he would not have fallen into the mistakes of palace building with which he is
credited by some writers. (*1)

Solomon’s house was built of wood from the “forest of Lebanon”, or, as we should say “of Lebanon wood”. It was 100
cubits long, 50 cubits broad, and 30 cubits in height. Although the number of cedar pillars is given, it is impossible to do
more than indicate them on the plan by number. No details as to arrangement are given. The same remark applies to
the Porch of Pillars, which apparently was a magnificent portico, to the house itself, and also to the statements
concerning the Porch of Judgment. The gross dimensions are given of “the Porch of Pillars” (50 cubits by 30 cubits) and
that is all; and we are told that “the house of Pharaoh’s daughter” was like unto this porch. This probably means 50
cubits by 30 cubits, as shown on the plan. Apart from this, all is left unspecified and vague.

(*1) e.g. Prof. STADE in his Geschichte des Volkes Israel, gives an elaborate plan, which has been reproduced in
one of the latest and most important works on Jerusalem. It is, however, completely at variance with the
Scripture record. This plan makes havoc of the Bible statements as to the royal buildings, for it shows (1) The
King’s House, (2) The House of the Forest of Lebanon, (3) Hall of Pillars, (4) The Throne Hall, (5) House of
Pharaoh’s Daughter — whereas the Hebrew text of 1 Ki 7:1-8 plainly records the fact that Solomon’s House and the
House of the Forset of Lebanon were one. This house had a “Porch of Pillars”, probably to the south, and also,
probably, south again, lay the Porch of Judgment, where Solomon sat to administer justice. This, as shown on p.
105, was situated in a position easy of access from “the city of David” — for the people’s sake 00 and at a
sufficient distance from the royal residence for the monarch’s own sake. Solomon was a gentleman as well as a
king, and it is incredible that he would have allowed the populace admission to the Judgment Hall through his own
private grounds. The House for Pharaoh’s daughter completes the buildings specified, although an extensive
Harem must have been added later on.

VII. SOLOMON’S ASCENT.

This ascent, by which Solomon went up to the house of Jehovah, would be between the house and the outer court
of the Temple, and would probably comprise two or three flights of steps or “stairs”, protected by another covered
portico or “porch”, with pillars in accordance with the other buildings. The Temple area level would probably be some
15 or 20 feet above that of the king’s house, and this difference in level would admit of the construction of an “ascent”
that must have possessed features of unusual interest and magnificence from the account given of the visit of the Queen
of Sheba (2 Ki 10:1-10; 2 Ch 9:1-12).

To reach the level of the present Haram area at the south side from “the city of David”, some means of easy ascent
must have been employed. This is shown on the plan, p. 105, as being by a series of steps — forming an important
stairway, giving direct means of approach to a spacious plateau on to which opened out the south end of the Judgment
Hall or Porch. This would afford direct access to the people to the Hall for Judgment concerning their disputes, &c.

In addition to this great stairway for the people, there must also have been an easy way of “going up” from “the city
of David” to the Temple area. This would probably be by means of an inclined ascent, such as that indicated on the plan
(p. 105). It must be remembered that this would also be requisite for a roadway for the king’s chariots, &c. The
evidence is abundant that Solomon had a number of horses and chariots. These would hardly have been installed on the
Haram area level, in juxtaposition with the royal buildings. The fact that beneath the SE. corner of the Haram is still to
be seen the great underground series of pillars and arches known as “Solomon’s stables”, gives strength to the suggestion
that the originals of these and the “Horse Gate” were in very close proximity. (See plan, p. 100.)

VIII. THE “DUNG GATE” OF NEHEMIAH.

On the plan (p. 100 is shown in dotted lines a large drain, running round the SW. angle of the Haram, to its exit at
the extreme S. point of “the city of David” (Zion). This drain is of very great importance with regard to the question of
locating the “Dung Gate” of Nehemiah.

In all probability this drain indicates the position of the “main-drainage system” of the Temple area, and the adjacent
royal buildings, from the time of Solomon and onwards. Ample provision must have been made in buildings of the
character and extent of the Temple and palace for the disposal of the blood of the sacrificial animals and the water of
the ceremonial cleansings, in addition to the sewage from the Levitical quarters, and the huge court entourage of
Solomon (*1) and possibly some of the later kings. For this purpose a great drain must have been employed to convey all
this sewage matter to the lower levels and outside the city.

The fact that the remains of such a large drain or sewer are still in existence in much the position necessitated by the
buildings on the Temple area, &c., suggests that this was either the one constructed by Solomon, or else one laid down
on about the same lines at a later date (*2). As shown by the latest Palestine Exploration Fund plan of Jerusalem, this
drain runs S. down the slope of the Tyropoeon valley, past the Pool of Siloam (the King’s Pool, Ne 2:14), and passes out
under an ancient gateway, recently discovered, to the south of “the Old Pool” (Isa 22:11).

In all likelihood this gateway marks the position (there or thereabouts) or Nehemiah’s “DUNG GATE”. It would be so
named from its close association with — as we should say now — the sewage outfall, as the drain (still existing here)
passed out beneath it, to discharge itself a little lower down into the gully formed by the junction of the Kidron and
Hinnom Valleys, and not far distant from the ridge site identified by some as Aceldama.

That this is the case receives strong confirmation from the fact that this sewer or drain passes under the present
south wall of Jerusalem in close proximity to the existing gate there, which still bears the Arabic name of Bab al
Magharibe or the Dung Gate. The difference in present levels from the SW. corner of the Haram to the “Dung Gate” (at
the south of Zion), and shown on the plan, p. 100 A – B, is 300 feet. This is a fall admirably suited for the purposes such
a drain would have to fulfill. This being so, it supplies the key to unlock the difficulties relating to the location of the
rest of the gates of Nehemiah.

The VALLEY GATE, from whence Nehemiah issued on his night inspection tour (C.2), and from whence the two
processions started E. and N. at the Dedication of the Wall (C.12), is seen to be on the slope of the SW. hill. Recent
explorations have revealed an ancient gateway in the position shown on the plan (p. 100).

The DUNG GATE being thus located at the extreme south of “the city of David”, the next, or “Fountain Gate”, is shown
in close proximity to the site near which the “Stairs of David”, leading up into the higher portion of the city of David,
must undoubtedly have existed.

The WATER GATE is shown close to where and existing road now runs to Gihon; and the other gates follow on in
orderly sequence till the SHEEP GATE is reached on the north of the Temple area, and close to the pool now identified
as the Pool of Bethesda “by the Sheep Gate” (Jn 5:2, marg.). This opened out probably into the large enclosure shown
on the plan (p. 105) necessary for the reception and feeding of the vast numbers of sacrificial animals.

The PRISON GATE (or Gate of the Guard more probably) would be near the extreme NW. angle of the Temple area,
and would be connected with the barracks or quarters of the Temple guard (from whence its name). It was at this
gate, Nehemiah tells up, the procession which started N. from the Valley Gate, at the dedication of the wall, “stood
still”, either to give the other company time to reach the same point, or else to allow the other, the priestly company
under Ezra (Ne 12:36), to precede Nehemiah and the other lay “rulers” into the House of God for the general
thanksgiving (12:40).

(*1) The occupants of the Harem, and their attendants alone, would probably number at least 2,000.

(*2) Another large drain is shown on the latest maps in this neighborhood. This is known as “Warren’s Drain”. It
starts from the Haram area, a little to the left of, and nearly parallel with, the one just referred to. This drain
runs due south for some 700 feet, and then ends, apparently, abruptly. (See plan, p. 100.)

Appendix 69

TRUST

In the Old Testament there are seven Hebrew words translated “trust”, which itself occurs 155 times. “Trust” is the
New Testament word “believe”.

i. batah = to confide in, so as to be secure and without fear. This is the word rendered “trust” in 107 passages,
viz. every passage except those given below.

ii. hasah = to flee for refuge to, take shelter in. This is the word rendered “trust” in thirty-seven passages, viz.
Dt 32:37. Jdg 9:15. Ru 2:12. 2 Sa 22:3,31. Ps 2:12; 5:11; 7:1; 11:1; 16:1; 17:7; 18:2,30; 25:20; 31:1,19; 34:8,22;
36:7; 37:40; 57:1; 61:4; 64:10; 71:1; 73:28; 91:4; 118:8,9; 141:8; 144:2. Pr 30:5. Isa 14:32; 30:2,3; 57:13. Na
1:7. Zep 3:12.

iii. ‘aman = to put faith in; hence, to stay or rest on. Rendered “trust” in six passages, viz. Jdg 11:20. Job 4:18;
12:20; 15:15,31. Mic 7:5.

iv. hul = to tarry, or wait for, once: Job 35:14.

v. galal = to roll on, or devolve, once: Ps 22:8.

vi. yahal = to wait on, or for, with confidence, twice: Job 13:15. Isa 51:5.

vii. rehaz = to rely on, once. Da 3:28.

Appendix 70

Ps 15 AND “THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT”

The place of Ps 15 is seen in the Structure of the first book of the Psalms (p. 721), in which the perfect man of Ps 15
is set in contrast with “the man of the earth” and other men in Ps 9-14. It sets forth the character and conditions of a
true citizen of Zion.

Hence, the Lord Jesus, in proclaiming the kingdom, Mt 4:17-7:29 (see the Structure of the whole Gospel), lays down
the characters of the true subjects of the kingdom. The kingdom has nothing to do with the present Dispensation,
which is one of Grace. The kingdom proclaimed by the King was rejected, and the King was crucified. Hence, “now we
see NOT YET all things put under Him” (Heb 2:8). the kingdom is therefore now in abeyance. But when it shall be set up,
then Ps 15 and “The Sermon on the Mount” will find and receive their full and proper interpretation. See Ap. 63. ix; 71;
and 72.

We note below the correspondence of the subjects treated, in the same order as they are set forth in the Psalm,
which is so complete that it evidently formed the text on which the Sermon on the Mount was based. See the Structure
of Mt 5:1-7:27.

Appendix 71

“THE SUFFERINGS, AND THE GLORY”.

We are told, in 1 Pe 1:10-12, that the prophets of old searched “what, or what manner of time the Spirit of Christ
which was in them did signify, when it testified beforehand the sufferings of Christ, and the glory that should follow.
Unto whom it was revealed, that not unto themselves, but unto us they did minister the things, which are now
reported unto you … with the Holy Ghost sent down from heaven”.

They wrote of the sufferings, and they wrote of the glory that should follow; but there was nothing to tell them
about the times or seasons. Whether the glory was to follow immediately on the sufferings, or whether there was to
be an interval, and whether that interval was to be short or long, no hint was given. hence, they searched as to “what
manner of time was signified”.

This “time” refers to the “unsearchable riches of Christ”. They could not them be traced. Even angels desire to look
into these things (1 Pe 1:12). “Now,” all is revealed. It is ministered unto us, in the Scriptures of truth, on earth; and
God is making known, by means of the Church, something of His manifold wisdom to the principalities and powers in
the heavenly places (Eph 3:9,10).

Angels and prophets saw the “sufferings” like the tops of a distant mountain range — while beyond it a farther range
was seen in a distant haze of glory. But what lay between they could neither see nor know. But now it is revealed. The
sufferings are past, and we are in the valley between these two mountain ranges. the glory is beyond. The secret “hid
in God” has been made known; and we can understand, a little, the answer to the question of Christ to the two
disciples: “Ought not Christ to have suffered these things, and to enter into His glory?” (Lk 24:26). They are linked
together inseparably, especially in the first epistle of Peter. See 1 Pe 1:11; 3:18; 4:13; 5:1.

In the Old Testament they are each frequently dwelt upon together: but, we find that, while the glory is often
mentioned and enlarged upon by itself, without any reference to the sufferings, we never find the sufferings mentioned
without the glory being referred to immediately after. Sometimes the change is quite sudden. In Ps 22, note the change
from v. 21 to vv. 22-end. In Ps 102, note the change from v. 11 to vv. 12-end. In Isa 53 note the change in the middle
of v. 10. (See Ap. 72.)

It seems that when the sufferings are mentioned, we are not left to think that all is to end there. The glory may be
mentioned alone, because there is to be no end to it. But to the sufferings there was to be an end, and that end was to
be revealed in glory.

That is why, when the Lord makes the first mention of His sufferings, in Mt 16:21, He at once proceeded to speak of
the time when He “shall come in the glory of His Father” (v. 27), and to add that some of those who were standing
should see it. And then, after six days, three of them saw the power and coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, and were
eye-witnesses of His majesty, when they were with Him in the holy mount (2 Pe 1:16-18. Cp. Jn 1:14).

Having heard of the sufferings, the disciples were not left to conclude that all was to end there: hence they were at
once given the most wonderful exhibition of the glory which was to follow. This is why the Transfiguration scene
occurs in the third part of the Lord’s ministry, which had to do with His sufferings. See notes on the Scriptures
referred to above, and compare Ap. 72.

Appendix 72
THE PARENTHESIS OF THE PRESENT DISPENSATION

From what has been said in Ap. 63. ix and Ap. 71, it will be seen that there are different Dispensations, or different
characters of Divine administration, suited to the different times in which such administrations are exercised. The
object of this appendix is to show that, in the Old Testament, while this present Dispensation was kept secret (cp. Mt
13:34,35. Ro 11:25. Eph 3:5,9, &c.), there are remarkable breaks which can be explained only after we have the key
put into our hands.

There are certain scriptures which we cannot understand unless we use this key. Like the angels and prophets (1 Pe
1:11,12) we may search in vain, while others may refuse to search and “look into” these things, and profanely speak of
it as the “gap theory”. Whether it be a “theory”, let Scripture decide, and the Savior Himself teach. In the synagogue at
Nazareth “He found the place where it was written:

The Spirit of the Lord is upon Me,
Because He hath anointed Me to preach the gospel to the poor;
He hath sent Me to heal the brokenhearted,
And recovering of sight to the blind,
To set at liberty them that are bruised,
To preach the acceptable year of the Lord.

And HE CLOSED THE BOOK, and He gave it again to the minister, and sat down” (Lk 4:18-20). Why this mysterious
action? Why not continue the reading? Because He could not; for the words which immediately follow refer to the end
of the present Dispensation of Grace, and speak of the coming Dispensation of Judgment. Had he continued to read Isa
61:1,2, the next line would have been

“And the day of vengeance of our God”.

But this part of the prophecy was not then to be fulfilled. As far as He had read, He could truly say, “This day is this
Scripture fulfilled in your ears.” But He could not have said “This day is this Scripture fulfilled”, had He not “closed the
book”, but gone on to read the next line. And yet, in the A.V. and all other versions, there is only a comma between the
two lines, while there is a period of nearly 2,000 years between the two statements. (In the MSS. there is no mark of
punctuation at all.) This will show the importance of “searching” and “looking into” the “manner of time” of which the
prophets wrote.

Other examples may be found in

Ge 1, between verses 1 and 2.
Ps 22, between verses 21 and 22.
Ps 118, in the middle of verse 22.
Isa 9:6, after the first clause.
Isa 53, in the middle of verse 10.
Isa 61, in the middle of verse 2 (see above).
Lam 4, between verses 21 and 22.
Da 9, between verses 26 and 27.
Da 11, between verses 20 and 21.
Hos 2, between verses 13 and 14.
Hos 3, between verses 4 and 5.
Am 9, between verses 10 and 11.
Mic 5, between verses 2 and 3.
Hab 2, between verses 13 and 14.
Zep 3, between verses 7 and 8.
Mt 10, in the middle of verse 23.
Mt 12, in the middle of verse 20.
Lk 1, between verses 31 and 32.
Lk 21, in the middle of verse 24.
Jn 1, between verses 5 and 6.
1 Pe 1, in the middle of verse 11.
Rv 12, between verses 5 and 6.

Appendix 73
THE TEN WORDS OF Ps 119

The number of the words which are frequently repeated in Ps 119 has been variously given and enumerated by
expositors and commentators. It will be better to give them here on the authority of the Massorah (Ap. 30).

The rubric on verse 122 is as follows: “Throughout the whole of the Great Alphabet [i.e. the Alphabetic Psalm, 119]
there is in every verse one of the following ten expressions ” DEREK ( = Way), ‘EDUTH ( = Testimony), PIKKUDIM ( =
Precepts), MIZVAH ( = Commandment), ‘IMRAH ( = Saying), TORAH ( = Law), MISHPAT ( = Judgment), ZEDEK, ZEDAKAH,
and ZADDIK ( = Righteousness), HOK, and HUKKAH ( = Statutes), DABAR ( = Word), which correspond to the Ten
Commandments; except one verse, in which there is none of these: viz. verse 122.” (Massorah, Ginsburg’s Edition, Vol.
II.)

The following list includes all the “Ten Words” given above, with every occurrence in the Psalm, together with the
first occurrence of each word.

(i.) WAY (derek) is from darak, to tread with the feet, and denotes the act of walking. Hence it is used of a going,
or way, or journeying. The first occurrence is Ge 3:24. It occurs in this Psalm thirteen times: vv.
1,3,5,14,26,27,29,30,32,33,37,59,168.

(ii.) TESTIMONIES (‘eduth) is from ‘ud, to turn back again, to go over again, to reiterate, hence, to testify. The first
occurrence is Ge 21:30 (edah). It occurs in this Psalm twenty-three times; nine times (‘eduth), vv.
14,31,36,88,99,111,129,144,157; fourteen times (‘edah, fem. sing.), vv.
2,22,24,46,59,79,95,119,125,138,146,152,167,168.

(iii.) PRECEPTS (pikkudim) is from pakad, to take oversight or charge: hence, mandates enjoined on others. It
occurs only in the Book of Psalms (see 19:8; 103:18; 111:7). In Ps 119 twenty-one times: vv.
4,15,27,40,45,56,63,69,78,87,93,94,100,104,110,128,134,141,159,168,173.

(iv.) COMMANDMENTS (mizvah) is from zavah, to set up, constitute. Hence, constitutional commands. First
occurrence Gen. 26:5. In Ps. 119 it occurs twenty-two times : vv. 6,10,19,21,32,35,47,48,60,66,73,86,96 (sing.),
98,115,127,131,143,151,166,172,176.

(v.) WORD (‘imrah) is from ‘amar, to bring forth to light; hence, to say. The verb is very regularly followed by the
words used; hence ‘imrah means an utterance and the purport of it. Not the same as dabar (No. x below), which refers
to the articulate utterance of it. The first occurrence is in Gen. 4:23, and is rendered “speech”. In plural only once, Ps.
12:6 (the only place where the plural is found). In Ps. 119 it occurs nineteen times : viz.
11,38,41,50,58,67,76,82,103,116,123,133,140,148,158,162,170,172. With dabar the two occur forty-two times.

(vi.) LAW (torah) is from yarah, to project, issue: hence, to point out, to show (Pr 6:13). Then, to instruct, teach.
The Torah contains Jehovah’s Instructions to His People, pointing out to them His will. First occurrence is in Ge 26:5
(pl.). In Ps 119 it occurs twenty-five times: always in the singular: viz. vv.
1,18,29,34,44,51,55,61,70,72,77,85,92,97,109,113,126,136,142,150,153,163,165,174.

(vii.) JUDGMENT (mishpat) is from shaphat, to set upright, erect (cp. Eng. right, and German richten and recht);
hence, to judge. Mishpat means judgment. Its first occurrence is in Ge 18:19 (in Jehovah’s mouth). In Ps 119 it occurs
twenty-three times (always in plural, except four times), viz.: vv. 7,13,20,30,39,43,52,62,75,84,91 (ordinances),
102,106,108,120,121,132 (as thou usest to do, see note), 137,149,156,160,164,175.

(viii.) RIGHTEOUSNESS, RIGHT, &c. (zedek, masc.), is from zadak, to be right, upright, just, righteous. Hence the
noun means rightness. By comparing the first occurrence (Lev 19:15) with the second (Lev 19:36) we get the idea that
the word has special reference to equal balancing. Zedek (masc.) occurs twelve times, and is rendered “righteousness”:
vv. 123,142 (second), 144,172; “right”, v. 7,62,106,138,160,164; “justice”, v. 121. Zedakah (fem.), first occurrence, Ge
15:6. In Ps 119, “righteousness”, vv. 40,142 (first). Zaddik (adj.), spoken of a king (2 Sa 23:3), once, in v. 137. The three
words fifteen in all.

(ix.) STATUTE (hok and hukka) is from hakak, to hew, cut in, engrave, inscribe; hence, to decree, or ordain. The
noun = a decree or ordinance. First occurrence, Gen. 26:5 (hukkah fem.). In Ps. 119 it occurs twenty-two times : viz. :
vv. 5,8,12,16 (hukkah, fem.), 23,26,33,48,54,64,68,71,80,83,112,117,118,124,135,145,155,171.

(x.) WORD, WORDS (dabar), is from dabar, to arrange in a row; hence, to set forth in speech. It refers to the
articulate form of what is said, whether spoken or written (cp. v above); to the mode or manner by which the
ipsissima verba are imparted. The first occurrence is in Ge 11:1 (“speech”). In Ps 119 it occurs twenty-four times, three
of them in pl., viz.: vv. 9,16,17,25,28,42 (twice), 43,49,57 (pl.), 65,74,81,89,101,105,107,114,130 (pl.), 139 (pl.),
147,160,161,169.

Appendix 74
THE BOOK OF PROVERBS:

Introduction and Analysis.

Contributed by

Dr. J. W. Thirtle

The Book of Proverbs is generally described as belonging to a branch of Hebrew literature which has for its subject
Wisdom, or, as we should say, Philosophy. This view has some truth in it; but it does not express the whole truth, as
will appear from an analysis of the book, and a careful examination of its constituent parts.

The book makes no claim to unity of authorship; it is avowedly a collection, and includes the work of others besides
Solomon the king. Hence, though in some sections there may be wisdom of a general order, in others one may find
cautions and counsels which were intended for a particular individual, and not for “all sorts and conditions of men”; and
which therefore, are not abstract Wisdom in the sense implied by most expositors of the book.

The conviction that this is the case will grow upon those who discriminate the material of which the book is
composed, noting the varying motives of the writers, and the outstanding characteristics of their proverbs, or sayings.
On the surface one distinguishes four divisions — The Proverbs of Solomon, the Words of the Wise, the Words of Agur,
and the Words of Lemuel. As these several writings may be easily distinguished, there is no reason why we should
summarily conclude that all the sections are of the “Wisdom” order.

Taken as a whole, the material rightly answers to the description of “Proverbs” (ch. 1, v. 1), or sententious sayings,
generally completed in the distich, or verse of two lines; but, as the authorship is complex, so also there may be
diversity of motive and object in the writings.

The present contention is that, while the Proverbs of Solomon may consist of teaching for all and sundry — dealing
with prudence, discretion, and the conduct of life — the sections which contain “the Words of the Wise” were intended
as instruction for a prince, and therefore designed to teach elementary lessons in policy and statecraft, even to show a
young ruler how he might “cleanse his way”, as the representative of Jehovah upon the throne of Israel. These parts of
the book have hitherto been treated as if designed to emphasize certain commands of the Decalogue: whereas, in
reality, they demand closer attention, as dealing with the dangers and temptations such as would inevitably beset a
king on the throne of Israel.

Hence, in a word, we find in the first twenty-nine chapters of the book several series of Proverbs which were FOR
Solomon, and again several series which were BY Solomon. (*1) Between the two classes there is a wide difference. Of
those that were FOR the king, being, in fact, “Words of the Wise” (men, or teachers), given for the instruction of the
young man, it may be said that, having a relation to the principles with were fundamental in the Divinely ordained
constitution of Israel, they stand apart from the class of Proverbs which enunciated by Solomon himself, were more of
less generally concerned with the life and behavior of the individual Israelite of the time.

The following is an analysis of the book from the point of view thus propounded:—

A. GENERAL INTRODUCTION — TITLE (ch. 1. vv. 1-6).

Misapprehension on the part of the Massorites or their predecessors in the editing of the text, let to inclusion in the
title of the line which, as heading, opens Section I. “The Words of the Wise and their dark sayings”, or sententious
utterances.

1. “Words of the Wise” (men, or teachers) — addresses by a father to a son, or rather by a teacher to a pupil, the
distinctive terms being the same (v. 6-). The addresses are fifteen in number, and all of them introduced by the formula
“My son” (1:7-7:27). The general subject of this section is embodied in the words “The fear of the LORD is the beginning
of knowledge; but fools despise wisdom and instruction” (v. 7). The “son” is addressed directly, “thou” and “thee”, “thy”
being also used; and again and again he is warned, in the most solemn terms, against “the strange woman,” i.e. the
foreign or alien woman — such women having from time to time led astray any Israelites that consorted with them.
Recall the allurements of the daughters of Moab; and the cases of Samson and Ahab. In other sections “my son” is warned
against “sinners” and “the wicked”, –that is, the heathen who knew not the true God, but who were haters of
righteousness, lovers of war, and given to oppression. He is, in particular, counseled not to “strike hands” with such —
i.e. not to enter into alliance or covenant with any such.

2. Two addresses, in the former of which (ch. 8, E5) Wisdom makes her claim upon the devotion of one who is
urged to esteem her as better than gold or silver, and is reminded that by Wisdom alone can kings reign and princes
decree justice; while in the latter (ch. 9), Wisdom and Folly are contrasted, the fear of Jehovah (or piety, as we know
it to have been esteemed in Israel) is magnified, and a warning is uttered against the foolish woman, already introduced
as “the strange woman”, with whom no Israelite should have any association — assuredly no king in Israel should seek her
company. In this section the address is sometimes to “ye”, “them”, “they” (that is, in the plural); at other times to
“thee”, “thou” (i.e. in the singular number). So far, after the title of the book, we have met with no mention of
Solomon; and none of his work. Hitherto, we have had proverbs which Solomon was taught.

3. A collection of Proverbs by Solomon, being so described in the opening verse (10:1 C). if the contents of sections 1
and 2 (A 1:-6-9:18, p. 864), already described, had been by Solomon, there would have been no need in this place for
the introductory line “The Proverbs of Solomon.” The mode of address is quite unlike that of section 1, with its second
person of the pronoun; the proverbs are not spoken to “my son”, but they mention “he” and “him”, using generally the
third person of the pronoun. Apparently, they continue to ch. 19:26, or thereabouts. They were for men in general to
learn, and not for a prince or distinguished individual (as “my son”).

4. Another section of addresses to “my son” begins with 19:20 (D, p. 864) or thereabouts; and continues to the end of
ch. 24. Here we have further lessons upon the ways of a king — like those of the earlier sections of the book, but quite
unmatched by anything in “The Proverbs of Solomon” (see 19:27, “My son”; and “the king” 20:2,8,26,28; 21:1; 22:11).
These are “Words of the Wise” (men, or teachers): this is twice affirmed (22:17; 24:23 R.V.); and the occurrences of the
formula “my son” are six in number (19:27; 23:15,19,26; 24:13,21). The counsels, like those of the sections 1 and 2, are
such as would eminently befit a prince in Israel: “my son” is instructed to regard the fear of the LORD as more desirable
than riches (22:1,4). Apparently the words are addressed to one who is to sit among rulers (23:1); one whose duty it is,
for the present, to fear the king as well as God (24:21); but one who is learning the duties of judicial administration
(20:8,26,28; 21:3; 22:11). There is nothing commonplace in warnings against “having respect of persons” in judgment:
such counsel is for a ruler (24:23,24). In this section again the foreign woman is denounced (22:14; 23:27,33); and riches
are shown to be of no account in comparison with wisdom and righteousness (20:15; 21:6; 23:4). In the earlier portion
of this division the pronouns are mostly in the third person, “he” and “him”; afterwards in the second person, “thou”,
“thy”, and “thee”. The counsels are manifestly such as King Solomon should have taken to heart.

5. A second collection of Proverbs by Solomon — chapters 25 and 26 (see opening verse of chapter 25, C, p. 864).
The book having been brought into its present shape in the reign of King Hezekiah, this section was “copied out” by the
scribes of that time. They would find in the royal library at Jerusalem many writings for the good of the nation, and
among them some of the best utterances of Solomon, as well as of his father David, who was likewise a great patron of
literature. The things said about kings are what might as well be expected from one who was himself the occupant of
a throne (25:2-7).

6. Without special introduction, ch. 27 (D) begins another series of “Words of the Wise”. The indication is found in
the substance of the proverbs, which are so obviously designed as instruction for a prince, and also in the occurrence
of the formula “my son” (27:11). The general applicability of these words to the case of a ruler in Israel is obvious (see
28:2, 6-8, 16; 29:4, 12, 14, 26).

7. The words of Agur, the son of Jakeh (ch. 30, A, p. 864).

8. The words of King Lemuel, the prophecy that his mother taught him (31:19), leading to the poem on

9. The virtuous woman (31:10-31).

In order to a proper understanding of “the Words of the Wise”, it is needful to bear in mind the following facts:—

1. The word “father” is used for a teacher — 2 Ki 2:12; 6:21; 13:14 (cp. Jdg 17:10; 18:19); and thus came to be the
common designation of the Jewish Rabbins.

2. The word “son” is used for a pupil — 1 Sa 3:6,16; 1 Ki 20:35; 2 Ki 2:3,5,7,15, and elsewhere; for the Israelitish
prophets, in some cases, conducted schools for young men, and received from them the obedience which was due to
parents, in whose place they stood for the time being. In this connection, note the words of remorse, suggested as
used by “my son” in the event of disobedience: I “have not obeyed the voice of MY TEACHERS, nor inclined mine ear to
THEM THAT INSTRUCTED ME” (ch. 5:13).

Again (3): The expressions “sinners”, “wicked”, “fools”, and “hypocrites” were applied in Israel to the heathen, and
those who followed their ways (Isa 13:11; 14:5: cp. Ps 9:5; 26:5; Pr 3:33; 28:4,28; 29:2). Though, as suggested, dealing
with politics, the “Words of the Wise” are in the language of the school; and the prince to whom the wise men address
themselves is led to view the surrounding nations and their ways from the standpoint of those who find the beginning
and end of knowledge in “the fear of the LORD”.

(2) The “strange woman”, whether answering to the Hebrew word zarah or nokriah, was not an erring Israelite, but
an ALIEN woman, to traffic with whom would inevitably lead to declension from the Lord. Both Hebrew words are
found in ch. 5:20; and in ch. 6 (22 ff.) the subject is extended, and associated with adultery, in order that personal
purity may be properly emphasized. As the Divine intention was that Israel should be separate from the nations of the
earth (Dt 7:6, and refs.: cp. Eze 20:32 ff.), it follows that the consorting with “strange women” implied contempt of the
covenant purpose of God in regard to the elect family of Abraham. There were, moreover, other consequences. In the
event of the transgressor being of the seed royal, such acts would bring confusion, and would imperil the dynasty of
David, the king of Jehovah’s choice; while all such offenders in Israel were thereby liable to be led into idolatry (Ex
34:16).

Through misinterpretation of ch. 2:17, some have held that the “strange woman” was an adulteress of the house of
Israel, and this has excluded from view the aspect which has thus far been presented. Careful examination of the
passage, however, finds in the word “god”, as here employed, no reference to Jehovah, but rather to the national
“god”, or gods, of the “alien woman”. In this verse the teacher would emphasize the audacity of the flatterer: “she
forsaketh the guide of her youth, and forgetteth the covenant of her god”. That is, leaving her own people in Philistia,
Edom, Moab, or Egypt, she has assumed the part of an adventuress, and come among a community of whose God she
knows nothing.

It was quite in order, on the one hand, to speak of nations as the people of their god (Nu 21:29: cp. 2 Ki 11:17; Ps
47:9); and likewise, on the other hand, to speak of gods as the gods of distinctive peoples. (Jdg 11:23; Jer 43:12; 48:7:
cp. Jos 7:13; Jdg 5:3,5; Isa 8:19; 40:1). The usage thus indicated was sanctified in relation to the faithful in many
passages of Holy Scripture: see the divergent courses of Orpha and Ruth (Ru 1:15,16), and compare the gracious words
of Jehovah: “I will be YOUR God, and ye shall be MY People” (Lev 26:12: cp. Ex 6:7; Jer 7:23; 11:4; 24:7; 30:22; Eze
11:20; 14:11; 36:28; 37:27; Zec 13:9).

Another ground for the contention that the “strange woman” merely means an Israelite of evil reputation has been
found by some in ch. 7:19,20 — “the goodman is not at home, he is gone a long journey”, &c. This, however, proves
nothing against the position taken up in the analysis now presented. In fact, it may be assumed that, in the days of
Solomon (as ever since) female corrupters of men, alien or otherwise, included some who had the protection of
husbands, or men who sustained such a relation.

Thus we fine “the Words of the Wise” to have been addressed by teachers to Solomon the prince, teachers whose
desire it was to instruct him in the ways of his father’s God: in fact, both parents are mentioned (1:8; 6:20).
Accordingly, these sections of the book deal with the domestic politics of Israel. After the opening verse there is no
mention of the nation in specific terms; but the fear of the Lord, the pious service of Jehovah, is inculcated as
fundamental. The “Words” or “Sayings”, as the title of the book intimates, treat of “discretion” and “wise dealing”, as
these are shown to relate to “the fear of the LORD”. Moreover, the “Words” range themselves in classes that were
distinctly anticipated in the Pentateuch as proper subjects for the consideration of rulers in Israel. This fact has am
important bearing upon the age of the book, and also upon the age of other portions of the Old Testament.

For instance: in Dt 17:14-20 it is stipulated that, if, on settlement in the Land of Canaan, the People should desire a
king, then in such matter they should have regard to the Divine choice, which would be, not to put responsibility upon
a foreigner, but upon “one from among thy brethren”. The stipulations are continued thus: (1) He shall not multiply
horses, after the manner of the Egyptians; (2) he shall not multiply wives, who might “turn away his heart” from God;
(3) he shall not greatly multiply to himself silver and gold; (4) he shall make a copy of the Law, and read therein daily,
that he may learn to fear the Lord; (5) all this is to be to the end that he may prolong his days in his kingdom, and
never lack successors on the throne. Moreover, in Dt 7:2-5 (cp. Ex 34:12 ff., and Jos 23:12,13) it is laid down that the
Israelites should destroy the Canaanites and their symbols of worship; should make no covenant with them, and should
guard against intermarriage with them; the last-named prohibition being supported by the warning that it would lead
to apostasy from Jehovah: “They will turn away thy son from following Me, that they may serve other gods.”

To the thoughtful reader of the Book of Proverbs it is clear that the sanctions and prohibitions of these passages of
the Pentateuch form the warp and woof of the teaching of the wise men to whose care the son of David was
committed. The Proverbs of Solomon, strictly so called, as found in sections 3 and 5 of the book, are quite distinct
from “The Words of the Wise”, as given in sections 1, 2, 4 and 6, and addressed to “my son”. The prince was, in these
latter, diligently fortified against practices that would bring about religious apostasy, and eventuate in dynastic disaster.
Hence, in these divisions of the book, we find instruction which answers with precision to the stipulations given in the
Pentateuch, thus:-

1. Horses are treated as no account, for “victory is of the Lord” (21:31).

2. The taking of foreign wives is condemned with unceasing energy (2:16 ff.; 6:24 ff.; 7:5 ff.).

3. Gold and silver, riches, are declared to be inferior to the fear of the Lord; in fact, to be at the disposal
of wisdom, and therefore not to be desired apart therefrom (3:16; 8:18,19; 22:1-4; 23:4,5; 27:24; 28:6-8).

4. The majesty of the Law is affirmed, and to keep it is a mark of wisdom; while the Law cannot offer
acceptable worship to God (6:20-23; 28:4-9; 29:18).

5. Obedience is commended, and shown to bring prolongation of life (3:2,16; 4:10; 9:11; cp. 10:27).

These several points agree with the stipulations of Dt 17, as we have indicated them in the light of Dt 7. Further, as
the ruler was not to make covenant with the nations, so also we find denunciations of alliance with “sinners” and
“strangers”, as distinct from women (1:10-15), “come with us … one purse” (6:1; cp. 20:26); also counsels against
following the ways of the nations in regard to war (1:10-18; 3:30,31; 4:14-17). The lessons were of the utmost gravity;
but, as we know, they were not, in their entirety, taken to heart but the young prince.

When, at length, Solomon was called upon to make his life-choice, he rightly prayed for wisdom rather than wealth;
and, as we know, was given “a wise and understanding heart”, also, in addition, that which he did not request, “both
riches and honor” (1 Ki 3:9-13). Hence, in his own Proverbs, Solomon spoke in praise of wisdom (13:1; 14:1), and
accorded a secondary place to riches (11:28; 13:7,8; 14:24; 15:6,16; 16:16; 18:11). That teaching, however, which was
of the greatest moment, he did not receive and hold fast. Accordingly we peruse his Proverbs in vain for any warnings
against the “strange woman”. Clearly this lesson was not learnt. Hence, in the record of his life (1 Ki 11) we read:—

King Solomon loved many strange women (the plural of the word nokriah), together with
the daughters of Pharaoh, women of the Moabites, Ammonites, Edomites, Zidonians, and
Hittites; of the nations concerning which the LORD said unto the children of Israel, Ye shall
not go in to them, neither shall they come in unto you: for surely they will turn away your
heart after their gods: Solomon clave unto these in love (1,2).

The words “concerning which the LORD said unto the children of Israel” take us back to Ex 34:16, and Dt 7:3,4. The
thing that was apprehended took place. We further read:—

It came to pass, when Solomon was old, that his wives turned away his heart after other
gods: and his heart was not perfect with the LORD his God, as was the heart of David his
father. For Solomon went after Ashtoreth the goddess of the Zidonians, and after Milcom
the abomination of the Ammonites. And Solomon did evil in the sight of the LORD, and went
not fully after the LORD, as did David his father. Then did Solomon build an high place for
Chemosh, the abomination of Moab, in the hill that is before Jerusalem, and for Molech, the
abomination of the children of Ammon. And likewise did he for all his strange wives, which
burnt incense and sacrificed unto their gods (4-8).

In further contempt of the will of the Lord for his kingdom, Solomon introduced horses from Egypt (1 Ki 10:26-29; cp.
ch. 9:19). The result was terrible. The kingdom was divided, in execution of the purpose set forth in 1 Ki 11:11-13, and
the ten tribes taken from under Rehoboam, the son of Solomon, of whom we read the significant (and repeated)
words: “His mother’s name was Naamah THE AMMONITESS” (1 Ki 14:21,31). And primarily this evil came from the folly of
the king in consorting with foreign women, in defiance of the instructions of teachers whose words have come down
to us in “the Words of the Wise”. Such conduct was a breach of the Divine covenant. The serious view which was
taken of all such proceedings by the pious Israelite may be gathered from the words and deeds of Ezra the Scribe, at
the time of the Return (Ezr 9; 10 passim; cp. Ne 13:23 ff. See also Josephus Antiq. VIII. vii. 5).

Having thus discriminated the Proverbs, and seen that, while some were written BY Solomon, others were written
FOR him, we suggest that the instruction which was given to the young prince shows an intimate acquaintance with
Israelitish policy, as Divinely ordained, and set out in the Book of Deuteronomy. That is to say, in the tenth century
B.C., the cautions and warnings given in Duet. 7 and 17 were developed in detail by those who were charged with the
education of him who was to succeed King David on the throne of Israel.

Yet the theory has been advanced, and is by many maintained, that the Book of Deuteronomy had no existence in
the age of Solomon! Indeed, it has been boldly declared that Deuteronomy was written in the reign of Manasseh, some
time near 650 B.C. And, naturally, scholars, who have not been able to distinguish allusions to the book in the early
Prophets, have not been careful to look for any reflection of its teaching in the Book of Proverbs, which, so readily,
has been placed in its entirety in the class of Wisdom Literature. Now, however, with due place and significance given
to “the Words of the Wise”, we see that the Fifth Book of the Pentateuch is demanded in the history of Israel over
three hundred years before the time of its presumed “discovery” in the days of Manasseh, and still longer before its
suggested fabrication in the days of Josiah.

If that is so, then the facts before us furnish another reason for profound distrust in regard to a system of criticism
which exhibits tendency to hurry conclusions, while as yet the essential facts are not gathered, much less understood
with thoroughness.

Thus we find that a study of the Book of Proverbs, with due attention to the divisions (most of them expressly
indicated in the text), not only reflects light upon a great chapter of Israelitish history, but also has an important bearing
upon critical questions, with which, hitherto, it has not been thought to have any intimate connection.

(*1) See the Structure on p. 864, which corresponds with this analysis.

Appendix 75

SPECIAL PASSAGES IN THE BOOK OF PROVERBS ACQUIRING NEW LIGHT

In the Companion notes to the Book of Proverbs, it will be observed that certain words are carefully discriminated:
such as the words for “fool”, “poor”; the singular and plural of the wicked, the righteous, &c., are noted. But certain
proverbs also are presented in a new light altogether. Among these are the following:

1:7. “The fear of the LORD”.

1:17. “In vain the net is spread in the sight of any bird”.

2:7. “He layeth up sound wisdom for the righteous”.

3:2,16. “Length of days” supposed to be given by “wisdom”. See also 4:10; 9:11; 10:27.

5:2. “That thy lips may keep knowledge”.

5:14. “Almost all in evil”.

16:1. “The preparations of the heart in man…is from the LORD”.

21:1. “The king’s heart is in the hand of the LORD as the rivers of water”.

21:4. “An high look, and a proud heart…is sin”.

Appendix 76

SUPPOSED “LATER” HEBREW WORDS IN ECCLESIASTES

It is alleged by some modern critics that the Book of Ecclesiastes belongs to a much later date, and was written by a
later hand, because certain words are alleged to belong to a later period of Hebrew literature. Several of these words
are noted in the margin, but it may be useful to the student to find them together in one list.

i. kanas, “gathered”, ch. 2:8. But it occurs in Ps 33:7; 147:2. Eze 22:21; 39:28.

ii. medinah, “provinces”, ch. 2:8; 5:8. But it is found in 1 Ki 20:14,15,17,19. Lam 1:1. Eze 19:8.

iii. mikreh, “event”, or happening, ch. 2:14,15; 3:19 (that which befalleth), and 9:2, 3. But it is found in Ru 2:3;
and 1 Sa 6:9; 20:26.

iv. shalat, “have rule”, ch. 2:19. But the word is found in Ps 119:133, and a derivative of it even in Ge 42:6.

v. hephez, “purpose”, ch. 3:1,17; 5:4,8; 8:6; 12:1,10. But it is found in 1 Sa 15:22, where it is rendered “delight”;
also 18:25. 2 Sa 22:20 (the verb). 1 Ki 5:8,9,10; 9:11; 10:13; where it is rendered “desire”. Even in Job 21:21;
22:3; where it is rendered “pleasure”. In Isa 53:10 “pleasure” evidently means what Jehovah has been pleased
to purpose. Cp. Isa 44:28; 46:10.

vi. soph, “the end”, ch. 3:11; 7:2; 12:13 (conclusion). This is found in 2 Ch 20:16. Joel 2:20, where it is rendered
“hinder part”. The verb is found in Nu 22:30,30, and repeatedly in Job.

vii. takaph, “prevail”, ch. 4:12; but the only two other places where it occurs are Job 14:20 and 15:24.

viii. misken, “poor”, ch. 4:13; 9:15,15,16; but the derivative of it is found in Dt 8:9.

ix. nekasim, “wealth”, ch. 5:19; 6:2. This is found as early as Jos 22:8. 2 Ch 1:11,12.

x. ‘amad, “stand”, “appear”, ch. 8:3. This occurs in Ge 18:8,22; 19:27; 24:30; 41:1,17; 43:15. Ex 9:10; 14:19;
18:13; 20:18,21, &c.; Lev 19:16.

xi. kasher, “prosper”, ch. 10:10 (profitable); 11:6 (prosper). But it is found in Ps 68:6, where “with chains” should
perhaps be rendered “into prosperity”.

xii. zua’, “tremble”, ch. 12:3. But we find it in Hab 2:7 (“vex”), and its derivative zeva’ah, Isa 28:19. Jer 15:4;
24:9.

These examples will be sufficient to show how slender is the argument on which an objection so grave, and a
conclusion so premature, is based. Some of the references given above may be later, of course, than the true date of
Ecclesiastes; nevertheless, they are all much earlier than the alleged date, which is about 200 B.C. or less.

Appendix 77
THE CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF THE PROPHETS

1. That the Canonical order of the books of the prophets is not their Chronological order is well known. But the
dates usually to be found at the head or in the margin of our Bibles — as well as in many of the “Tables” supplied in
“Aids” to students — involve the subject in hopeless confusion. The four prophets commonly styled “Greater” (or
Longer), viz. ISAIAH, JEREMIAH, EZEKIEL, and DANIEL, are all dated. Of the other twelve, called “Minor” (or shorter), six
are dated and six are undated. (See the Structure on p. 1206).

The dated books are HOSEA, AMOS, MICAH, ZEPHANIAH, HAGGAI, and ZECHARIAH.

The undated books are JOEL, OBADIAH, JONAH, NAHUM, HABAKKUK, and MALACHI.

Of the whole sixteen, therefore, we have ten dated and six undated. (See Ap. 10.) From the particulars given in the
dated books themselves, we are enabled to lay down with precision the years and periods covered by the respective
prophecies. With regard to the undated books the case is different; and we have to rely upon the guidance of their
internal evidence. But this in almost every case is so clear, that there is no great difficulty in assigning each of the
prophetical books to its respective chronological position (Obadiah being perhaps the only exception). The Chart on p.
113 has been prepared accordingly.

It must be premised that the periods indicated by the thick black lines are the duration of the periods in which the
Divine Message continued to “come” to and through the particular prophet named: e.g. ISAIAH is shown on the Chart as
649-588 B.C., thus comprising a period of sixty-one years. This does not represent the years of the prophet’s life, which
in all probability extended to some 81 or 83 years. (See notes on p. 930.)

2. It is a Jewish belief that JEREMIAH and ZECHARIAH were contemporaries. This is quite possible. We are not told
when, or how, or where Jeremiah died. When Jerusalem was destroyed finally by Nebuchadnezzar (477 B. C.)
Jeremiah would be about 57 years old. He may easily have lived another thirty or forty, or even more, years after that
event. (*1) If we suppose he outlived the destruction of Jerusalem by forty years, then the year of his death would be
437 B.C., eleven years before the end of the Babylonian Captivity, in 426 B.C. ZECHARIAH began his seven years of
prophetic ministry twenty-seven years later, in 410 B.C.

But we are not told anything about him in Scripture, save that his grandfather was a prophet; neither have we any
clue to his age, as we have e.g. in the cases of JEREMIAH and DANIEL. ZECHARIAH may very well have been at least
thirty or forty years of age in 410 B.C., when he gives us his first date (1:1). Consequently, he would have been
contemporary with the great Benjamite priest for from three to thirteen years!

3. It is further necessary to state, and important to be observed, that the dates given in the Chart on p. 113 have
been charted down from the dating given (or suggested by internal evidence) in the prophetic books themselves, and
NOT vice versa. So the student may understand that the remarkable and significant groupings of the prophets as therein
depicted are in no wise “manipulated” or “fitted in” to suit any preconceived ideas or theories. They are charted down
simply from the dates and the data afforded by the sacred records themselves, and tell clearly their own story.

4. Turning now to the Chart itself (p. 113), it must be further premised that “section-paper” has been used, as in Ap.
50. This is highly important; as only thus can the exact relative proportions of the length of each prophetical ministry
be presented accurately to the eye. The thick black lines represent the period covered by each prophet, either as
expressly stated, or to be inferred from internal or historical evidence.

And here, the value of the section-paper is at once apparent: as these black lines are not merely an approximate in
their proportions of length one to another — as would be the case if they were set up in type; but, in each and every
case, they begin and end exactly at the very year stated or indicated. Thus the eye is enabled at once to grasp the
proportionate lengths of each and all of the prophetical periods; the overlapping and concurrences in each particular
group; and their historical position as shown on the background of the reigns of the kings of Judah and Israel.

The columns of figures to the left and right are the B.C. years, rising by tens from 350 to 700 B.C. Each of the larger
section-squares thus shows twenty years, and each of the small ones two years. On this plan, every date, year, and
period has been charted down, and can be checked by the student with absolute exactitude.

It must also be observed that the thick black lines themselves mark the exact positions of the beginning and ending
of the years shown on the figure-columns to the left and right, and indicated by the fainter horizontal lines — and NOT
the figures placed directly above and below in each case. These latter merely state the years which begin and end each
period, as shown accurately by the top and bottom of the black line throughout: e.g. JEREMIAH is given as 518-477
B.C. The top and bottom of the thick black stroke are on the lines of these respective years in the figure-columns.

Where there is only one figure given, as in the case of HABAKKUK and ZEPHANIAH, viz. 518 B.C., it will be understood
that only one date year is indicated in the Scriptures.

THE TABLE.

5. It will be seen on referring to the Chart on p. 113 that the sixteen prophetical books fall into four remarkable and
well defined divisions, separated by three “breaks”, or periods of years as shown below:—

From the above it is seen that MALACHI is to be reckoned as being separate and apart from the rest; and not, as
usually presented, linked together with HAGGAI and ZECHARIAH. “By the Hebrews, Malachi is known as ‘the Seal of the
Prophets’, and as closing the Canon of the Jewish Scriptures.” (*2)

The other fifteen prophets (5 x 3) arrange themselves in three groups of 6, 7, and 2; and the period covered by
these collectively — including the breaks — is 287 years (forty-one sevens).

6. The First Group commences with JONAH and ends with NAHUM. Both are connected with Nineveh. This group
consists of six prophets, and the period they cover is 102 years (seventeen sixes).

Between the First and Second Groups there is the great “gap” or “break” of seventy years (ten sevens, see Ap. 10).
According to Jewish tradition, ISAIAH perished in the Manassean persecution (see the Note on p. 930). If this persecution
took place, or culminated, about five years after Manasseh’s accession — as is most probable — this would be 584 B.C.;
and that year is sixty-five years from the dated commencement of Isaiah’s “Vision”: viz., the year in which King UZZIAH
died (649 B.C.: see Ap. 50. VII, p. 68, and cp. the Chart on p. 113).

We have, however, no indication that “the Word of the Lord came” to ISAIAH later than the end of the reign of
ZEDEKIAH, and MANASSEH’S accession in 588 B.C.

Therefore, from that year on, and until “the thirteenth year of Josiah” (518 B.C.), there was no “coming” of “the
Word”; but, instead, a long solemn silence on the part of Jehovah for seventy years! (588 – 518 = 70.) This silence was
broken at length by the Divine utterances through JEREMIAH, HABAKKUK, and ZEPHANIAH simultaneously, in 518 B.C.;
and the Word then “came” in an unbroken sequence of ninety-four years (518 – 424 = 94) through the seven prophets
associated with the final scenes in the history of the Southern Kingdom, JUDAH — including the Babylonian Captivity —
as the six earlier prophets had been associated with the closing scenes of the Northern Kingdom, which ended in 601
B.C.

The Second Group closes with the latest date recorded by Daniel, “the third year of Cyrus” (Da 10:1), i.e. in 424
B.C. Then occurs a short break of fourteen years (two sevens) between DANIEL and HAGGAI (424 – 410 = 14), followed
by The Third Group, consisting of HAGGAI and ZECHARIAH, extending over seven years (410 – 403 = 7).

The seven years covered by Zechariah are succeeded by the last “break” of twenty-nine years, closed by the affixing
of “the Seal of the Prophets”, MALACHI, in 374 B.C. This was exactly thirty years from the restoration of the Temple
worship and ritual, commencing after the Dedication of the Temple in 405 B.C., with the First Passover in Nisan, 404
B.C. (Ap. 58, p. 84).

This year (374 B.C.) marked the commencement of the last great national testing time of the People in the land: viz.
four hundred years (40 x 10), and ended with the beginning of Christ’s ministry in A.D. 26.

7. On examining this chronological grouping, it will be seen that it presents the prophetical books to us as a whole;
and thus, in a manner is at variance with the usual classification into “Four Prophets the Greater (or Longer), and
Twelve Prophets the Minor or (Shorter).”

Although it is, of course, manifestly true that ISAIAH, JEREMIAH, EZEKIEL, and DANIEL are “greater”, in the sense that
they are messages of ampler dimensions, and far wider scope than the majority of the others, yet –according to their
chronological positions in the Scriptures, as shown in the Chart (p. 113) — it would appear that they are grouped
together by the Divine Spirit, with the so-called “Minor” (or Shorter) prophets, as being units only in a particular
“coming” of the Word of Jehovah, during certain clearly defined periods of time connected with the close of the
national history of Israel’s sons as possessors of the land.

It is interesting to note the close association of the figures “6 ” and “7 ” with these periods.

a. The three groups together cover a period of 203 years, during which “the Word of the Lord came”
through the prophets (102 + 94 + 7 = 203); and 203 is twenty-nine sevens.

b. The prophecies of the First Group, linked together by the number of Man “6 ” (Ap. 10), are seen to be
closely connected with the last hundred years or so of the Northern Kingdom. The prophecies of the
Second Group, linked together by the special number of Spiritual Perfection “7 ” (Ap. 10), are as closely
connected with the destruction and punishment of JUDAH and JERUSALEM.

c. In the First Group, HOSEA, ISAIAH, and MICAH were contemporary for twenty-one years (three sevens);
viz. from 632 to 611 B.C. In the Second Group, JEREMIAH, DANIEL, JOEL, and EZEKIEL are contemporaries
for seven years (one seven); viz. from 484 to 477 B.C.

If OBADIAH’S date is 482 B.C., then we have five prophets all contemporaries during this period. And five is the
number associated with Divine Grace (Ap. 10).

After the “break” of fourteen years (two sevens) between the Second and Third Groups, we have ZECHARIAH, the last
of the fifteen prophets of the three groups, continuing from 410 to 403 B.C. (one seven); HAGGAI being contemporary
with him in 410. The fifteen prophets represent the number of Grace thrice repeated (5 x 3).

8. MALACHI’S date is 374 B.C. As stated above, this is exactly thirty years after the Restoration, and the resumption
of the Temple worship and ritual, beginning with the Passover in 404 B.C. (Ezr 6:19). The “Seal of the Prophets” was
therefore affixed thirty years from that important start-point, and twenty-nine clear years from Ezra’s last date: viz.,
1 st of Nisan 403 B.C. (Ezr 10:17), the year that witnessed the Dedication of the Wall (Ne 12:27-47) and the Reformation
of the People under Nehemiah (Ne 13).

9. It may also be noted that the Book of JONAH — the prophet quoted by our Lord as the “Sign” of His own
Resurrection — commences the grouped fifteen, while ZECHARIAH ends them with the glorious and detailed statements
of the Return of the King to reign as “the Lord of all the earth”.

Again: as the “break” of twenty-nine years follows after Zechariah, before the “Seal”, MALACHI, is affixed in 374 B.C.,
this points to a fact of great importance: viz., that the O.T. is really closed by the Book of Zechariah and not Malachi,
as usually understood. Malachi marks the commencement of the great final probationary period of 400 years, which
ended with the coming of “My Messenger” (John the Baptist) followed by the Advent of “the Messenger of the
Covenant” (Messiah Himself).

MALACHI is thus seen to be linked on to John the Baptist (cp. Mal 4:5,6, and Mt 11:10-15), and “seals” together the last
page of the O.T., and the beginning of “The Book of the Generation of Jesus the Messiah.”

(*1) The belief of some that Heb 11:37 refers to Jeremiah is based on the Jewish tradition that the prophet was
“stoned” to death in Egypt. But of this we have no proof.

(*2) WORDSWORTH on Malachi, Prelim. note.

The Table From Page 113.

Appendix 78
THE INTER-RELATION OF THE PROPHETICAL BOOKS

In the Hebrew Canon (Ap. 1) we have:

1. The five books of the “Law”. This is the number of Grace.

2. The eight books of the “Prophets” — this is the Dominical number.

3. The eleven books of the Hagiographa –this is the remarkable number (the fifth prime) which plays so
important a part in the works of God. (See Ap. 10.)

In the Law, the grace of God was shown to Israel (Dt 4:31-37, &c.); but true grace came by Jesus Christ. (See note on
John 1:16 John 1:17.) In the Prophets, we have Jehovah’s special dealing with Israel. In the “former prophets” we see
the law-principle; and in the latter prophets we see faith-principle; and two together presenting us with a wonderful
picture of the failure of man on the one hand, and the faithfulness of Jehovah on the other.

THE BOOKS OF THE PROPHETS.

Through the changing of the order of the books of the prophets, by the Translators of the Septuagint, the Church has
lost sight of the one grand illustration of the great principle of Old Testament teaching, which is currently supposed to
be taught only in the New; viz, that law-principle brings in “the curse”, whereas faith-principle brings in “the blessing”.
The non-recognition of the fact that this is Old Testament teaching has obscured the specific doctrine of the New: viz.,
that over and above belief on the Lord Jesus Christ, a “mystery” or “secret”, which had been hid in God “from the
beginning of the world” (Eph 3:9), was made manifest after Pentecost, and after the Dispensation covered by the Acts
of the Apostles, to the apostle Paul. See notes on Eph 1:9 Eph 3; and 5:32.

There is another Structure, differing from that given in Ap. 1, but equally true, viz.:—

THE FORMER PROPHETS.

LAW-PRINCIPLE.

A | JOSHUA. Israel brought into the Land. God keeps His covenant. Israel under priests.

B | JUDGES. Israel in the Land. Man breaks the covenant. Failure of the priesthood.

B | SAMUEL. Israel in the Land. God shows mercy in appointing prophets, and a king whose throne shall be
established for ever.

A | KINGS. Israel ejected from the Land. Man breaks the covenant as before; the ten tribes and the kings break
the one made with David.

Here, in the “former” prophets (Zec 7:7), we see, arranged in an Introversion, the whole of Israel’s failure in the
Land, set forth by the Lord. Now we are shown in the “latter” prophets how God’s faithfulness was going to secure His
own purposes, and Israel’s blessing.

THE LATTER PROPHETS.

FAITH-PRINCIPLE.

Priests and kings were anointed: but God would now send an anointed One, i.e. Messiah; and if they would believe
on Him they would be established. For He would be also a Prophet. Corporate testimony had failed: therefore there
would be a division among individuals of the nation on account of Him; so that in times of crisis those whose sins had
not been expiated by His priestly work would be excluded from the Nation for not hearkening to Him as Prophet (Dt
18:18,19), and extirpated by His work as King (Isa 6:9-13; 7:9; Jn 7:40-43; Ac 3:19-26; 13:38-52; Mt 13:36-43). In Him,
then, the righteous Servant of Jehovah, the future of Israel is seen in the latter prophets (Isa 49).

He is both rejected and accepted. The Nation went back to the land to try that question under Divine auspices (Da
9:24-27). When they rejected Him, they were not established, but again scattered. But when they accept Him they
will be regathered, and never again rooted out.

They can come back only through David (from whom their second breach of covenant referred to was a departure),
before the first breach of covenant can be healed up; for the character and form of the Structure (here, as elsewhere)
corresponds with the subject-matter; and, in this, the Introversion of the Structure is the same as the principle on
which God works: viz., by introversion. The Law must go forth from Zion.

We find then that the following is the Structure, showing

THE INTER-RELATION OF THE PROPHETIC BOOKS.

C | ISAIAH. Restoration of the throne of David through the priestly work of Messiah, from the standpoint of the
two tribes.

D | JEREMIAH. Political disruption, and final restoration of Judah and Ephraim (the twelve tribes) by a new
Covenant.

D | EZEKIEL. Ecclesiastical disruption, God ceasing to rule the Land in demonstration; and final restoration
of the same, re-establishing all the twelve tribes.

C | THE TWELVE MINOR PROPHETS. Restoration of the throne of David through the priestly work of Messiah,
from standpoint of the ten tribes. (See the Structure of these, preceding HOSEA.)

The New Covenant of Jer 31:31-34 has indeed been made (Mt 26:28); and can never be made again: for His “blood of
the Covenant” has been shed, once for all. Had the nation repented on the proclamation of Peter (Ac 2:38; 3:19-26), all
would have been fulfilled; in the same way as John the Baptist would have been taken for Elijah the prophet (Mal 3:1;
4:5. Cp. Mt 11:10-15) had the nation, through its rulers, repented at his proclamation (Mt 3:1,2) and that of Messiah (Mt
4:17, &c.). But, seeing that these great calls to “repent” were not obeyed, both fulfillments stand in abeyance, until this
one great condition of national restoration and blessing shall have taken place.

The modern doctrine, in certain circles, that the New Covenant holds good with Gentiles now, or with the
present-day “house of Israel”, would bestow justification on unbelievers. This is not the teaching of Heb 8 and 10. This
does not affect the position of those who are “in Christ” in this Dispensation of the “Mystery”. They have all, and more
than all, in that “New Covenant” which will yet bring back blessing to Restored Israel.

When that national repentance does take place, the time will come for the travailing woman to bring forth (Isa
66:8; Jn 16:19-22). But that is still future. What is true, is that declaration of Jehovah by Micah: “Therefore will He
give them up, until the time that she which travaileth hath brought forth; then the remnant of his brethren shall
return unto the children of Israel” (Mic 5:3).

Appendix 79

ISAIAH: THE EVIDENCES FOR ONE AUTHORSHIP

The hypothesis of modern critics is that Isaiah is not the sole author of the prophecy bearing his name, but that he
only wrote chapters 1-39 (called by them “the former portion”), and that an unknown author or authors (for there are
now alleged to have been three, or more, Isaiahs) are responsible for chapters 40 to the end (called by them “the latter
portion”). Thus, they would treat this prophecy mush as Isaiah himself is said to have been treated, who, as tradition
tells us, was “sawn asunder”. This “latter portion” also modern critics would relegate to a later date: viz., toward the
close of the seventy years’ exile. This is a very modern theory; for, the one authorship of this prophecy has been held
without question by both Jews and Christians for over 2,000 years.

I. THE USE OF HIS NAME IN THE NEW TESTAMENT.

A sufficient and conclusive answer to this matter is afforded by Holy Scripture itself, in the fact that Isaiah is
twenty-one times mentioned by name in the New Testament as the author of this prophecy. Eleven of these passages
attribute to him words occurring in the latter portion of the book, and ten of them words occurring in the former
portion. A complete list is appended, divided as follows:—

(i) THE TEN PASSAGES NAMING ISAIAH AS THE AUTHOR OF THE “FORMER” PORTION.

Mt 4:13.

Mt 13:14.

Mt 15:7.

Mk 7:6.

Jn 12:39.

Jn 12:41.

Ac 28:25.

Ro 9:27.

Ro 9:29.

Ro 15:12.

Isa 9:1,2.

Isa 6:9.

Isa 29:13.

Isa 29:13.

Isa 6:9.

Isa 6:9.

Isa 6:9.

Isa 10:22,23.

Isa 1:9.

Isa 11:10.

(ii) THE ELEVEN PASSAGES NAMING ISAIAH AS THE AUTHOR OF THE “LATTER” PORTION.

Mt 3:3.

Mt 8:17.

Mt 12:17.

Lk 3:4.

Lk 4:17.

Jn 1:23.

Jn 12:38.

Ac 8:28.

Ac 8:30.

Ro 10:16.

Ro 10:20.

Isa 40:3.

Isa 53:4.

Isa 42:1-3.

Isa 40:3-5.

Isa 61:1,2.

Isa 40:3.

Isa 53:1.

Isa 53:7,8.

Isa 53:7,8.

Isa 53:1.

Isa 65:1,2.

(iii) The above twenty-one passages are distributed over six books of the New Test.: viz., Matt. (six times); Mark
(once); Luke (twice); John (four times); Acts (three times); Romans (five times).

(iv) And the prophet is named by seven different speakers or writers in the New Testament: Four times by Christ
Himself; three being from the former portion of Isaiah (Mt 13:14; 15:7. Mk 7:6), and one from the latter (Mt 12:17).

Twice by Matthew: once from the former portion (Mt 4:14), and once from the latter portion (Mt 8:17).

Four times by Luke: all from the latter portion of Isaiah (Lk 3:4; 4:17. Ac 8:28,30).

Three times by John the Evangelist: twice from the former portion (Jn 12:39,41), and once from the latter portion
(Jn 12:38).

Twice by John the Baptist: both from the latter portion (Mt 3:3. Jn 1:23).

Six times by Paul the Apostle: four from the former portion (Ac 28:25. Ro 9:27,29; 15:12), and twice from the latter
portion (Ro 10:16,20).

II. THE EMPLOYMENT OF CERTAIN WORDS.

A further evidence of the unity of Isaiah is furnished by the Structure of the book: which, as the student of The
Companion Bible will readily perceive, does not lend itself in any degree to the arbitrary ending suggested, at chapter
39. A “pillar” of this “theory” is found in the supposed occurrence of certain words in the “former” portion of the
prophecy which are not found in the “latter” portion, and vice versa. An examination of a few such words which are
cited by modern critics will show the palpable inaccuracy characterizing their assertions.

It is asserted that the following are found only in the “latter” portion of Isaiah (chapters 40 to the end):—

1. The titles Creator, Redeemer, Savior. But the facts of creating, redeeming, and saving are referred to in
1:27; 12:1,2; 14:1; 17:10; 25:9; 27:11; 29:22; 30:18; 33:22; 35:10.

2. The thought of Jehovah as “Father”. But the relation is stated in 1:2.

3. The word bachar (to choose). But see 1:29; 7:15,16; 14:1.

4. The word halal (to praise). But see 13:10; 38:18.

5. The word paer (to glorify). But see 10:15.

6. The word patsach (to break forth into joy). But see 14:7.

7. The word tsemach (to spring forth). But see 4:2.

8. The word zero’ (the arm [of Jehovah]). But see 9:20; 17:5; 30:30; 33:2.

There are more than 300 words and expressions which are common to both the alleged “former” and “latter” portions
of Isaiah’s prophecy; and which do not occur at all in the later prophecies of Daniel, Haggai, Zechariah, and Malachi. A
sufficient number of these, to illustrate this fact amply, will be found given in the notes under their occurrences.

Appendix 80

ISAIAH: QUOTATIONS AND ALLUSIONS IN THE NEW TESTAMENT

The prophet Isaiah is quoted or referred to some eighty-five times in the New Testament. But several passages are
cited or alluded to more than once; so that sixty-one separate passages are referred to in these eighty-five New
Testament citations.

Of these sixty-one passages in Isaiah, it will be noticed that twenty-three are from the alleged “former” part of Isaiah
(chs. 1-39), and are cited thirty-two times; while thirty-eight (the larger number) are cited from the alleged “latter”
part (chs. 40-66) which is most called in question by modern critics. These sixty-one passages are cited eighty-five
times.

The following table exhibits the whole; and the evidence hereby afforded, as to the unity of the authorship of
Isaiah, may be added to that already given in Ap. 79:—

(The alleged “former” part) 8:14.

ISAIAH.

1. 1:9.1.

2. 6:1-3.2.

3. 6:9,10.3.

 

 

 

 

4. 7:14.

5. 8:12,13.

6. 8:14.

7. 8:18.

8. 9:1,2.

9. 10:22,23.

10. 11:4.

11. 11:10.

12. 21:9.

 

13. 22:13.

14. 22:22.

15. 25:8.

 

16. 28:11,12.

17. 28:16.

 

 

18. 29:10.

19. 29:13.

 

20. 29:14.

21. 29:16.

22. 34:4,10.

23. 35:3.

(The alleged “latter” part)

1. 40:3-6.

 

 

 

2. 40:6-8.

 

3. 40:13.7.

 

4. 41:4.

 

 

5. 42:1-4.12.

6. 43:18,19.

7. 45:9.14.

8. 45:23.

 

9. 49:6.

 

10. 49:8.

11. 49:10.

12. 52:5.

13. 52:7.

14. 52:11.

15. 52:15.

16. 53:1.

 

17. 53:4.

18. 53:5.

19. 53:7,8.

20. 53:9.30.

21. 53:12.

22. 54:1.

23. 54:13.

24. 55:3.34.

25. 55:10.

26. 56:7.

 

 

27. 57:19.

 

28. 59:7,8.

29. 59:17.

30. 59:20,21.

31. 60:3,10,11.44.

32. 61:1,2.

33. 63:2,3.

34. 64:4.

35. 65:1,2.

36. 65:17.

 

37. 66:1,2.

 

38. 66:24.

NEW TESTAMENT.

1. Ro 9:29.

2. Jn 12:41.

3. Mt 13:14.

 4. Mk 4:12.

 5. Lk 8:10.

 6. Jn 12:40.

 7. Ac 28:26,27.

8. Mt 1:23.

9. 1 Pe 3:14,15.

10. Ro 9:32-33.

11. Heb 2:13.

12. Mt 4:14-16.

13. Ro 9:27,28.

14. 2 Th 2:8.

15. Ro 15:12.

16. Rv 14:8.

17. Rv 18:2.

18. 1 Co 15:54.

19. Rv 3:7.

20. 1 Co 15:54.

 21. Rv 7:17.

22. 1 Co 14:21.

23. Ro 9:33.

24. Ro 10:11.

25. 1 Pe 2:6.

26. Ro 11:8.

27. Mt 15:8,9.

28. Mk 7:6,7.

29. 1 Co 1:19.

30. Ro 9:20.

31. Rv 6:13,14.

32. Heb 12:12.

 

1. Mt 3:3.

2. Mk 1:2,3.

3. Lk 3:4-6.

4. Jn 1:23.

5. 1 Pe 1:24,25.

6. Jas 1:10,11.

7. Ro 11:34.

 8. 1 Co 2:16.

9. Rv 1:8,11,17.

 10. Rv 21:6.

 11. Rv 22:13.

12. Mt 12:17-21.

13. 2 Co 5:17.

14. Ro 9:20.

15. Ro 14:11.

16. Php 2:10,11.

17. Lk 2:32.

18. Ac 13:47.

19. 2 Co 6:2.

20. Rv 7:16.

21. Ro 2:24.

22. Ro 10:15.

23. 2 Co 6:17.

24. Ro 15:21.

25. Jn 12:38.

26. Ro 10:16.

27. Mt 8:17.

28. 1 Pe 2:24,25.

29. Ac 8:32,33.

30. 1 Pe 2:22.

31. Mk 15:28.

32. Gal 4:27.

33. Jn 6:45.

34. Ac 13:34.

35. 2 Co 9:10.

36. Mt 21:13.

37. Mk 11:17.

38. Lk 19:46.

39. Eph 2:17.

40. Ro 3:15.

41. Eph 6:14-17.

42. 1 Th 5:3.

43. Ro 11:26,27.

44. Rv 21:24-26.

32. 61:1,2.45. Lk 4:17-19.

46. Rv 19:13-15.

47. 1 Co 2:9.

48. Ro 10:20,21.

49. 2 Pe 3:13.

50. Rv 21:1.

51. Ac 7:49,50.

52. Mt 5:34,35.

53. Mk 9:44.

The eighty-five citations or allusions are distributed as follows: In Matt. there are nine; Mark, six; Luke, five; John,
five; Acts, five; Rom., eighteen (eight from the “former” part, and ten from the “latter”); 1 Cor., six; 2 Cor., four; Gal.,
one; Eph., two; Phil., one; 1 Thess., one; 2 Thess., one; Heb., two; James, one; 1 Pet., five; 2 Pet., one; Rev.,
twelve (five from the “former” part, and seven from the “latter”).

Twelve books give six direct quotations.

Eighteen books contain eighty-five allusions to Isaiah.

Only seven books out of twenty-seven have none.

The greater part of the New Testament is concerned with establishing the genuineness and authority of the book of
the prophet Isaiah, and its one authorship. (See Ap. 79.)

Appendix 81
THE “ALTAR TO JEHOVAH IN THE LAND OF EGYPT” (Isa 19:19)

The fulfillment of this prophecy took place in 1 B.C., and is recorded by Josephus (Ant. xiii. 3. 1-3; 6; Wars 7. 10, 3;
and Against Apion, 2. 5):—

In consequence of wars between the Jews and Syrians, ONIAS IV, the High Priest, fled to Alexandria; where, on
account of his active sympathy with the cause of Egypt against Syria, he was welcomed by PTOLEMY PHILOMETOR, and
rewarded by being made prince over the Jews in Egypt, (*1) with the title of Ethnarch and Alabarch. Josephus says:—

“Onias asked permission from Ptolemy and Cleopatra to build a temple in Egypt like that at Jerusalem, and to appoint
for it priests and Levites of his own Nation. This he devised, relying chiefly on the prophet Isaiah, who, 600 years
before predicted that a temple must be builded in Egypt by a Jew to the supreme God. He therefore wrote to
Ptolemy and Cleopatra the following epistle:—

‘Having come with the Jews to Leontopolis of the Heliopolite district, and other abodes of my Nation, and
finding that many had sacred rites, not as was due, and were thus hostile to each other, which has befallen
the Egyptians also through the vanity of their religions, and disagreeing in their services, I found a most
convenient place in the fore-mentioned stronghold, abounding with wood and sacred animals. I ask leave,
then, clearing away an idol temple, that has fallen down, to build a temple to the supreme God, that the
Jews dwelling in Egypt, harmoniously coming together, may minister to thy benefit. For Isaiah the prophet
has predicted thus: “There shall be an altar in Egypt to the LORD God”; and he prophesied many other such
things concerning the place.’

“The King and Queen replied: ‘We have read thy request asking leave to clear away the fallen temple in
Leontopolis of the Heliopolite nome. We are surprised that a temple should be pleasing to God, settled in an
impure place, and one full of sacred animals. But since thou sayest that Isaiah the prophet so long ago
foretold it, we grant thee leave, if, according to the Law we may not seen to have offended against God.'”
(Ant. xiii. 6.)

The place of this temple was the identical spot where many centuries before, Israel had light in their dwellings while
the rest of Egypt was suffering from a plague of darkness. Here again was light in the darkness, which continued for
more that 200 years (about 160 B.C. to A.D. 71), when it was closed by Vespasian.

The Jerusalem Jews were opposed to, and jealous of, this rival temple; and, by changing two letters almost identical
in form (<START HEBREW>j<END HEBREW> = „ [or CH] to <START HEBREW>h<END HEBREW> = H) turned “the city of the sun” (cheres) into “the city of destruction (heres). But the
former reading is found in many codices, two early printed editions, and some ancient versions, as well as in the
margins of the A.V. and R.V. The Septuagine reading shows that the Hebrew MSS. from which that version was made,
read ‘irha-zedek = “the city of righteousness.”

The “five cities” of Isa 19:18 were probably Heliopolis (the city of the sun, where this temple was built),
Leontopolis, Daphne, Migdol, and Memphis.

(*1) See longer note in the Text on p. 1096.

Appendix 82
THE FORMULAE OF PROPHETIC UTTERANCE

It is clear that there was an appropriate and recognized style of prophetic address, and of the introduction to
special prophetic utterances. By attending to this we shall read the prophetic books to an advantage that cannot be
realized by submitting, without thought, to the superficial guidance of chapter-beginning and chapter-ending. These
will be found of little use in helping us to distinguish separate and distinct prophecies.

In JEREMIAH, the formulae are generally “The word of the LORD came”, “Thus saith the LORD”, or “The word that
came”.

In EZEKIEL, the call is to the prophet as “son of man”, (*1) and the formula is “the word of the LORD came”, many
times repeated.

In the Minor (or Shorter) Prophets, it is “The word of the LORD by”, “Hear the word that the LORD hath spoken”, or
“The burden of the word of the LORD”.

In ISAIAH, the prophetic utterances have two distinct forms. As to Israel, the chosen People, they open with “Listen”,
“Awake”, “Ho”, “Arise, shine”, “Behold”; while in the case of the surrounding nations it was a series of “Burdens” or
“Woes”; as well as to Ephraim (28), and to the rebellious sons who go down to Egypt, to the “Assyrian”, &c. See the
Structures on pp. 930, 1015, and 1104.

An illustrative example of the usefulness of noting these formulae is furnished by Isa 34 and 35. Most Commentators
make chapter 35 commence a new prophecy, and thus entirely obscure the great issue of the prophecy, which begins
in ch. 34:1 with the Call:—”COME NEAR, YE NATIONS, to hear; and HEARKEN, ye peoples: let the earth HEAR”, &c. The
Call is to witness Jehovah’s JUDGMENT ON EDOM (in ch. 34), which issues in the salvation of ISRAEL (in ch. 35). Thus
the prophecy is seen to have no break, but forms one complete and comprehensive whole, embracing these two great
parts of one subject.

In ch. 34 we have the desolation of Edom: wild beasts celebrate the discomfiture of its inhabitants: then, in ch. 35,
the wilderness and solitary place are seen to be glad; and, as it were, in sympathy with Divine judgment, the desert
rejoices and blossoms as the rose (35:1, 2). In the result, ch. 35 shows that the People of Jehovah enjoy the inheritance
of the Edomites. Not only are their enemies gone, but so are the wild beasts which were at once the evidences and
tokens of their judgment. It will have become the way of holiness; the unclean shall not pass over it; no lion shall be
there, but the redeemed shall walk there (35:8, 9).

But all the beauty of this wonderful transition is lost, when chapter 35 is made the beginning of a new and distinct
prophecy; and, more that this, the difficulty is created by the Hebrew suffix “for them”, in 35:1. Not knowing what to
do with it, the Revisers solve the difficulty by simply omitting these two words “for them”; and this in the absence of
any manuscript authority, and without giving in the margin even the slightest hint that they have entirely ignored the
Hebrew suffix in the verb susum (i.e. the final “m”).

The two chapters (34 and 35) form a comprehensive message, a matter of world concern: for it combined an
implied vindication of the righteousness of God, and a confirmation of His promise to save His People Israel with an
everlasting salvation.

A failure to recognize the formula of Isaiah’s prophetic utterance led, first, to a misapplication of the chapter, and
then to an unjustifiable disregard of the pronominal suffix. This typical case of confusion, resulting primarily from an
unfortunate arrangement in chapter-division, suggests the great importance of care being exercised in a correct
individualizing of the prophecies of Holy Scripture.

(*1) Without the article. For the expression “THE Son of Man” belongs only to Him Who was “t f6 he second
man”, “the last Adam”, the successor or superseder of “the first man Adam” to Whom dominion in the earth is now
committed. Cp. Ge 1:26, Ps 8:1,9; and vv. 4-6, Heb 2:8 “not yet”. See Ap. 98.

Appendix 83

JEREMIAH: THE CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF HIS PROPHECIES

Appendix 84

THE SEPTUAGINT VERSION OF JEREMIAH

The Septuagint translation of Jeremiah differs both in matter and form from the Massoretic Hebrew Text. It is a
Paraphrase rather than a Version, and an Exposition rather than a Translation. It is not therefore to be regarded as
representing an independent Hebrew Text, but as a paraphrase, often abbreviated, and often inaccurate. No Hebrew
MS. ever seen corresponds with a text from which the Septuagint professes to have been derived.

It omits about one-eighth of the Hebrew text, or about 2,700 words; while the changes manifest the carelessness and
arbitrariness of the translator or translators. Indeed, the Hebrew language does not seem to have been understood, or
its meaning apprehended; for, when the sense of a word could not be understood, it was summarily transliterated in
Greek characters.

It is needless therefore to treat it seriously, or to set out in any tables wherein such differences consist.

Appendix 85

JEREMIAH, A TYPE OF THE MESSIAH

In many particulars Jeremiah was a type of Christ. Sometimes by way of contrast (marked *). The following passages
may be compared:—

JEREMIAH

(Type).

11:18

11:19

11:19*

11:20

13:17

18:23

18:23*

20:7

20:10

26:11

26:15

26:15,16

29:26

29:27

Lam 1:12

3:8

3:14

3:48

CHRIST

(Antitype).

Isa 11:2. Jn 2:25.

Isa 53:7,8.

Isa 53:10.

Isa 53:11.

Mt 26:38. Lk 19:41; 22:41,44,45.

Jn 11:53.

Lk 23:34,61.

Mk 5:40.

Lk 11:54. (Cp. Ps 55:12,13.)

Mt 26:65,66.

Mt 27:4-25.

Jn 10:21. Lk 23:13-15.

Jn 7:20; 10:20,39.

Jn 8:53. Lk 7:39.

Jn 1:29. Isa 53:10.

Mt 27:46.

Ps 69:12.

Lk 19:41.

Appendix 86
“THE FOURTH YEAR OF JEHOIAKIM”

(Jer 25:1-3)

(Being supplemental to Appendix 50, p. 42).

“The only ancient authority of value on Babylonian History is the Old Testament” (Encycl. Brit., 11 th (Cambridge)
edition, vol. iii, p. 101).

1. The great prophecy of the seventy years of Babylonian servitude in Jer 25 is prefaced, in vv. 1-3, by one of the
most important date-marks in the Scriptures:—

“The word that came to Jeremiah concerning all the people of Judah IN THE FOURTH YEAR
OF JEHOIAKIM the son of Josiah king of Judah, that WAS THE FIRST YEAR OF
NEBUCHADNEZZAR king of Babylon; the which Jeremiah the prophet spake unto all the
people of Judah, and to all the inhabitants of Jerusalem, saying, From the thirteenth year of
Josiah the son of Amon king of Judah, even unto this day, that is the three and twentieth
year, the word of the LORD hath come unto me.”

On what is called “received” dating, the fourth year of Jehoiakim (being the first year of Nebuchadnezzar) is usually
given as 606 B.C.; whereas in The Companion Bible, both in the margin, and in Ap. 50. V, p. 60, and VII, p. 67, it is
shown as 496 B.C. — a difference of 110 years. This is a serious matter, but the reason is simple, and is as follows:—

In the majority of the systems of dating extant, chronologers have ignored, and omitted from their sequence of Anno
Mundi years, the ninety-three years included in St. PAUL’S reckoning in Ac 13:19-22; and also, in the majority of cases,
the interregnum and “gaps” in the later kings of Judah, amounting together to 110-113 years (*1); and, further, by
accepting the 480 th year of 1 Ki 6:1 as being a cardinal, instead of an ordinal number; and as being an Anno Mundi date,
instead of one to be understood according to Anno Dei reckoning (see Ap. 50, Introduction, § 6).

The Holy Spirit, we may believe, expressly made use of St. Paul, in the statement in the passage referred to, in
order to preserve us from falling into this error. CLINTON (1781-1852) well says on the point (*2): “The computation of
St. Paul, delivered in a solemn argument before a Jewish audience, and confirmed by the whole tenor of the history in
the Book of Judges, out-weighs the authority of that date” (480). In spite, however, of this Divine warning, many
accept the 480 th year as being a cardinal number, and reckon it as an Anno Mundi date.

2. On the commonly “received” dating, the period from the Exodus to the commencement of the Babylonian
servitude is usually given as 1491 B.C. to 606 B.C.; that is, a period of 885 years; whereas The Companion Bible dates
are 1491 B.C. to 496 B.C. = 995 years.

But, if ST. PAUL is correct in adding ninety-three years to the period between the Exodus and the Temple (making
thus 573 instead of 479); and if the inter-regnum between Amaziah and Uzziah, and the “gaps” clearly indicated in the
sacred record and shown on the Charts in Ap. 50 are recognized, then it is perfectly clear that the majority of the
chronologers are 110 to 113 years out of the true Anno Mundi reckoning, and, instead of the Babylonian servitude
commencing in the year 606 B.C. (the fourth year of Jehoiakim and first year of Nebuchadnezzar), the real Anno Mundi
year for that most important event is 496 B.C., as shown in Ap. 50.

3. This, no doubt, will be startling to some who may be inclined to suppose that certain dates and periods of time in
the Scriptures have been irrevocably “fixed”.

On the authority of certain well-known names, we are asked to believe that “profane history”, and the annals of
ancient nations, supply us with infallible proofs and checks, whereby we can test and correct the chronological
statements of Holy Scripture. But we need to be reminded that this is very far from being true.

Chronologists of all ages are, as a rule, very much like sheep — they follow a leader: and, once the idea became
current that the “correct” (supposed) dates of certain epochs and periods in Greek (and other) history could be brought
to bear upon and override certain Biblical chronological statements, which presented “difficulties” to these modern
chronologers, then it soon became almost a matter of course to make the figures of Divine revelation submit and
conform to “profane” figures, derived from parchment or clay, instead of vice versa. (*3)

4. FYNES CLINTON, in his learned work Fasti Hellenici (Vol. I, pp. 283-285) has such an appropriate and weighty
statement that bears on this subject, in the Introduction to his Scripture Chronology, that it is well to quote the
testimony of one who is regarded as among the ablest of chronologers. He remarks:—

“The history contained in the Hebrew Scriptures presents a remarkable and pleasing contrast to the early
accounts of the Greeks. In the latter, we trace with difficulty a few obscure facts preserved to us by the
poets, who transmitted, with all the embellishments of poetry and fable, what they had received from oral
tradition. In the annals of the Hebrew nation we have authentic narratives, written by contemporaries, and
these writing under the guidance of inspiration. What they have delivered to us comes, accordingly, under a
double sanction. They were aided by Divine inspiration in recording facts upon which, as mere human
witnesses, their evidence would be valid. But, as the narrative comes with an authority which no other
writing can possess, so, in the matters related, it has a character of its own. The history of the Israelites is the
history of miraculous inter-positions. Their passage out of Egypt was miraculous. Their entrance into the
promised land was miraculous. Their prosperous and their adverse fortunes in that land, their servitudes and
their deliverances, their conquests and their captivities, were all miraculous. Their entire history, from the
call of Abraham to the building of the sacred Temple, was a series of miracles. It is so much the object of the
sacred historians to describe these, that little else is recorded. The ordinary events and transactions, what
constitutes the civil history of other States, are either very briefly told, or omitted altogether; the incidental
mention of these facts being always subordinate to the main design of registering the extraordinary
manifestations of Divine power. For these reasons, the history of the Hebrews cannot be treated like the
history of any other nation; and he who would attempt to write their history, divesting it of its miraculous
character, would find himself without materials. Conformably with this spirit, there are no historians in the
sacred volume of the period in which miraculous intervention was withdrawn. After the declaration by the
mouth of Malachi that a messenger should be sent to prepare the way, the next event recorded by any inspired
writer is the birth of that messenger. But of the interval of 400 (*4) years between the promise and the
completion no account is given.”

And then CLINTON significantly remarks:—

“And this period of more than 400 (*4) years between Malachi and the Baptist is properly the only portion in
the whole long series of ages, from the birth of Abraham to the Christian era, which is capable of being
treated like the history of any other nation.
“From this spirit of the Scripture history, the writers not designing to give a full account of all transactions,
but only to dwell on that portion in which the Divine character was marked, many things which we might
desire to know are omitted; and on many occasions a mere outline of the history is preserved. It is mortifying
to our curiosity that a precise date of many remarkable facts cannot be obtained.
“The destruction of the Temple is determined by concurrent sacred and profane testimony to July, 587 B.C.
From this point we ascent to the birth of Abraham. But between these two epochs, the birth of Abraham and
the destruction of the temple, two breaks occur in the series of Scripture dates; which make it impossible to
fix the actual year of the birth of Abraham; and this date being unknown, and assigned only upon conjecture,
all the preceding epochs are necessarily unknown also.”

This important statement deserves the most serious consideration; for CLINTON himself frequently transgresses its
spirit in his Scripture Chronology: e.g. he “determines” the “captivity of Zedekiah to June, 587 B.C.” And this he
accomplishes by “bringing”, as he says, Scripture and profane accounts to “a still nearer coincidence by comparing the
history of ZEDEKIAH and JEHOIACHIN with the dates assigned to the Babylonian kings by the Astronomical Canon” (Fasti
Hellenici, I, p. 319). In other words, this means that he “squares” the scriptural records of events some 200 years before
the commencement of the period which he has before stated is alone “capable of being treated like the history of any
other nation”, by means of the Astronomical Canon of Ptolemy.

PTOLEMY’S Canon (cent. 2 A.D.) is to CLINTON and his disciples what the monuments are to PROFESSOR SAYCE and
his followers. Both “necessitate” the accommodation of Biblical chronology to suit their respective “Foundations of
Belief” in dating.

5. But it is on the principle so excellently enunciated by CLINTON, and quoted above, that the dating of The
Companion Bible is set forth: viz., that “the history of the Hebrews cannot be treated like the history of any other
nation”. If this is granted, the same argument must necessarily apply to the chronology of such a people. And it may be
carried a step farther. The chronology of the history of the Chosen People is unlike that of any other nation, in that it
has a system of reckoning by durations, and not, like other nations, by dates; and a system of registering events and
periods of time by what it may be permitted to call “double entry”. This is to say, not only do we find in the Bible a
regular sequence of years, commencing with Adam and ending with Christ, and consequently a true and perfect record
of Anno Mundi years in the lifetime of mankind during that period; but also, concurrently with this, we find another
system of dealing with dates and periods concerning the Hebrew race alone. This system is used and referred to in The
Companion Bible as being according to Anno Dei reckoning. (See Introduction to Ap. 50, pp. 40-42.) And it may be
strongly urged that failure on the part of the majority of chronologers, and partial failure on the part of others to
recognize this, so to speak, double entry system of the Bible dating has “necessitated”, as we are told, the adjustment
of the Biblical figures to suit the requirements of Astronomical Canons and ancient monuments.

6. But, to the candid mind it is incredible that the inspired Scriptures should be found so faulty in their chronological
records and statements as many would have us suppose; or that it is “necessitated” that they should be “determined” from
profane sources and un-inspired canons, whether on parchment or stone! (*5)

CLINTON’S Calendar of Greek dates, it must be borne in mind, only commences with the traditional date of the first
Olympiad (*6) (776 B.C.). From that year on and backwards, everything in his Scripture Chronology is assumed to be
capable of being arranged, and made to harmonize with that date.

But, it must also be remembered that grave suspicions have been entertained as to the correctness of this view.

SIR ISAAC NEWTON (1642-1727), for instance, in his Chronology of Ancient Kingdoms Amended, charges the Greek
chroniclers with having made the antiquities of Greece 300 or 400 years older than the truth. The whole passage reads
thus (Works, vol. v, p. 4 of the Introduction):—

“A little while after the death of ALEXANDER THE GREAT, they began to set down the generations, reigns, and
successions, in numbers of years; and, by putting reigns and successions equipollent (equivalent) to
generations; and three generations to an hundred or an hundred and twenty years, as appears by their
chronology, they have made the antiquities of Greece 300 or 400 years older than the truth. And this was the
original of the technical chronology of the Greeks. ERATOSTHENES wrote about an hundred years after the
death of ALEXANDER THE GREAT; he was followed by APOLLODORUS; and these two have been followed ever
since by chronologers.”

NEWTON then goes on to quote the attack on HERODOTUS by PLUTARCH (born about 46 A.D.), for chronological
nebulosity (*7), in support of his contention as to the uncertainty and doubtfulness of the chronology of the Greeks. He
further adds:—

“As for the chronology of the Latins, that is still more uncertain … The old records of the Latins were burnt by
the Gauls, sixty-four years before the death of ALEXANDER THE GREAT: and QUINTIUS FABIUS PICTOR (cent. 3
B.C.), the oldest historian of the Latins, lived an hundred years later than that king.”

7. If NEWTON was right, then it follows that the Canon of PTOLEMY, upon which the faith of modern chronologers is
so implicitly — almost pathetically — pinned, must have been built upon unreliable foundations. Grecian chronology is
the basis of “PTOLEMY’S Canon”; and, if his foundations are “suspect”, and this is certainly the case, then the elaborate
super-structure reared upon them must necessarily be regarded with suspicion likewise.

EUSEBIUS, the Church historian and bishop of Caesarea (A.D. 264-349), is mainly responsible for the modern system
of dating which results in squaring scriptural chronology with the Greek Olympiad years, and it is upon EUSEBIUS’S
reckonings and quotations that CLINTON also mainly relies.

In his Chronicle of Universal History, the first book, entitled Chronography, contains sketches of the various nations
and states of the old world from the Creation to his own day.

The second book of this work consists of synchronical tables with the names of the contemporary rulers of the
various nations, and the principal events in the history of each from ABRAHAM to his own time. EUSEBIUS gets his
information from various sources. He makes use of JOSEPHUS (A.D. 37-95), AFRICANUS (cent. 3 A.D.), BEROSUS (cent. 3
B.C.), POLYHISTOR (cent. 1 B.C.), ABYDENUS (about 200 B.C.), CEPHALION (cent. 1 A.D.), MANETHO (cent. 3 B.C.), and
other lost writers — equally “profane”.

In his turn, he is largely used by moderns to “determine” scriptural dates; and it is mainly through his instrumentality
that many of the so-called “received” datings of the O.T., from Abraham to the Christian era, have been “fixed”.

In addition to these and other ancient records, and “systems” of chronology, we have notably the Canon of Ptolemy
referred to above. PTOLEMY, an astronomer of the second century A.D., give a list of Babylonian, Persian, Greek,
Egyptian, and Roman rulers, “from about 750 B.C. to his own time.”

The Seder Olam is a Jewish chronological work of about the same date (cent. 2 A.D.).

Now to-day, we have what is called “the Witness of the Monuments”, of which it may be remarked that frequently
their testimony is accepted in preference to the scriptural record, and is often used to impugn the statements and
chronology of the Bible. The result of recent modern explorations in Assyria, Babylonia, and Egypt, has been that we
have almost every date in the O.T. redated, because we are told by some (as PROFESSOR SAYCE, quoted above) that
this is “necessitated” by the Assyrian Canon.

The Assyrian Eponym Canon is a list, compiled from several imperfect copies (*8) on clay tablets of lists of public
officials (called “Eponyms”) who held office, one for each year. This list contains some 270 names, and is supposed to
cover the period from soon after the close of Solomon’s reign to the reign of Josiah. It is spoken of as showing “some
slight discrepancies, (*9) but on the whole is held to be highly valuable”. This is the Assyrian Canon which, according to
PROFESSOR SAYCE, “necessitates” the redating of the Biblical events and periods!

The Babylonian and Egyptian Monumental Records also contribute their quota towards the “fixing” of scriptural
chronology; but these are, it is acknowledged, more of less incomplete, and therefore, more or less untrustworthy.

So far as supplying interesting sidelight details of the periods with which they deal, and that impinge upon sacred
history, these sources are all more or less useful. But, so far as affording absolutely trustworthy material from which a
complete chronological compendium can be formed from the Creation to Christ, is concerned, they are all more or less
useless, for the simplest of all reasons, viz. that they have no datum line or start-point in common. They possess, so to
speak, no “common denominator”.

8. It must be remembered that the ancients, excepting of course the “Church” historians, had not the Hebrew
Scriptures of Truth to guide them. They knew not at what period in the duration of the world they were living! The
only knowledge they had of the origin of the world, and man’s beginning, was derived from myth and fable. Had they
possessed such knowledge as we possess in the Word of God, they would have undoubtedly have used it; and, instead
of finding, as we do, their chronological systems, commencing (and ending) with floating periods, concerning which
they had more or less reliable information, they would have extended their chronological hawsers backward, and
anchored their systems firmly at “the beginning”.

CENSORINUS (quoted in the note on p. 122) may be taken to voice the whole body of ancient chronologers when, in
writing on chronological subjects, he says:—

“If the origin of the world had been known unto man, I would thence have taken my beginning … Whether
time had a beginning, or whether it always was, the certain number of years cannot be comprehended.”

And PTOLEMY, the author of the famous “Canon”, says:—

“To find observation upon the passages of the whole world, or such an immense crowd of times I think much
out of their way that desire to learn and know the truth.”

He means, it was a hopeless matter to fix upon the original start-point for chronology!

9. An illustration may be permitted from the fundamental principles governing the engineering world. Suppose a line
of railway to be projected, say, for the sake of argument, 4,000 miles more or less in length (*10). The line is run
through countries of varied physical character, from flat plains to lofty hill districts. Preparatory to constructing the
line, it is essential that an accurated survey of the whole length of territory though which it has to pass be made.

For this purpose two things are absolutely necessary to the engineer: viz. a “bench-mark” (or marks) and a “datum
line”.

The “bench-mark” is a mark cut in stone of some durable material in a fixed position, and forms the terminus a quo,
from which every measurement of distance on the whole length of line is measured off.

The datum line is supposed perfectly horizontal line extending beneath the whole distance between the proposed
termini; and from which all the levels are to be calculated. The first bench-mark is the starting-point a line of levels for
the determination of altitudes over the whole distance; or one of a number of similar marks, made at suitable carefully
measured distances, as the survey proceeds, in order that the exact distances between each, and ultimately between
the terminus a quo and the terminus ad quem may be ascertained before the work is carried out.

10. To apply this to our subject:—

All are agreed that the FOURTH YEAR OF JEHOIAKIM, and the FIRST YEAR OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR form a point of
contact between sacred and profane history of the utmost importance. From this point of contact it is claimed that a
“complete scheme of dates may be derived”, as some put it; or, according to others, “from this date we reckon on to
Christ and back to Adam.”

The year of the point of contact is generally said to be 606 B.C. or 604 B.C. It is perfectly justifiable to occupy this
position; but, only if the dating of the point of contact can be demonstrated and maintained. It is quite easy to say that
this year of contact between the sacred and profane history is 606 B.C. or 604 B.C., and from this we can reckon “back
to Adam and on to Christ”. But a question of paramount importance at once suggests itself, viz. What is the datum, or
foundation, or bench-mark date from which the year, say 606 B.C., is obtained?

The answer usually received is “we determine it from (the date of) the captivity of Zedekiah” (CLINTON). Or, “the
agreement of leading chronologers is a sufficient guarantee that David began to reign in 10561055 B.C., and, therefore,
that all dates subsequent to that event can be definitely fixed.” Or else we are told that the Assyrian Cannon (and the
“Monuments” generally) “necessitate” the date of this year of contact as being 604 B.C. (PROFESSOR SAYCE).

11. But all this is only begging the question. The argument — if mere ipse dixit assertions based on floating dates and
periods, as acknowledged by CENSORINUS and PTOLEMY, can be truly called an argument — when examined, is found to
be quite unreliable; and, in the engineering world would be described as “fudging the levels!” This exactly describes
the present case, because this date-level (i.e. 606 or 604 B.C.), so to speak, makes its appearance in the middle of the
supposed line (or, to be more accurate, towards the end of it) without being referred back to datum, that one definite
“fixed” departure point or bench-mark at the teminus a quo from which the years can alone be accurately reckoned.

12. It is as though the engineer took a map showing the district through which it was intended to construct the last
600 or 700 miles of his line, and the proposed terminus, but without any absolute certainty as to where the actual
position of that terminus should be; and should then say to himself, “from information received”, and from the general
appearance and apparent scale of this map, I “determine” the highest point of my line to be 606 miles from where I
“conjecture” my terminus ad quem ought to be! From this point therefore, 606 miles from our supposed terminus, we
will measure back 450 miles, and “fix” an important station (David); and then, another 569 miles back from David, we
“determine” another important station (Exodus), and so on.

13. This system of “measuring on the flat”, to use a technical engineering term, for fixing stations and important
positions for his railway, would be charmingly simple for the engineer — on paper. But “The Standing Orders” of the
joint Committee of both Houses of Parliament would shut out those said plans from receiving one moment’s
consideration.

It would be impossible to find an engineer who would be guilty of such folly. He would accurately measure his
distances from a fixed point at the terminus a quo, referring everything back to that, and using his datum line to check
his levels, otherwise he might as easily find himself 100 miles or more out.

14. To apply this:—

In the chronology of the Bible we have given to us one primal fixed point (or bench-mark) and one only, from which
every distance-point on the line of time, so to speak, must be measured, and to which everything must be referred
back as datum!

That datum-point, or bench-mark, is the creation of Adam, and is represented by the datum-mark 0 (nought) or
zero. And as the unit of measurement, in the illustration suggested above, is one mile (*11), so the unit of
measurement in the chronology of the Bible is one year (whether sidereal or lunar matters not for the sake of the
argument).

15. Working therefore from our datum-point of first bench-mark 0 (zero), which represents the creation of Adam,
we measure off 130 years on our line and reach the first station, so to speak, SETH. This gives us a second bench-mark
from which to measure on to ENOS. Thus, by measuring onward, but always checking by referring back to datum,
which is the primal station, we are able to mark off and locate exactly the various stations and junctions (junctures) all
down the line, from the terminus a quo until we reach a point which some of the later stations themselves will indicate
as being the exact position for the terminus ad quem. This may be either the Incarnation or the Crucifixion and
Resurrection of our Lord.

If Holy Scripture had definitely stated the exact period in years between the creation of “the First Man Adam”, and
“the Last Adam”, or had given us the exact date of the Incarnation or Resurrection of Christ, we should then have been
justified in reckoning back from this fixed date as from the known and authoritative terminus ad quem.

But this is not the case, although we believe the period is clearly inferred and indicated, as the Charts in Ap. 50
show, which thus agree with USSHER’S conclusions, although not reaching them by USSHER’S methods, or figures. (*12)
We have therefore no alternative. We must make our measurements, i.e. reckon our years, from the only terminus we
possess, viz. the start-point or bench-mark laid down for us in “the Scriptures of truth”, that is, the creation of Adam.

16. This is the principle adopted in the chronology of The Companion Bible: and, on this principle alone all the
important “stations” on the chronological line have been laid down, or “determined” (to borrow CLINTON’S word), not by
Astronomical or Assyrian Canons, but on the authority of the Biblical Cannon alone.

Acting on this principle we recognize the fact that ST. PAUL’S period, from the Exodus to the Temple, is the real
period of 573 Anno Mundi years; while the 479 (480 th) years of 1 Ki 6:1 are to be taken as according to Anno DEI
reckoning. Thus, by accepting this, and admitting, instead of omitting, the “gaps” so clearly indicated in the line of the
later kings of Judah, it will appear that the important chronological contact-point between sacred and secular history,
which Scripture calls “THE FOURTH YEAR OF JEHOIAKIM and THE FIRST YEAR OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR”, is to be dated 496
B.C., instead of the usually “received” date of 606 B.C., or thereabout.

(*1) The uncertainty of the three years here is “necessitated”, as Professor SAYCE says in another connection, by
the absolute impossibility of avoiding overlapping owing to the use of both cardinal and ordinal numbers
throughout in the successions of the kings.

(*2) Fasti Hellenici, Scripture Chronology, I, p. 313.

(*3) e.g. in The Variorum Aids to Bible Students we are told by Professor SAYCE, in a special head-note to his
article The Bible and the Monuments, that the dates he gives throughout are necessitated by the Assyrian Canon
(p. 78).

(*4) CLINTON, apparently in these two passages, speaks of the 400 years as being a round number; meaning that
is was about 400 years from MALACHI to the birth of JOHN THE BAPTIST, and therefore the Incarnation.

A reference to Ap. 50. VII, p. 67, VII (6), p. 69, and Ap. 58, p. 84, will show that the 400 years he speaks of are
not a round number, but the actual number of years that elapsed between the prediction of MALACHI — “the seal
of the prophets” — and the coming of “My messenger” (John the Baptist) followed by “the Messenger of the
Covenant”, 3:1 (Jesus Christ). From its internal evidence it is perfectly clear that the prophecy of Malachi — “the
burden of Jehovah” –must be dated several years after the Restoration, and the Dedication of the Temple of
Zerubbabel.

From the first Passover in Nisan 404 B.C. — following immediately after the Dedication — to the birth of John the
Baptist in the spring of the year 4 B.C. was four hundred years (10 x 40), the Incarnation being six months later
in the same year. But the ministries of both the Baptist and Christ began thirty years later; i.

e. in 26 A.D. Four hundred years back from this date gives us 374 B.C., and 374 B.C. is of course thirty
years after the recommencement of the Mosaic ritual dating from the Passover in Nisan 404 B.C. It is
therefore a fair inference that the “seal of the prophets” should have been affixed thirty years after
the Restoration of the Temple services, and exactly four hundred years before the fulfillment (Mt
3:1-3. Mk 1:2,3. Lk 3:2-6. Jn 1:6-23) of Malachi’s prediction in 3:1.

The language used by Malachi describes a condition of things that could not well have been reached under twenty
or thirty years. On the other hand the period could not have been longer. See Ap. 77, p. 113, and the notes on
Malachi. Another illustration of the principle of Anno DEI reckoning should be noted here. The fourth year of
JEHOIAKIM and first of NEBUCHADNEZZAR is dated 496 B.

C. : that is, 492 years from the Nativity.

The Babylonian servitude, seventy years, and the succeeding twenty-two years, from the decree of Cyrus (426
B.C.) to the First Passover after the Dedication of the Temple (404 B.C.), are together ninety-two years. If this,
the Great Lo-Ammi period (corresponding to the ninety-three Lo-Ammi years in Judges), is deducted we get again
400 years (496 – 92 – 4 = 400). Thus we have the scriptural Great number of probation (10 x 40 = 400)
significantly connected with this fourth year of JEHOIAKIM. Cp. also Ge 21:10. Ac 7:6; and see Ap. 50, pp.
51-53. There are other examples in the Scriptures.

(*5) See note on 2 Kings 15:27.

(*6) His authority for this date is given in the following sentences :–“The first Olympiad is placed by CENSORINUS
(c. 21) in the 1014 th year before the consulship of ULPIUS and PONTIANUS in A.D. 238 = 776 B.C. … If the 207 th
games were celebrated in July, A.D. 49, 206 Olympiads, or 824 years had elapsed, and the first games were
celebrated in July, 776 B.C.” That is to say, a date is taken, supposed to be A.D. 49 (Fasti Hellenici, Vol. I,
Tables, p. 150), on testimony quoted from another ancient writer (SOLINUS, cent. 3 A.D.), that in that year the
207 th Olympic games were held; and, as 206 Olympiads = 824 years, therefore the first games were celebrated in
776 B.C. This year 776 B.C. therefore has become the pivot upon which all chronology has been made to depend,
and Scripture events to “fit” in!

(*7) HERODOTUS was in the same boat with CENSORINUS and PTOLEMY. See. p. 123. (*8) No complete list is yet
known. (*9) See note on 2 Kings 15:27. (*10) And for comparison with the 4,000 years in question. (*11) Of
course, the real unit is one inch; but, for convenience, the mile is considered as the unit in such a case. (*12) See
his Annales Veteris et Novi Testamenti (1650-1654).

Appendix 87

“PHARAOH’S HOUSE IN TAHPANHES” (Jer 43:9)

In the year 1886 W.M. Flinders Petrie was exploring at Tell Defenneh, in Egypt; he was told that the name of one of
the mounds was Kasr Bint el Jehudi, which means “the palace of the Jew’s daughter”. This name recalled to his mind
the passage in Jer 43:6,7, and at once connected Defenneh with “Tahpanhes”, where in vv. 8-11 Jeremiah received this
order:

“Take great stones in thine hand, and hide them in the clay in the brickkiln, which is at the
entry of Pharaoh’s house in Tahpanhes, in the sight of the men of Judah; and say unto them,
Thus saith the LORD of hosts, the God of Israel; Behold, I will send and take Nebuchadrezzar
the king of Babylon, My servant, and will set his throne upon these stones that I have hid; and
he shall spread his royal pavilion over them”, &c. Jer 43:8-10.

In the notes on 2 Sam 12:31, Jer 43:9, and Na 3:14, we have shown that the Heb. malben cannot mean a “brickkiln”
as rendered in the A.V. and in R.V. (2 Sa 12:31, and Na 3:14 (marg. brickmould)), but brickwork of any kind. In 2 Sam,
12:31, and Jer 43:9, a pavement of brickwork; and in Na 3:14, fortresses built of brick.

That this is so is fully proved by Jer 43:9, as the prophecy could not be fulfilled by Nebuchadrezzar’s spreading his
pavilion over the stones hidden in a “brickkiln”, to say nothing of a brickkiln being situated “at the entry of Pharaoh’s
house”. Neither would a brickkiln require to be fortified.

But it was left to Professor Flinders Petrie to discover the solution of the difficulty on clearing around the fort:

“The entrance was in the side of a block of buildings projecting from the fort; and in front of it, on the opposite
side of the roadway, similarly projecting from the fort, was a large platform of brickwork suitable for out-door
business, … just what is now called a mastaba … Jer 43:9 is the exact description of the mastaba which I found.” See
the illustration below, which we give by permission.

(Photo Caption: Restoration of the Fort among the ruins of Defenneh (now Daphnae), in Egypt, showing the large
platform before the entry of Pharaoh’s palace at Thapanhes.

Appendix 88

THE MILLENNIAL “SANCTUARY” AND “OBLATION” OF Eze 40-48.

NOTES OF THE “SANCTUARY” OF EZEKIEL.

1. It is a mistake to speak of the wonderful series of courts and buildings, described in the closing chapters of
Ezekiel, collectively as the Temple. The proper term is “The Sanctuary”, as it is set forth in 45:1-4 (see plan above).

2. The governing figure of the dimensions given throughout the last eight chapters — not only in connection with the
Sanctuary, but also in the measurements of the holy “Oblation unto Jehovah”, of the Land — is the number “5 ” (Ap. 10).

3. The Sanctuary is in the midst of the central portion of the middle (the Priests’) portion of the “Oblation” (see
block plan, p. 127). The Altar which occupies the exact center of the Sanctuary (not the Temple proper, see below), is
thus twelve miles from the north gate of the city, twelve miles from the southern boundary of the Levites’ portion, and
thirty miles from the eastern and western boundaries of the “Oblation” respectively.

4. The Sanctuary is comprised in a great square (42:15-20) enclosed with a wall measuring 500 reeds each way. If the
“measuring reed” = 12 ft. 6 in., then 500 reeds will be equivalent to about nine English furlongs, or a little more than one
mile square. (*1)

5. In the center of this great square we have next the boundary wall enclosing the OUTER COURT. This wall is 12 ft.
6 in. high by 12 ft. 6 in. broad, and forms a square of 500 cubits (*2) (external measurements). Five hundred cubits is
25.025 x 500 = 1042.7 English feet, or about 1/5 of a mile.

6. Within this is the Inner Court, a square of 300 cubits (*2) (25.025 x 300 = 625 English feet).

7. Inside the Inner Court we have the Temple (or Palace, Heb. heykal) Court, or the Separate Place (*3)
(41:12,13,14,15; 42:1,10,13), and the Temple-Palace itself, each occupying a space of 100 cubits = 216 feet square, and
forming together a rectangle of 200 x 100 cubits ( = 432 ft. x 216 ft.).

8. Finally in the midst of the “Separate Place” stands the Altar, twelve cubits square ( = 25 ft.) on its base or “settle”
of fourteen cubits square ( = about 29 ft.). Thus it will be seen that “the ALTAR before the HOUSE” (40:47), in the midst
of “the Separate Place”, is the actual center of the Millennial Sanctuary and worship, and not the “Building”, the

“House”, or “Temple” immediately to the west of it (*4). This indicates that the millennial “Temple” is really the
Palace, or Habitation of Messiah in connection with “the City of the great King” (Ps 48:2. Mt 5:35), when He, as the
“GLORY of Jehovah”, will from time to time visit His earthly metropolis.

At the glorious “Dedication” of the Sanctuary, of which brief mention is made in 43:2-6, Jehovah’s Glory (Messiah)
enters the “House” by way of “the gate of the Outward Sanctuary which looketh toward the East” (43:4; 44:1). This will
then be closed for all purposes of general ingress and egress; and is reserved strictly for the use of “the Prince” (the
risen David?) who, as Messiah’s vicegerent (cp. 37:24,25), will alone be permitted to make use of it.

9. A word is necessary regarding the mistake into which some commentators have fallen with regard to the
measurements of the “Oblation”. It has been assumed that these are stated, and are to be understood, as being given in
cubits, not reeds.

According to this reckoning, all the oblation (25,000 x 25,000 somethings); and if cubits, it would represent a square
of rather less than ten miles each way. The absurdity of this view will be at once apparent when the cubit-scale is
applied to the city. This is stated (48:15,16) as being 5,000 x 5,000 something; if these are cubits, the the “City of the
Great King” (Ps 48), which in every allusion to it in the Scriptures is suggestive of magnificence and spaciousness, is
reduced to a petty area of less than four square miles (5,000 cubits x 5,000 cubits = a square of less than two miles each
way).

The point need not be labored. 5,000 reeds x 5,000 reeds give us a city twelve miles square, with an area of 144
square miles — dimensions of dignity and importance befitting the metropolis of the world. In measuring or “setting out”
buildings and distances, rods and tapes or chains are used now of recognized standardized lengths. This is precisely
what we have in 40:3; where the angelic measurer or surveyor is presented to us “with a line of flax” ( = tape) in his
hand, and “a measuring reed” ( = a rod). Cf. 47:3.

In the block plan (p. 127) it will be seen that “the possession of the City” is shown to the south of the Oblation.
Whereas in Ps 48:2, which is distinctly Messianic in its fuller scope, it is stated:

“Beautiful for situation ( = elevation), the joy of the whole earth,
Is Mount Zion on the sides of the North.” (See the notes on Ps 48:2.)

(cp. the only other places where the expression “the sides of the North” occurs, Isa 14:12-14; 38:6,15; 39:2, and the note
on Ps 75:6).

That “the Possession of the City” will lie parallel with “the great valley” cloven through the Mount of Olives and
running east and west (Zec 14:4,5) seems clear. The “City of the Great King” will therefore be situated in a magnificent
position on the north side of this great valley. No wonder it is spoken of as “beautiful for situation” (elevation, or
extension). As the original Zion towered above the Kidron Valley in days gone by, so in the Messianic days to come,
“Zion, the City of our God” will be seen towering in majestic elevation above the north side of the “very great valley”
that will then “cleft” east and west, and through which the cleansing waters will flow eastward to make the land, now
desert, “blossom as the rose” (47:8: and cp. Isa 35).

10. Difficulties are sometimes raised with regard to taking the measurements of the “Oblation” as being in reeds not
cubits, on the score of disproportion to the “Land”. It is argued that a square block of 60 miles by 60 = 3,600 square
miles, taken out of the whole territory as divided among the Tribes, is out of all proportion to the area of the “Holy
Land”. But it is nowhere stated that Palestine as we know it now is the whole extent of the “Land”.

The majority of the maps intended to show the division of the millennial land, are presented usually with the
geographical boundaries of the Holy Land as they are now known to us, practically the same as in the days of our Lord,
with the huge square block of the “Oblation” occupying about one-fifth of the map of Palestine.

This is an entire misconception. The promise in Ge 15:18 yet awaits fulfillment. And if, with the statement therein
that the northern and southern boundaries of the Promised Land are the two great rivers, the Euphrates and the Nile,
then, the comparison of this with Eze 47:20 gives us the western boundary, viz. the “Great Sea” (Mediterranean). This
leaves the eastern boundary to be accounted for; and the possibility is that “the East Sea” of verse 18 is the Persian
Gulf, at the head of which is the northern boundary (the Euphrates) will end. As “the tongue of the Egyptian sea” will
be utterly destroyed “in that day” (Isa 11:15), this amplitude, or enlargement of the area of territory promised to
Abraham on the south gives strength for the suggestion of a corresponding extension to the east.

If this is so, then the whole of the Promised Land will be a magnificent territory, bounded on the north by the
Euphrates, on the eat by the Indian Ocean (the east sea), on the south by the Nile, and on the west by the
Mediterranean. This will include not only the Arabian peninsula, but the great Arabian and Syrian deserts, and the plains
of Babylonia. A glorious patrimony truly, and worthy of occupation by the “strong nation” of Mic 4:7, the People
through whom all the nations of the earth are yet to be blessed! See Ge 12:3; and especially 28:14. It may be that the
Twelve Tribes may be allotted special strips or “lots” of the land on either side of the Oblation as usually shown; but
that an enormously increased territory N., E., and S., will become “in that Day” the realization of the Promised Land is
certain.

BLOCK PLAN, SHOWING “ALL THE OBLATION” (48:20).

The whole size of the “OBLATION” is 25,000 x 25,000 REEDS (48:20), and equals about 60 ENGLISH MILES square.
Divided into three main Portions:

1. The Portion for the Priests, containing in the center the Sanctuary, The Holy Portion of the Land, 25,000 x
10,000 Reeds (45:1-4) = 60 miles by 24.

2. The Portion for the Levites, 25,000 x 10,000 (45:5) = 60 miles by 24.

3. The “Possession of the City”, 25,000 x 5,000 (45:6) = 60 miles by 12, including the Two “Portions” for the
Prince, one on the W., the other on the E. of the City (see block plan above).

The CITY is set in the midst of the “Possession of the City”, and its dimensions are given (48:15) as 5,000 x 5,000
reeds = about 12 miles square; thus covering an area of 144 square miles (English). Of this, 250 reeds all round are
marked off as “suburbs”, thus reducing the actual size of the “City” itself to about 11 miles square, covering an area of
121 square miles (48:15-17). Verse 18 gives the length of the “possession”, to E. and W., as being 10,000 reeds each
way. This manifestly includes the “Prince’s Portions” at either end. Between these portions and the suburbs of the City
lies on either side (B B) the remainder of “the residue in length over against (i.e. alongside) the oblation of the holy
(portion)”, which is evidently the “garden” portion of the City, as “the increase (Heb. tebu’ah, 48:18) thereof shall be
for food for them that serve the City”.

· The “City Portion” is therefore seen to be divided into 5 (Ap. 10) portions, each 5,000 reeds square, or
into 5 blocks of 144 English square miles each. The total area covered being 144 x 5 = 720 square miles.

· The “Priests’ Portion” is one large block containing a superficial area exactly double, viz. 1,440 square
miles.

· The “Levites’ Portion” is of equal size. The total area of “All the Oblation” is therefore, in English miles,
1,440 + 1,440 + 720 = 3,600 square miles.

The above figures will enable the student to grasp fully a fact that is often lost sight of: viz. that everything in
connection with the whole of the Oblation to Jehovah, including the City, will be planned, as shown by these
dimensions, on a “magnifical” scale. To give one instance of the scale on which the Oblation will be “laid out” — the
nearest point from which the outside wall of the Sanctuary, in the midst of the Priests’ portion, can be reached from
the Northern Gate of the City is 11 1/2 miles. There will be no overcrowding or jerry-building in “that day”. It is not
possible for us now to do more than faintly imagine to ourselves what the City will be like; 12 miles square, perfectly
planned, with “garden” spaces on either hand occupying like areas, and these again bounded by the Prince’s “private
gardens”, so to speak, and abode, of similar size.

SPECIFICATION OF “THE SANCTUARY”.

And its planning out in relation to the “Oblation unto Jehovah” of the Land and the location of the tribes.

Eze 40-48.

Order.Refs.

1. The “Wall on the outside of the house round about” (12 ft. 6 ins. high, and 12 ft. 6 ins. broad).40:5

2. THE EAST OUTER GATE. Details.6-16

3. THE OUTER COURT. Details.17-19

4. THE NORTH OUTER GATE. Details.20-22

5. THE NORTH AND EAST INNER GATES.23

6. THE SOUTH OUTER GATE. Details.24-26

7. THE SOUTH INNER GATE.27

8. THE INNER COURT. SOUTH GATE. Details.28-31

9. THE INNER COURT. EAST GATE. Details.32-34

10. THE INNER COURT. NORTH GATE. Details.35-43

11. CHAMBERS for the “SINGERS”.44

12. CHAMBERS for the Priests in charge of the HOUSE.45

13. CHAMBERS for the Priests in charge of the ALTAR.46

14. THE ALTAR COURT (100 cubits square. See plan on p. 125) and THE ALTAR that was before the House.47

15. The PORCH of the HOUSE. Details.48,49

16. THE TEMPLE (Heb. heykal. Often translated Palace: e.g. Ps 45:8,15). Details.41:1-11

17. THE BUILDING that was before the SEPARATE PALACE (*5) (i.e. the TEMPLE or HOUSE itself facing the SEPARATE PLACE — the ALTAR COURT — 100 cubits square = about 208 feet). Details.12-14

18. Length of the “BUILDING”, including the INNER TEMPLE (100 cubits). Details.15

19. The DOOR (entrance). Details.16-21

20. The ALTAR of wood — within the Sanctuary — “the Table before Jehovah”.22

21. The TWO DOORS (entrances) or the SANCTUARY. Details.23-26

22. THE OUTER COURT. NORTH entrance. Width 100 cubits, of which 50 cubits is occupied by the porch of the outer gate. Details.42:1-8

23. THE OUTER COURT. EAST entrance. Details. Concerning the Priests.9-12

24. Measurements of the space separating between the Sanctuary and the profane place: i.e. the great outer “surround” of 500 reeds square ( = a little more than a mile square) enclosed within a wall of unspecified dimensions.15-20

25. The OUTER EAST GATE — and the Vision of the Triumphal First Entry of the Messiah KING into the HOUSE (when Ps. 24:7-10 will be fulfilled).43:1-5

26. JEHOVAH’S Command from “the HOUSE” giving “the LAW OF THE HOUSE”.6-12

27. THE ALTAR. 12 cubits square ( = 25 ft. x 25 ft.) on its base (settle) of 14 cubits square ( = about 29 ft. x 29 ft.).13-17

28. THE ORDINANCES OF THE ALTAR.18-27

29. The CLOSED outer EAST Gate and the reason.44:1-3

30. Ezekiel brought into the COURT OF THE HOUSE by the NORTH (the Sacrificial) gate — to receive.4

31. “THE ORDINANCES of the HOUSE OF JEHOVAH”.5-31

32. THE LAND. The OBLATION (*6) unto Jehovah, 25,000 reeds by 10,000 reeds (about 60 miles by 24 miles).45:1

33. Of this — THE SANCTUARY (500 reeds by 500 reeds square = about 1 mile square) and THE MOST HOLY PLACE — and for the dwelling of the priests.2-4

34. THE LEVITES’ portion, 25,000 reeds by 10,000.5

35. THE POSSESSION of the CITY, 25,000 reeds by 5,000 reeds ( = about 60 miles by 12 miles, therefore covering an area of 720 square miles).6

36. THE PRINCE’S PORTIONS east and west of the City, each 5,000 x 5,000 reeds square ( = about 12 miles square and covering each an area of 144 square miles).7

37. The rest of the Land for Israel according to their Tribes.8

38. ORDINANCES.9-25

39. ORDINANCES for WORSHIP for the Prince (David?) and the People.46:1-18

40. The Place of Preparation of the Offerings.19,20

41. The FOUR Corner Courts of the OUTER COURT.21-24

42. THE HEALING WATERS from the HOUSE.47:1-2

43. Boundaries of the Land.13-23

44. LOCATION of the Seven Tribes on the North side (Dan, Asher, Naphtali, Manasseh, Ephraim, Reuben, JUDAH).48:1-7

45. JEHOVAH’S OBLATION for THE SANCTUARY and the Priests, 25,000 x 10,000 reeds.8-12

46. THE PORTION for the LEVITES.13,14

47. THE PORTION for THE CITY (*6).15-19

48. “ALL THE OBLATION”, 25,000 reeds by 25,000 reeds = 60 x 60 square miles – an area of about 3,600 square miles.20

49. The PRINCE’S portions east and west of the City (see block plan on p. 127).21,22

50. LOCATION of the remaining Five Tribes — BENJAMIN, Simeon, Issachar, Zebulun, Gad.23-28

51. SUMMARY.29

52. “Goings out of the City” (exits) and its Gates.30-35

53. THE NAME OF THE CITY, “JEHOVAHSHAMMAH” (JEHOVAH [is] T35

(*1) The “measuring reed” is given as being “of six cubits (long) by the cubit and an handbreadth” (40:5; 43:13);
and in 41:8 we have the specified standard length of the reed as “a full reed of six great cubits”. This “great
cubit” is therefore one cubit + one handbreadth. Six handbreadths are reckoned to the ordinary cubit. In this
case there is one extra. So that the “great cubit” employed in the measurements of the Sanctuary and the Land is
equal to seven handbreadths (Ap. 10). It follows therefore that “six great cubits” = 42 (6 x 7) handbreadths. If the
handbreadth is taken as being 3.575 in., or a little more than 3 1/2 in., which is most probably about the exact
figure, then the “great cubit” is 3.575 x 7 = 25.025 in.; and “the full reed” will therefore be 25.025 x 6 = 150.150
in. This = 12.5125 English feet, or in round numbers 12 feet 6 inches.

(*2) The main dimensions given supply us with these figures, although they are not specifically stated as in the
case of the 500 reeds of 42:16-20.

(*3) The Separate Place has in its center the ALTAR and seems to be the court for worship of “separated ones”.

(*4) In the “Specification”, it is a remarkable fact that the Altar is the item numbered 27. The whole number of
“items” specified from 40:1-48:35 is 53. This gives 26 items on either side of 27 — thus placing the Altar exactly
in the midst of the angelic specification — as it is placed in the center of the Sanctuary.

(*5) The Separate Place. Only used here seven times (41:12, 13, 14, 15; 42:1, 10, 13), and in Lam 4:7 where the
word is rendered polishing.

(*6) See the Plan (to scale), and Notes on p. 127.

Appendix 89

THE VISIONS OF DANIEL (chs. 7-12), SYNCHRONOUS.

The visions recorded in these chapters are synchronous, and all relate to “the time of the end” (i.e. the last seven
years of the seventy sevens of chapter 9:24-27, see Ap. 91). This will be seen from the similar expressions exhibited in
the following table:—

Appendix 90
THE “TIMES”, AND NUMBERED “DAYS” OF Da 7:25; 8:14; 12:7,11,12

There are five (*1) specific periods of “time” and “days” mentioned in the Book of Daniel (7:25; 8:14; 12:7,11,12). In
addition to these five, we have the great period of the “seventy sevens” (or weeks) of years in chapter 9. Sixty-nine
of these were completed at the “cutting off” of the Messiah; the last of “seventieth seven” is yet to come (see Ap. 91).
All the other five periods of time in the book are to be referred to, and are standardized, so to speak, by this last
“seven”. The “seventy weeks” (sevens) are confessedly to be reckoned as years. Therefore, on the basis of a Jewish
year of 360 days, one “seven” is 360 x 7 = 2,520 days.

The terminus a quo of 1, 4, 5, 6 (see diagram) is manifestly determined by the term “in the midst of the week” (the
last “seven” of years), of the standard (col. 3): that is, 1,260 days, or 3 1/2 years from either end of the column. “The
prince that shall come” (Antichrist) “will make a (*2) covenant with many for one week” (i.e. seven years) (9:27). After
3 1/2 years, on grounds not stated, he breaks this covenant (or “league”, 11:23), the daily sacrifice is “taken away”, the
“abomination” set up, and “Jacob’s trouble” (Jer 30:7) commences and continues for the remainder of the “seven”: viz.:
for the 1,260 days or 3 1/2 years. It is this “midst of the week” that determines both the a quo and the ad quem of
these Numbered Days.

In 8:14 it is stated, “then shall the Sanctuary be cleansed” (*3). With regard to this “cleansing”, all the periods, 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6 (see diagram) synchronize at the end (see Ap. 89); while the last tow columns (5 and 6) are extended and
prolonged beyond the close of the 1,260 days by two significant periods of days, viz. 30 days and 75 days, respectively.

The first of these, 1,290 days is 1,260 + 30. And the 30 days here may be taken as a “Ve-Adar” or intercalary month of
30 days of “cleansing” following directly after the destruction of the false Messiah, and the break up of his confederacy.
These thirty days may possibly be the period allotted for the construction of the new and glorious “Sanctuary” of Eze
40-43, which is to be erected after the destruction and removal of the Jewish temple which will have been built by the
sons of Israel some time previously to its profanation by the Antichrist — as the antitype of Antiochus Epiphanes.

With regard to the 1,335 days of 12:12: This is 1,260 days with an excess of 75 days. This again being an excess of 45
days beyond the 1,290 of 12:11. 1,335 is, therefore, 1,260 + 30 + 45. If the 30 days are occupied with the “cleansing”,
i.e. with the “justifying” or “making righteous” a new and glorious “Sanctuary”, then it may be that the further 45 days,
over and above the 1,290, will cover the preparation time for the fulfillment of the forty-fifth psalm (such preparation
including, the resurrection to life of those concerned in 12:2), in order that the nuptials of the king may be celebrated
as described in such wonderful and minute detail in that psalm. (*4)

In connection with this period (1,335 days) we have the only Beatitude in the book! “Blessed (ashrey) is he that
waiteth ( = is steadfast) and cometh to the thousand three hundred and five and thirty days” (12:12). A blessed “lot”
indeed for those who will have passed through “the Trouble” and are counted worthy to be participators in the scenes
of glory and triumph of the King when He is united to restored Israel in that Day, as portrayed in the forty-fifth psalm!

In examining the diagram and the references in the book, it will be seen (1) that the only one of these five periods
of “time” and “days” that presents any serious difficulty is that of the 2,300 days. (2) That its terminus ad quem is the
same as the others, viz. the end of the seventieth seven is clear from 8:14, which gives it as being marked by the
“cleansing of the Sanctuary”. Reckoning backwards, therefore, the terminus a quo of this period is seen to be 220 days
short of the commencement of the seventieth “seven”.

It is not clearly revealed what event or events will mark the commencement of these 2,300 days, but it will be
probably some political crisis connected with the confederated kingdoms under the sway of the Antichrist. The key is
possibly to be found in chapter 8, typified by the contention between the ram and he-goat representing Medo-Persia
and Greece. But, though the terminus a quo of this period is not given to us in plain language (like e.g. the “midst of
the week” of 9:27), yet it will be known to, and understood by, the people of God, who pass through “the Trouble”
time of the seventieth “seven”, for “the wise (in that day) shall understand” (12:10).

If the “time of trouble” of Da 12:1 is a “time” like the “time” of 7:25; 12:7 (Nos. 1 and 4, above), i.e. one year, then
there are six specific periods of time in the book of Daniel, in addition to the seventieth, or last “seven”. If so, the
“time” of Da 12:1 suggests that “Jacob’s trouble” will be closed by a “time” (or year) of acutest “tribulation”. Does this
correspond with “the acceptable year” of Isa 61:2, immediately preceding the “Vengeance”?

The Diagram will illustrate the above remarks.

1. “And they shall be given into his had until a time, and times, and the dividing of time.” 7:25.


2. “The shall the Sanctuary be cleansed.” 8:14.


3. “To finish the transgression and to make an end of sins, and to make reconciliation for iniquity, and to bring
in everlasting righteousness, and to seal up the vision and prophecy and to anoint the Most Holy.” 9:27.


4. “How long shall it be to the end of these wonders?” 12:6 “For a time, times, and an half … all these
(things) shall be finished.” 12:7.


5. “From the time (that) the daily (sacrifice) shall be taken away (there shall be) a thousand two hundred
and ninety days.” 12:11.


6. “Blessed (ashrey) is he that waiteth ( = is steadfast) and cometh to the thousand, three hundred and five
and thirty days.” 12:12.


(*1) See the last paragraph on p. 130.

 

(*2) No definite art. in the Heb.

 

(*3) Heb. zadak = justified or made righteous. Not the word used of ceremonial or moral cleansing (Heb.
tah-heer); and it may be noted that the word is here employed in the Niphal-Praeterite form — and is therefore
equal to — the Sanctuary was justified or made, or appointed righteous.

 

(*4) Further, it is interesting to note in connection with the numbers 30 and 45, that Ps 30 was sung “at the
dedication of the house of David” — its subject being praise for deliverance in “The Day of (the) Trouble” (Ps 20:1)
— which is prophetically this very 1,260 days of “Jacob’s trouble” in Daniel and Revelation. And 45 is the number
of the Psalm which, as the Great King’s Nuptial Ode — sets before us the glory and triumph of the Messiah at His
marriage with the elect remnant of Israel — the “wife” of such passages as Isa 54:5-8; 62:4,5. Jer 3:14, &c.
Moreover, the No. 75 is that of the Psalm which sets before us “God’s anointed” in the Sanctuary, and
emphatically declared (v. 7) “God is Judge” (or Ruler).

Appendix 91

THE “SEVENTY WEEKS” OF Da 9:24-27

For the meaning of this passage, reference must be made to the notes, and especially to the Structures, which are
always the best commentary and the surest guide to interpretation.


We may set out the three divisions of the whole period on the diagram (not exact to scale):—

I. THE FIRST PERIOD is simple, being the “seven sevens”, or 49 years.

II. THE SECOND PERIOD. The “threescore and two sevens”, or 434 years, from 405 B.C. to A.D. 29 = the year of
the “cutting off” of Messiah (see Ap. 50 pp, 60, 61). This was 483 years from the issuing of the decree in 454
B.C. (i.e. 49 + 434 = 483 years). The “cutting off” of Messiah is stated as being “after” the “threescore and two
weeks”. The word “after”, here, evidently means, and is intended to be understood as indicating, the
completion of the period named; i.e. on the expiration of the sixty-two sevens will “Messiah be cut off”.
Beyond this exactness it is hardly necessary for us to go.

III. THE THIRD PERIOD. This is the one seven, i.e. the seventieth (or “last”), seven which has still to be accounted
for. That it must be yet future seems certain, from the agreement of its events with those of the visions of
chapters 7-12 (Ap. 89), and the numbered “days” of chs. 8:14 and 12:7, 11, 12 (Ap. 90); also from the fact that
none of the six definite events (of 9:24), which mark its end has as yet taken place (*1). These belong to the
whole seventy sevens, and are thus connected with the seventieth or last seven, being the object and end of
the whole prophecy. The following three, among other reasons, may be added:—

1. If the seventieth, or “one seven”, is to be reckoned from the cutting off of Messiah in direct, continuous,
and historic sequence, then it leads us nowhere –certainly not to any of the six events of v. 24, which
are all categorically stated to relate to Daniel’s People, “all Israel” (v. 7), and to the holy City “Jerusalem”.
No interpretation which transfers these six events to Gentiles or to Gentile times, is admissible. If they are
continuous, then there is no point or crisis in the Acts of the Apostles which marks their end. If they
coincided with any events of importance, such as the end of Peter’s ministry or the beginning of that of
Paul, or Ac 12 and 13, that would be something. But there is nothing.

2. Messiah was to “have nothing” that was His, “after” His cutting off. This clearly points to the crucifixion of
Messiah, and the rejection of His Messianic kingdom. For nearly 2,000 years Messiah has “had nothing” of
all the many “glorious things” which have been spoken of Him, in connection with Himself or with His
People Israel.

3. This last, or “one seven” of years, is divided into two distinct equal parts (see Ap. 90), and the division
takes place in connection with an event which has no connection whatever with any event which has yet
taken place. Messiah did not “make a (not the) covenant” of any kind, either with Israel or with any one
else, at the end of, or “after” the sixty-ninth week; nor did He “break” any covenant three and a half years
later. Man may “make” and “break” covenants, but Divine Covenants are never broken.

On the other hand: of “the prince that shall come” it is distinctly stated that he shall do both these very things (vv.
26, 27); and, in Ap. 89 and 90 both are connected with “the time of the end”. Hence, we are forced to the conclusion
that this last seven of years still awaits its fulfilment; and this fulfilment must be as literal and complete as that of all the
other parts of this vision and prophecy; for the end must be the glorious consummation for Israel of v. 24, the complete
destruction of “the coming prince” (the false Messiah or Antichrist), and the setting up of the Messiah’s kingdom.

Nothing less will satisfy all the requirements of Daniel’s vision of “the seventy weeks”. The Hebrew word rendered
“week” is shabua’, and means, simply, a “septad”, a “hebdomad”, or a seven, hence a week, because it is a seven (of
days). But in this passage it is confessedly used of a seven of years; and this of necessity, for no other seven of any
other portion of time will satisfy the prophecy and fall within its terminus a quo, and the terminus ad quem.

Seventy of these sevens of years (or 490 years) are the one subject of this prophecy. We are told exactly when they
would commence, and how they were to end. They sum up, within their bounds, all the then counsels of God as to His
future dealings with His People Israel; for they are “determined” (the angel said to Daniel) “upon thy People, and upon
they Holy City” (v. 24). These words cannot have any other interpretation than “all Israel” (v. 7), and Jerusalem, and
the Holy Sanctuary; for that had been the subject of Daniel’s prayer, to which this prophecy was sent as the specific
answer. (See vv. 2, 7, 16, 17, 18, 19, and especially v. 24.)

These “seventy sevens [of years]” are divided into three distinct and separate periods:—

I. The seven sevens, or 49 years.

II. The sixty-two sevens, or 434 years.

III. The one seven, or 7 years.

(I. and II. = 483 years.)
(I., II., and III. = 490 years)

The terminus a quo of the whole period is the issuing of a decree “to restore and to build (or rather, rebuild)
Jerusalem.”

The terminus ad quem of the whole period is the cleansing of the Sanctuary. This is also the end of all the visions of
Daniel in chaps. 7-12 (Ap. 89); and all the numbered “days” of 7:25; 8:14; and 12:7, 11, 12, have this cleansing as their
object and end.

As to the whole period, Daniel is bidden by the angelic Hierophant to “understand … and consider” (v. 23); while, as
to its three separate divisions, Daniel is to “know therefore and understand” (v. 25). See the Structures of these
passages, pp. 1196, 1198, 1199.

THE FIRST PERIOD. The seven sevens (or 49 years). These commence with “the going forth of the commandment to
restore and to build Jerusalem”. This was in the first month, Nisan, 454 B.C. (see Ap. 50, pp. 60, 67, and 70). Hanani’s
report to Nehemiah was made in the ninth month Chisleu, in 455 B.C., three months before; both months being in the
“twentieth year of Artaxerxes”.

See notes on Neh 1:1 and 2:1; also on pp. 615-18; and Ap. 57. The ARTAXERXES (or Great King) of Ne 1:1; 2:1, who
issues this decree, is identified with the great king ASTYAGES. (See Ap. 57.) ASTYGES was brotherin-law to
Nebuchadnezzar. The madness of the latter had at this time lasted for seven years. ASTYGES had evidently in imperial
matters been acting for his brother-in-law. This seems to be clear from the fact that the decree was issued in Shushan,
and not Babylon; and no one, however great a potentate he might be, would have dared to issue such a decree,
connected with the affairs of the suzerainty of Babylon, unless he possessed the authority to do so.

Therefore it may be put thus: In Nisan, 454 B.C., ASTYAGES (i.e. Artaxerxes = the Great King) issued the decree
spoken of in Da 9:25. Later, in the same year, Nebuchadnezzar’s “madness” was lifted off him. “At the end of the days”
his understanding and reason returned to him, it seems, as suddenly as they had left him; and he thereupon issued his
imperial proclamation throughout his dominions, as recorded in Da 4:34-37. See the note there on v. 34.

The seven sevens therefore, meaning seven sevens of literal years, occupied 49 years (454 B.C. to 405 B.C. = 49
years). They began in 454 B.C. with the decree, and end with the completion of the walls and the dedication of the
Temple in 405 B.C. See Ezr 6:10,15-19. It must be remembered that the issuing of this decree took place long before
Ezra appeared on the scene; and before any of the subsequent decrees of other monarchs, which all had to do with
the Temple; whereas the first, issued to Nehemiah (2:1), had to do only with the “City” and its “walls”. See the notes
on Ezra-Nehemiah, and Appendix 58. (*3)

THE SECOND PERIOD. The sixty-two sevens (or 434 years). These follow on directly from the end of the seven
sevens of the First Period, and close with the cutting off of the Messiah.

THE THIRD PERIOD. The last, or the seventieth seven. This period is yet future, and awaits the same literal fulfilment
as the other two periods.

(*1) Archbishop Ussher’s Chronology was first added to the A.V. by Bishop Lloyd in the edition of 1701. But, in Ne
2:1, Bishop Lloyd put his own date “445 B.C.”, to suit his own theory. Archbishop Ussher’s date for the
commencement of the reign of Artaxerxes was A.M. 3531, which, in his Collatio Annorum, corresponds to 474
B.C. “The twentieth year of Artaxerxes” would, therefore, be 454 B.C., as given above.


(*2) The era called “Anno Domini” was first fixed by a monk (Denys le Petit, commonly know by his Latin name,
Dionysius Exiguus), about A.D. 532. It did not come into general use for some centuries. Charles III of Germany
was the first who used the expression, “in the year of our Lord”, in 879. It was found afterward that a mistake
had been made by fixing the era four years too late! this explains the marginal notes in Mt 2:1 and Lk 2:20, “The
fourth year before the Common Account called Anno Domini.” (In some editions of the A.V. we have seen “the
fifth year”, Lk 2:1, also “the sixth year”, Lk 1:6.) Hence, the year called A.D. 33 was really the year A.D. 29.
This, with 454, makes exactly 483 years, or 69 weeks of years.

(*3) N.B. There was a further division of this first period of seven sevens which may be mentioned. From the
decree of Ne 2:1 to the end of the Babylonian servitude (see notes on p. 615), which was the “first year of
DARIUS” ( = CYRUS, see Ap. 57) the son of ASTYAGES, was 28 years (454 – 426 = 28); and those events closed the
fourth of the seven sevens. See Ap. 50, p. 60.

Appendix 92

REFERENCES TO THE PENTATEUCH IN THE PROPHETS

It is alleged by modern critics that, while Deuteronomy was the work of some anonymous writer in the reigns of
Josiah and Manasseh, the ritual portions of Exodus, Leviticus, and Numbers were the work of Ezra and the priests in
Babylon. This, practically, the greater part of the Pentateuch is assumed to be post-exilic, and therefore not written by
Moses; and this in spite of the fact that the claims of the whole Bible necessitate the Mosaic authorship. On the other
hand, it is admitted by the same modern critics that the prophets lived and wrote in the reigns of those kings with
whose reigns they are respectively associated.

But the Pentateuch is full of technical terms and legal phraseology; and has its own peculiar vocabulary. The constant
reference to these by all the prophets proves conclusively that the Pentateuch as a whole must have had a prior
existence; and must have been well known by the prophets, and understood by those who heard the prophetic
utterances and read the prophetic writings.

Throughout all the books of the prophets such references to the Pentateuch have been noted in the margin of The
Companion Bible with the brief indication “Ref. to Pent.”, followed by the passages referred to. It is not claimed that
none have been overlooked: so that the number will be greater rather than less. It would occupy too much space here
to give the table which had been prepared. Any reader can collect the whole from the notes, and arrange them in the
order of chapters and verses of the Pentateucal books.

An examination of these references will show that altogether 1,531 have been noted, and are distributed as follows:
GENESIS is referred to 149 times; EXODUS, 312; LEVITICUS, 285; NUMBERS, 168; while DEUTERONOMY is referred to 617
times. Thus DEUTERONOMY, of which the modern critics have made the greatest havoc, is referred to more often than
any of the other four books: 468 times more often than Genesis; 305 times more often than Exodus; 332 times more
often that Leviticus; and 449 times more often than Numbers. That is to say, more often than any two of the other
books put together.

It is also remarkable that the references to technical, legal, and ritual terms are more numerous than to those relating
to historical events. The latter would necessarily be better known and remembered; but the former could not have
been thus referred to unless the ritual itself (less easily remembered) had existed in writing, and thus been generally
known and understood. It is evident that it would have been perfectly useless for the prophets to write and quote aught
but what was well known, or could be easily referred to and verified.

Regard must also be had to the fact that the canonical order of the prophetic books is not the same as their
chronological order; for Malachi (the latest prophet) refers (Mal 1:2) to an earlier passage of Deuteronomy (Dt 7:8) than
Isaiah (one of the earliest prophets), who refers, in Isa 1:2, to a later passage (Dt 32:1).